Subaru - Impreza - Workshop Manual - 1999 - 2002

Page 1042
Page 495
P Code List (Partial list)
Testing and Inspection
Hose/Line HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Flexible Hose
NOTE: If cracking, damage, or swelling is found on a hose, replace it with a new one.
Page 3103
Specifications
Compressor Clutch: Specifications A/C Compressor Clutch
A/C Compressor Clutch
A/C Compressor Clutch Air Gap .012-.024 inches

Page 4177
Diagnostic procedure with Trouble Code - Page AT-72

Page 6654
ILLUMI-03 - Clearance Light And Illumination System

Fuse/Relay Locations: For fuse and/or relay locations refer to Starting and Charging / Power and
Ground Distribution: See: Power and Ground Distribution
Component Locations: For component locations refer to Vehicle / Locations / Harness: See:
Locations/Harness Locations
Ground Locations: For ground locations refer to Vehicle / Locations / Grounds: See:
Locations/Ground Locations
NOTE:
To locate Connectors, Components and/or Grounds using Harness Connector Location diagram(s)
use the connector's alphanumeric name [referred to in
Page 829
5. Install A/C belt tensioner. (With A/C model)
6. Install A/C belt. (With A/C model)

Page 2926
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page AT-73

Component Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Component Locations
Air Bag System Components

Page 756

Page 4800
Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque: T: 4.4 N.m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.3 ft-lb)
NOTE:
- Align the cutout portion of one connector with that of other before tightening the connecting bolt.
- Do not tighten the bolt excessively since this may deform the connectors.
EXPLANATION OF SMJ SHOWN IN THE WIRING DIAGRAM

Cruise Control Main Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Main Switch
Check continuity between cruise control main switch terminals. If NG, replace cruise control main
switch.
Page 1308
4. Connect connector to oil pressure switch.
5. Connect connector to crankshaft position sensor.
6. Connect knock sensor connector.
7. Connect connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.

Locations
Fuse Block: Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 2380
Part 3
Page 5115
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair
TOOL REQUIRED
- ST1 927080000 Hub Stand
- ST2 927420000 Hub Remover
- ST1 927430000 Housing Stand
- ST2 927440000 Bearing Remover
- ST2 927460000 Oil Seal Installer
- Or Equivalent
DISASSEMBLE
1. Remove knuckle. Refer to Steering and Suspension. 2. Using ST1 and ST2, remove hub from
rear housing. 3. Remove back plate from rear housing. 4. Using a standard screwdriver, remove
outer and inner oil seals.
CAUTION: Use new oil seals.
5. Using flat bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring.
6. Using ST1 and ST2, remove bearing by pressing inner race.
ST1 927430000 HOUSING STAND ST2 927440000 BEARING REMOVER
CAUTION:
^ Do not remove bearing unless damaged.
^ Do not re-use bearing after removal.
7. Remove tone wheel bolts and remove tone wheel from hub (only vehicle equipped with ABS).
Page 5440
2. Remove the cover (or cut the package shelf material on 1995-1999 Legacy Sedan) from the
anchor installation point on the vehicle. Install the assembled anchor kit (Figure 6) directly behind
the seating position to be utilized for the child restraint as shown in Figures (1 thru 5) for the
Page 3421
Diagnostics Chart with Trouble Code - Page CC-30 Cruise Control System
Page 2911
Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code - Page 3-2

Page 4873
Page 201
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Do not disassemble the airbag control module.
- If the airbag control module is deformed or if water damage is suspected, replace the airbag
control module with a new genuine part.
- Do not drop the airbag control module.
- After removal, keep the airbag control module on a dry, clean surface away from moisture, heat,
and dust.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the ground cable from the battery, and wait for at least
20 seconds before starting work. 3. Remove console box. 4. Disconnect connector from airbag
control module.
5. Using T40(R) TORX bit (Tamper resistant type), remove four TORX(R) bolts in the order shown
in the figure.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Use new TORX(R) bolts during re-assembly. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1515
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Cleaning and Regapping
CLEANING
Clean spark plugs in a sand blast type cleaner. Avoid excessive blasting. Clean and remove
carbon or oxide deposits, but do not wear away porcelain.
If deposits are too stubborn, replace plugs.

Impact Sensitivy Test
Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Impact Sensitivy Test
Security Control Module
1. IMPACT SENSITIVITY TEST
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Close all windows. 3. Close all doors and the rear
gate or trunk lid. 4. Cover the hood with a blanket. 5. Press the LOCK/ARM button of the
transmitter. 6. Confirm that the security indicator light blinks every 2 seconds.
7. Hit the center of the windshield with your palm and make sure the alarm operates.
If NG, adjust the impact sensitivity.

Page 557
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations
Vehicle Speed Sensor Locations

Page 3063
Spark Plugs - Page PM-8
Page 2415
5. Tighten fuel drain plug and install front right side fuel tank cover. 6. Raise rear seat and turn floor
mat up. (Wagon model) 7. Remove rear seat. (Sedan model)
8. Remove service hole cover.
9. Disconnect connector from fuel sub level sensor.

Page 4178
Diagnostics Chart with Diagnosis Connector - Page ABS-84
Page 4857
Fuse Block: Application and ID
Fuse Locations
Page 3335
Apply the liquid gasket into the non-threaded holes as shown.
Install oil pan and bolts. Tightening torque: 43 +/- 4 in.lb. (5 +/- 0.5 Nm).
Reinstall exhaust heat shield cover (H6 Models only).
Tap the heat shield with a rubber or plastic hammer to confirm that it will not rattle.
Note:
In case the shield rattles, reposition the shield and retighten it.
Install ATF
Lower the vehicle from the lift.
Pour 5.5 quarts (5.2 liters) of Dexron III ATF into filler pipe.
Check for oil leaks.
Check oil level and oil level gauge. If oil level is incorrect, adjust accordingly.
Note:
The level of ATF varies with fluid temperature. Pay attention to the fluid temperature when
checking oil level.
Locations
Page 6769
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Power Window Control Switch
REMOVAL
1. MAIN SWITCH
1. Remove two hooks of switch panel to remove power window main switch.
2. Disconnect electrical connectors from power window main switch and mirror switch.
2. SUB-SWITCH
Remove two hooks of switch panel to remove power window sub-switch and disconnect electrical
connector.
INSTALLATION
1. MAIN SWITCH
Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. SUB-SWITCH

Page 1320
8. Tighten bolt which installs injector pipe on intake manifold.
9. Tighten two bolts which install fuel pipes on the left side of intake manifold.
10. Tighten bolt which install injector pipe on intake manifold.
11. Install purge control solenoid valve.

Page 2365
Drive Pinion Shaft Assembly - Page MT-67
Page 4627
5. Disconnect connector from VDCCM by pulling up the securing holder. 6. Remove VDCCM.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: After completion of installation procedure, the following two position settings must be
made. -
Steering angle sensor center positioning
- Yaw rate and lateral G sensor 0 positioning these procedures are necessary for VDCCM to later
recognize what position the vehicle is in. For procedures for the above two settings, refer to Testing
and Inspection.
Page 4591
BRAKE/W-01
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
Fuse Locations
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications CLEARANCE
CLEARANCE
Intake 0.20 +/- 0.02 mm
Exhaust 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm

Page 84
- Each connector number shown in the wiring diagram corresponds to that in the wiring harness.
The location of each connector in the actual vehicle is determined by reading the first character of
the connector (for example, a "F" for F8, "i" for i16, etc.) and the type of wiring harness. The first
character of each connector number refers to the area or system of the vehicle.
How to Use Wiring Diagrams

Page 2639
10. Disconnect grommet from toe board.
NOTE: From inside compartment, push grommet into hole.
11. Pull out the cable from the toe board hole.
12. Disconnect accelerator cable bushing from accelerator pedal lever.
13. Disconnect accelerator cable stopper from bracket 14. Separate accelerator cable and bracket.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
If cable clamp is damaged, replace it with a new one.
^ Never fail to cover outer cable end with boot.
^ Be careful not to kink accelerator cable.
^ Always use new clevis pins.

Service and Repair
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Remove lower inner trim of passenger side.
3. Disconnect connectors from main relay. 4. Remove bolt which holds main relay bracket on body.
INSTALLATION

Page 3186

Page 2735
5. Drain fuel from fuel tank.
Set a container under the vehicle and remove drain plug from fuel tank.
6. Tighten fuel drain plug and install front right side tank cover.
7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Remove sub service hole cover.

Page 6074
Page 6862
Wiper Blade: Testing and Inspection
Wiper Blade
1. When the wiper does not perform well, inspect the following:
- Make sure the movable part of the blade assembly moves smoothly.
- Make sure the wiper rubber is not deformed or damaged.
2. Replace with a new part if damage is found.

Page 2269
Part 2
Service and Repair
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
NOTE: This sensor is installed on AT vehicles only.
2. Disconnect connector from atmospheric pressure sensor.
3. Remove atmospheric pressure sensor from bracket.
INSTALLATION
Page 3462
7. Remove bolts.
8. Move range select lever to parking position (left side).
9. Remove inhibitor switch from transmission.
D: INSTALLATION
1. Install inhibitor switch to transmission case. 2. Move range select lever to neutral position.
Page 3782
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential
A: REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect ground terminal from battery. 2. Jack-up vehicle and support it with sturdy racks.
3. Remove the oil drain plug and filler plug, and drain the gear oil.
CAUTION: Be careful not to burn your hands, because gear oil becomes extremely hot after
running.
4. Tighten oil drain plug.
CAUTION: Apply fluid packing to oil drain plug.
Fluid packing: THREE BOND 1105 or equivalent Tightening torque: 49.0 Nm(5.0 kgf-m, 3fi2 ft. lbs.)
5. Fill differential carrier with gear oil to the upper plug level.
CAUTION: Carefully refill oil while watching the level. Excess or insufficient oil must be avoided.
Oil capacity: 0.8 L (0.8 US qt. 0.7 Imp qt.)
6. Install filler plug.
Fluid packing: THREE BOND 1105 or equivalent Tightening torque: T-type: 49.0 Nm (5.0 kgf-m,
3fi2 ft. lbs.) VA-type: 33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.6 ft. lbs.)
Page 3259
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the oil charger pipe, and remove the O-ring from the flange face. Attach the O-ring to
the pipe.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the oil charger pipe with O-ring.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the O-ring.
Tightening torque: 41 Nm (4.2 kgf-cm, 30.4 ft. lbs.)
C: INSPECTION
Make sure the oil charger pipe is not deformed or otherwise damaged.
Diagrams
Page 3030
Diagnostics - Page 3-2

Page 2350

Page 3815
15. Align alignment marks on shaft and outer race, and install outer race. 16. Install circlip in the
groove on SFJ outer race.
CAUTION: Pull the shaft lightly and assure that the circlip is completely fitted in the groove.
17. Apply an even coat of the specified grease 30 to 40 g (1.06 to 1.41 oz.) to the entire inner
surface of boot. 18. Install SFJ boot taking care not to twist it.
CAUTION: ^
The inside of the larger end of SFJ boot and the boot groove shall be cleaned so as to be free from
grease and other substances.
^ When installing SFJ boot, position outer race of SFJ at center of its travel.
19. Put a band through the clip and wind twice in alignment with band groove of boot.
CAUTION: Use a new band.
20. Pinch the end of band with pliers. Hold the clip and tighten securely.
NOTE: When tightening boot, exercise care so that the air within the boot is appropriate.
21. Tighten band by using ST.
ST 925091000 BAND TIGHTENING TOOL
NOTE: Tighten band until it cannot be moved by hand.
22. Tap on the clip with the punch provided at the end of ST.
CAUTION: Tap to an extent that the boot underneath is not damaged.
23. Cut off band with an allowance of about 10 mm (0.39 in) left from the clip and bend this
allowance over the clip.
CAUTION: Be careful so that the end of the band is in close contact with clip.
Page 1044
Fuse Locations
Page 5871
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Rear Gate Trim
REAR GATE TRIM
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage clips or their holes.
1. Remove clips and detach rear gate lower trim (A).
2. Remove caps and screws, and then detach high-mounted stop light cover (A).
3. Remove rear gate upper trim (A).
INSTALLATION

Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection
Rear Window Defogger Switch
Auto A/C
Manual A/C
Check continuity between connectors at the back of heater control unit.

Disconnection and Connection
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Disconnection and Connection
OPERATION
FRONT SUB-SENSOR, SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR
How to disconnect:
1. Holding outer part (A), pull it in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION: When pulling, be sure to hold onto the connector and not the wire.
How to connect:
Holding the connector, and push it in carefully until a connecting sound is heard.
CAUTION:
- Outer (A) moves back, and so do not put your hand on the outer part.
- Be sure to insert the connector in until it locks. Then pull on it gently to make sure that it is locked.
Page 6377
Outside Temperature Display: Service and Repair
Ambient Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Open front hood. 2. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 3. Disconnect ambient sensor
connector.
4. Remove ambient sensor from radiator lower panel.
INSTALLATION

Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed
Idle Speed
Idle Speed 700 rpm (AT) 650 rpm (MT)

Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
Front Regulator and Motor Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove door trim. 2. Remove sealing cover. 3. Remove inner remote. 4. Remove door glass. 5.
Disconnect electrical connector.
6. Loosen four bolts and two nuts to pull out regulator assembly.
7. Loosen screws to remove motor assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Adjust front door glass.

Page 4686
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove battery ground terminal. 2. Disconnect connector from clutch switch. 3. Remove clutch
switch.
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: T: 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
Page 824
4. Measure the extension of rod beyond the body. If it is not within specifications, replace with a
new one.
Rod extension: H 5.7 ±0.5 mm (0.224 ±0.020 inch)
Belt Tension Pulley
1. Check mating surfaces of timing belt and contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
scratches. Replace automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly if faulty.
2. Check tension pulley for smooth rotation. Replace if noise or excessive play is noted.
3. Check tension pulley for grease leakage.
Belt Idler
1. Check belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace if noise or excessive play is noted.
2. Check belt outer contacting surfaces of idler pulley for abnormal wear and scratches.
3. Check belt idler for grease leakage.
Camshaft and Crankshaft Sprocket
1. Check sprocket teeth for abnormal wear and scratches.
2. Make sure there is no freeplay between sprocket and key.
3. Check crankshaft sensor sprocket notch for sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
matter.
Page 1095
a rubber mat, etc.
2. While vehicle is being driven, be careful not to ride over sharp obstacles or allow aluminum
wheels to contact the shoulder of the road. 3. When installing tire chain, be sure to install it properly
not to have a slack; otherwise it may hit wheel while driving. 4. When washing aluminum wheel,
use neutral synthetic detergent and water. Avoid using the cleanser including abrasive, hard
brushes or an
automatic car washer.

Page 2476
Diagnostic Procedure with Trouble Code - Page AT-115

Page 627
A: REMOVAL
switch.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 3500
7. GROUND
Each grounding point can be located easily by referring to the corresponding wiring harness.
8. DIODE
A symbol is used to indicate a diode.
9. WIRE TRACING ON EXTENDED WIRING DIAGRAMS
For a wiring diagram extending over at least two pages, a symbol (consisting of the same
characters with arrows), facilitates wire tracing from one page to the next.
A <--> A, B <--> B
10. SYMBOLS OF WIRE CONNECTION AND CROSSING
11. POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
A symbol is used to indicate the power supply in each wiring diagram. "MB-5", "MB-6", etc., which
are used as power- supply symbols throughout the text, correspond with those shown in the
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING in the wiring diagram. Accordingly, using the POWER SUPPLY
ROUTING and wiring diagrams permits service personnel to understand the entire electrical
arrangement of a system.
ABBREVIATION IN WIRING DIAGRAMS

Page 3029

Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter (Option)
1. Remove glove box.
2. Disconnect resistor connector (a) and then remove cover (b) from the cooling unit (c) by
removing the four clips (d)
3. Pull out filter (a). 4. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: -
The passenger compartment side of each filter is marked with an arrow. Ensure the arrow points
up.
- Ensure each filter assembly's tongues and grooves fit the corresponding cooling unit and
matching filter tongues and grooves.
- Ensure no air leaks from the cooling unit through the cover.
5. Fill in the maintenance label with the replacement date and mileage.
NOTE: Install maintenance label (a) on the outside of the glove box as shown.
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH Check continuity between terminals when operating the switch.
Lower Inner Trim
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Lower Inner Trim
LOWER INNER TRIM
REMOVAL
1. Remove front pillar lower trim (A). 2. Remove side sill front lower cover (B). 3. For sedan:
Remove rear seat cushion, then remove side sill rear upper cover (C).
For wagon: Rise rear seat cushion, then remove side sill rear upper cover (C).
4. Remove side sill rear lower cover (D). 5. Remove center pillar lower trim (E).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Be sure to securely hook pawls of inner trim panel to body flange.
Page 5107
DISASSEMBLY
Using ST, press bushing out of place. ST 20099AE010 INSTALLER & REMOVER
ASSEMBLY
1. Using ST, press bushing into place.
ST 20099AE010 INSTALLER & REMOVER
CAUTION: Outer bushing has a "directional" design. Be sure to install bushing with longer inner
housing side facing vehicle rear.
INSPECTION
Visually check link upper for damage or bends.
Stabilizer Link Front
REMOVAL
1. Loosen wheel nuts. Lift-up vehicle and remove wheel.
2. Use transmission jack to support rear arm horizontally.
3. Remove bolt securing link front to sub frame.

Front
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove lock pin. 2. Raise caliper body.
3. Remove pad.
NOTE: If brake pad is difficult to remove, proceed as follows:
1. Remove caliper body and fasten it provisionally to coil spring. 2. Remove support.
3. Place a support in a vise between wooden blocks.
4. Attach a rod of less than 12 mm (0.47 inch) dia. to the shaded area of brake pad, and strike the
rod with a hammer to drive brake pad out of
place.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply thin coat of Molykote AS880N (Part No. 26298AC000) to the frictional portion between pad
and pad clip.
Page 2469
2. Disconnect connector from throttle position sensor.
3. Remove throttle position sensor holding screws, and remove it.
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
CAUTION: When installing throttle position sensor, adjust the position to match with the specified
data.
AT VEHICLES
A/T - Harsh AWD Engagement/Code 45 Set
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh AWD Engagement/Code 45 Set
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
APPLICABILITY: 1999-2002MY 4EAT Vehicles
SUBJECT: TCU Code 45 and AWD Harsh Engagement
INTRODUCTION
If you encounter a TCU Code 45 (intake manifold pressure signal), and have confirmed the wiring
and connectors as outlined in the appropriate Service Manual, it will be necessary to replace the
TCU with one listed below. Please note that if the same vehicle is experiencing an ECM code for
the pressure signal, replacement of the TCU will not correct it. You will need to diagnose and repair
according to the Service Manual.
These new TCUs also include a slight logic change to address AWL) harsh engagement. Some
customers may comment, when they are driving in snow and ice and they try to accelerate during
slow speed driving, that they feel a bang from the rear of the vehicle. This is caused by the transfer
clutch being applied quickly when the system detects slight wheel slippage. You should confirm the
AWD is working properly prior to replacing the TCU.
These logic changes were incorporated into production from the start of 2003 model year.
Diagrams
Page 403
two connectors are connected as a unit, the poles which have the same number are joined.
- Electrical Wiring Harness: The connectors are numbered along with the number of poles, external
colors, and mating connections in the accompanying list.
- The sketch of each connector in the wiring diagram usually shows the (A) side of the connector.
The relationship between the wire color, terminal number and connector is described in figure.
NOTE: A wire which runs in one direction from a connector terminal sometimes may have a
different color from that which runs in the other direction from that terminal.
- In wiring diagram, connectors which have no terminal number refer to one-pole types. Sketches of
these connectors are omitted intentionally.
Page 1937

Page 2367
Service Procedure - Page 3-1
Page 1498
Page 3378
Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code by ABS Warning Light - Page 4-4
Page 6313

Brakes - ABS ECU Replacement
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS ECU Replacement
NUMBER: 06-31-03R DATE: 12/08/04
APPLICABILITY: 1997~04MY Legacy, Outback & Baja (Excluding VDC Equipped Vehicles);
1998~04MY Impreza and Forester
SUBJECT: Replacement of ECU for ABS Repair
INTRODUCTION
In order to improve serviceability of ABS system, the ECU was subdivided and has been newly
established as a spare part. This service bulletin details the part numbers and replacement
procedures of the ECU as a spare part.
PARTS NUMBERS AND APPLICABLE MODELS
REPAIR PROCEDURE
1) Turn off the ignition switch.
2) Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery.
3) Disconnect the air intake duct from the Air Box.

Page 3409
Page 189
Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair
Interrupt Relay
REMOVAL
Remove the mounting nuts and detach the interrupt relay (near the fuse box).
INSTALLATION

Page 2834
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
REMOVAL
2. Remove bolt which install crankshaft position sensor to cylinder block.
3. Remove crankshaft position sensor, and disconnect connector from it.
INSTALLATION

Diagrams
Axle Shaft Assembly: Diagrams
2. FRONT AXEL
Locations
Page 451
5. Remove camshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor support as a unit. 6. Remove
camshaft position sensor itself.
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
- Camshaft position sensor support; 6.4 N.m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
- Camshaft position sensor; 6.4 N.m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

Page 6040
2001 MY Forester
2001 MY Impreza
Page 4488
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Rear
INSPECTION
1. Repair or replace faulty parts. 2. Check caliper body and piston for uneven wear, damage or
rust. 3. Check rubber parts for damage or deterioration.
Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Condenser
1. Confirm that no dust or insects are found on the condenser fins. Air-blow or flush fins with water
as needed. 2. Confirm that no oil leaks from condenser. If a failure is found, replace condenser with
a new one.
Page 509
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Oxygen Sensor
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector from rear oxygen sensor. 3. Lift-up the vehicle. 4. Apply SUBARU CRC or
its equivalent to threaded portion of rear oxygen sensor, and leave it for one minute or more.
SUBARU CRC (Part No.004301003)
5. Remove rear oxygen sensor.
CAUTION: When removing, do not force rear oxygen sensor in an unnatural way especially when
exhaust pipe is cold, otherwise it will damage exhaust pipe.
INSTALLATION
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Remote Control Mirror Switch
Change Over Switch Left Position
Change Over Switch Right Position
Move rearview mirror switch to each position and check continuity between terminals. If NG,
replace the switch.
Diagrams
Shift Interlock Control Module: Diagrams
1 of 2
2 of 2
Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications PRESSURE
PRESSURE
Pressure at 700 Rpm 96 Kpa (14 Psi.) Min.
Pressure at 5000 Rpm 294 Kpa. (43 Psi.) Min.

Page 1403
Page 6399

NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 5649
Amplifier: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove passenger's seat. 2. Disconnect harness connector.
3. Remove mounting nuts, and then detach speaker amplifier.
INSTALLATION

Procedures
Front Bumper: Procedures
FRONT BUMPER
REPAIR
1. COATING METHOD FOR PP BUMPER

Coating Method For PP Bumper
2. REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS FOR COLORED PP BUMPER
NOTE: All PP bumpers are provided with a grained surface, and if the surface is damaged, it
cannot normally be restored to its former condition. Damage limited to shallow scratches that cause
only a change in the lustre of the base material or coating, can be almost fully restored. Before
repairing a damaged area, explain this point to the customer and get an understanding about the
matter. Repair methods are outlined below, based on a classification of the extent of damage.
- Minor damage causing only a change in the lustre of the bumper due to a light touch
Page 785
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug
Spark Plug
Plug Gap 0.039-0.043 in (1.0-1.1 mm)
Plug Torque 13-17 ft lb

Page 4879
Page 3762
This damage may not be noticeable by a visual inspection but may result in future premature
failures of related components such as wheel bearings.
The following instructions should be followed carefully to ensure proper replacement of the right
front axle housing assembly.
Following the procedures found in section 5 of the 2001 Subaru Service Manual:
1) Remove the right front axle housing from the vehicle.

2) Remove the hub from the old housing.
3) Remove the old bearing inner race from the hub and discard.
4) Install the hub in the new pre-assembled replacement housing.
Note:
The replacement right front axle housing has been pre-assembled with wheel bearings, snap ring
and grease seals. The bearings have been pre-packed with the correct amount of grease and do
not require additional grease.
5) Install the new housing assembly using the new hardware provided. For proper assembly and
torque procedures, also refer to the Subaru publication, "Wheel Bearing Replacement Procedure:
A visual guide" (MSA5TT0001).
6) Check the vehicle's suspension by performing a four-wheel alignment. Adjust the suspension as
necessary.
RENTAL CAR
For retail customers, SOA will pay the cost of a one-day car rental when an affected vehicle
requires right front axle housing replacement provided:
1) The LOT number found on the original right front axle housing matches the affected one.
2) The part is ordered VOR next day air.
The one-day car rental charges may be included with the Recall/Campaign claim submission.
RECALL CAMPAIGN IDENTIFICATION LABEL
Type or print the necessary information on a Recall Campaign identification label. The completed
label should be attached to the vehicle's upper radiator support.
A quantity of labels is provided to each dealer with this bulletin. Additional labels are available
through your Area/Distributor Service Office.
CLAIM REIMBURSEMENT AND ENTRY PROCEDURES
Credit for performing this recall campaign will be based on the submission of properly completed
repair order information. Dealers may enter the applicable claim information through their Dealer
Communications System.
Listed below is claim entry information:
Inspection Only - Verification of the right front axle housing lot number. The affected lot number is
not present, indicating replacement is not necessary.
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut (color) Tightening Torque
Front Axle (Gold color) 186 Nm (19 kg-m, 137 ft.lb.)
Rear Axle (Olive color) 235 Nm (24 kg-m, 174 ft.lb.)

Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Rear Gate Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove real wiper motor. 2. Remove electrical connector from rear defogger terminal. 3.
Remove glass in the same procedure as for windshield glass.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply adhesive evenly to the glass attachment area. 2. Insert the glass clip pin into the rear gate
hole, and after pushing on the area around the clip pin to secure it, push lightly all around the area
to seal
it.
3. About one hour after installation, conduct a leak test.
CAUTION: -
When door is opened/closed after glass is bonded, always lower door glass and then open/close it
carefully.
- Move vehicle slowly.
4. After completion of all work, allow vehicle to stand for about 24 hours.
NOTE: For minimum drying time and time the vehicle must be left standing before driving after
bonding, follow instructions or instruction manual from the adhesive manufacturer.
CAUTION: When a vehicle is returned to the user, tell him or her that the vehicle should not be
subjected to heavy impact for at least three days.
5. Connect rear defogger terminals. 6. Install rear wiper.

Page 2942
Service Procedure - page 3-2 Oil Pump Assembly
Page 3249
Page 1400
Timing Belt: Specifications
30,000 Miles Inspect 60,000 Miles Inspect 90,000 Miles Inspect 105,000 Miles Replace
Page 2310
CAUTION: Replace gaskets for intake air pressure sensor and idle air control solenoid valve with
new ones.
Page 3423

Campaign - Heater Hose Inspection/Replacement
Heater Hose: Recalls Campaign - Heater Hose Inspection/Replacement
NUMBER: WWB-85 DATE: 12/2000
APPLICABILITY: 2001 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback
SUBJECT: Inlet Heater Hose
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that the affected vehicles may have been equipped
with an inlet heater hose that may have been accidentally cut during production.
The program will involve the inspection and possible replacement of the inlet heater hose.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
2001 Subaru Legacy and Outback.
Affected vehicles are identified in the VIN range chart below. NOTE: All affected vehicles must be
confirmed by using the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry in the Dealer Communication System (DCS).
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 4843
Fuse: Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 1336
24. Connect air by-pass hose to throttle body.
25. Install intake air temperature and pressure sensor.
CAUTION: Replace O-ring with new one.
26. Connect connector to intake air temperature and pressure sensor. 27. Install ignition coil and
ignitor assembly.
Page 2520
Page 5041
Page 5917
Page 915
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery minus terminal.
2. Lift vehicle and remove jack-up plate.
3. Remove one pipe joint at the center of gearbox, and connect vinyl hose to pipe and joint.
Discharge fluid by turning steering wheel fully clockwise
and counterclockwise. Discharge fluid similarly from the other pipe.
CAUTION: Improper removal and installation of parts often causes fluid leak trouble. To prevent
this, clean the surrounding portions before disassembly and reassembly, and pay special attention
to keep dirt and other foreign matter from mating surfaces.
4. Remove clamp E from pipes C and D. 5. Disconnect Pipe C-D from pipe (on the gearbox side).
CAUTION: ^
When disconnecting pipe C-D, use two wrenches to prevent deformities.

Page 5437
Page 3475
Shift Interlock Control Module: Testing and Inspection
1. AT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5047
Spray time of anti-rust wax and length of the spray nozzle to be inserted into the sub-frame
corresponding holes are described as shown.
CROSSMEMBER FRONT (A)
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into hole (A) at right side of the crossmember front until it touches the
outer tube of the other side bushing. Spray anti-rust wax for 12 sec. while pulling the spray nozzle
back to the original opening.
Spray time: 12 sec.
CROSSMEMBER FRONT (B)
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into hole (B) at left side of the crossmember front until it touches the
Page 2798
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
3. Remove throttle position sensor holding screws, and remove throttle position sensor itself.
AT VEHICLES

Page 126
Page 960
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
1. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
1. Drain ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) by removing drain plug after allowing the engine to
cool for 3 to 4 hours.
CAUTION: Before starting work, cool off the engine well.
2. Reinstall drain plug after draining ATF, and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 24.5 ± 2.0 Nm (2.5 ± 0.2 kg.m, 18.1 ± 1.4 ft.lb)
3. Fill ATF up to the middle of the "COLD" side on level gauge by using the gauge hole.
Recommended fluid: Dexron II, IIE or III type automatic transmission fluid
Fluid capacity: 9.3(+0.3/-0) l (9.8(+0.3/-0) US qt, 8.2(+0.3/-0) Imp qt)
4. Run the vehicle until the ATF temperature rises to 60 to 80°C (140 to 176°F) and check the ATF
level.
2. ATF FILTER
NOTE: ATF filter is maintenance free part. ATF filter needs replacement, when it has physically
damaged or ATF leaked.
Page 6237
SYMBOLS IN WIRING DIAGRAMS
A number of symbols are used in each wiring diagram to easily identify parts or circuits.
1. RELAY
A symbol used to indicate a relay.
2. CONNECTOR-1
The sketch of the connector indicates the one-pole types.
3. WIRING CONNECTION
Some wiring diagrams are indicated in foldouts for convenience. Wiring destinations are indicated
where necessary by corresponding symbols (as when two pages are needed for clear indication).
4. FUSE NO. & RATING
The "FUSE No. & RATING" corresponds with that used in the fuse box (main fuse box, fuse and
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
- Each connector is indicated by a symbol.
- Each terminal number is indicated in the corresponding wiring diagram in an abbreviated form.
- For example, terminal number "C2" refers to No. 2 terminal of connector (C:F41) shown in the
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
- Each connector sketch clearly identifies the shape and color of a connector as well as terminal
locations. Non-colored connectors are indicated in natural color.
- When more than two types of connector number are indicated in a connector sketch, it means
that the same type connectors are used.
Page 2062
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground terminal from battery. 2. Lift-up the vehicle. 3. Remove center rear exhaust
pipes and muffler. 4. Disconnect connector from vehicle speed sensor.
5. Turn and remove vehicle speed sensor.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE: ^
Discard vehicle speed sensor and after removal, replace with a new one.
^ Ensure sensor mounting hole is clean and free of foreign matter.
^ Align tip end of key with key groove on end of speedometer shaft during installation.
1. Hand tighten vehicle speed sensor. 2. Tighten vehicle speed sensor using suitable tool.
Tightening torque: 5.9 Nm (0.6 kgf-m, 4.3 ft. lbs.)
3. Connect connector to vehicle speed sensor. 4. Install front and center exhaust pipes.
Page 5005
Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Link Upper
REMOVAL
3. Remove bolt securing link upper to sub frame.
4. Remove bolts which secure link upper to rear arm and detach link upper.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal, observing the following instructions.
CAUTION: ^
Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally, install link upper and tighten nuts to
specified torque.
^ Tighten nut when installing adjusting bolt.
^ Replace self-locking nut.
NOTE: Check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.

Page 940
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Mandatory Replacement Fluids
NUMBER: 01-151-00
DATE: 07/15/00
APPLICABILITY: All Subaru Vehicles
SUBJECT: Required Fluid Use for Warranty Repairs.
NOTE:
This bulletin is to be inserted into Section 13 of the CDS Policy & Procedure Manual for future
reference.
Effective August 1, 2000 the use of Factory Fill Coolant and Automatic Transmission / Power
Steering Fluid supplied by Subaru of America (SOA) will be mandatory for all repairs submitted to
SOA for reimbursement that require the use of these fluids.
The part numbers shown must be used when submitting a claim for these fluids:
These part numbers are to be used for claim reimbursement only, the part numbers required for
ordering were supplied previously in a Promotions Letter from SOA's Fixed Operations
Department.
DISCLAIMER
Page 465
10. Disconnect fuel jet pump hose.
11. Remove bolts which install fuel sub level sensor on fuel tank. 12. Remove fuel sub level sensor.
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Brake/Tail Light Bulb
REMOVAL
SEDAN (COMBINATION LIGHT)
1. Open trunk lid and remove cover. 2. Turn the socket and remove the bulb.
SEDAN (FINISHER LIGHT)

INSTALLATION

Page 4563
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair
For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to
Drum Brake System; Service and Repair.
Page 4828
- The following color codes are used to indicate the colors of the wires used.
- The wire color code, which consists of two letters (or three letters including Br or Lg), indicates the
standard color (base color of the wire covering) by its first letter and the stripe marking by its
second letter.
- The table lists the nominal sectional areas and allowable currents of the wires.
CAUTION: When replacing or repairing a wire, be sure to use the same size and type of the wire
which was originally used.
NOTE:
- The allowable current in the table indicates the tolerable amperage of each wire at an ambient
temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).
- The allowable current changes with ambient temperature. Also, it changes if a bundle of more
than two wires is used.
Page 4031
Page 3202
Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal - Page EN(H6)-29
DISCLAIMER
Page 1275
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 6526
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 5065
Page 1033
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Brakes - Squealing Noise
Brake Caliper: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Squealing Noise
NUMBER: 06-30-01R DATE: 03/06/02
APPLICABILITY: 2001 2002MY Legacy Vehicles with 16-inch Brake System
SUBJECT: Brake Squeal Noise
INTRODUCTION This updated bulletin is to inform of a change in production to eliminate brake

squeal noise in addition to the previous bulletin dealing with a field repair procedure (the installation
of brake shims)
PRODUCTION LINE CHANGE
1) 16-inch front disc brake caliper, housing bracket, and pad kit have been changed to eliminate
the brake squeal in reverse, that occurs after a cold soak.
2) The applicable VIN numbers have incorporated the changes:

FRONT HOUSING CHANGED (EFFECTIVE AUGUST 8, 2001 BEGINNING WITH THE
FOLLOWING VINS)
FRONT CALIPER AND PAD KIT CHANGED (EFFECTIVE OCTOBER 12, 2001 BEGINNING
WITH THE FOLLOWING VINS)
Any VIN # after this change should not have the Brake Squeal concern or require the brake shim
modification.
PART NUMBERS: NEW AND OLD
FIELD PROCEDURE:
For vehicles produced prior to the previously outlined production line change, if the customer
complains of a brake squeal in the AM when backing up on the first application, you will need to
install a new style brake shim part # 26298AE020. This part number will include a set of four (4)
shims.
Note:
If you are replacing a pad kit for maintenance, you will need to install this shim set.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
1) Remove the front wheels.
2) Loosen the front upper caliper bolt. Remove the lower bolt and swing the caliper up out of the
way.
Page 5218
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage condenser fins. If a damaged fin is found, repair it using a thin
screwdriver.
If condenser is replaced, add appropriate amount of compressor oil to the compressor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Replace O-rings on hoses or pipes with new ones, and then apply compressor oil.
Confirm that lower guide of condenser has been fitted into holes on radiator panel.
2. Charge refrigerant.
Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection
Move combination switch to respective positions and check continuity between terminals.
Lighting Switch
1. LIGHTING SWITCH
Dimmer And Passing Switch
2. DIMMER AND PASSING SWITCH
Turn Signal Switch
3. TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Service and Repair
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
Front Outer Handle
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim. 2. Remove the sealing cover. 3. Remove the front door latch assembly. 4.
Remove the two rod joints.
5. Remove the two bolts. Remove the front outer handle (A).
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to remove the door panel. This will deform it.
INSTALLATION

Body - Front Door Weatherstrip Detached/Loose
Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Weatherstrip Detached/Loose

NUMBER: 12-79-03 DATE: 04/15/03
APPLICABILITY: 2000-2003MY Legacy, Outback and Baja Vehicles
SUBJECT: Front Door Panel Weather Strip
INTRODUCTION
In the event you encounter a customer complaint that the lower front door weather strip is detached
or hanging loose, the following repair method should be used in lieu of replacing the entire weather
strip or door trim panel assembly. For weather strips which are loose only, replacement is not an
option under warranty.
PARTS INFORMATION
REPAIR PROCEDURES/INFORMATION
1) Remove the door trim panel assembly.
2) Remove the four dips at the bottom of the inner door panel and replace with new ones.
3) Insert the three holders into the space between the weather strip and the bottom of the door
pocket protrusion, ensuring that the holder is wedged flush with the weather strip (see picture).
4) Reinstall the door trim panel assembly in reverse order of removal.
5) Ensure proper operation of all door functions and electrical operations.
CLAIM REIMBURSEMENT/WARRANTY INFORMATION
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Limited Warranty coverage period, this repair may be
claimed using the information shown.
Ignition Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ignition Switch
1. Remove the instrument panel lower cover. 2. Remove the lower column cover. 3. Unfasten the
holddown clip which secures the harness and disconnect the connector of the ignition switch from
the body harness.
4. Turn the ignition key plate to each position and check the continuity between the terminals of the
ignition connector.
If NG, replace the ignition switch.

Page 6294
- Relays are classified as normally-open or normally-closed. The normally-closed relay has one or
more contacts. The wiring diagram shows the relay mode when the energizing circuit is OFF.
Page 828
3) Tighten remaining bolts.
Crankshaft Pulley and Belt Cover
1. Install front belt cover.
Tightening Torque: 5 Nm (0.5kg-m, 3.6 ft. lbs.)
2. Install LH belt cover.
3. Install crankshaft pulley. 4. Install pulley bolt
To lock crankshaft, use ST 499977100 Crankshaft Pulley Wrench.
a. Clean the crankshaft pulley thread using an air gun. b. Apply engine oil to the crankshaft pulley
bolt seat and thread. c. Tighten the bolt temporarily with tightening torque of 44 Nm (4.5kg-m, 33
ft.lbs.) d. tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Tightening torque: 177 Nm (18.0 kg-m, 130.2 ft. lbs.)
e. Confirm that the tightening angle of the crankshaft pulley bolt is 65° or more, if not replace
crankshaft pulley bolt.
Caution: Conduct the tightening procedures by confirming the turning angle of the crankshaft pulley
bolt referring to the gauge indicated on the belt cover.
Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection
Horn Switch
Check continuity between terminals.

Page 2527
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 2. Loosen throttle position sensor holding screws.
3. When using voltage meter;
1. Take out ECM. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON. 3. Adjust throttle position sensor to the proper
position to allow the voltage signal to ECM to be in specification.
4. Tighten throttle position sensor holding screws.

Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection
1. MAIN SWITCH
Driver's Switch
Front Passenger's Switch

Rear Left Switch
Rear Right Switch
Check continuity between connector terminals. If NG, replace the main switch.
2. SUB-SWITCH
Front Passenger's Door Switch And Rear Door Switch
Check continuity between connector terminals. If NG, replace the sub-switch.

Page 2466

Page 4908
^ In case the fluid leaks from flare nut, it is caused by dust (or the like) and/or damage between
flare and tapered seat in piping.
^ So remove the flare nut, tighten again it to the specified torque after cleaning flare and tapered
seat. If flare or tapered seat is damaged, replace it with a new one.
Locations
Page 4184
Front & Rear Differential Oil - Page PM-23

Page 2881
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable from battery ground terminal.
2. Remove air cleaner case.
3. Disconnect knock sensor connector.
4. Remove knock sensor from cylinder block.
INSTALLATION
1. Install knock sensor to cylinder block.

Page 826
2. Install automatic belt tension adjuster assembly.
Tightening torque: 39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.9 ft. lbs.)
3. Install belt idler (No. 1).
Timing Belt
1. Installation of timing belt
1) Turn camshaft sprocket No. 2 using ST1, and turn camshaft sprocket No. 1 using ST2 so that
their alignment marks come to top positions.
ST1 499207100 CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH
2) While aligning alignment mark on timing belt with marks on sprockets, position timing belt
properly.
CAUTION: Ensure belt's rotating direction is correct.
2. Install belt idler No. 1.

Page 6397
- Each unit is directly grounded to the body or indirectly grounds through a harness ground
terminal. Different symbols are used in the wiring diagram to identify the two grounding systems.
- The ground points is shown in the wiring diagram.
NOTE: All wiring harnesses are provided with a ground point which should be securely connected.
Page 5117
3. Clean housing interior completely. Using ST1 and ST2, press bearing into housing.
CAUTION:
^ Always press outer race when installing bearing.
^ Be careful not to remove plastic lock from inner race when installing bearing.
^ Charge bearing with new grease when outer race is not removed.
^ Do not apply pressure more than 30 kN (3.1 ton, 2.8 US ton, 3.1 Imp ton).
4. Using plier, install snap ring.
CAUTION: Ensure snap ring fits in groove properly.
5. Using ST1 and ST2, press outer oil seal until it comes in contact with snap ring.
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure more than 3.92 kN (0.4 ton, 0.4 US ton, 0.4 Imp ton).
6. Invert both ST1 and housing. 7. Using ST2, press inner oil seal into housing until it touches
bottom.
ST1 927430000 HOUSING STAND ST2 927460000 OIL SEAL INSTALLER

Page 6650
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Diagram Information and Instructions
Shifter A/T: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
The wiring diagram of each system is illustrated so that you can understand the path through which
the electric current flows from the battery. Sketches and codes are used in the diagrams. They
should read as follows:
- Each connector and its terminal position are indicated by a sketch of the connector in a
disconnected state which is viewed from the front.
- The number of poles or pins, presence of a lock, and pin number of each terminal are indicated in
the sketch of each connector. In the sketch, the highest pole number refers to the number of poles
which the connector has. For example, the sketch of the connector shown in figure indicates the
connector has 9 poles.
- When one set of connectors is viewed from the front side, the pole numbers of one connector are
symmetrical to those of the other. When these
Page 1853
2. Install rear exhaust pipe to center exhaust pipe.

Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Cut Valve: Service and Repair
FUEL CUT VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Remove fuel tank.

2. Move clip and disconnect evaporation hose from fuel cut valve. 3. Remove bolts which install
fuel cut valve.
INSTALLATION

Page 2177
Spark Plug: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
Correct it if the spark plug gap is measured with a gap gauge, and it is necessary.
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order
Firing Order 1-3-2-4

Page 2246
Page 927
Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Check that brake fluid level remains between "MIN" and "MAX". If out of the specified range,
refill or drain fluid. If fluid level becomes close to
"MIN", refill fluid.
2. Check fluid for discoloration. If fluid color has excessively changed, drain the fluid and refill with
new fluid.
Page 2456
Component Location Overall View / Component Views

Page 1526
12. If necessary, adjust the valve clearance.
13. Similar to measurement procedures used for #1 cylinder, measure #2, #3 and #4 cylinder valve
clearances.
NOTE: ^
Be sure to set cylinder pistons to their respective top dead centers on compression stroke before
measuring valve clearances.
^ To set #3, #2 and #4 cylinder pistons to their top dead centers on compression stroke, turn
crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° at a time starting with arrow mark on left-hand camshaft sprocket
facing up.
14. After inspection, install the related parts in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque: Resonator chamber: 32 Nm (3.3 kgf-m, 24 ft. lbs.)

Page 868
A used toothbrush which has been cleaned works great.
Manually open the negative pressure valve. Using clean water and a brush, thoroughly clean the
valve (inner and outer surface) and the valve seal surface.
Check the radiator cap valve opening pressure using a radiator cap tester to insure the cap is
within specification (refer to the applicable Subaru Service Manual).
Note:
If the cap is out of specification replace it.
2. Coolant Reservoir Tank Cleaning
Remove the reservoir tank (refer to the applicable Subaru Service Manual).
Using clean water, thoroughly clean the inside of the reservoir tank.
Reinstall reservoir tank. Fill with coolant to the Full mark.
Note:
Be sure to use genuine Subaru Super Coolant or Subaru Long Life Coolant, depending upon what
type of coolant is currently in the system.
3. Coolant Reservoir Tank Hose Modification

Page 4599
1. Start engine and depress brake pedal with pedal force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lbs.). Keep engine
running until a vacuum of 66.7 kPa (500 mm-Hg,
19.69 inch-Hg) = point B is indicated on vacuum gauge while the pedal is still depressed.
2. Stop engine and watch vacuum gauge. If the vacuum drop range is less than 3.3 kPa (25
mm-Hg, 0.98 inch-Hg) within 15 seconds after stopping
engine, brake booster is functioning properly. If defective, refer to "AIR TIGHTNESS CHECK".
Under Without Using Gauges. See: Without Using Gauges
- Lack of boosting action check
Turn off engine, and set the vacuum gauge reading at "0". Then, check the fluid pressure when
brake pedal is depressed. The pressure must be greater than the standard value listed.
- Boosting action check
Set the vacuum gauge reading at 66.7 kPa (500 mm-Hg, 19.69 inch-Hg) by running engine. Then,
check the fluid pressure when brake pedal is depressed. The pressure must be greater than the
standard value listed.
Page 3194
Page 1258
Oil Filter: Tools and Equipment
Oil Filter Wrench
AST tool# 5040
66.5mm, 14 flats, Oil Filter Wrench for Subaru. Fits all 2.5L 4-cylinder motors (except Justy and
Loyale). Fits both Subaru factory filter #15208AA100 and Suzuki factory filter #16510-03G00. Also
fits 2008 U.S. model Smart Car.
- 66.5mm with 14 Flats
- Applicable to Subaru 2.5L 4-Cylinder Motors (except Justy and Loyale)
- Fits Suzuki factory filter# 16510-03G00
- Fits 2008 U.S. Model Smart Car
- Made in USA
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943

Page 4252
Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Dynamics Control (Vdc)
INSPECTION
Check the VDCCM identification mark.
ADJUSTMENT
Always conduct steering angle sensor center positioning and yaw rate and lateral G sensor 0
positioning whenever you have replaced, removed or installed the following items. -
VDCCM
- Steering angle sensor
- Yaw rate and lateral G sensor
- Steering wheel parts (including airbag)
- Suspension parts
- Adjustment of wheel alignment
1. WITHOUT SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1. Park the vehicle in a straight ahead position on a
horizontal surface. 2. Confirm the steering wheel center position. (If the center position is not
accurate, adjust wheel alignment.) 3. Drive the vehicle approximately 10 km (6 MPH) preferably on
a straight road, then turn ignition switch OFF. Then drive the vehicle
approximately 10 km (6 MPH) again confirming that ABS and VDC warning lights do not go ON
while vehicle is being driven. Also make sure there are no abnormalities of the VDC function or
steering operation.
NOTE: If it is not possible to drive the vehicle, use SUBARU SELECT MONITOR.
4. If there are any abnormalities found, conduct the procedure over again.
2. WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1. Park the vehicle in a straight ahead position on a
horizontal surface. (Engine running in gear position of P or N) 2. Confirm the steering wheel center
position. (If the center position is not accurate, adjust wheel alignment.) 3. Set the SUBARU
SELECT MONITOR on the vehicle and select "Set Mode Str.A.Sen.N & Lat.Gsen.Op" in "Function
Check Sequence" display
menu. (Follow the instructions in the display.)
4. Select "Current Data display & Save" in (Brake Control System) display menu and confirm if the
steering angle sensor is indicated as "0 deg". 5. If the display does not indicate (0 deg), conduct the
procedure over again and make sure it indicates "0 deg". 6. Drive the vehicle approximately 10
minutes and confirm that ABS and VDC warning lights do not go ON while vehicle is being driven.
7. If there are any abnormalities in VDC function or steering operation found while vehicle is being
driven, conduct the procedure over again.
Page 3009

Engine - Valve Guide Oil Seal Identification
Valve Guide Seal: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Valve Guide Oil Seal Identification
Valve stem oil seals
The Techline occasionally gets calls concerning the color of valve stem oil seals and what colors
are for what valves. The green seals are for the exhaust valves. The gray/black seals are for the
intake valves. We hope this helps alleviate some confusion.
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Check Standard 1,216 kPa at 350 rpm
Limit 941 kPa at 350 rpm
Difference Between Cylinders 49 kPa at 350 rpm

Ignition Switch
the body harness.
ignition connector.

Page 5008
2. Remove bolt securing stabilizer clamps to sub frame.
3. Remove support sub frame RH. (When removing RH side link rear.)
4. Remove stabilizer link.
6. Remove bolt securing link rear to rear arm. 7. Scribe an alignment mark on link rear adjusting
bolt and sub frame.
Axle Bearing: Testing and Inspection
E: INSPECTION
Check the removed parts for wear and damage. If defective, replace with new ones.
CAUTION: ^
If bearing is faulty, replace it as the bearing set.
^ Be sure to replace oil seal at every overhaul.

Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection
1. STOP LIGHT SWITCH

Recall - Front Seat Inner Slide Rail Replacement
Seat Track: Recalls Recall - Front Seat Inner Slide Rail Replacement
NUMBER: WWD-87 DATE: 03/2001
SUBJECT: Front Seat Inner Slide Rail
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that some 2001 Legacy and Outback models
equipped with manually adjustable (non-powered) seats may have been produced with an
improperly welded front seat inner slide rail latch mechanism.
This program will involve replacement of the manually adjustable driver and/or passenger front seat
inner slide rail on affected vehicles. Power driver seats are not affected.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
2001 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback models.
Affected vehicles are identified in the VIN range chart.
NOTE:
All affected vehicles must be confirmed by using the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry in the Dealer
Communication System (DCS). The description found next to the campaign code (WWD87) in the
Vehicle Coverage Inquiry will identify the seat(s) that requires inner seat rail replacement. Refer to
the section "IDENTIFY THE AFFECTED INNER FRONT SEAT RAIL THAT REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT" of this Bulletin for more details.
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 6736
Turn Signal Lamp: Service and Repair Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb
Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 2344
Page 2723
4. Tighten bolt which holds fuel filler pipe on body.
5. Insert evaporation hose (O) approximately 25 to 30 mm (0.98 to 1.18 in) into the lower end of
evaporation pipe and hold clip.
Service and Repair
Spare Tire: Service and Repair
NOTE "T-type" tire for temporary use is prepared as a spare tire.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use a tire chain with the "T-type" tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit
properly and will result in damage to the vehicle and the tire.
^ Do not drive at a speed greater than 80 km/h (50 MPH).
^ Drive as slowly as possible and avoid passing over bumps.
REPLACEMENT
Refer to Removal and Installation of Steel Wheel for removal/installation of "T-type" tires. Refer to
Wheel; Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Replace with a conventional tire as soon as possible since the "T-type" tire is only for
temporary use.
INSPECTION
1. Check tire inflation pressure.
Specification: 412 kPa (4.2 kg1cm, 60 psi)
2. Take stones, glass, nails, etc. out of the tread groove. 3. Check tires for deformation, cracks,
partial wear, or wear.
CAUTION: Replace the tire with a new one.

Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
FRONT GRILLE
REMOVAL
1. Open hood. 2. Loosen bolts and nuts to remove front grill.
INSTALLATION

Page 6318
Fuel Gauge: Testing and Inspection
Fuel Gauge
Measure resistance between fuel gauge terminals. If NG, replace speedometer and fuel gauge
assembly. If OK, replace combination meter printed circuit.
Canister Vent Valve: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Make sure that hoses are not cracked or loose.

Page 5654
EXAMPLES OF PEELING LABELS
PLEASE USE CAUTION WHEN USING YOUR GENUINE SUBARU IN-DASH CD

CHANGER/PLAYER
In-dash compact disc (CD) players are a great way to enjoy crystal-clear music in your Subaru.
Subaru CD players are designed to play standard 4 3/4 inch diameter CDs, which carry the
"Compact Disc Digital Audio" logo.
Service and Repair
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE MANIFOLD PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
NOTE: This sensor is installed on MT vehicles only.
2. Remove idle air control solenoid valve.
3. Disconnect connector from intake manifold pressure sensor.
4. Remove intake manifold pressure sensor from throttle body.
INSTALLATION
Page 4945
^ Do not leave the valve of pressure gauge closed or hold the steering wheel at stop end for 5
seconds or more in any case, as the oil pump may be damaged due to long keep of these
conditions.
^ Put cotton cloth waste at a place where fluid drops before pressure gauge is installed. Wipe off
split fluid thoroughly after the measurement.
NOTE: Keep engine idling during the measurement.
1. MEASURE REGULAR PRESSURE.
1. Remove two bolts securing power steering pipes to engine. 2. Install ST1, 2 and 3 between
power steering pump and pipes using gasket (Part No. 34621AC021 and bolt (Part No.
34620AC010). 3. Replenish power steering fluid up to specified level. 4. Open valve, and start the
engine.
5. Measure regular pressure. ST1 925711000 PRESSURE GAUGE ST2 34099AC020 ADAPTER
HOSE B ST3 34099AC010 ADAPTER HOSE A Service limit: 981 kPa (10 kgf-cm2, 142 psi) or less
6. If it is not within the specified value, replace the troubled part caused by the following symptoms;
pipe or hose clogged, leaks from fluid line,
and mix of foreign objects in fluid line.
2. MEASURE RELIEF PRESSURE.
1. Using STs, measure relief pressure. 2. Close valve.
3. Measure relief pressure.
ST1 925711000 PRESSURE GAUGE ST2 34099AC020 ADAPTER HOSE B ST3 34099AC010
ADAPTER HOSE A Service limit. 9,611 - 10,199 kPa (98 - 104 kgf-cm2, 1,394 - 1,479 psi)
4. If it is not within the specified value, replace the oil pump.
3. MEASURE WORKING PRESSURE.
1. Using STs, measure working pressure. 2. Open valve.

Page 1616
Page 769
Service Precautions
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service Precautions
C: CAUTION
^ Wear work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles, and protective shoes during operation.
^ Remove contamination, including dirt and corrosion, before removal, installation or disassembly.
^ Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
^ Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary
removal, installation, disassembly, and replacement.
^ Be careful not to burn your hands, because each part in the vehicle is hot after running.
^ Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
^ Place shop jacks or safety stands at the specified points.
^ Before disconnecting electrical connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect negative

terminal from battery.
Body - Front Door Weatherstrip Detached/Loose
Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Weatherstrip Detached/Loose
NUMBER: 12-79-03 DATE: 04/15/03
APPLICABILITY: 2000-2003MY Legacy, Outback and Baja Vehicles
SUBJECT: Front Door Panel Weather Strip
INTRODUCTION
In the event you encounter a customer complaint that the lower front door weather strip is detached
or hanging loose, the following repair method should be used in lieu of replacing the entire weather
strip or door trim panel assembly. For weather strips which are loose only, replacement is not an
option under warranty.
PARTS INFORMATION
1) Remove the door trim panel assembly.
2) Remove the four dips at the bottom of the inner door panel and replace with new ones.
3) Insert the three holders into the space between the weather strip and the bottom of the door
pocket protrusion, ensuring that the holder is wedged flush with the weather strip (see picture).
4) Reinstall the door trim panel assembly in reverse order of removal.
5) Ensure proper operation of all door functions and electrical operations.
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Limited Warranty coverage period, this repair may be
claimed using the information shown.
Page 2252
Page 4328
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 3013
Page 4485
Disclaimer
Page 133
Idle Mixture - Page PM-20

Page 764
Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection
Front & Rear Motor Assembly
1. Make sure that power window motor rotates properly when battery voltage is applied to terminals
of motor connector. 2. Change polarity of battery connections to terminals to ensure that motor
rotates in reverse direction.
Specifications
Fluid Line/Hose: Specifications
Oil Cooler Line/Hose Outlet Pipe 44 Nm
Inlet Pipe 25 Nm
Page 6107
SOA will prepare and mail an Owner Notification Letter to owners of the affected vehicles. The
owner notification is scheduled for mailing in mid-March, 2001.
DEALER PROGRAM RESPONSIBILITY
Dealers are to promptly service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to the vehicle owner
regardless of mileage, age of the vehicle, or ownership.
For affected vehicles sold after the date on the dealer's computer list, dealers are to contact those
owners and provide them with a copy of the owner notification letter. They should also arrange to
make the required correction according to the instructions in the service procedure section of this
bulletin.
Page 6409
second letter.
NOTE:
Front Drive Shaft
Axle Shaft Assembly: Testing and Inspection Front Drive Shaft
E: INSPECTION
Check the removed parts for damage, wear, corrosion etc. If faulty, repair or replace. 1. DOJ
(Double Offset Joint)
Check seizure, corrosion, damage, wear and excessive play.
2. SFJ (Shudder-less Freering tripod Joint)
Check seizure, corrosion, damage and excessive play.
3. Shaft
Check excessive bending, twisting, damage and wear.
4. BJ (Bell Joint)
5. Boot
Check for wear, warping, breakage or scratches.
6. Grease
Check for discoloration or fluidity.

Page 2022
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) - Page EN(H6)-340
Page 5468
Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Rear Gate Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove real wiper motor. 2. Remove electrical connector from rear defogger terminal. 3.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply adhesive evenly to the glass attachment area. 2. Insert the glass clip pin into the rear gate
hole, and after pushing on the area around the clip pin to secure it, push lightly all around the area
to seal
it.
3. About one hour after installation, conduct a leak test.
CAUTION: -
carefully.
5. Connect rear defogger terminals. 6. Install rear wiper.

Page 2999
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnosis Connector - Page ABS-79

Page 1047
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 265

Page 5039
Page 3566
Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates -

Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
APPLICABILITY: 2001 Impreza Service Manual 2001 Legacy & Outback Service Manual 2001
Forester Service Manual 2001 Supplement for 6 Cylinder 2000 Legacy Service Manual
SUBJECT: Service Manual Corrections
Place a REVISED label on the appropriate page of the shown effected Service Manual and update
the Service Manual Correction Binder with the following pages:
Page 1879
Page 101
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
HORN RELAY
Tail And Illumination Relay
Check continuity between terminals (indicated in table) when terminal No.4 is connected to battery
and terminal No.3 is grounded.
Page 1875

Page 1366
Page 1672
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor
E: INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive (+) terminal to terminal No. 2, and negative (-) terminal to terminal No. 1
of sub fan motor connector. 2. Make sure the sub-fan motor operates properly. Replace it if it
doesn't.
Page 5950
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for these products are included in each product carton and
available in the electronic version.
Respiratory Protection
NIOSH-approved respirator for organic vapor and mist to control exposure where ventilation is
inadequate. Example: 3M Maintenance-free Half Facepiece Respirator 07191, 07192, 07193 or
Low-Maintenance Half Facepiece Respirator 07177, 07178, 07179.
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 2540
Warranty - Mandatory Replacement Fluids
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Mandatory Replacement Fluids
NUMBER: 01-151-00
DATE: 07/15/00
NOTE:
reference.
Department.
DISCLAIMER
Page 2335
1. Before installing rear oxygen sensor, apply anti-seize compound only to threaded portion of rear
oxygen sensor to make the next removal easier.
CAUTION: Never apply anti-seize compound to protector of rear oxygen sensor.
Anti-seize compound: SS-30 by JET LUBE
2. Install rear oxygen sensor.
3. Connect connector to rear oxygen sensor. 4. Lower the vehicle.
5. Connect battery ground cable.

Page 2170
Service Procedure - Page 3-2 Control Valve Body
Page 5846
Hood Latch: Testing and Inspection
Front Hood Lock Assembly
1. Check the striker for bending or abnormal wear. 2. Check the safety lever for improper
movement. 3. Check other levers and the spring for rust formation and unsmooth movement.
Front Door Trim
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Trim
FRONT DOOR TRIM
Door Trim
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force to clip. Otherwise the clip may be broken.
1. Pull up inner remote cover toward you to remove upper hook. Pull down it to remove lower claw.
Remove inner remote cover.
Page 6463
Page 3564
Page 3224
M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03
APPLICABILITY: 1995-2002MY Legacy; 1997-2003MY 2.5L Impreza; and 1998-2003MY Forester

Vehicles. All models have Manual Transmission.
SUBJECT: Clutch Pedal Sticking (revised)
INTRODUCTION
In the event you encounter a customer complaint of the clutch pedal not returning completely after
being engaged, or has a spongy pedal feel or a light feel in the shifting pedal while shifting, the
following repair method should be followed. This condition may affect certain manual transmission
vehicles with a hydraulic clutch system under certain weather conditions.
PROCEDURE
To correct this condition you must replace the parts in the chart that match your vehicle using the
following procedure:
For Natural Aspiration models with hydraulic clutches
1) Remove the intake chamber from the backside of the intake manifold.
2) Remove the clutch hose and the clutch operating cylinder in this procedure it is not necessary to
remove the master cylinder, the clutch pipe and bracket.
3) Replace the clutch hose and the clutch operating cylinder with new parts as listed in the chart.
Note that two pieces of gasket (P/N 114130151) used on the connector of the operating cylinder
must be replaced with new ones when replacing the clutch hose. Tightening torque of the bolt is:
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
4) Bolt the operating cylinder onto the transmission.
5) Add brake fluid.
6) Bleed the air from the system.
7) Install the intake chamber.
8) Check the following items:
a) Insure there is no leakage from the line, check whether fluid leakage occurs after the clutch
pedal has been fully depressed.
b) Check whether the clutch performs normally.
For Turbo models
1) Remove the intercooler.
2) Remove the dutch operating cylinder hose. In this procedure, the clutch master cylinder, clutch
pipe and bracket are unnecessary to be removed.
3) Replace the clutch hose that was removed with the new one listed in the chart. Note that two
pieces of gasket (P/N 114130151) used on the connector of the operating cylinder must be
replaced with new ones when replacing the clutch hose. Tightening torque of the bolt is: 37 +/- 3
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.

6) Install the intercooler.

Page 5262
owner notification is scheduled to be mailed in early January, 2001. A copy of the Owner
Notification Letter is included in this bulletin.
Dealers are to promptly service all vehicles subject to this Service Program at no charge to the
vehicle owner regardless of mileage, age of the vehicle, or ownership.
bulletin.
Dealers are also to promptly perform the applicable service procedures defined in this bulletin to
correct all affected vehicles in their inventory (new, used, demo). Additionally, whenever a vehicle
subject to this service program is taken into dealer new or used inventory, or is in the dealership for
service, necessary steps should be taken to ensure the service program correction has been made
before selling or releasing the vehicle.
PARTS INFORMATION
Replacement part(s), listed below, are available by following normal part ordering procedures.
INSPECTION / REPAIR PROCEDURE
Remove the engine air intake box. Inspect the inlet heater hose for black PVC (electrical) tape
wrapped around a section of the hose's foam protective cover. If no tape is found, no further action
is necessary. If tape is found, replace the hose following the procedures in the applicable Service
Manual.
Page 3875
NOTE: Tighten flywheel installing bolts gradually. Each bolt should be tightened to the specified
torque in a crisscross fashion.
3. Install clutch disc and cover. 4. Install transmission assembly.

Service and Repair
Ignition Lock: Service and Repair
Ignition Key Lock
1. Remove the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the steering column.
3. Secure the steering column in a vise. Remove the bolt with a drill. 4. Remove the ignition key
lock.
5. Use a new torn bolt. Tighten the torn bolt to the end of the thread.
Page 5108
4. Remove bolts which secure link front to rear arm and detach link front.
NOTE: Link front bushing cannot be replaced alone. Always replace link front and bushing as a
single unit.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally, install link front and tighten nuts
to specified torque.
^ Install link front with protruded side facing front.
INSPECTION
Visually check link front for damage or bends.
Stabilizer Link Rear
REMOVAL

Page 22
Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Control Module
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove glove box. 3. Remove nut, then remove keyless
entry control module (B) and the other electrical control module (A) while disconnecting connector.
4. Disconnect keyless entry control module and the other electrical control module.
INSTALLATION

Page 3233
1. Install transmission control module.
Except VTD model
VTD model
2. Connect connectors to transmission control module. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2164
Page 4181

Page 6297
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 3117
Page 5745
4. Remove clip at bottom of bumper.
5. Remove clip (A), and pull out bumper slightly. 6. Disconnect electrical connector of fog light to
remove bumper.
7. Remove E/A FORM from bumper beam.
CAUTION: E/A FORM is easy to break. Do not apply excessive force to it during removal.
8. Remove bumper beam.

Page 4495
8. Install lock and guide pin boot on support.
15 inch AND 16 inch TYPE 1. Clean caliper body interior using brake fluid. 2. Apply a coat of brake
fluid to piston seal and fit piston seal in groove on caliper body. 3. Apply a coat of brake fluid to the
entire inner surface of cylinder and outer surface of piston. 4. Insert piston into cylinder.
CAUTION: Do not force piston into cylinder.
5. Apply a coat of specified grease to boot and fit in groove on ends of cylinder and piston.
Grease: NIGLUBE RX-2 (Part No. 003606000)
To facilitate installation, fit boot starting with piston end.
6. Position boot in grooves on cylinder and piston. 7. Install boot ring. Be careful not scratch boot.
8. Apply a coat of specified grease to lock pin and guide pin, outer surface, cylinder inner surface,
and boot grooves. 9. Install lock pin boot and guide pin boot on support.
Rear
DISASSEMBLY
Page 2506
DISCLAIMER
Page 1395
1. Install crankshaft sprocket. 2. Install camshaft sprocket. 3. Install timing belt assembly. 4. Install
belt cover. 5. Install crankshaft pulley. 6. Install V-belt.
Page 6043
NOTE : The paint codes are found on the VIN plate located on the Left Strut Tower. The color code
is depicted by a solid color or by a combined upper and lower color code.
Page 2240
Page 1745
Note:
Note:

Page 5700
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 5503
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 1334
16. Install fuel pipe protector RH.
17. Install fuel pipe protector LH.
18. Connect pressure regulator vacuum hose to intake manifold.

Diagrams
Brake Pedal Assy: Diagrams
Brake Pedal For AT Model

Page 4959
- Do not check continuity of the airbag module (driver, passenger, and side, pretensioner).
- The removed front seat with the airbag module must be kept at least 200 mm (8 in) away from
walls and other objects.
- Do not use the airbag or pretensioner parts from other vehicles. Always replace parts with new
parts.
- Do not re-use deployed airbag or pretensioner again.
- When painting or performing sheet metal work on the front part of the vehicle, including the front
wheel apron, front fender, and front side frame, take utmost care not to apply paint or the flame of
the welding burner directly to the front sub sensors and wire harness of the airbag system.
- When painting or performing sheet metal work on the side of the vehicle, including the side sill,
center pillar, and front and rear doors, take utmost care not to apply paint or the flame of the
welding burner directly to the side airbag sensors and wire harness of the airbag system.
Page 5359
Air Bag Harness: Testing and Inspection Main Harness
INSPECTION
Check for the following, and replace damaged parts with new parts.
- Harness and/or connector is damaged.

Page 3457
Page 554
Page 3353
^ Raise the vehicle hood and lift the transmission dipstick about 1 inch
^ Raise the vehicle on the lift
Note:
It is extremely important that the area in which this repair takes place remains clean to prevent
contamination of internal transmission parts.
Heat Shield Removal (H6 models only)
H6 models only - Remove the heat shield from the left front catalytic converter.
Transmission Oil Pan Removal
1. Drain the transmission fluid by removing the drain plug. While the transmission is draining,
remove the oil pan bolts.
2. When the transmission fluid has finished draining and the pan bolts have been removed, reinstall
the drain plug with the new gasket. Torque to 18.4 +/- 1.4 ft-lb. (25 +/- 2 Nm)
3. Separate the oil pan from the transmission case by using a liquid gasket cutter or similar tool.
Caution:
Do not insert a screwdriver or chisel between the oil pan and the transmission case. This will
damage the oil pan and transmission case. To prevent damage to the internal wire harness, do not
insert the gasket cutter beyond the lip of the pan.
4. Separate the oil pan from the rear side of the transmission and drain the remaining ATF.
Valve Body Removal

Page 1914
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL
3. Detach floor mat of front passenger seat.
4. Remove protect cover.

Page 5599
Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection Side Airbag Sensor
INSPECTION
- Bracket connector for side airbag sensor is damaged.

Page 929
6. Instruct your co-worker to depress the brake pedal slowly two or three times and then hold it
depressed. 7. Loosen bleeder screw approximately 1/4 turn until a small amount of brake fluid
drains into container, and then quickly tighten screw. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 above until there are
no air bubbles in drained brake fluid and new fluid flows through vinyl tube.
NOTE: Add brake fluid as necessary while performing the air bleed operation, in order to prevent
the tank from running short of brake fluid.
9. After completing the bleeding operation, hold brake pedal depressed and tighten screw and
install bleeder cap.
Tightening torque (Bleeder screw): 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
10. Bleed air from each wheel cylinder using the same procedures as described in steps 6 through
7 above. 11. Depress brake pedal with a force of approximately 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) and hold it
there for approximately 20 seconds. At this time check pedal
to see if it shows any unusual movement. Visually inspect bleeder screws and brake pipe joints to
make sure that there is no fluid leakage.
12. Install wheels, and drive vehicle for a short distance between 2 to 3 km (1 to 2 miles) to make
sure that brakes are operating properly.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure
Fuel Pressure
Fuel Pressure 43.4 psi. At Idle

Page 52
INSTALLATION
made. -
and Inspection.
Page 4142

Page 5382
Air Bag System - Components, Harnesses, And Connectors

Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Heater Hose Inspection/Replacement
AFFECTED VEHICLES
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 3425
Page 1097
Wheels: Service and Repair Balancing
REPLACEMENT
1. Remove balance weights. 2. Using dynamic balancing, measure wheel balance.

3. Select a weight close to the value measured by dynamic balancing. 4. Install the selected weight
to the point designated by dynamic balancing. 5. Using dynamic balancing, measure wheel balance
again. Check that wheel balance is correctly adjusted.
INSPECTION
1. Proper wheel balance may be lost if the tire is repaired or if it wears. Check the tire for dynamic
balance, and repair as necessary. 2. To check for dynamic balance, use a dynamic balancer. Drive
in the balance weight on both the top and rear sides of the rim. 3. Some types of balancer can
cause damage to the wheel. Use an appropriate balancer when adjusting the wheel balance. 4.
Use genuine balance weights.
Page 5921
Page 2362
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 4818
Relay Box: Application and ID
Fuse Locations
AFFECTED VEHICLES
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 3218

Page 1534
Page 1189
5. Install A/C belt.

Page 5096
^ Sedan
8. Remove shock absorber.
INSTALLATION
1. Use a jack to support the shock absorber. 2. Tighten self-locking nut used to secure shock
absorber to vehicle body.
CAUTION: Use a new self-locking nut.
Tightening torque: 30 Nm (3.1 kgf-cm, 22 ft. lbs.)
3. Place jack (furnished with vehicle) upside down and position it between link rear and sub frame.
Adjust jack position so rear shock absorber is
aligned with rear arm at their corresponding holes. Install lower shock absorber bolts.
CAUTION: Put a cloth between jack and its mating area to protect link rear and sub frame from
scratches.
4. Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally and tighten shock absorber nuts and bolts
5. Install floor mat. (Wagon model) 6. Set trunk side trim. (Sedan model) 7. Install trunk mat.
(Sedan model)
DISASSEMBLY
For disassembly of shock absorber, refer to procedures outlined under front strut as a guide.
ASSEMBLY
Refer to Front Strut as a guide for assembly procedures.
INSPECTION
Page 2353
Front Door Lock Actuator
Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Actuator
1. Disconnect the door lock actuator harness connector.
2. Connect the battery to the door lock actuator terminals.
If NG, replace the door lock actuator.

Front Differential
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Front Differential
A: REPLACEMENT
1. Lift-up the vehicle.
2. Drain differential gear oil completely.
CAUTION: Directly after the engine has been running, the differential gear oil is hot. Be careful not
to burn yourself.
NOTE: Tighten differential gear oil drain plug after draining differential gear oil.
3. Pour gear oil into the gauge hole.
Recommended fluid: Use GL-5 or equivalent. Gear oil capacity: 1.2 l (1.3 US qt., 1.1 Imp qt.)
4. Check the level of the differential gear oil.
1. Ensure the vehicle is in safe condition.
NOTE: Do not check the oil level nor add oil to the case with the front end of the vehicle jacked-up;
this will result in an incorrect reading of the oil level.
2. Check whether the oil level is between the upper (F) and lower (L) marks. If it is below the lower
limit mark, add oil until the level reaches the
upper mark.
Page 805
3) Disconnect washer motor connectors.
4) Move washer tank to forward. 5) Disconnect spark plug cords from spark plugs (#2 and #4
cylinders). 6) Disconnect PCV hose from rocker cover (LH). 7) Remove bolts, then remove rocker
cover (LH).
10. Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of compression stroke by rotating crankshaft pulley
clockwise using ST ST499977100 CRANKSHAFT
PULLEY WRENCH
NOTE: When arrow mark on camshaft sprocket (LH) comes exactly to the top, #1 cylinder piston is
brought to the top dead center of compression check.
11. Measure #1 cylinder valve clearance by using thickness gauge.
CAUTION: ^
Insert the thickness gauge in as horizontal a direction as possible with respect to the valve stem
end face.
^ Measure exhaust valve clearances while lifting-up the vehicle.
Valve clearance: Intake: 0.20 ±0.02 mm (0.0079 ±0.0008 inch) Exhaust: 0.25 ±0.02 mm (0.0098
±0.0008 inch)
Page 2636
Accelerator Pedal: Service Precautions
C: CAUTION
^ Wear work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles, and protective shoes during operation.
^ Remove contamination, including dirt and corrosion, before removal, installation or disassembly.
^ Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
^ Be careful not to burn your hands, because each part in the vehicle is hot after running.
^ Before disconnecting electrical connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect negative

Page 4243
C) Do not reuse the seal from the ECU.
Installation of new ECU
1) Confirm that the sealing surface of the hydraulic unit is clean.
NOTE:
A) Do not machine the sealing surface.
B) If the sealing surface is damaged, replace not only ECU but also the hydraulic unit and the ECU
assembly with new one.
C) Clean dust or foreign material from the sealing surface with a clean cloth and alcohol.
D) Do not blow compressed air onto the ECU surface or the hydraulic unit.
2) In order to prevent damage on the valves protruded from the hydraulic unit, do not tilt the ECU
against the hydraulic unit when assembling.
3) Install the new ECU.
4) Temporarily tighten 6 screws by hand.
NOTE:
Do not reuse the screws that were previously removed from the ECU.
5) Tighten the 6 screws in the exact order shown in Figure 4.4; use the specified tightening torque
of 2.65 +/- 0.30Nm (1.95 +/- 0.22ft-lbs) (26.4 inch-lbs).
6) Check if the screws are security tightened by confirming no dearance between ECU and
hydraulic unit visually.
7) Connect the motor power source connector to ECU.
NOTE:
Confirm that you hear a clicking sound when locking the connector lock.
8) Install the hydraulic unit and the ECU assembly onto the bracket and tighten the two nuts with a
tightening torque of 18 +/- 5Nm (13.28 +/- 3.69ft-lbs) (44.28 inch-lbs).
NOTE:
Attach the damper under the hydraulic unit with the hydraulic unit and the bracket securely.
9) Reconnect the ECU harness connector with the ECU.
Restoration of surrounding parts
1) Install the air cleaner case.
2) Install the air intake duct.
3) Connect the negative terminal to the battery.
Testing after replacement
1) Confirm that the ABS warning lamp light comes on on normally and then turns off when the
ignition switch is turned on.
2) Connect the select monitor and confirm in the first display that the model year, driving system
and transmission system are correct.
3) Confirm that the ABS warning lamp does not light when starting the engine and driving up to
more than 12.5 m/h (20 km/h).
NOTE:
If something abnormal was found in above three testing procedures, follow the repair instructions
described in the diagnostic procedures of the vehicle's Service Manual.

Cooling System - Warranty Repair Coolant Usage
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Warranty Repair Coolant Usage
NUMBER: 09-42-05
DATE: 04/15/05
APPLICABILITY: All Models
SUBJECT: Cautions Concerning Engine Coolant
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to inform of cautions concerning engine coolant.
When adding, replacing or servicing the cooling system always use Genuine Subaru Long Life
Coolant. Genuine Subaru Long Life Coolant is a phosphate (non-amine) type and is specially
formated for all Subaru vehicles equipped with aluminum engines and radiators. Coolant of other
types may not provide the proper protection to aid against corrosion of aluminum parts. If an
equivalent must be used, make sure it is a phosphate (non-amine) type. As a reminder, use of
Genuine Subaru Long Life Coolant is mandatory on all repairs paid for by Subaru of America, Inc,
that require the replenishment of coolant. This holds true for any claim type.
Do not use flushing machines.
If a flushing machine has been used to service other brand vehicles with copper radiators, a
chemical reaction between copper ions and Subaru coolant may occur. This could also cause
clogging of the radiator.
If regular flushing is required, only use fresh tap water. Do not use hard water. Hard water will
create calcium build-up which will clog the radiator.
Whenever the coolant is changed, you must add Genuine Subaru Cooling System Conditioner.
Genuine Subaru Cooling System Conditioner has been tested and approved for aluminum engines
and radiators.
Do not use after-market coolant reinforcement agents, sealers and/or flushing agents as those
chemicals could corrode aluminum parts.
Disclaimer
Page 68
System Relay: Testing and Inspection
Relays
(3) - (4): Continuity exists. (1) - (2): No continuity
While applying battery voltage to the cable between (3) and (4), check continuity between (1) and
(2).
If no continuity exists, replace the relay with a new one.

Page 2182
6. Remove spark plug with the spark plugs socket.
INSTALLATION
RH SIDE
Tightening torque (Spark plug): 20.6 N.m (2.10 kgf-m, 15.2 ft-lb)
CAUTION: The above torque should be only applied to new spark plugs without oil on their
threads. In case their threads are lubricated, the torque should be reduced by approximately 1/3 of
the specified torque in order to avoid over-stressing.
LH SIDE
Page 6408
Front Turn Signal Light Bulb
Turn Signal Lamp: Service and Repair Front Turn Signal Light Bulb
Front Turn Signal Light Bulb
REMOVAL
1. Remove headlight assembly.
2. Turn the socket and remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION

Page 3119
Page 4111
5. Remove solenoids, duty solenoids and ATF temperature sensor.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install solenoids and ATF temperature sensor.
Tightening torque: T: 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)

Page 3431
Part 3
Page 1954
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Sub Level Sensor
FUEL SUB LEVEL SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Place "NO FIRE" signs near the working area.
- Be careful not to spill fuel on the floor.
- During work procedures, if fuel tank is more than 3/4 full, be careful because fuel may spill.
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Lift-up the vehicle.
3. Remove front side fuel tank cover.
4. Drain fuel from fuel tank. Set a container under the vehicle and remove drain plug from fuel tank.
Page 1314
7. Remove throttle body.
8. Disconnect pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake manifold.
9. Remove fuel pipe protector LH.

Page 1808
Thermostat: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Thermostat Starts To Open 76 - 80 deg C
Fully Opened 91 deg C


Page 3989

Page 5543
Continued Inspection and Retractor Cover Bolt Tightening - Use the following claim submission
information if the right front seatbelt was found to contain an affected lot number and the retractor
cover bolt torque was checked and tightened as necessary.
For right front seatbelt inspection, cover bolt torque check and tightening - enter labor operation
191-714 for 0.2 labor hours. The claim will automatically be credited an additional 0.2 labor hours
for lot number inspection. A total of 0.4 labor hours will be credited.
Inspection and Right Front Seatbelt Replacement - Use the following claim submission information
if the right front seatbelt was found to contain the affected lot number and the retractor cover bolt(s)
were found to be missing and seatbelt replacement was necessary.
For right front seatbelt inspection and replacement enter labor operation 191-724 for 0.5 labor
hours. The claim will automatically be credited an additional 0.2 labor hours for lot number
inspection. A total of 0.7 labor hours will be credited.
Enter applicable part number(s). Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus applicable handling
allowance. If the part was ordered for overnight delivery, add the additional freight charge as sublet
with comments indicating "sublet for overnight freight".
If applicable, enter car rental amount.
Disclaimer
Page 4158

Page 139
Page 2823
Disclaimer
Page 3543
Page 2953
INSTALLATION
RH SIDE
LH SIDE
Page 4848
Page 1819
Water Pump: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from the battery. 2. Lift-up the vehicle.
3. Remove under cover.
4. Drain engine coolant completely.
5. Disconnect connectors from radiator main fan (A) and sub fan (B) motors.
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3464
8. Connect inhibitor switch connector. 9. Install air intake chamber and duct.
Page 6268
faulty harness with a new genuine part.
- Install the wire harness securely with the specified clips to avoid interference or tongled up with
other parts.
- Do not allow water or oil to come in contact with the connector terminals. Do not touch the
connector terminals.
- The airbag module (driver, passenger, and side, pretensioner) must not be disassembled.
- The airbag module cannot be used again once inflated.
- After removal, keep the airbag module with the pad facing upward on a dry, clean, and flat
surface away from heat and light sources, and moisture and dust.
Page 1208
cover (LH).
PULLEY WRENCH
CAUTION: ^
end face.
±0.0008 inch)
Page 395
NOTE:
use the connector's alphanumeric name [referred to in the wiring diagram(s)] to identify the
appropriate Harness Connector Location diagram. For example, the prefix letter "B" in the
connector name "B-38" indicates the location is displayed in the Bulkhead Wiring Harness
Connector Location diagram.
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
............................. Harness Connector Diagram
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... Instrument Panel P ..........................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Front Sub Sensor Harness
Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Sub Sensor Harness
INSPECTION
Check for the following, and replace damaged parts.

Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications CAPACITY
CAPACITY
Refil Capacity Liters 1.2 Refil Capacity Pints 2.6

Page 1315
10. Remove fuel pipe protector RH.
11. Disconnect connectors from fuel injectors.
12. Disconnect connector from purge control solenoid valve.
13. Remove harness bands (*) which hold engine harness onto intake manifold.
Page 3397
DISCLAIMER
Page 2799
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
data.
AT VEHICLES
Page 5947
Removal and Installation
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL
CAUTION: All spark plugs installed on an engine, must be of the same heat range.
Spark plug: CHAMPION: RC10YC4 (Alternate) CHAMPION: RC8YC4 NGK: BKR6E-11

NIPPONDENSO: K20PR-U11
RH SIDE
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove air intake duct and resonator chamber.
1. Remove bolt which installs air intake duct on the front side of body.
2. Remove bolt which installs air intake duct on body.

Page 3998

Page 4071
3. Using ST, tighten bolts of inhibitor switch.
ST 499267300 STOPPER PIN
4. Install select cable to range select lever.
5. Install plate assembly to transmission.
Tightening torque: T: 24.5 Nm (2.50 kgf-m, 18.1 ft. lbs.)
6. Install snap pin to range select lever. 7. Install center exhaust pipe.
Specifications
Firing Order

Page 3544
DISCLAIMER
Page 5158
TOOL REQUIRED
- Or Equivalent
DISASSEMBLE
CAUTION:
Page 6077
Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of Reservoir
Coolant Reservoir: Customer Interest Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
APPLICABILITY: 1999MY and later Impreza & Forester 2000MY and later Legacy & Outback
2006MY and later Tribeca
SUBJECT: Coolant Overflow
Introduction
If you encounter a vehicle which experiences coolant coming out of the coolant reservoir tank, it
may be caused by the radiator cap pressure valve being stuck open by debris sucked up through
the reservoir tank hose. As the cooling system cools down, it sucks coolant back into the radiator. If
there is debris that settles to the bottom of the reservoir tank, the hose is low enough to also suck
them back into radiator. This causes the radiator cap not to seal, allowing excessive amount of
coolant to escape overflowing the reservoir tank. If this condition continues over time, there will not
be enough coolant in the system to maintain proper engine temperature.
In order to correct the condition you need to clean (and test) or replace the radiator cap, clean out
the reservoir tank, and shorten the hose slightly, following the repair procedure.
Production Line Change
The shorter coolant reservoir tank hose was used in production as shown above.
Repair Procedure/Information
1. Radiator Cap Cleaning
Many caps can be successfully cleaned. The important part is the thorough cleaning of the
negative pressure valve. If this is not done completely, remaining debris may result in a repeat
issue. If there is an excessive amount of debris or the sealing rubber on the cap appears to be
pitted or damaged, replace the cap.
Note:
If replacing the cap, skip to Step 2.
Using clean water and a brush, thoroughly clean the cap seal surface.
Note:
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
FRONT FOG LIGHT RELAY Check continuity between terminals (indicated in table) when terminal
No.4 is connected to battery and terminal No.3 is grounded.
Page 3031

Page 6525
Page 3416


Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 1877

Page 6481
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect connector battery ground terminal.
2. Disconnect connector back-up light switch and neutral position switch. 3. Lift-up the vehicle.
4. Remove back-up light switch and neutral position switch with harness.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install back-up light switch and neutral position switch with harness.
2. Disconnect connector of back-up light switch and neutral position switch. 3. Connect battery
ground terminal.
Specifications
Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications
Master Cylinder Type Tandem
Diameter 14 inch Type 25.4 mm
15 and 16 inch Type 26.99 mm

Page 1495

Page 3545
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
When driving condition or starter motor operation is erroneous, first check the shift linkage for
improper operation. If the shift linkage is functioning properly, check the inhibitor switch.
1. Disconnect inhibitor switch connector.
2. Check continuity in inhibitor switch circuits with select lever moved to each position.
CAUTION: Also check that continuity in ignition circuit does not exist when select lever is in R, D, 3,
2 and 1 ranges.
NOTE: If inhibitor switch is inoperative, check for poor contact of connector on transmission side.
3. Check if there is continuity at equal points when the select lever is turned 1.5° in both directions
from the N range.
If there is continuity in one direction and the continuity in the other or if there is continuity at
unequal points, adjust the inhibitor switch.
Page 6745

Page 3210

Page 3314
Fluid Pump: Specifications
Oil Pump, Transmission Type Pracoid Constant-Displacement Pump
Driving Method Driven By Engine
Number of Teeth Inner Rotor 9
Outer Rotor 10
Page 720
Fuel Filter: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Check the inside of fuel filter for dirt and water sediment. 2. If it is clogged, or if replacement
interval has been reached, replace it. 3. If water is found in it, shake and expel the water from inlet
port.
Page 1912
Part 2
Power Distribution - Fuse 4 Keeps Blowing
Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Power Distribution - Fuse 4 Keeps Blowing
SOURCE: Subaru Tech Tips
TITLE: Fuse 4 Blow Out
APPLIES TO: 00-02 Legacy
SERVICE TIP:
Page 5223
Control Assembly: Service and Repair
Control Unit
REMOVAL
1. AUTO A/C
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Remove front cover (A).
3. Loosen 2 screws (B) to remove center panel (C).
4. Loosen screws to pull control unit slightly out of center console. 5. Disconnect connector to
remove control unit.
2. MANUAL A/C
3. Loosen 2 screws (B) to remove center panel (C). 4. Set temperature control switch to "FULL
HOT" and disconnect temperature control cable from heater unit.
Page 6150
Disclaimer
Page 4427
Brake Drum: Specifications Brake Service Specifications
Brake Service Specifications
ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Front Brake Pad thickness (including back metal) 17 mm (0.67 in) 7.5 mm (0.295 in)
Disc thickness 24 mm (0.94 in) 22 mm (0.87 in)
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)
Rear Brake (Disc type) Pad thickness (including back metal) 14 mm (0.55 in) 6.5 mm (0.256)
Disc thickness 10 mm (0.39 in) 8.5 mm (0.335 in)
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)
Rear Brake (Drum type) Inside diameter 228.6 mm (9.0 in) 230.6 mm (9.08 in)
Lining thickness 4.1 mm (0.161 in) 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Rear Brake (Disc type parking) Inside diameter 170 mm (6.69 in) 171 mm (6.73 in)

Page 1527
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
B: ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: Adjustment of valve clearance should be performed while engine is cold.
PULLEY WRENCH
brought to the top dead center of compression stroke.
2. Adjust the #1 cylinder valve clearance.
1) Loosen the valve rocker nut and screw. 2) Place suitable thickness gauge. 3) While noting valve
clearance, tighten valve rocker adjust screw. 4) When specified valve clearance is obtained, tighten
valve rocker nut.
CAUTION: ^
end face.
^ Adjust exhaust valve clearances while lifting-up the vehicle. Valve clearance: Intake: 0.20 ±0.02
mm (0.0079 ±0.0008 inch) Exhaust: 0.25 ±0.02 mm (0.0098 ±0.0008 inch)
3. Ensure that valve clearances are within specifications. 4. Turn crankshaft two complete rotations
until #1 cylinder piston is again set to top dead center on compression stroke. 5. Ensure that valve
clearances are within specifications. If necessary, readjust valve clearances.
6. Similar to adjustment procedures used for #1 cylinder, adjust #2, #3 and #4 cylinder valve
clearances.
Page 6627
Wire Color Code Identification
The following color codes are used to indicate the colors of the wires used.
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
The wire color code, which consists of two letters (or three letters including Br or Lg), indicates the
second letter.
Page 4036

ABS
M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeaking Noise
Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeaking
Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
If you encounter a manual transmission equipped vehicle with a clutch pedal squeak concern, and
lubricating the pedal mechanism didn't fix the noise, check the clutch switch. We have had a few
reports where this has been the source of the problem. The fix is to replace the clutch pedal switch.
Mechanical Specifications
Thermostat: Mechanical Specifications
Thermostat Type Wax Pellet Type
Valve Lift 9.0 mm
Or More
Valve Bore 35 mm
Page 3511
8. Tilt lever forward and pull down to separate it from frame. 9. Remove spring.
CAUTION: Wear goggles. Do not allow spring to fly out during removal.
10. Remove bolt and then disconnect lever upper and lever lower.
D: ASSEMBLY
1. Clean all parts before assembly. 2. Apply grease [MULITEMP AC-D or equivalent] to each parts.
3. Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. 4. After completion of fitting, transfer selector
lever to range "P" - "1", then check whether the indicator and selector lever agree, whether
operating
force is.
Page 2092
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 5919
Page 164
Part 3
Page 545
Page 1596
Page 4698
Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Parasitic Battery Draw Information
NUMBER: 07-62-07
DATE: 01/17/08
SUBJECT: Dark Current or Excessive Battery Draw
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide the diagnostic procedure when checking for excessive
battery draw
REPAIR PROCEDURE/INFORMATION
PRIOR to beginning the test:
^ Be certain the vehicle battery is fully charged
^ The battery posts and cable ends are free of corrosion, dirt, sealer, and in good condition.
^ Be sure to record the customer's radio station, and satellite radio station pre-sets as they will be
lost during the test, along with any seat memory settings.
^ You may NOT use an aftermarket 9V memory device in the power outlet to retain any ECU
memory.
^ Any aftermarket accessories will also need to be disconnected. These items will affect the test
results and may cause false readings or misdiagnosis.
Items required for test:
^ Pen and paper for recording radio and satellite radio pre-sets
^ Digital Volt Ohm Meter
^ 10 MM wrench
^ 16 gauge by-pass wire, about 12 inches long, w/ proper securing attachments at each end
Test Procedure:
1) Remove battery negative cable
2) Connect one end of by-pass wire to the battery's negative post then connect the other end to
negative battery cable end Simply wrapping then twisting the stripped back ends of the by-pass
wire around the post and terminal will be sufficient Reinstall the negative cable on the battery post
3) Wait 5 minutes before proceeding to the next step. This will allow the system voltage to stabilize.
During this time, be sure the glove box door, trunk, tailgate, and all vehicle doors are closed and
their corresponding lamps are off. Also, be sure that the head lamps, fog lamps, and all switches
are off. The ignition key needs to be removed, and the doors must be locked (make sure not to lock
the keys in the car). Remove the negative battery cable, making sure the by-pass wire has not lost
contact. If contact is lost, you will need to start at step # 2 again.
4) Make sure your voltmeter is set to milliamp (mA) setting. Connect the test leads of your
voltmeter to the negative battery cable and the negative battery post. Remove the by-pass wire you
installed in steps # 2 and # 3 and measure the current draw.
After the 5 minute stabilization period, the measured draw should be a maximum of 150 milli-amps.
This maximum draw value is read with the key out of the ignition switch.
If your results are greater than the above specification, further diagnosis will be necessary to
determine the source of the excessive current draw. This should be done using normal electrical
circuit testing until the source of this excessive draw is determined and repaired.
After confirming the repair, the customer's radio presets and clock time should be reset properly.
Page 137
Page 1240
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove generator from bracket.
1) Disconnect connector and terminal from generator.
2) Remove V-belt cover.
3) Loosen lock bolt and slider bolt, and remove front side V-belt.
Page 3707
Clutch Release Bearing: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. RELEASE BEARING
CAUTION: Since this bearing is grease sealed and is of a non-lubrication type, do not wash with
gasoline or any solvent when servicing the clutch.
1. Check the bearing for smooth movement by applying force in the radial direction.
Radial direction stroke: 1.4 mm (0.055 inch)
2. Check the bearing for smooth rotation by applying pressure in the thrust direction. 3. Check wear
and damage of bearing case surface contacting with lever.
2. RELEASE LEVER
1. Check lever pivot portion and the point of contact with release bearing case for wear.
Page 4948
8. Remove socket from oil pump. 9. Remove bolt from the rear side of oil pump.
10. Disassemble oil pump and bracket by inserting a screwdriver as shown in the figure.
INSTALLATION
1. Install oil pump to bracket.
1. Place oil pump bracket in a vise. Tighten bushing using a 12.7 mm (1/2 in.) type 14- and 21-mm
box wrench until it is in contact with oil pump
mounting surface.
CAUTION: Do not place oil pump bracket directly in the vise; use soft pads and hold oil pump
lightly to protect the pump.
2. Tighten bolt which installs oil pump to bracket.
Tightening torque: 37.3 Nm (3.8 kgf-cm, 27.5 ft. lbs.)

Service and Repair
Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair
TRAILER HITCH
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Because trailer hitch is heavy, two people are required to remove it.
1. Lift-up the vehicle. 2. Remove rubber cushion from body.
NOTE: If rubber cushion is hard to remove, apply SUBARU CRC.
SUBARU CRC (Part No. 004301003 )
3. Remove strap (a). 4. Remove bolts. Remove trailer hitch while lowering muffler.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. For installation method of bolt, see the figure.
Page 6519
H/L (4L)-01
4-Light Model
Connector Locations: For connector locations refer to Vehicle / Locations / Harness: See:
Page 3534
Page 3245
Page 1264
7. Remove radiator upper brackets.
8. Support engine with a lifting device and wire ropes.
CAUTION: At this time, raise up wire ropes.
11. Drain engine oil.
Set container under the vehicle, and remove drain plug from oil pan.
Page 5062
Disclaimer
Repair Procedures
This repair procedure involves cleaning and applying anti-rust material to the inside and outside of
the rear sub-frame assembly.
Exposure Controls for use of Nox-Rust X-210 and X-121 Black

Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1412
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Installation
CAUTION: INTERFERENCE ENGINE
When installing the timing belt, be sure to align all alignment marks on the belt with corresponding
marks on the sprockets. If incorrectly installed, interference between pistons and valves may occur.
INSTALLATION
Automatic Belt Tension Adjuster Assembly and Belt Idler
1. Preparation for installation of automatic belt tension adjuster assembly;
CAUTION: ^
Always use a vertical type pressing tool to move the adjuster rod down.
^ Do not use a lateral type vise.
^ Push adjuster rod vertically.
^ Be sure to slowly move the adjuster rod down applying a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.).
^ Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually taking more than three minutes.
^ Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807 N (1,000 kg, 2,205 lbs.).
^ Press the adjuster rod as far as the end surface of the cylinder. Do not press the adjuster rod into
the cylinder. Doing so may damage the cylinder.
^ Do not release press pressure until stopper pin is completely inserted.
1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster assembly to the vertical pressing tool.
2) Slowly move the adjuster rod down with a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) until the adjuster
rod is aligned with the stopper pin hole in the
cylinder.
3) With a 2 mm (0.08 inch) diameter stopper pin or a 2 mm (0.08 inch) (nominal) diameter hex bar
wrench inserted into the stopper pin hole in
the cylinder, secure the adjuster rod.

Page 5697
Page 1096
Wheels: Service and Repair Steel Wheel
REMOVAL
1. Apply parking brake, and position select lever to "P" or "LOW". 2. Set shop jacks or a lift to the
specified point, and support the vehicle with its wheels slightly contacting the floor. 3. Loosen wheel
nuts. 4. Raise the vehicle until its wheels take off the ground using a jack or a lift. 5. Remove wheel
nuts and wheels.
NOTE: ^
While removing wheels, prevent hub bolts from damage.
^ Place wheels with their outer sides facing upward to prevent wheels from damage.
INSTALLATION
1. Attach the wheel to the hub by aligning the wheel bolt hole with the hub bolt. 2. Temporarily
attach the wheel nuts to the hub bolts. (In the case of aluminum wheel, use SUBARU genuine
wheel nut for aluminum wheel.) 3. Manually tighten the nuts making sure the wheel hub hole is
aligned correctly to the guide portion of hub. 4. Tighten the wheel nuts in a diagonal selection to the
specified torque. Use a wheel nut wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 88 Nm (9 kgf-cm, 65 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: ^
Tighten the wheel nuts in two or three steps by gradually increasing the torque and working
diagonally, until the specified torque is reached. For drum brake models, excess tightening of
wheel nuts may cause wheels to "judder".
^ Do not depress the wrench with a foot; Always use both hands when tightening.
^ Make sure the bolt, nut and the nut seating surface of the wheel are free from oils.
5. If a wheel is removed for replacement or for repair of a puncture, retighten the wheel nuts to the
specified torque after running 1,000 km (600
miles).
INSPECTION
1. Deformation or damage on the rim can cause air leakage. Check the rim flange for deformation,
crack, or damage, and repair or replace as
necessary.
2. Jack-up vehicle until wheels clear the floor.
3. Slowly rotate wheel to check rim "run-out" using a dial gauge. 4. If rim run-out exceeds
specifications, remove tire from rim and check run-out while attaching dial gauge to positions
shown in figure. 5. If measured run-out still exceeds specifications, replace the wheel.
Alarm Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Security Horn Relay
Check continuity between the security horn relay terminals (indicated in the table) when connecting
the battery to terminal No.1 and No.4. If NG, replace the security horn relay.
Front Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Front Wiper Arm
Adjustment
Operate wiper once. Align wiper blade to ceramic print point mark (A) of front window pane.
Page 757

Page 3461
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
C: REMOVAL
1. Move select lever to neutral position. 2. Remove air intake chamber and duct.
3. Disconnect inhibitor switch connector. 4. Remove center exhaust pipe.
5. Remove snap pin from range select lever.
6. Remove plate assembly from transmission case.

Page 6159
Clutch Switch
REMOVAL
Disconnect the connector from the switch, and then remove the switch.
INSTALLATION

Page 2557
Page 755
Page 6782
REMOVAL
1. MAIN SWITCH
2. SUB-SWITCH
connector.
INSTALLATION
1. MAIN SWITCH
2. SUB-SWITCH

Fuel Level Sensor
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING:
NOTE: Fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly.
1. Remove fuel pump assembly.
2. Disconnect connector from fuel pump bracket.
3. Pushing the pawls with a screwdriver, remove fuel meter unit by pulling it downwards.
NOTE: Replace fuel filter pawls with new ones as they might brake when removed.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Ground cable must be connected.
- Spark may occur and ignite if fuel is nearby.

Page 6298
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Ignition System - DTC's P0301/P0302/P0303/P0304
Ignition Coil Wire: Customer Interest Ignition System - DTC's P0301/P0302/P0303/P0304
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
APPLICABILITY: 2000MY and Later Legacy/Outback 25L SOHC Vehicles
1999MY and Later Impreza and Forester 25L SOHC Vehicles
SUBJECT: Ignition Coil and High Tension Cables
INTRODUCTION
When diagnosing for misfire code(s) P0301 P0302 P0303 and/or P0304 there is the possibility that
the ignition coil and/or high tension cables could be the cause In addition to the information
published in the service manual, use the following procedure to check the ignition coil and high
tension cables.
The new style high tension cables have been used in production with the VINs shown.
Step 1) Ignition Coil Inspection
Check the tower portion of the ignition coil for carbon tracks (leakage) If leakage is more than 5mm
long, the ignition coil and high tension cables should be replaced (see Figure 1).
Step 2) High Tension Cable Inspection

Page 248
Page 1323
20. Connect connectors to throttle position sensor (A), idle air control solenoid valve (B) and intake
manifold pressure sensor (C). 21. Connect air by-pass hose (D) to idle air control solenoid valve.
22. Connect air by-pass hose (E) to intake manifold.
23. Install ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
24. Connect connector to ignition coil and ignitor assembly. 25. Install engine ground terminal to
intake manifold.
AT Vehicles
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect engine ground terminal from intake manifold.

Locations
Security System
Page 138
Specifications
Stabilizer Bar: Specifications
STABILIZER
Page 2638
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Remove lock nut from accelerator cable bracket. 3.
Separate accelerator cable from bracket. 4. Remove accelerator cable end from throttle cam.
5. Disconnect accelerator cable from throttle body.
CAUTION: Be careful not to kink accelerator cable.
6. Remove clip inside engine compartment. 7. Remove instrument panel lower cover from
instrument panel, and connector. 8. Remove brake and clutch pedal bracket. (MT model)
9. Remove accelerator pedal connecting bolt from accelerator pedal bracket.

Control Module: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh AWD Engagement/Code 45 Set
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 1892
Page 5922
Page 3059

Page 1565
Note:
Note:

Page 656
Page 4834
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 547
Page 3094
Prior to performing repairs, confirm coverage for potentially affected vehicles by using the Vehicle
Coverage Inquiry in the Dealer Communication System (DCS).
Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Torque/Sequence Refer to Engine/ Service and Repair/ Camshaft for installation sequence
procedures.
Page 6520
NOTE:
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 1297
Intake Manifold: Locations

MT Vehicles
Page 90

NOTE:
Page 2207

Page 961
For the replacement procedures of the ATF filter, refer to "AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND
DIFFERENTIAL".
Page 5009
8. Remove bolts securing link rear to sub frame, detach link rear.
CAUTION: To loosen adjusting bolt, always loosen nut while holding the head of adjusting bolt.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally, install link rear and tighten nuts to specified
torque.
DISASSEMBLY
Using ST-A, B, press bushing out of place. ST-A, B 20099AE000 INSTALLER & REMOVER
ASSEMBLY
Using ST, press bushing into place.

Page 3380
Page 3227
Page 1035
Page 4890
Page 259
Page 4304
CAUTION: Be careful not to strike ABS sensor's pole piece and tone wheel's teeth against adjacent
metal parts during installation.
Engine Controls - A/F, O2 Sensor Diagnostic Information
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - A/F, O2 Sensor Diagnostic
Information
Bulletin Number: 11-92-08
Date: 01/05/09
APPLICABILITY: 1999MY and later Forester 1999MY and later Impreza 2000MY and later Legacy
SUBJECT: Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor and Oxygen Sensor
INTRODUCTION
This bulletin is for information purposes only.
REPAIR/SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing diagnostics or reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) for Air Fuel Ratio (A/F)
sensors and Oxygen (O2) sensors use the following information to identify, locate and repair the
appropriate sensor and sensor circuits:
(1) Rarely will multiple sensors fail at the same time.
(2) On vehicles with only one O2 sensor, the designation for that O2 sensor will be bank 1.
(3) On vehicles with only one A/F sensor, the designation for that A/F sensor will be bank 1.
(4) Any reference to sensor 1 is an A/F sensor.
(5) Any reference to sensor 2 is an O2 sensor.
(6) Early PZEV vehicles used an additional O2 sensor behind the rear catalyst and is designated
sensor 3.
(7) On vehicles with A/F and O2 sensors on the right (Passenger Side) and left (Driver side) of the
vehicle, Bank 1 is the right side (Passenger Side) and Bank 2 is the left side (Driver side).
Example: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (Bank 1 Sensor 1). This DTC is
referring to the A/F sensor and since it is on a 2007 Forester there is only one A/F sensor and one
O2 sensor.
Example (as illustrated): DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (Bank 1 Sensor
2). This DTC is referring to the O2 sensor on the right side exhaust (or the O2 sensor of a vehicle
with only one O2 sensor).
Page 359
Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Inhibitor Switch (A/T)
Inhibitor Switch (A/T)
Check continuity between inhibitor switch terminals. If NG, replace inhibitor switch.
Locations
Page 4224
10. Place transmission jack under transmission.
CAUTION: ^
Always support transmission case with a transmission jack.
^ On AT vehicle, make sure that the support plates of transmission jack don't touch the oil pan.
11. Remove the transmission rear crossmember bolts. 12. Lower the AT jack.
NOTE: Do not separate the AT jack and transmission.
13. Remove the oil cooler outlet pipe.
CAUTION: When removing outlet pipe, be careful not to lose balls and springs used with retaining
screws.
14. Remove front and rear vehicle speed sensor, and torque converter turbine speed sensor with
harness assembly.
^ Front vehicle speed sensor and torque converter turbine speed sensor
Page 5585
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Disposal of Pretensioner
Deploying While Installed In Vehicle
1. Fold backrest all the way forward, and then move front seat all the way forward. 2. Turn ignition
switch OFF, disconnect the ground cable from the battery, and wait for more than 20 seconds
before starting work. 3. Remove center pillar lower trim.
4. Disconnect yellow connector from pretensioner. 5. Short terminal to alligator clip furnished as
deployment tool.
Deployment tool: (Part No. 98299PA030)
CAUTION: The deployment tool should be kept shorted until lust before deployment of the
pretensioner.
6. Connect deployment tool connector (1D) and pretensioner yellow connector.
7. Extend the deployment tool to the limit, and make sure that vehicle is empty. Close all windows,
sunroof, and rear gate completely. 8. Move the battery at least 5 m (16 ft) from the vehicle, and
secure the nearby area. Connect the deployment tool alligator clip to the battery minus
terminal.
Locations
Expansion Valve: Locations
Intake Unit With Evaporator
Page 4251
4. Operate the brake tester. 5. Perform ABS sequence control. 6. Hydraulic unit begins to work;
and check the following working sequence.
1. The FL wheel performs decompression, holding, and compression in sequence, and

subsequently the FR wheel repeats the cycle. 2. The RR wheel performs decompression, holding,
and compression in sequence, and subsequently the RL wheel repeats the cycle.
7. Read values indicated on the brake tester and check if the fluctuation of values, when
decompressed and compressed, meet the standard values. 8. After checking, also check if any
irregular brake pedal tightness is felt.
Page 3137
6. Run the vehicle until the ATF temperature rises from 60 to 80°C (140 to 176°F) and check the
ATF level of the "HOT" side on level gauge.
Specifications
Valve: Specifications
Valve Head Edge Thickness Intake 1.0 mm
Exhaust 1.2 mm
Limit 0.6 mm
Stem Diameter Intake 5.950 - 5.965 mm
Exhaust 5.945 - 5.960 mm
Stem Oil Clearance Intake 0.035 - 0.062 mm
Exhaust 0.040 - 0.067 mm

Limit 0.15 mm
Overall Length Intake 120.6 mm
Exhaust 121.7 mm
Page 4896
1. Place vehicle on a turning radius gauge. 2. While depressing brake pedal, turn steering wheel
fully to the left and right. With steering wheel held at each fully turned position, measure both
the inner and outer wheel steering angle.
Steering angle:
Adjustment Turn tie-rod to adjust steering angle of both inner and outer wheels.
CAUTION: ^
Check toe-in.
^ Correct boot if it is twisted.

Page 1029
If you encounter a situation on a 2000MY-2002MY Legacy where the heated seats, lighted visor
mirrors, or power mirrors are inoperative, check to see if fuse 4 is blown. H-6 vehicles equipped
with Automatic Climate Control will also experience a failure of this system should fuse 4 blow.
Investigation of this has shown that the power mirror wiring harness may be the cause. The wiring
harness for the power mirrors may have been routed incorrectly within the mirror housing. This
routing may cause the harness to rub, and eventually pinch against the door gusset mounting
screw. Once the harness is pinched the insulation is cut and eventually blows the fuse.
Currently only the RH mirror is causing the problem but, it can be assumed that the LH mirror may
cause the same concern. Replacing the fuse may or may not lead to a second immediate failure of
the fuse. In some cases, the wire may move away from the gusset screw and the condition would
then become an intermittent concern.
A secondary area to check is where the harness for the lighted visors travels through the roof
panel. The harness has no protection in this area and could become pinched.
Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector from front oxygen (A/F) sensor. 3. Lift-up the vehicle. 4. Apply SUBARU
CRC or its equivalent to threaded portion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and leave it for one minute
or more.
5. Remove front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
CAUTION: When removing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, do not force front oxygen (A/F) sensor
especially when exhaust pipe is cold, otherwise it will damage exhaust pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, apply anti-seize compound only to threaded portion
of front oxygen (A/F) sensor to make the next
removal easier.

Page 1960
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Set the vehicle on the lift.
2. Open fuel flap lid, and remove fuel filler cap.
5. Disconnect connector from fuel tank pressure sensor.
6. Disconnect pressure hose from fuel tank pressure sensor.

Page 2872
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
IGNITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect spark plug cords from ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
3. Disconnect connector from ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
4. Remove ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
INSTALLATION
Page 782
Page 2133
Disclaimer
Page 1015
While the engine is idling, depress the brake pedal with a 490 N (50 kg, 110 lbs.) load and measure
the distance between the brake pedal and steering wheel. With the brake pedal released, measure
the distance between the pedal and steering wheel again. The difference between the two
measurements must be more than specified.
7. If the distance is more than specifications, there is a possibility that air is in the brake line. Bleed
brake line until pedal stroke meets the
specification.
8. Operate hydraulic control unit in the sequence control mode. 9. Recheck the brake stroke.
10. If the distance is more than specifications, there is a possibility air is in the inside of the
hydraulic unit. Repeat above steps 2 to 9 above until pedal
stroke meets the specification.
11. Add brake fluid to the required level (MAX. level) of reservoir tank. 12. As a final step, test run
the vehicle at low speed and apply brakes relatively hard 2 to 3 times to ensure that brakes provide
normal braking action
on all four wheels without dragging and uneven braking.

Page 2326
The list shown above is of A/F Sensor related DTCs. (This list is for example only. Refer to the
applicable service manual for a complete list of DTCs.)
Note:
When the DTCs for A/F sensor are stored in memory, do not replace the oxygen sensor.
The list above is of O2 Sensor related DTCs. (This list is for example only. Refer to the applicable
service manual for a complete list of DTCs.)
Note:
When the DTCs for O2 sensor are stored in memory, do not replace the A/F sensor.
Page 2343

Page 1817
Page 530

Service and Repair
Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Lift-up vehicle and remove front tires and wheels.
3. Remove both stabilizer and jack-up plate. 4. Disconnect tie-rod end from housing. 5. Remove
front exhaust pipe.
6. Remove front transverse link from front crossmember and body. 7. Remove nuts attaching
engine mount cushion rubber to crossmember. 8. Remove steering universal joint. 9. Disconnect
power steering pipe from steering gear box.
10. Lift engine by approximately 10 mm (0.39 inch) by using chain block. 11. Support crossmember
with a jack, remove nuts securing crossmember to body and lower crossmember gradually along
with steering gearbox.
CAUTION: When removing crossmember downward, be careful that tie-rod end does not interfere
with SFJ boot.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Always tighten rubber bushing when wheels are in full contact with the ground and
vehicle is curb weight.
Tightening torque:
Transverse link bushing to crossmember: 100 Nm (10.2 kgf-cm, 74 ft. lbs.) Stabilizer to bushing: 25
Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18.1 ft. lbs.) Tie-rod end to housing: 27.0 Nm (2.75 kgf-cm, 19.9 ft. lbs.) Front
cushion rubber to crossmember: 74 Nm (7.5 kgf-cm, 54.2 ft. lbs.) Universal joint to pinion shaft: 24
Nm (2.4 kgf-cm, 17.4 ft. lbs.) Crossmember to body: 100 Nm (10.2 kgf-cm, 74 ft. lbs.)
2. Purge air from power steering system.
INSPECTION
Check crossmember for wear, damage and cracks, and correct or replace if defective.
Page 6647
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 1377
Page 1661
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 2966
2. Connect harness connectors at 8 places. Connect connectors of same color, and secure
connectors to valve body using clips.
3. Apply proper amount of liquid gasket to the entire oil pan mating surface.
Fluid packing: Tree Bond 1217B
4. Install oil pan.
Recommended fluid: Dexron III type automatic transmission fluid Fluid capacity: 9.3 - 9.6 L (9.8 -
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Service and Repair
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
REMOVAL
1. Remove heater unit. 2. Remove screws to separate heater unit case.
3. Remove heater core.
INSTALLATION

Page 2202
INSTALLATION

Page 1884
General Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake Pad Front 14 inch Type Length 112.4 mm
Width 44.3 mm
15 and 16 inch Type Length 112.3 mm
Width 50.0 mm
All Thickness 11.0 mm
Rear 15 and 16 inch Type Length 82.4 mm
Width 33.7 mm
Thickness 9.0 mm
Page 2175
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Check electrodes and inner and outer porcelain of plugs, noting the type of deposits and the
degree of electrode erosion.
1. Normal
Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight electrode wear indicate correct spark plug heat range.
2. Carbon fouled
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and electrode are mostly caused by slow speed driving in
city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture, dirty air cleaner, etc. It is advisable to replace with plugs
having hotter heat range.
3. Oil fouled
Wet black deposits show excessive oil entrance into combustion chamber through worn rings and
pistons or excessive clearance between valve guides and stems. If same condition remains after
repair, use a hotter plug.
Page 1599
Page 2516

Page 3573
CAUTION: When removing control valve body, be careful not to interfere with transfer duty
solenoid wiring.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Set the select lever in "N" position.
2. Install the control valve and ground earth connectors.
3. Connect all connector.
4. Attach the magnet at the specified position.

Page 253

Page 2610
Evaporative Shut Valve: Service and Repair
SHUT VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Drain fuel from fuel tank. 2. Remove fuel filler pipe.
3. Disconnect evaporation hoses from shut valve.
4. Remove shut valve from fuel filler pipe.
INSTALLATION

Page 6389
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2074
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
data.
AT VEHICLES
Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Camshaft Sprocket 57.9 + or - 3.6 Ft Lbs.

Page 3659
Hydraulic Hose: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Check pipes and hoses for cracks, breakage, or damage. Check joints for fluid leakage. If any
cracks, breakage, damage, or leakage is found, repair or replace the applicable pipe or hose.
Page 485
new ones.
Page 231

Page 678
REMOVAL
1. MAIN SWITCH
2. SUB-SWITCH
connector.
INSTALLATION
1. MAIN SWITCH
2. SUB-SWITCH

Page 6427
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 6465

Page 4829
Page 1486
Page 1803
Page 568
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2465
1. Insert the cartridge to Subaru Select Monitor.
2. Connect Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector. 3. Turn ignition switch to ON, and
Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON. 4. Select {2. Each System Check} in Main Menu. 5. Select
{Engine Control System} in Selection Menu. 6. Select {1. Current Data Display & Save} in
EGI/EMPI Diagnosis. 7. Select {1.12 Data Display} in Data Display Menu. 8. Adjust throttle position
sensor to the proper position to match with the following specifications.
Condition: Throttle fully closed Throttle opening angle 0.00% Throttle sensor voltage 0.50 V
AT VEHICLES
Page 3290
4. Remove the under cover.
5. Disconnect ATF cooler hose from radiator.
NOTE: ^
Do not remove with a screwdriver or other pointed tools.
^ When the hose is difficult to remove, wrap a shop cloth around the hose to protect it. Turn it with
pliers, and then pull directly out with your hand.
6. Disconnect ATF cooler hoses from transmission.
NOTE: ^
7. Remove front left mud guard.

Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Recall 02V282000: A/T Park Rod Assembly Replacement
Parking Pawl: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 02V282000: A/T Park Rod Assembly
Replacement
DEFECT: Certain passenger and sport utility vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions were
produced with an improperly manufactured transmission parking rod. When the transmission
selector lever is placed in the "P" (PARK) position, the transmission park mechanism, which is
intended to hold the vehicle, may not engage. The vehicle could then move/roll without prior
warning, increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the automatic transmission parking rod assembly. The manufacturer
has reported that owner notification is expected to begin during January 2003. An interim owner
notification will be sent during November 2002. Owners should contact Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Page 3520
6. Install heat shield cover. 7. Install rear exhaust pipe to muffler. 8. Install under cover.
Inspection Items (After A Collision)
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Inspection Items (After A Collision)
INSPECTION
If the vehicle is involved in a collision on any side, even if it is a slight collision, be sure to check the
following system parts.
AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE
- Control module is cracked or deformed.
- Mounting bracket is cracked or deformed.
- Connector is scratched or deformed.
- Airbag is deployed.
- Side airbag deployed.

Page 2098
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
WARNING: Before removing fuel pressure gauge, release fuel pressure.
NOTE: If out of specification, check or replace pressure regulator and pressure regulator vacuum
hose.
1. Release fuel pressure.
3. Disconnect fuel delivery hoses from fuel filter, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
4. Connect connector of fuel pump relay. 5. Start the engine.
6. Measure fuel pressure while disconnecting pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake
manifold.
Fuel pressure: Standard: 284 - 314 kPa (2.9 - 3.2 kg/cm2, 41 - 46 psi)
Page 328
3. OUTPUT VOLTAGE Output voltage can be checked by the following method. Install resistor and
condenser, then rotate wheel about 2.75 km/h (2 MPH) or equivalent.
NOTE: Regarding terminal No., please refer to item 1. ABS SENSOR.
ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the gap using spacer (Part No. 26755AA000).

Page 988
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
1. Park vehicle on a level surface. 2. Remove oil level gauge and wipe it clean. 3. Reinsert the level
gauge all the way. Be sure that the level gauge is correctly inserted and in the proper orientation.
4. Remove it again and note the reading. If the engine oil level is below the "L" line, add oil to bring
the level up to the "F" line. 5. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan before checking the level. 6. Just after driving or while the engine is warm,
engine oil level may show in the range between the "F" line and the notch mark. This is caused by
thermal expansion of the engine oil.
7. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add oil above the "F" line when the engine is cold.
Page 113
Page 6212
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Command Switch
Cruise Control Command Switch
REMOVAL
WARNING: Before servicing, be sure to read the notes for proper handling of the driver's airbag
module.
1. Set front wheels in straight ahead position. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect battery
ground cable from battery and wait for at least 20 seconds before starting work.
4. Using TORX(R) BIT T30 (Tamper resistant type), loosen two TORX(R) bolts which secure
driver's airbag module. 5. Disconnect airbag module connector on back of airbag module.
6. Remove horn switch from steering wheel as shown.
7. Disconnect horn and cruise control command switch connector, then remove cruise control
command switch.
INSTALLATION
Install is in the reverse order of removal.

Page 363
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Inhibitor Switch (A/T)
REMOVAL
Disconnect connector from switch, and then remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Page 6531
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 1584
Page 6372
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4874
Adjustments
Throttle Position Sensor: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
4. When using Subaru Select Monitor;
NOTE: For detailed operation procedures, refer to the Subaru Select Monitor Operation Manual.
Page 1961
7. Remove fuel tank pressure sensor.
INSTALLATION

Page 1014
2. Fit one end of vinyl tube into the air bleeder and put the other end into a brake fluid container.
CAUTION: Brake fluid replacement sequence; (A) Front right -> (B) Rear left -> (C) Front left -> (D)
Rear right
3. Slowly depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Then, open the air bleeder to discharge
air together with the fluid. Release air bleeder for 1
to 2 seconds. Next, with the bleeder closed, slowly release the brake pedal. Repeat these steps
until there are no more air bubbles in the vinyl tube. Allow 3 to 4 seconds between two brake pedal
operations.
CAUTION: Cover bleeder with waste cloth, when loosening it, to prevent brake fluid from being
splashed over surrounding parts.
NOTE: Brake pedal operating must be very slow.
4. Tighten air bleeder securely when no air bubbles are visible.
Air bleeder tightening torque: 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
5. Perform these steps for the brakes connecting to the secondary chamber of master cylinder,
first, and then for the ones connecting to primary
chamber. With all procedures completed, fully depress the brake pedal and keep it in that position
for approximately 20 seconds to make sure that there is no leak evident in the entire system.
6. Check the pedal stroke.

Page 298

Fluid Pump: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 2037

Charging Procedure
Battery: Service and Repair Charging Procedure
WARNING: Do not bring an open flame close to the battery at this time.
CAUTION:
- Prior to charging, corroded terminals should be cleaned with a brush and common baking soda
solution.
- Be careful since battery electrolyte overflows while charging the battery.
- Observe instructions when handling battery charger.
- Before charging the battery on vehicle, disconnect battery ground terminal. Failure to follow this
rule may damage alternator's diodes or other electrical units.
1. JUDGMENT OF BATTERY IN CHARGED CONDITION
1. Specific gravity of electrolyte is held at a specific value in a range from 1.250 to 1.290 for more
than one hour. 2. Voltage per battery cell is held at a specific value in a range from 2.5 to 2.8 volts
for more than one hour.
2. CHECK HYDROMETER FOR STATE OF CHARGE
3. NORMAL CHARGING
Charge the battery at current value specified by manufacturer or at approximately 1/10 of battery's
ampere-hour rating.
4. QUICK CHARGING
Quick charging is a method in which the battery is charged in a short period of time with a relatively
large current by using a quick charger. Since a large current flow raises electrolyte temperature,
the battery is subject to damage if the large current is used for prolonged time. For this reason, the
quick charging must be carried out within a current range that will not increase the electrolyte
temperature above 40 °C (104 °F). It should be also remembered that the quick charging is a
temporary means to bring battery voltage up to a fair value and, as a rule, a battery should be
charged slowly with a low current.
CAUTION: -
Observe the items in 1. NORMAL CHARGING.

- Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because that will shorten battery life.
Page 5111
ST-A, B 20099AE000 INSTALLER & REMOVER
INSPECTION
Visually check link rear for damage or bends.

Page 6857
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Arm
Rear Wiper Arm
REMOVAL
1. Raise wiper arm cover (A). 2. Loosen nut to remove wiper arm.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Operate rear wiper once.
3. Align blade to rear defogger heat wire (A).

Page 3124
Disclaimer
Page 2154
Page 2234
Page 528
Page 3044
Control Module: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
2. Remove lower cover and then disconnect connector. 3. Disconnect connectors from
transmission control module.
Except VTD model
VTD model
4. Remove transmission control module.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 4354
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Rear
INSPECTION
Page 4622
INSPECTION
ADJUSTMENT
VDCCM
- Suspension parts
steering operation.
Page 5982
- When checking, use a test harness. Do not directly apply the tester probe to any connector
terminal of the airbag.
- Do not drop the airbag modulator parts, subject them to high temperature over 93 °C (199 °F), or
let water, oil, or grease get on them; otherwise, the internal parts may be damaged and reliability
greatly lowered.
- If any damage, opening, rust is found on the airbag system wire harness, do not attempt to repair
using soldering equipment. Be sure to replace the
Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5275
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- When disconnecting/connecting hoses, do not apply excessive force them. Confirm that no
torsion and excessive tension exist after installing.
- Seal the disconnected hose with a plug or vinyl tape to prevent contamination from entering.
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Using refrigerant recovery system, discharge
refrigerant.
3. Remove duct (A). 4. Remove hose attaching bolts (C). 5. Disconnect hose from evaporator unit.
6. Disconnect hose from compressor. 7. Remove low-pressure hose (A) from the vehicle. 8.
Remove hose attaching bolts (D). 9. Disconnect hose from compressor.
10. Disconnect hose from condenser.
11. Disconnect high-pressure hose (B) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: When disconnecting/connecting hoses, do not apply an excessive force them. Confirm
that no torsion and excessive tension exist after installing. Seal the disconnected hose with a plug
or vinyl tape to prevent contamination from entering.
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Charge refrigerant.

Page 327
Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear
INSPECTION
1. ABS SENSOR
1. Check pole piece of ABS sensor for foreign particles or damage. If necessary, clean pole piece
or replace ABS sensor.
2. Measure ABS sensor resistance.
CAUTION: If resistance is outside the standard value, replace ABS sensor with new one.
NOTE: Check ABS sensor cable for discontinuity. If necessary, replace with a new one.
2. SENSOR GAP
1. Measure the distance "A" between ABS sensor surface and sensor pole face. 2. Measure the
distance "B" between surface where the front axle housing meets the ABS sensor, and the tone
wheel.
NOTE: Measure so that the gauge touches the tone wheel teeth top.
3. Find the gap between the ABS sensor pole face and the surface of the tone wheel teeth by
putting the measured valves in the formula below
and calculating.
ABS sensor clearance = B - A ABS sensor standard clearance: 0.44 - 0.94 mm (0.0173 - 0.0370
inch)
NOTE: If the clearance is outside specifications, readjust.

Page 2023
Page 4257
INSTALLATION
made. -
and Inspection.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure

Page 4160
DISCLAIMER
Page 4360
CAUTION: Place a wooden block as shown in Figure to prevent damage to piston.
5. Remove piston seal from caliper body cylinder. 6. Remove lock pin boot and guide pin boot.
ASSEMBLY
14 inch TYPE 1. Clean caliper body interior using brake fluid. 2. Apply a coat of brake fluid to piston
seal and fit piston seal in groove on caliper body. 3. Apply a coat of brake fluid to the entire inner
surface of cylinder and outer surface of piston. 4. Apply a coat of specified grease to boot and fit in
groove on ends of cylinder and install piston boot onto cylinder.
Grease: NIGLUBE X-2 (Part No. 003606000)
5. Insert piston into cylinder.
6. Position boot in grooves on cylinder and piston. 7. Apply a coat of specified grease to lock pin
and guide pin outer surface, cylinder inner surface, and boot grooves.

Page 5571
Disclaimer
Page 3652
This change was incorporated in production after the VIN numbers shown.
Disclaimer
Page 4141
Page 3033
Page 3891
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
1. Remove the door trim. 2. Pull back the sealing cover.
3. Remove the rod clamp. Remove the bolt. Replace the key cylinder.
Page 5405
4. Disconnect connector from front sub sensor.
5. Remove front sub sensor (A).
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
20 seconds before starting work. 3. Remove instrument panel.
4. Disconnect front sub sensor connector (blue) from airbag main harness. 5. Remove front
bumper.
Page 3305
Service and Repair
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: During work procedures, if fuel tank is more than 3/4 full, be careful because fuel may
spill.
NOTE: Fuel temperature sensor is built in fuel pump assembly.
2. Disconnect connector from fuel pump bracket. 3. Remove fuel temperature sensor.
NOTE: When replacing fuel temperature sensor, also replace fuel level sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: -
Ground cable must be connected.

Page 82
Page 2529
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
AT VEHICLES

Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Slides To Lower Anchor
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Slides To Lower Anchor
NUMBER: 17-06-01R DATE: 05/11/05
APPLICABILITY: 1995 MY and after Legacy 1998 MY and after Forester 1993MY and after
Impreza 2003MY and after Baja 2006MY and after Tribeca
SUBJECT: Seat Belt Latch Slides to the Lower Seat Belt Anchor
DESCRIPTION
In the event you encounter a customer complaint of the seat belt latch sliding down the v~ebbing to
the lower seat belt anchor, it may be caused by the latch web stop button separating from the belt
webbing. This stop button may become loose and fall off if the belt webbing is jammed between the
body panel and door when the door is closed
Use the chart to locate and order the correct repair kit for your application.
REPAIR PROCEDURES
1) Inspect the belt webbing for damage. If damaged replace the seat belt assembly.
2) Remove any piece of broken stopper button from the belt webbing.
3) Lift the belt latch up and beyond the original stopper button location and hold in place using
adhesive tape.
4) Locate the original stopper hole (about 500mm up from bottom anchor) in the webbing and insert
the new male stopper button from the backside of
the belt Push the other part of the button over the pin sticking through the front belt webbing.
5) Using a suitable tool, crimp the two parts together until the new button thickness is 4.5~5.0mm.
6) Remove the adhesive tape from the latch and confirm the stopper button holds the latch in the
proper position.
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Limited Warranty period this repair can be claimed using the
table shown.
Page 4883
Page 6078
particular model and screw the anchor bolt into the threaded anchor point on the vehicle. Tighten
the anchor bolt to 20 foot pounds with a torque wrench.
3. Install the anchor plate cover (Figure 6).
4. Refer the owner to the Child Restraint System section (Section 2) of the Owners Manual for
instructions on how to attach the child restraint top tether strap hook to the anchor.
DISCLAIMER
Page 6120
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair
Sunroof Switch
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery.
2. Remove spot light lens (A) and sunroof switch mounting screw (B). 3. Disconnect harness
connectors and remove sunroof switch.
INSTALLATION

Clutch Bleeding Procedure
Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair Clutch Bleeding Procedure
A: PROCEDURE
NOTE: Bleed air from oil line with the help of a co-worker.
1. Remove air chamber.
2. Fit one end of a vinyl tube into the air bleeder of operating cylinder and put the other end into a
brake fluid container.
3. Slowly depress the clutch pedal and keep it depressed. Then open the air bleeder to discharge
air together with the fluid.
Release the air bleeder for 1 or 2 seconds. Next, with the bleeder closed, slowly release the clutch
pedal.
4. Repeat these steps until there are no more air bubbles in the vinyl tube.
CAUTION: Cover bleeder with waste cloth when loosening it, to prevent brake fluid from being
5. Tighten air bleeder.
6. After depressing the clutch pedal, make sure that there are no leaks evident in the entire system.
7. After bleeding air from system, ensure that clutch operates properly.
Page 3118
Page 2938
Page 2862
Disclaimer
Page 4773
RAPS-01 - Rear Accessory Power Supply System

Page 1540
2. Install left-hand belt cover No. 2.
3. Install tensioner bracket.
4. Install left-hand camshaft sprockets by using ST.
ST 4992707100 CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH Tightening torque: 78 Nm (8.0 kgf-m, 57.9 ft.
lbs.)

Page 6532
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 6000
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Rear Quarter Trim
REAR QUARTER TRIM
REMOVAL
1. SEDAN
1. Remove rear mole (A). 2. Remove rear shelf trim. 3. Remove side sill rear upper cover. 4.
Remove rear pillar lower trim (B). 5. Remove rear pillar upper trim (C).
2. WAGON
1. Remove side sill rear upper cover. 2. Remove luggage floor mat. 3. Remove rear skirt trim (A). 4.
Remove rear quarter lower trim mounting volts, screws and clips, then remove the trim (B). 5.
Remove rear mole (C). 6. Remove rear quarter upper trim mounting screw, then remove the trim
(D). 7. Remove rear rail trim (E).
INSTALLATION
Page 278
Shift Interlock Control Module: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground terminal.
2. Remove the lower cover and then disconnect connector. 3. Disconnect connector from AT shift
lock control module. 4. Remove the AT shift lock control module.
B: INSTALLATION

Specifications
Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake Service Specifications
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)

Page 3211
Page 3327
The second owner notification letter will be sent in January 2003. The letter will advise owners that
repair parts are available.
owners and provide them with a copy of the owner
Page 1367
Service and Repair
Shift Rail: Service and Repair
Manual Transmission/Transaxle; Shift Lever, M/T.
Page 6189
REMOVAL
module.
command switch.
INSTALLATION

Page 1051
Page 3413

Page 4617
Page 3481
Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove the select lever. 2. Remove AT shift lock solenoid "P" position switch.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install AT shift lock solenoid and "P" position switch. 2. Install the select lever.
Locations
Page 2547
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 1787
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 3008
Page 4406
Brake Pad: Specifications Brake Service Specifications
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)

Page 6447
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 4820
Page 4185
Page 6432
NOTE:
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
- When servicing a vehicle, be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ground cable
from the battery, and wait for more than 20 seconds before starting work.
- The airbag system is fitted with a backup power source. If the airbag system is serviced within 20
seconds after the ground cable is disconnected, it may inflate.
- If sensors, air bag module, airbag control module, pretensioner and harness are deformed or
damaged, replace them with new genuine parts.
- Do not use the airbag system and pretensioners on other vehicles. When replacing parts, be sure
to replace them with new parts.
- When checking the system, be sure to use a digital circuit tester. Use of an analog circuit tester
may cause the airbag to activate erroneously.
Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
Page 5395

Page 3115
radios, etc.
6) Turn off all electronic devices that can generate electromagnetic waves (mobile phones, pagers,
etc. - no radios).
7) Turn off the vehicle's electrical devices before reprogramming (every light, seat heater, audio
system. Do not use the cigarette lighter, power seat switch, etc. during reprogramming)
8) Do not attempt ECM reprogramming if the vehicle's under hood temperature is below 32° F (0°
Celsius).
Page 480
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5389
8. Remove steering column covers.
9. Removing three retaining screws, remove combination switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Failure to do this might damage roll connector.
1. Before installing combination switch, check to ensure that combination switch is off and front
wheels are set in the straight ahead position. 2. Install column cover and center roll connector.
ADJUSTMENT
CENTERING ROLL CONNECTOR
Before installing steering wheel, make sure to center roll connector built into combination switch.
1. Make sure that front wheels are positioned straight ahead. 2. Install steering gearbox, steering
shaft and combination switch properly. Turn roll connector pin (A) clockwise until it stops.
3. Then, back off roll connector pin (A) approximately 2.5 turns until "A" marks aligned.
NOTE: If steering wheel angle requires fine adjustment, adjust tie-rod.
4. Install airbag module and lower cover in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6778
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
Rear Regulator and Motor Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove door trim. 2. Remove sealing cover. 3. Remove door glass.
4. Secure bolts using screwdriver to remove front sash adjusting nut. 5. Remove front sash. 6.
7. Loosen four bolts and two nuts to remove regulator assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Adjust rear door glass.

Page 1344
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 5238
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Intake Unit
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove resistor (A) and thermistor (B) from intake unit.
2. Remove screws and clips to separate intake unit.
3. Remove expansion valve (A) from evaporator.
CAUTION: If evaporator is replaced, add appropriate amount of compressor oil to evaporator.
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION: Replace O-rings with new ones, and then apply compressor oil.
Page 3568
Page 3925
Mainshaft: Service and Repair
Manual Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Unit Overhaul.
Page 1889
Child Restraint - Top Tether Anchor Kit Installation
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Technical Service Bulletins Child Restraint - Top Tether Anchor Kit
Installation
NUMBER: 17-04-99
DATE: 11/17/99
APPLICABILITY: All Subaru Vehicles Equipped with child Restraint Top Tether Anchor Points
SUBJECT: Installation of Top Tether Anchor Kits
Effective with vehicles produced on or after September 1, 1999, in accordance with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 225, all Subaru vehicles will be equipped with top tether anchor hooks for
use with forward facing child restraint seats and booster seats. All 2000 model year Subaru
vehicles will be equipped in production with 3 top tether anchor hooks. The tether strap that
connects the top of the child restraint to the anchor hook must be supplied by the manufacturer of
the child restraint.
TOP TETHER ANCHOR KITS FOR OLDER MODELS

Page 1473
Page 4703
Battery: Specifications Parasitic Draw
Information not supplied by the manufacturer
Page 6155
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
Stop and Brake Switch
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 975
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Specified type ......................................................................................................................................
.......................................... API Classification GL - 5
Specified viscosities at ambient temperature ranges: Temperatures above 0°C (32°F) .....................
...........................................................................................................................................................
SAE 90 Temperatures above -28°C (-36°F) [1] ...................................................................................
............................................................................... SAE 85W Temperatures below 32°C (90°F) .......
..............................................................................................................................................................
..... SAE 80W Temperatures in all ranges ...........................................................................................
................................................................................... SAE 75W - 90
[1]Temperatures are approximate.

Page 225

Page 3311
Page 249

Page 584

Page 2005
AT VEHICLES
Page 5045
sub-frame.
(c) Dry the inside and outside of the sub-frame assembly using high pressure air at the same
locations identified in the cleaning process. Use a clean rag to remove any remaining moisture.
Step 5: Vehicle Preparation
Important:
Be sure the following items have adequately cooled before applying protective covers.
(a) Cover rotors, calipers, and exhaust parts near the sub-frame with a cloth or paper to prevent
wax from adhering to these surfaces.
(b) Place a suitable container (such as an oil drain pan) below the vehicle's subframe to capture
any anti-rust agent and anti-rust wax that could leak from the drain holes during the application
process.
Step 6: Application of anti-rust agent (NOX RUST X-210)
Use the flexible 360° type nozzle for spraying. Turn the spray gun stop screw counterclockwise 1/2
turn from closed, and adjust the air supply pressure to 40psi Sprayed amount: 5oz. (150cc). Refer
to the chart for spray times and follow the detailed, step-by-step process.
The holes in which the spray nozzle should be inserted and the direction from which the spray
nozzle should be applied are identified in the figure (see
Page 6340
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2719
12. Remove heat sealed cover.
13. Place transmission jack under sub frame.
14. Remove bolt which holds rear shock absorber to rear suspension arm.
Page 4167
Page 1333
10. Tighten bolt which install injector pipe on intake manifold.
11. Install purge control solenoid valve.
12. Connect hoses to purge control solenoid valve.
CAUTION: Carefully connect the evaporation hoses.
13. Install engine harness onto intake manifold. 14. Connect connectors to fuel injectors and purge
control solenoid valve.
15. Hold engine harness by harness band (*)
NOTE: Do not use harness band on harnesses where they are supposed to be protected by the
fuel pipe protector.
Page 5338
STEERING SHAFT
The clearance between capsule (A) and tip of column bracket (B) on steering column upper side
should be within specifications.
If necessary, replace them with new parts.

Page 4320
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. MT MODEL 1. Remove steering column. 2. Disconnect connectors from stop light and clutch
switches. 3. Remove snap pins which secure lever to push rod and operating rod.
4. Remove clevis pins which secure lever to push rod and operating rod.
5. Remove nut which secures clutch master cylinder. 6. Remove bolts and nuts which secure brake
and clutch pedals, and remove pedal assembly.
2. AT MODEL 1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Remove instrument panel lower cover
from instrument panel. 3. Remove clevis pin which secures brake pedal to brake booster operating
rod. Also disconnect stop light switch connector.
4. Remove two bolts and four nuts which secure brake pedal to pedal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: -
- Never fail to cover outer cable end with boot.
- Be careful not to kink accelerator cable.
- Always use new clevis pins.

Page 1514
INSTALLATION
RH SIDE
LH SIDE
Recall - Engine Control Module Reprogramming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Engine Control
Module Reprogramming
NUMBER: WWF-89 DATE: 04/2002
APPLICABILITY: 2000-01MY Subaru Legacy and Outback 4EAT 2000-02MY Impreza MT5 or
4EAT 2001-02MY Forester MT5 or 4EAT
SUBJECT: Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming
INTRODUCTION
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that some affected vehicles listed below may
require ECM reprogramming. The ECM logic for the air/fuel ratio circuit may not be broad enough
to accept the signal parameters of the A/F ratio sensor. Should the A/F ratio sensor signal
repeatedly fluctuate beyond the parameters of the ECM logic, the CHECK ENGINE warning light /
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate steadily while the engine is running, advising the
driver of a malfunction and the need to seek repair service. Reprogramming the ECM will broaden
the allowable A/F ratio signal parameters and correct this condition.
This condition is a software issue and has no impact on vehicle emissions or driveability.
This service program will involve reprogramming the ECM on affected vehicles.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
^ 2000-01 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback with H4 engine and 4EAT transmission only. (Legacy
and Outback vehicles with the H6 engine or MT5 transmission are not affected.)
^ 2000-02 MY Impreza with MT5 or 4EAT. (Impreza WRX models are not affected.)
^ 2001-02 MY Forester with MT5 or 4EAT.
NOTE:
Page 1764
Disclaimer
Page 3022

Page 2583
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE: ^
Diagrams
Page 3824
Page 4329
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor
E: INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive (+) terminal to terminal No. 2, and negative (-) terminal to terminal No. 1
of main fan motor connector. 2. Make sure the main fan motor operates properly. Replace it if it
doesn't.
Front
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Front
INSPECTION
Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan Baffle Plate Attaching Bolts 6.4 Nm
Oil Strainer to Baffle Plate 10 Nm
Pan Attaching Bolts 5 Nm

Page 1999
CAUTION: Never apply anti-seize compound to protector of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
2. Install front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Connect connector of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.

Service Manual - Multiple Systems Updates/Corrections
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual - Multiple Systems
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
APPLICABILITY: 2000-2002 Impreza Service Manuals 2000-2002 Legacy & Outback Service
Manuals 2000-2002 Forester Service Manuals
Place a REVISED label on the appropriate page of the shown effected Service Manual and Update
Page 216

Page 1836
1. Install front catalytic converter to front exhaust pipe.
2. Install front exhaust pipe and center exhaust pipe. And temporarily tighten bolt which installs
center exhaust pipe to hanger bracket.
3. Tighten bolts which hold front exhaust pipe onto cylinder heads.
4. Install center exhaust pipe to rear exhaust pipe.

Page 295
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 6462
second letter.
NOTE:
Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Timing Cover 4-6 Nm (3.3-4.0 Ft Lbs)

Page 388
Page 5588
10. Connect the other terminal of deployment tool to the battery plus terminal. Then deploy
pretensioner.
CAUTION: -
After deployment, pretensioner is especially hot. Leave it unattended for 40 minutes.
- Do not let water get on the deployed pretensioner.
11. Wrap the deployed pretensioner in an airtight vinyl bag, and discard it.
Page 5944
Page 132
Ignition Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC's P0301/P0302/P0303/P0304
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 2085
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5508
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Testing and Inspection
Interrupt Relay
the battery to terminals No.1 and No.4. If NG, replace the interrupt relay.
Page 5050
Locations
Page 1010
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Replacement
NOTE:
- If a component is replaced, add an appropriate amount of compressor oil.
- When replacing the compressor, the new compressor will already have the specified amount of oil
in it. Install the new compressor after removing the same amount of oil that is remaining in the
compressor removed.
Page 4542
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Check connected and fixed condition of connector.
2. Check valve relay and motor relay for discontinuity or short circuits.
1. CHECKING THE HYDRAULIC UNIT ABS OPERATION BY PRESSURE GAUGE 1. Lift-up

vehicle and remove wheels. 2. Disconnect the air bleeder screws from the FL and FR caliper
bodies. 3. Connect two pressure gauges to the FL and FR caliper bodies.
CAUTION: -
Pressure gauges used exclusively for brake fluid must be used.
- Do not employ pressure gauge previously used for transmission since the piston seal is expanded
which may lead to malfunction of the brake.
NOTE: Wrap sealing tape around the pressure gauge.
4. Bleed air from the pressure gauges. 5. Perform ABS sequence control. 6. When the hydraulic
unit begins to work, and first the FL side performs decompression, holding, and compression, and
then the FR side performs
decompression, holding, and compression.
7. Read values indicated on the pressure gauge and check if the fluctuation of the values between
decompression and compression meets the standard
values. Also check if any irregular brake pedal tightness is felt.
8. Remove pressure gauges from FL and FR caliper bodies.

Page 5339
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt System
Inspection Locations After a Collision
Inspection
Check for the following, and then replace with new parts if necessary.
- Center pillar lower garnish is discolored or cracked.
- Wire harness and/or connector is damaged.
Seat Belts
Replace front & rear seat belts worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident.
The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Child Restraint
Replace the built-in child restraint equipped vehicle seat back assembly if the child restraint was in
use during a serious collision. The built-in restraint may be severely weakened. In a subsequent
accident, it might not be able to provide adequate protection. The entire assembly should be
replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Page 3032
Page 4966
Page 780

Page 4968
Page 2663
Fuel Injector: Service and Repair
FUEL INJECTOR
REMOVAL
RH SIDE
1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Open fuel flap lid, and remove fuel filler cap.
4. Remove air intake duct and air cleaner assembly .
5. Remove resonator chamber.

Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor
A: REMOVAL
4. Disconnect connector of main fan motor. 5. Lower the vehicle.
6. Remove air intake duct.

Page 1188
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove V-belt. Refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories; Drive Belt; Service and
Repair.
2. Remove crankshaft pulley bolt. To lock crankshaft, use ST.
ST 499977100 CRANKSHAFT PULLEY WRENCH
3. Remove crankshaft pulley.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install crankshaft pulley. 2. Install pulley bolt.
To lock crankshaft, use ST. ST 499977100 CRANKSHAFT PULLEY WRENCH 1) Clean the
crankshaft pulley thread using an air gun. 2) Apply engine oil to the crankshaft pulley bolt seat and
thread. 3) Tighten the bolts temporarily with tightening torque of 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft. lbs.).
4) Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolts.
3. Confirm that the tightening angle of the crankshaft pulley bolt is 65 degrees or more. If not,
conduct the following procedures (1) through (4).
1) Replace the crankshaft pulley bolts and clean them.
Crankshaft pulley bolt: 12369AA011
2) Clean the crankshaft thread using an air gun. 3) Tighten the bolts temporarily with tightening
torque of 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft. lbs.). 4) Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolts keeping them in an
angle between 65 degrees and 75 degrees.
CAUTION: Conduct the tightening procedures by confirming the turning angle of the crankshaft
pulley bolt referring to the gauge indicated on the belt cover.
4. Install A/C belt tensioner.

Cruise Control Servo: Testing and Inspection
Actuator
Measure resistance between cruise control actuator terminals. If NG, replace cruise control
actuator.
Page 6269
parts.
Page 2280
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Page 6528
Page 2972
B: INSTALLATION

Exterior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 3287
Fluid Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Repair or replace any defective hoses, pipes, clamps, and washers found from the inspection
below. 1. Check for ATF leaks in joints between the transmission, radiator, pipes, and hoses. 2.
Check for deformed clamps. 3. Lightly bend the hose and check for cracks in the surface and other
damage. 4. Pinch the hose with your fingers and check for poor elasticity. Also check for poor
elasticity in the parts where the clamp was by pressing with
your fingernail.
5. Check for peeling, cracks, and deformation at the tip of the hose.
Page 1873

Page 145
DISCLAIMER
Page 655
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Side Airbag Module
Side Air Bag: Testing and Inspection Side Airbag Module
INSPECTION
Check for the following, and replace front seat assembly.
- Front seat is deformed or damaged.
- Harness and/or connector is cracked, deformed or open.
- Load wire is exposed.

Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 4.0L (4.2 Qt)
Page 5716
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 5429
Step 7
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTS

Page 2631
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
1. Before checking idle speed, check the following:

1) Ensure that air cleaner element is free from clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs are in
good condition, and that hoses are connected
properly.
2) Ensure that malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE light) does not illuminate.
2. Warm-up the engine. 3. Stop the engine, and turn ignition switch to OFF. 4. When using
SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE: For detailed operation procedures, refer to the SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION
MANUAL.
1) Insert the cartridge to SUBARU SELECT MONITOR.
2) Connect SUBARU SELECT MONITOR to the data link connector. 3) Turn ignition switch to ON,
and SUBARU SELECT MONITOR switch to ON. 4) Select (2. Each System Check) in main Menu.
5) Select (Engine Control System) in Selection Menu. 6) Select (1. Current Data Display & Save) in
Engine Control System Diagnosis. 7) Select (1.12 Data Display) in Data Display Menu. 8) Start the
engine, and read engine idle speed.
5. When using tachometer (Secondary pick-up type).
1) Attach the pick-up clip to No. 1 cylinder spark plug cord.
2) Start the engine, and read engine idle speed.
NOTE: ^
When using the OBD-II general scan tool, carefully read its operation manual.
^ This ignition system provides simultaneous ignition for #1 and #2 plugs. It must be noted that
some tachometers may register twice that of actual engine speed.
6. Check idle speed when unloaded. (With headlights, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator fan, air
conditioning, etc. OFF)
Idle speed (No load and gears in neutral (MT), or N or P (AT) position):
MT vehicle: 650 ±100 rpm AT vehicle: 700 ±100 rpm
7. Check idle speed when loaded. (Turn air conditioning switch to "ON" and operate compressor for
at least one minute before measurement.)
Idle speed [A/C "ON", no load and gears in neutral (MT) or N or P (AT) position]: 850 ±100 rpm
CAUTION: Never rotate idle adjusting screw. If idle speed is out of specifications, refer to
Computers and Control Systems: Testing and Inspection.
Page 6630

NOTE:
Clutch Pedal Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03

INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURE
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
5) Add brake fluid.
For Turbo models
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.


Page 4113
Page 3292
B: INSTALLATION
1. 2.5L MODEL
1. Install the oil cooler outlet and inlet pipes.
CAUTION: Be sure to use a new aluminum washer.
Tightening torque: T1: 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft. lbs.) T2: 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft. lbs.)
2. Install ATF cooler pipe to frame.

Page 1502
Page 2357
Page 5472
DISCLAIMER
Page 761

Page 2040
Page 920
CAUTION: It is likely that although one judges fluid leakage, there is actually no leakage. This is
because the fluid spilt during the last maintenance was not completely wiped off. Be sure to wipe
off spilt fluid thoroughly after maintenance.
Page 2231

Page 3045
Except VTD model
VTD model
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove union bolt and disconnect brake hose from caliper body assembly.
2. Remove bolt securing lock pin to caliper body. 3. Raise caliper body and move it toward vehicle
center to separate it from support. 4. Remove support from housing.
NOTE: Remove support only when replacing it or the rotor. It need not be removed when servicing
caliper body assembly.
5. Remove disc rotor from hub.
NOTE: If disc rotor seizes up within hub, drive disc rotor out by installing an 8-mm bolt in holes B
on the rotor.
6. Clean mud and foreign particles from caliper body assembly and support.
INSTALLATION
Page 130

Page 620
6. Disconnect connector from front sub sensor. 7. Remove wiring harness clips.
8. Remove grommet, and then detach front sub sensor harness (A).
INSTALLATION

Recall - Rear Subframe Corrosion
Technical Service Bulletin # WWM-96 Date: 030701
NUMBER: WWM-96
DATE: July 2003
APPLICABILITY: 2000-2002MY Subaru Legacy and Outback Vehicles
SUBJECT: Rear Suspension Sub-frame Corrosion
INTRODUCTION
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that affected vehicles, listed below, may have been
manufactured with improperly applied paint to the rear suspension sub-frame. If an affected vehicle
is operated for an extensive period in a "salt-belt" area (see list of states below that use large
amounts of salt on the roads in the winter), continued exposure to the salt could cause the rear
sub-frame to rust-out and possibly break. If the rear sub-frame were to rust-out and break, control
of the vehicle could be affected.
This recall will involve cleaning and applying rust proofing material at the affected area.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
All 2000, all 2001 and most 2002 model year Legacy/Outback vehicles (and approximately 45 very
early production 2003 Legacy, Outback and BAJA models) are affected. This recall will be limited
to vehicles in regional areas known as "salt-belt" states and affects vehicles originally sold in or
currently registered in the states of:
Affected vehicles are identified in the VIN range chart in this bulletin.
NOTE:
Coverage for all affected vehicles must be confirmed by using the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry in the
Dealer Communication System (DCS).
OWNER NOTIFICATION
REMOVAL
or more.
INSTALLATION
removal easier.

Page 6247
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Replace belts, if cracks, fraying or wear is found.
2. Check drive belt tension and adjust it if necessary by changing generator installing position
and/or idler pulley installing position.
Belt tension (A)
replaced: 7 - 9 mm (0.276 - 0.354 inch) reused: 9 - 11 mm (0.354 - 0.433 inch)
(B)
replaced: 7.5 - 8.5 mm (0.295 - 0.335 inch) reused: 9.0 - 10.0 mm (0.354 - 0.394 inch)
Page 3547
C: REMOVAL

Page 5066
Page 2359

Page 2253
Parking Brake Lever: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
While pulling parking brake lever upward, count the notches. Lever stroke: 7 to 8 notches when
pulled with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lbs.) Incorrect, adjust the parking brake.
Recall 04V128000: Cruise Control Cable/Throttle Sticking
Cruise Control Servo Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V128000: Cruise Control
Cable/Throttle Sticking
DEFECT: On certain passenger and sport utility vehicles, the cruise control cable could come out
of its track on the cruise control lever and lodge on the control lever tab when the accelerator pedal
is released. If this condition occurs, the throttle will not return to the idle position and will remain in
an open position. If this occurs during vehicle operation, the driver could lose control of the vehicle,
which could result in a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will install a cruise control cable retaining clip to the cruise control lever tab on
the throttle shaft in order to prevent the cruise control cable from coming out of its track. The
manufacturer has reported that owner notification was expected to begin during April 2004. Owners
may contact Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Page 302
BRAKE/W-01
Page 3021
Page 1085
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Limited Warranty period, this repair may be claimed using
table.
Disclaimer
Page 5283
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant Type R-134a

Page 651
DISCLAIMER
Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1145
Tightening torque: 10 ± 2 Nm (1.0 ± 0.2 kg-m, 7.2 ± 1.4 ft. lbs.)
(8) Apply a coat of grease to oil seal lips and install oil seal (A) on camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
CAUTION: Use a new oil seal.
ST1 499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE ST2 499587500 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(9) Install plug using ST. ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(10) Install oil level gauge guide. (11) Install camshaft position sensor support.
2. CAMSHAFT (RH)
a) Apply a coat of engine oil to camshaft journals and install camshaft (RH). b) Install camshaft cap.
(1) Apply liquid gasket on the around of cam shaft cap.
Liquid gasket: THREE BOND 1280B (Part No. 0029431130)

Page 4076
CAUTION: ^
screws.
harness assembly.
Page 1528
NOTE: ^
adjusting valve clearances.
facing up.
Page 3779
Fluid - Differential: Description and Operation
^ Rear differential gear oil Recommended oil
CAUTION: Each oil manufacturer has its base oil and additives. Thus, do not mix two or more
brands.
Page 3096
bulletin.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Dealers will automatically be shipped the necessary special select monitor reprogramming cables
and cartridges for this campaign at no charge. If additional reprogramming cables and cartridges
are needed, please contact your District Service Operations Manager for ordering instructions.
Part numbers are as follows:
Select Monitor Reprogramming Cable - 22775Z0C00 Select Monitor Reprogramming Cartridge -

24082X0A54
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Using the Select Monitor Reprogramming Cable, Part Number 22775Z0C00, connect the Select
Monitor to the vehicle's Diagnostic Link Connector ( DLC) located in the vehicle's lower left dash
panel. Insert the appropriate "Diagnostic" cartridge for the vehicle being serviced, and retrieve and
record any diagnostic trouble codes previously stored in the ECM.
If no codes are found, proceed to the "ECM Reprogramming Precautions and Instructions" section
of this bulletin.
If trouble codes are found, refer to the table for the correct repair procedure. Make any necessary
repairs and clear all codes prior to reprogramming the ECM.
Important:
Only use the specified Select Monitor Programming Cable for reprogramming. The Select Monitor
should remain "off" until instructed to turn "on" while following the reprogramming instructions.
NOTE:
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor should ONLY be replaced when trouble code P0031, P0130 or
P1133 is present and should not be replaced for any other reason. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensors
that have been replaced should not be returned unless requested through the Service Part Return
System.
ECM Reprogramming Precautions
Before reprogramming the ECM, the following precautions must be observed:
1) Only use the appropriate reprogramming cable P/N 22775Z0C00 for ECM reprogramming.
2) Keep the vehicle at least 150 feet (50 meters) from high voltage power lines.
3) Keep the vehicle at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any machinery that creates high voltage.
4) Keep the vehicle at least 6 feet (2 meters) away from other vehicles that may generate electrical
"noise". (Example: Other vehicle being checked for ignition spark, etc.)
5) Keep the vehicle at least 6 feet (2 meters) away from any electrical device that can generate an
electronic wave, such as mobile phones, pagers,
Page 408
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2722
24. Disconnect evaporation hose (O) from fuel filler pipe.
25. Remove bolt which holds fuel filler pipe to body. 26. Remove fuel filler pipe to under side of the
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Hold fuel filler flap open.
2. Set fuel saucer (A) with rubber packing (C) and insert fuel filler pipe into hole from the inner side
of apron. 3. Align holes in fuel filler pipe neck and set cup (B), and tighten screws.
NOTE: If edges of rubber packing are folded toward the inside, straighten it with a screwdriver.
Page 1414
4. After ensuring that the marks on timing belt and camshaft sprockets are aligned, remove stopper
pin from belt tensioner adjuster.
CAUTION: After properly installing timing belt, remove rocker cover and ensure that the valve lash
adjuster contains no air.
5. Install timing belt guide. (MT vehicles only)
1) Temporarily tighten remaining bolts.
2) Check and adjust clearance between timing belt and timing belt guide by using thickness gauge.
Clearance: 1.0 ±0.5 mm (0.039 ±0.020 inch)

Page 6442
Wheels/Tires - Highway Speed Vibration/Harshness/Noise
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Highway Speed Vibration/Harshness/Noise
NUMBER: 05-50-10R DATE: 02/03/11
SUBJECT: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) at Highway Speeds Caused by a Tire Imbalance
or Excessive Radial Force
INTRODUCTION
This bulletin is to serve as information only and is intended to help minimize steering wheel
vibrations at highway speed.
DESCRIPTION
Some customers may describe a concern of a steering wheel vibration, oscillation or a "shimmy"
condition at highway speeds that may be caused by improper tire and wheel balance or excessive
radial force variation (RFV).
Subaru of America Inc. (SOA) recommends the use of the Hunter GSP 9700 Wheel Balance and
Road Force Measurement System to properly balance the wheel and tire assemblies "dynamically"
and to measure the radial force variation of the wheel and tire assembly. While the majority of
these conditions can be greatly reduced with proper wheel balancing, some road feel may be
considered characteristic and can be compared to like model vehicles with similar mileage.
Wheel Imbalance
The two most common types of wheel imbalances are static (single weight plane) and dynamic
(dual weight plane). A static imbalance is best described as a vertical imbalance when the
assembly is mounted on the vehicle. A dynamic imbalance is defined as a vertical and inner/outer
imbalance while the assembly is mounted on the vehicle.
Wheel and tire assembly imbalance should be addressed first as this is the most common source
of tire and wheel vibrations. A well maintained dual weight plane balancer (commonly known as a
Dynamic Balancer) such as a Hunter G5P9700 should be used to achieve the best possible
results. Balancer settings and proper maintenance are critical to obtaining the best results. Refer to
the operating instructions as provided by the balancer manufacturer for setup and maintenance
instructions.
Radial Force Variation (RFV)
Radial force variation is an industrial measurement describing the tire uniformity under load. These
variations, or harmonics, are measured in kilograms, pounds or newtons. SOA asks that all weight
measurements be reported using the metric system (grams, kilograms, etc.) The Hunter GSP 9700
Road Force Measurement System is capable of measuring these harmonics and displaying them
as R1H (radial first harmonic), R2H (radial second harmonic) and R3H (radial third harmonic.)
These different harmonic levels indicate the number of bad occurrences per revolution.
Most commonly, radial first (R1H) harmonics are the cause of steering wheel or body related
vibrations that can be felt at highway speeds. Radial force variation can be greatly affected if the
vehicle has been parked for an extended period of time causing flat spots or by improper tire
inflation. Before performing any diagnosis~ be sure to drive the vehicle at least 10 miles and adjust
tire pressures as indicated on the door label.
Machine Setup
SOA recommends the use of the Hunter GSP 9700 Road Force Measurement System to properly
balance and measure radial force on tire and wheel assemblies. To ensure the most accurate
results, the following guidelines should be used:
^ Refer to the operating instructions to set the machine to measure in grams (for balancing) and
kilograms (for radial force measurements)
^ Refer to the operating instructions to enable the dynamic balancing mode
^ Refer to the operating instructions to disable the Quickmatch(TM) function, if available.
^ Select the "Mixed Weights Balance" mode and measure the weight location carefully.
^ Calibration should be checked at least once per week
^ Ensure the arbor threads and base plate are clean and in good condition
^ Measure the wheel center bore and select the proper cone for mounting the wheel to the
balancer
Page 2509
Page 3325
The first owner notification letter was sent in November 2002. The letter will explain the parking rod
condition and advise owners that repair parts will be available in January 2003. The letter will also
explain the importance and need to use the parking brake.
Page 2683
A: INSPECTION
hose.
manifold.
Page 1084
^ Inspect the cone for any debris or damage and clean or replace as necessary
^ Perform the Centering Check® Procedure (software version 2.1 and higher) before each wheel is
balanced
PROCEDURE
Always verify the concern with a test drive before beginning diagnosis and performing repairs.
Drive the vehicle a minimum of 10 miles to eliminate any flat spots on the tires. Immediately after
the road test, lift the vehicle into the air to minimize flat spotting. Adjust tire pressures according to
the door label and inspect for any visible damage. If any damage is found, resolve these concerns
before continuing with diagnosis.
Tire dynamic imbalance should be measured first and adjusted to within 5 grams. Leave any
remaining factory weights in place and remove weights that have been added afier production; be
careful not to damage the wheel.
If the assembly cannot be adjusted to within 5 grams, inspect for the following:
^ Improperly mounted tire or unseated tire bead
^ Improperly mounted assembly to the balancer
^ Damage to the wheel or tire
^ Damage to the tire balancer
^ Debris located inside the tire
If a vibration can still be felt afier the wheels have been properly balanced, there is a possibility of
excessive radial force variation (RFV) in the tire and wheel assembly. To address RFV concerns, a
wheel balancer capable of measuring RFV must be used; Subaru Of America Inc. recommends the
use of the Hunter GSP 9700 Road Force Measurement System. If a GSP 9700 is not available,
locate the nearest machine through the Hunter Engineering web site (www.gsp9700.com).
Measure and record the RFV readings of the wheel and tire assembly for R1H. Then perform the
wheel runout measurements by following the on-screen instructions or by referring to the operating
instructions; this will determine the individual tire and wheel RFV measurements. The following
assembly RFV measurements can be used as a guide:
^ R1H on passenger tires - 8.0kg (17.6lbs) or less
If higher than normal RFV measurements are found for the assembly, refer to the on-screen
instructions or the operating instructions to match the tire and wheel to minimize the assembly RFV
By matching the low spot of the tire to the high spot of the wheel, radial force can be reduced
without replacing any components.
After all RFV measurements are adjusted to the lowest possible level, install the wheels with the
lowest RFV measurements on the front of the vehicle and road test to verify the concern has been
reduced.
Replacement of tires due to excessive assembly measurements may be unnecessary.
If the concern still exists at an unacceptable level, contact the Subaru Technical HelpLine with the
following information readily available:
^ Thorough description of customer's concern
^ VIN
^ Mileage
^ Tire manufacturer, size and condition
^ Completed "Dealer vibration Analysis Worksheet and Tire Analysis Worksheet" available under
TechLine Pre-Call Worksheets on Subarunet. (All measurements should be in grams or kilograms)
^ Service history of vehicle
WARRANTY/CLAIM INFORMATION
Page 2518
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 4763
Page 4970

Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 1247
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Grade ...................................................................................................................................................
................................. SH or SJ Energy Conserving II Above -20° C (0° F) .........................................
.......................................................................................................................................... 10W-30,
10W-40 Below 40° C (100° F) .............................................................................................................
.................................................................. 5W-30 (preferred)
Service and Repair
Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair
Glove Box Lamp
REMOVAL
1. Remove glove box. 2. Disconnect harness connector.
3. Remove glove box light.
INSTALLATION

Page 6424
Page 5927
Spray time: 12 sec.
Page 626
Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. If clutch switch does not operate properly (or if it does not stop at the specified position), replace
with new one.
Specified position: L 2 +1.5/0 mm (0.079 +059/0 inch)
2. Check clutch switch continuity. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
^ Clutch switch (Starter interlock)
^ Clutch switch (With cruise control)

Page 3251

Page 1870
Page 908
Disclaimer
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection
Check continuity brake switch (1) and stop light switch (2) between terminals. If NG, replace stop
and brake switch.
Page 1345
Page 1163
1. MAIN SWITCH
Driver's Switch

Rear Left Switch
Rear Right Switch
2. SUB-SWITCH

Page 6744
Page 3432
A: REMOVAL
Except VTD model
VTD model
B: INSTALLATION
Page 3823
Specifications
Valve Cover: Specifications
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
............................................. 5±1 Nm (3.6±0.7 ft lbs)
Page 3820
10. Install circlip in the groove on DOJ outer race.
NOTE: ^
Assure that the balls, cage and inner race are completely fitted in the outer race of DOJ.
^ Exercise care not to place the matched position of circlip in the ball groove of outer race.
^ Pull the shaft lightly and assure that the circlip is completely fitted in the groove.
11. Apply an even coat of the specified grease [20 to 30 g (0.71 to 1.06 oz.)] to the entire inner
surface of boot. Also apply grease to shaft. 12. Install DOJ boot taking care not to twist it.
NOTE: ^
The inside of the larger end of DOJ boot and the boot groove shall be cleaned so as to be free from
grease and other substances.
^ When installing DOJ boot, position outer race of DOJ at center of its travel.
13. Put a band through the clip and wind twice in alignment with band groove of boot.
CAUTION: Use a new band.
14. Pinch the end of band with pliers. Hold the clip and tighten securely.
NOTE: When tightening boot, exercise care so that the air within the boot is appropriate.
15. Tighten band by using ST.
NOTE: Tighten band until it cannot be moved by hand.
16. Tap on the clip with the punch provided at the end of ST.
CAUTION: Tap to an extent that the boot underneath is not damaged.
17. Cut off band with an allowance of about 10 mm (0.39 in) left from the clip and bend this
allowance over the clip.
Page 663
connectors to valve body sing clips.
Fluid packing: Three Bond 1217B
4. Install the oil pan.
5. Install the front and rear vehicle speed sensor, and also the torque converter turbine speed
sensor, and then fasten the harness.
6. Install oil cooler outlet pipe.
7. Install transmission rear crossmember bolts.
Tightening torque: 75 Nm (7.6 kgf-m, 55 ft. lbs.)
8. Install propeller shaft. 9. Install shield cover.
10. Install front, center, rear exhaust pipe and muffler. 11. Install the transmission connector to the
stay.
Page 2256
Page 4746
1. Brush length
Measure the brush length and replace if it exceeds the service limit. Replace if abnormal wear or
cracks are noticed.
Brush length:
Standard 15 mm (0.59 in)
Service limit 10 mm (0.39 in)
2. Brush movement
Be sure brush moves smoothly inside brush holder.
3. Insulation resistance of brush holder
Be sure there is no continuity between brush holder and its plate.
4. Brush spring force
Measure brush spring force with a spring scale. If it is less than the service limit, replace brush
spring.
Brush spring force:
Standard 18.6 N (1.9 kg, 4.2 lb) (when new)
Service limit 6.9 N (0.7 kg, 1.5 lb)
5. BEARING
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
2. Disconnect transmission connector. 3. Remove the transmission connector from stay. 4. Lift-up
the vehicle. 5. Clean transmission exterior.
6. Drain ATF completely.
NOTE: Tighten ATF drain plug after draining ATF.
7. Remove front, center, exhaust pipes and muffler. 8. Remove the shield cover. 9. Remove the
propeller shaft.
Page 1623

Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
REAR GATE KEY CYLINDER
1. Remove the rear gate lower trim.
2. Remove the rod clamp. Remove the nut. Replace the key cylinder.
Radiator Cap: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
Page 3527
Transmission Mount: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Repair or replace parts if the results of the inspection below are not satisfactory.
1. PITCHING STOPPER Make sure that the pitching stopper is not bent or damaged. Make sure
that the rubber is not stiff, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
2. CROSSMEMBER AND CUSHION RUBBER Make sure that the crossmember is not bent or
damaged. Make sure that the cushion rubber is not stiff, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
Page 1816
Locations
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations
Connector Location
Daytime Running Light Relay - (B102)


Page 4212
Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 4949
2. Install socket to oil pump.
3. Tighten bolt which install power steering pump bracket.
4. Interconnect pipes C and suction hose.
Tightening torque:
Joint nut 39.2 Nm (4 kgf-cm, 28.9 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: If a hose is twisted at this step, the hose may come into contact with some other parts.
5. Connect connector to power steering oil pressure switch. 6. Install pulley belt to oil pump. 7.
Check pulley belt tension. 8. Tighten bolt belt tension.
9. Install pulley belt cover bracket.
10. Connect ground terminal of battery. 11. Feed the specified power steering fluid
Page 5835
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 4155

Page 1809
Thermostat: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Replace the thermostat if the valve does not close completely at an ambient temperature or if the
following test shows unsatisfactory results. Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in water.
Raise water temperature gradually, and measure the temperature and valve lift when the valve
begins to open and when the valve is fully opened. During the test, agitate the water for even
temperature distribution. The measurement should be to the specification. Starts to open: 76.0 -
80.0°C (169 - 176°F) Fully opens: 91°C (196°F)
Page 3034
Page 6357
Page 1193
Piston: Service and Repair
Engine; Service and Repair; Disassembly and Reassembly; Cylinder Block.
Page 2504
Locations
Page 3450
Page 1857
Muffler: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Make sure there are no exhaust leaks from connections and welds. 2. Make sure there are no
holes or rusting. 3. Flake sure the cushion rubber is not worn or cracked.
Page 2257
Page 3613
Disclaimer
Specifications
Piston Pin: Specifications
Wrist Pin Outer Diameter 22.994 - 23.000 mm
Standard Clearance Between Piston Pin and Hole in Piston Standard 0.004 - 0.008 mm
Degree of Fit Piston Pin Must Be Fitted into Position with Thumb at 20 deg C
Page 1701
Caution:
The engine cooling system may be extremely hot and under high pressure. Be sure the cooling
system has adequately cooled and properly depressurized before removing the heater hose. Refer
to the engine section of the applicable Subaru Service Manual for proper engine cooling system
servicing procedures.
SERVICE PROGRAM IDENTIFICATION LABEL
Type or print the necessary information on a Service Program identification label. The completed
through your Area / Distributor Service Office.
Credit for performing this Service Program Will be based on the submission of properly completed
Inspection Only - Verification that the inlet heater hose does not have tape on the protective cover
and replacement is not necessary. A total of 0.3 labor hours will be automatically credited upon
claim submission.
Inspection and Replacement - Use the following claim submission information if tape was found on
the inlet heater hose protective cover and replacement was necessary.
For inlet heater hose inspection and replacement enter labor operation 128-281 for 0.1 labor hours
The claim will automatically be credited an additional 0.3 labor hours for inspection. A total of 0.4
labor hours will be credited.
allowance.
Recall 03V153000: Frame Corrosion Issue
Subframe: Recalls Recall 03V153000: Frame Corrosion Issue
DEFECT: This applies to certain passenger vehicles sold or currently registered in the States of
Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts,
Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and the District of Columbia. Certain
rear suspension subframe components were produced with poor paint quality which, after
continued exposure to corrosive road salts for a period of several years, could result in rust-out of
the component and possible breakage of the subframe. If such breakage occurs while the vehicle
is being operated, control of the vehicle could be affected, increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will clean and rust-proof the rear suspension subframe. The manufacturer has
reported that owner notification is expected to begin during June or July 2003. Owners may contact
Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Page 5506

Page 4032
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 2282
INSTALLATION

Page 4272
2. Secure relay box connector to connector bracket.
CAUTION: Align connector with mating receptacle.
3. Connect connector to relay box. 4. Install air intake duct. 5. Connect ground cable to battery.
Lighting Switch
1. LIGHTING SWITCH
Turn Signal Switch

Page 6109
3. Remove the inner slide rail assembly
Proceed with removal of the inner slide rail assembly as follows:
1) Disconnect the seat adjustment cable and release arm from the inner seat rail.
2) Remove the seat rail to seat frame attaching bolts and screws.
3) Remove the seatback to seat rail attaching screw.
4) Remove the seatbelt buckle assembly from the seat rail as pictured.
5) Carefully rotate the seat rail downward as pictured.

and brake switch.
Page 4527
2. Tighten end of brake hose at caliper using a union bolt. 3. Secure middle fitting of brake hose to
bracket at strut location using a clamp. 4. Position disc in straight-forward direction and route brake
hose through hole in bracket on wheel apron side.
CAUTION: Be sure brake hose is not twisted.
5. Temporarily tighten flare nut to connect brake pipe and hose. 6. Fix brake hose with clamp at
wheel apron bracket. 7. While holding hexagonal part of brake hose fitting with a wrench, tighten
flare nut to the specified torque.
Tightening torque (Brake pipe flare nut): 15 Nm (1.5 kgf-m, 10.8 ft. lbs.)
8. Bleed air from the brake system.
2. REAR BRAKE HOSE 1. Pass brake hose through the hole of bracket, and lightly tighten flare nut
to connect brake pipe. 2. Insert clamp upward to fix brake hose.
3. While holding hexagonal part of brake hose fitting with a wrench, tighten flare nut to the specified
torque. 4. Bleed air from the brake system.
Page 3384
Page 5377
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
and dust.
control module.
in the figure.
INSTALLATION
Page 4120
Page 3193

Service and Repair
Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair
High-Mounted Stop Light
REMOVAL
SEDAN WITHOUT REAR SPOILER
1. Disconnect connector of high-mounted stop light from body harness.
2. Remove bolts, then detach high-mounted stop light assembly.
SEDAN WITH REAR SPOILER
1. Remove two screws and then detach high-mounted stop light assembly while disconnecting
connector.
INSTALLATION

Vehicle - Recommended Fluids/Chemicals
Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle -

Recommended Fluids/Chemicals
NUMBER: 01-067-08
DATE: 09/09/08
SUBJECT: Recommended Materials
Introduction
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 4372
2) Apply a thin coat of Molykote AS-880N or equivalent to both faces of inner shim.
3) Apply a thin coat of Molykote M7439 or equivalent to pad clip
Diagrams
Starter Motor: Diagrams
MT Vehicles
Clutch Switch
Check continuity between clutch switch terminals. If NG, replace the clutch switch.
Page 6548
Locations
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2049
Page 333
6. Remove bolts which hold rear sensor harness brackets.
7. Remove rear ABS sensor from rear arm. 8. When inspecting rear tone wheel, remove rear drive
shaft as rear tone wheel is unitized with BJ assembly of rear drive shaft.
CAUTION: -
Be careful not to damage pole piece located at tip of the sensor and teeth faces during removal.
- Do not pull sensor harness during removal.
INSTALLATION
1. Install rear drive shaft to the vehicle. 2. Temporarily install rear ABS sensor on rear arm.
Page 2228
Page 738
Disclaimer
Page 4402
2) Apply a thin coat of Molykote AS-880N or equivalent to both faces of inner shim.
3) Apply a thin coat of Molykote M7439 or equivalent to pad clip
Page 1262
Oil Pan: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
By visual check make sure oil pan, oil strainer, oil strainer stay and baffle plate are not damaged.
Page 6470
Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection
Water Temperature Gauge
Measure resistance between temperature gauge terminals. If NG, replace tachometer and water
temperature gauge assembly. If OK, replace combination meter printed circuit.
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5624
Alarm Module: Adjustments
1. IMPACT SENSITIVITY
NOTE: Before adjustment, make sure the security control module has been securely installed on
the bracket.
1. Remove security control module. 2. Adjust the sensitivity adjust screw in security control module.
NOTE: After adjusting, be sure to plug the adjust screw hole.
3. Install security control module. 4. Perform impact sensitivity test.

Page 3232
A: REMOVAL
Except VTD model
VTD model
B: INSTALLATION
Page 4455
3) Remove the inner and outer brake pads, making sure not to mix the two pads.
4) Remove the OEM shims from the pads and DISCARD.
5) Spray brake clean on a shop towel and clean the grease from the back sides of the brake pads.
Make sure that the slit on the front side of the brake pad is clean.
6) Inspect BOTH SIDES OF the brake rotors at this time. If they are grooved, scored, or discolored,
they should be resurfaced before proceeding to the next step.
7) Compress the caliper pistons at this time. Clean the inner sides of the caliper with brake cleaner.
This will allow the shims to adhere.
8) Remove the blue plastic film from the inner side of the new shim and adhere it to the brake pads.
DO NOT REMOVE THE BLUE FILM FROM THE OUTSIDE OF THE SHIM AT THIS TIME.
9) Install the brake pads back into the pad holders, making sure to grease the ends of the brake
pads (slotted ends).
10) Remove the blue film from the outside of the shims and swing the caliper back into position.
11) Install the lower bolt and tighten both bolts, torque the bolts to 29 ft lbs. Reinstall the wheels
and start the engine. Depress the brake pedal 5 times to make sure the glue on the shims is
secured firmly.
Note:
Refer to the Warranty Labor Time Guide for claim information.
Disclaimer
Page 1296
Intake Manifold: Specifications Throttle Body Sequence
Throttle Body Sequence
Information Not Supplied by Manufacturer

Page 1512
3. Remove air intake duct as a unit.
3. Remove spark plug cords by pulling boot, not cord itself.
4. Remove spark plugs with the spark plug socket.
LH SIDE
Page 1898
Page 4056
Service and Repair
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair
O-RING CONNECTIONS -
Use new O-rings.
- In order to keep the O-rings free of lint which will cause a refrigerant gas leak, perform operations
without gloves and shop towels.
- Apply the compressor oil to the O-rings to avoid sticking, then install them.
- Use a torque wrench to tighten the O-ring fittings: Over-tightening will damage the O-ring and
tube end distortion.
- If the operation is interrupted before completing a pipe connection, recap the tubes, components,
and fittings with a plug or tape to prevent contamination from entering.
- Visually check the surfaces and mating surfaces of O-rings, threads, and connecting points. If a
failure is found, replace the applicable parts.
- Install the O-rings at right angle to the tube beards.
- Use the oil specified in the service specifications to lubricate the O-rings. Apply the oil to the top
and sides of the O-rings before installation. Apply the oil to the area including the O-rings and tube
beads.
- When connecting hoses or pipes, use 2 wrenches (a torque wrench for tightening). While
securing one side with a wrench, tighten the other
Diagrams
Power Steering Pump: Diagrams
OIL PUMP
NOTE: The illustration for 2.5 L model is shown. (Not shown for 3.0 L model because it cannot be
disassembled.)
CAUTION ^
Wear working clothing, including a cap, protective goggles, and protective shoes during operation.
^ Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
^ Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust or dirt.
removal, installation, disassembly and replacement.
^ Be careful not to burn your hands, because each part on the vehicle is hot after running.
^ Use SUBARU genuine steering fluid, grease etc. or the equivalent. Do not mix steering fluid,
grease etc. with that of another grade or from other manufacturers.
^ Apply steering fluid onto sliding or revolution surfaces before installation.
^ Before installing O-rings or snap rings, apply sufficient amount of steering fluid to avoid damage
and deformation.
^ Before securing a part on a vice, place cushioning material such as wood blocks, aluminum plate,
or shop cloth between the part and the vice.

Page 1311
4. Install power steering pipes onto right side intake manifold protector.
5. Install power steering pump drive V-belt.
6. Adjust V-belt. 7. Install V-belt covers.
8. Install resonator chamber.

Clutch Slave Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03

INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURE
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
5) Add brake fluid.
For Turbo models
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.


Diagrams
Hood Lock And Remote Openers

Page 4538
When removing the ECU, the brake pipes remain connected.
1) Disconnect all electrical connections from the ECU (top and bottom).
2) Remove the two installation bolts (M8) from the bracket of the hydraulic unit and the ECU
assembly.
3) Lift the hydraulic unit and the ECU assembly from the bracket by about 5 cm (0.2 inches) and
support it with a small piece of wood.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to deform the brake pipe during this procedure.
4) Unlock the connector for the motor power source and disconnect the connector as shown in
figure 2.
5) Remove the 6 torx head screws (T20) which join the hydraulic unit and the ECU assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse the torx head screws once removed.
6) Remove the ECU from the hydraulic unit by pulling it gently.
NOTE:
A) Do not insert anything into the gap between the ECU and the hydraulic unit.
B) Do not pry the ECU, but pull it straight from the hydraulic unit.
Information
Date: 01/05/09
INTRODUCTION
sensor 3.
O2 sensor.
Page 6368
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 6880
Wiper Blade Heater: Service and Repair
Wiper Deicer
Repair
1. Clean broken portion with alcohol or white gasoline. 2. Mask both side of wire with thin film.
3. Apply conductive silver composition (DUPONT No.4817) to broken portion. 4. After repair, check
wire.
Page 2369

Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid
Total Capacity ......................................................................................................................................

........................................................... 9.5L (10.0 Qt) Service Capacity ..............................................
.................................................................................................................................................. 2.5L
(2.6 Qt)
Page 2061
Page 2594
5. Tighten bolt which holds center exhaust pipe to hanger bracket.
6. Connect connector to rear oxygen sensor connector. 7. Install under cover. 8. Lower the vehicle.
9. Connect front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector.
NOTE: The rear catalytic converter is integrated with front catalytic converter. Therefore, the
procedure for installing rear catalytic converter is the same as the description above.
Page 6872
Page 4586
Page 4832
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4208
Page 405
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Coolant Capacity MT 6.0 L
Approximate
AT 6.2 L
Page 4096
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Diagrams
Hood Lock And Remote Openers

Page 4403
4) Apply a thin coat of Molykote M7439 or equivalent to caliper support.

Page 2297
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 610

Page 4849
Page 517
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
AT VEHICLES

Page 463
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Service and Repair
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
2.5 Model 1. Drain fluid from the reservoir tank. 2. Disconnect pipe D from return hose and suction
hose from oil pump.
CAUTION: ^
Do not allow fluid from the hose end to come into contact with pulley belt.
^ To prevent foreign matter from entering the hose and pipe, cover the open ends of them with a
clean cloth.
3. Remove reservoir tank from bracket by pulling it upwards.
3.0 Model 1. Drain fluid from the reservoir tank. 2. Disconnect return hose and suction hose from
reservoir tank.
CAUTION: ^
^ To prevent foreign matter from entering the hose, cover the open ends of them with a clean cloth.
3. Remove reservoir tank from bracket by pulling it upwards.
INSTALLATION
2.5 Model 1. Install reservoir tank to bracket.
2. Connect pipes D to return hose and suction hose to oil pump.

Page 3024

Page 2546
DISCLAIMER
Removal
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal
1. Remove A/C belt. (With A/C model)
2. Remove A/C belt tensioner. (With A/C model)
3. Remove crankshaft pulley bolt. To lock crankshaft, use ST 499977100 Crankshaft Pulley
Wrench. 4. Remove crankshaft pulley.
5. Remove belt cover (LH). 6. Remove front belt cover.

Page 2952
2. Disconnect washer motor connector. 3. Disconnect rear window glass washer hose from washer
motor, then plug connection with a suitable cap.
4. Remove the two bolts which hold the washer tank, then take the tank away from the working
area.
5. Remove spark plugs cord by pulling boot, not cord itself.

Evaporator Case: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Intake Unit
REMOVAL
1. Using refrigerant recovery system, discharge refrigerant. 2. Disconnect ground cable from
battery.
3. Remove bolts securing expansion valve and pipe in engine compartment. 4. Remove instrument
panel.
5. Remove keyless unit and CRU unit. 6. Disconnect sunroof connector.
7. Disconnect servo motor connector. 8. Disconnect heater blower power transistor connector. 9.
Disconnect heater blower motor connector.
Page 1465
Disclaimer
Page 4651
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Vehicle Dynamics Control (Vdc)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove console cover. 3. Disconnect connector from yaw
rate and lateral G sensor. 4. Remove yaw rate and lateral G sensor.
CAUTION: Do not drop or bump yaw rate and lateral G sensor.
5. Remove bracket from body.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Do not install yaw rate and lateral G sensor in the wrong direction. There is an arrow on the
sensor showing which side faces the front of the vehicle.
made.
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
Front Wiper Motor and Link
REMOVAL
1. Remove cowl panel. 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector.
3. Loosen bolts and nuts to remove wiper link.
4. Loosen bolts and nut to remove motor.
INSTALLATION

Page 566
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 893
Page 3039
Page 4880
and brake switch.
Page 4613
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:

Page 1374
^ Inspected and/or repaired in accordance with instructions outlined in the Product Campaign
Bulletin.
Any Authorized Subaru Dealer failing to perform the applicable service procedures defined in this
bulletin to correct affected vehicles in their inventory (new, used, demo) prior to the vehicle being
placed in service may be in breach of the Subaru Dealer Agreement.
PARTS INFORMATION
Subaru Cooling System Conditioner
Note:
Subaru Cooling System Conditioner is packaged in cases that contain 12 bottles. Each affected
vehicle requires one (1) bottle. Each case contains enough material to treat 12 vehicles.
Prior to the release of this Service Program, each dealer will automatically be shipped a quantity of
Subaru Cooling System Conditioner equivalent to 40% of their vehicle sales, or up to a maximum
of 20 cases.
Additional quantities of the Cooling System Conditioner will be available through normal parts
channels after 2/15/04. In order to maintain an adequate part supply, SOA requests that Dealers
only order quantities necessary to satisfy anticipated demand.
REPAIR PROCEDURES
The repair procedure involves adding Subaru Cooling System Conditioner to the cooling system.
Follow the recommended procedure that applies to either a "Cold" or "Hot" engine.
Caution:
The engine cooling system is under pressure and may he extremely hot. To prevent personal injury
or vehicle damage he sure to take appropriate precautions while performing this procedure.
Service Procedure on a COLD Engine
NOTE:
Impreza and Forester vehicle system components are shown in the images below, but Legacy and
Outback models are similar. Consult your service manual for exact locations and illustrations.
1. Install rags around the radiator filler neck to prevent coolant from contaminating the engine area.
2. Take off the radiator cap and set aside.
3. Extract 125ml (4.23 oz.) of coolant from the radiator using a suitable device such as a piston
syringe, meat or poultry baster, antifreeze hydrometer, etc.
Page 2994

Page 4327
State Emissions Test - OBD System MIL Check
Information
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins State Emissions Test - OBD System MIL
Check Information
NUMBER: 11-62-00
DATE: 05/08/00
APPLICABILITY: All 2001 Model Subaru Vehicles
SUBJECT: On-Board Diagnostic System Check During State Emission Test
THIS BULLETIN IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY.
This bulletin provides additional information to SUBARU Bulletin 11-55-99, which stated that
Subaru plans to revise the current Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) illumination strategy for most
2001 MY and newer models, such that the MIL status is "OFF" in both the Key-On-Engine-Off
(KOEO) and Key-On-Engine-Running (KOER) positions.
Only 2001 MY Impreza 2.2L and Legacy 2.5L vehicles with manual AWD transmission will retain
the 1996-2000 model MIL illumination strategy, in which the MIL is illuminated and commanded
"ON" in the KOEO position. (If the MIL is checked in the KOER position, the MIL will indicate "OFF"
assuming no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present.) SUBARU plans to revise the MIL
illumination strategy as described in the first paragraph for these models in 2002.
Page 5042
Page 4875
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 1325
6. Disconnect connectors from throttle position sensor and idle air control solenoid valve.
7. Disconnect air by-pass hose from throttle body.
8. Remove throttle body.
9. Disconnect connector from air assist injector solenoid valve.
10. Disconnect air by-pass hoses from air assist solenoid valve.
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 6325
other parts.
Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
REAR GATE KEY CYLINDER
1. Remove the rear gate lower trim.
2. Remove the rod clamp. Remove the nut. Replace the key cylinder.
Page 4078
stay.
Page 3226

Locations
Page 374
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Pressure Switch (Triple Switch)
Pressure Switch (Triple Switch)
1. Connect the manifold gauge to the service manifold on the high-pressure side.
2. Remove the pressure switch harness connector. Using a circuit tester, inspect the ON-OFF
operation of the pressure switch.
Page 5763
Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Heater Vent Duct
Heater Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel. 2. Remove nine screws.
3. Remove heater vent duct.
INSTALLATION

Page 45
8. Remove pressure gauges from FL and FR caliper bodies. 9. Remove air bleeder screws from
the RL and RR caliper bodies.
10. Connect the air bleeder screws to the FL and FR caliper bodies. 11. Connect two pressure
gauges to the RL and RR caliper bodies. 12. Bleed air from the pressure gauges and the FL and
FR caliper bodies. 13. Perform ABS sequence control. 14. When the hydraulic unit begins to work,
at first the RR side performs decompression, holding, and compression, and then the RL side
performs
15. Read values indicated on the pressure gauges and check if they meet the standard value. 16.
After checking, remove the pressure gauges from caliper bodies. 17. Connect the air bleeder
screws to RL and RR caliper bodies. 18. Bleed air from brake line.
2. CHECKING THE HYDRAULIC UNIT ABS OPERATION WITH BRAKE TESTER
1. In the case of AWD AT vehicles, install a spare fuse with the FWD connector in the main fuse
box to simulate FWD vehicles. 2. Prepare for operating ABS sequence control.
3. Set the front wheels or rear wheels on the brake tester and set the select lever's position at
"neutral".
Page 2668
4. Remove two bolts which install washer tank on body.
5. Disconnect connector from front window washer motor. 6. Disconnect connector from rear gate
glass washer motor.
7. Disconnect rear window glass washer hose from washer motor, then plug connection with a
suitable cap. 8. Move washer tank, and secure it away from working area.
9. Remove spark plug cords from spark plugs (#2 and #4 cylinders).
Page 6752
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 3448
Page 3846
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
C: INSPECTION
NOTE: Do not disassemble propeller shaft. Check the following and replace if necessary.
1. Tube surfaces for dents or cracks 2. Splines for deformation or abnormal wear 3. Joints for
non-smooth operation or abnormal noise 4. Center bearing for free play, noise or nonsmooth
operation 5. Oil seals for abnormal wear or damage 6. Center bearing for breakage Check the
following points with propeller shaft installed in vehicle.
1. JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS 1. Remove center exhaust pipes. 2. Remove heat shield cover.
3. Check for any looseness of yoke flange connecting bolts and center bearing retaining bolts.
2. SPLINES AND BEARING LOCATIONS 1. Remove center exhaust pipes. 2. Remove rear
exhaust pipe and muffler. 3. Remove heat shield cover.
4. Turn propeller shaft by hand to see if abnormal free play exists at splines. Also move yokes to
see if abnormal free play exists at spiders and
bearings.
3. RUNOUT OF PROPELLER SHAFT 1. Remove center exhaust pipes. 2. Remove rear exhaust
pipe and muffler. 3. Remove heat shield cover.
4. Turn rear wheels by hand to check for "runout" of propeller shaft.
NOTE: Measure runout with a dial gauge at the center of front and rear propeller shaft tubes.
Runout: Limit 0.6 Nm (0.024 inch)
4. CENTER BEARING FREE PLAY 1. Remove front and center exhaust pipes. 2. Remove rear
exhaust pipe and muffler. 3. Remove heat shield cover.
Page 2272
Part 2
Page 2247
DISCLAIMER
Page 1765
Radiator Cap: Specifications
Radiator Cap Standard Pressure 93 - 123 kPa
Limit 83 kPa
Page 1906
Part 3
Page 2577

Page 4943
Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Basic Inspection
Perform the inspection procedures and repair or replace defective parts.
^ In accordance with the provided table, check all removed parts for wear and damage, and make
repair or replacement if necessary.
Service Limit Make a measurement as follows. If it exceeds the specified service limit, replace the
parts with new ones.
CAUTION: ^
Fix oil pump on a vise to make a measurement. At this time, hold oil pump with the least possible
force between two wood pieces.
^ Do not set outside of flow control valve or pulley on a vise; otherwise outside or pulley might be
deformed. Select properly sized wood pieces.
1. Play of pulley shaft
On condition: P: 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)

Page 2172
DISCLAIMER
Service and Repair
Case: Service and Repair
Air Bag Harness: Testing and Inspection Inspection Items (After A Collision)
INSPECTION
MAIN HARNESS
- Harness is open, lead wire is exposed, and corrugated tube is noticeably cracked.
- Connector is scratched or cracked.

Page 5348
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Disarming
When servicing, be sure to turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal,
then wait for more than 20 seconds before starting work.
Arming
Reconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

Airbag Systems
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Airbag Systems
Inspection Locations After a Collision
INSPECTION
AIRBAG MODULE (DRIVER)
1. Check for the following, and replace damaged parts with new parts.
- Airbag module is cracked or deformed.
- Harness and/or connector is cracked, deformed or open. Lead wire is exposed.
- The module surface is fouled with grease, oil, water or cleaning solvent.
2. When installing a new driver's airbag module, check the following. If necessary, install a new
airbag module and steering wheel.
- The steering wheel is in the way, making it difficult to install the airbag module.
- The clearance between the driver's airbag module and steering wheel is not constant.
- Free play of the steering wheel is over specifications in axial and radial directions.
AIRBAG MODULE (PASSENGER)
- Airbag module is cracked or deformed.
- Harness and/or connector is cracked, deformed or open. Lead wire is exposed.
- The module surface is fouled with grease, oil, water or cleaning solvent.
AIRBAG MODULE (SIDE)
- Front seat is damaged or deformed.
- Lead wire is exposed.

Page 5197
Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection
Power Transistor (Heater Blower Resistor)
1. MANUAL A/C
Check continuity between connector terminals. If NG, replace the blower resistor.
Page 411
S/BELT-01 - Seat Belt Warning System

Page 4600
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove or disconnect the following parts at engine compartment.

1. Disconnect connector for brake fluid level indicator. 2. Remove brake pipes from master cylinder.
3. Remove master cylinder installing nuts. 4. Disconnect vacuum hose from brake booster.
2. Remove the following parts from the pedal bracket.
1. Snap pin and clevis pin 2. Four brake booster installing nuts
3. Remove brake booster while shunning brake pipes.
NOTE: -
Be careful not to drop brake booster. Brake booster should be discarded if it has been dropped.
- Use special care when handling operating rod. If excessive force is applied to operating rod,
sufficient to cause a change in the angle in excess of ±3°, it may result in damage to the power
piston cylinder.
- Use care when placing brake booster on the floor.
- Do not change the push rod length. If it has been changed, reset the projected length "L" to the
standard length.
CAUTION: If external force is applied from above when brake booster is placed in this position, the
resin portion as indicated by "P", may be damaged.
INSTALLATION
1. Mount brake booster in position.

Page 2513
second letter.
NOTE:
Procedures
Rear Bumper: Procedures
REPAIR
Refer to front bumper repair.

Page 2180
LH SIDE
Page 3818
Disassembly and Assembly
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Straighten bent claw of larger end of DOJ boot.
2. Loosen band by means of screwdriver or pliers with care of not damaging boot. 3. Remove boot
band on the small end of DOJ boot in the same manner. 4. Remove the larger end of DOJ boot
from DOJ outer race.
5. Pry and remove round circlip located at the neck of DOJ outer race with a screwdriver. 6. Take
out DOJ outer race from shaft assembly.
7. Wipe off grease and take out balls.
CAUTION: The grease is a special grease (grease for constant velocity joint). Do not confuse with
other greases.
NOTE: Disassemble exercising care not to lose balls (6 PCs).
8. To remove the cage from the inner race, turn the cage by a half pitch to the track groove of the
inner race and shift the cage. 9. Remove snap ring, which fixes inner race to shaft, by using pliers.
10. Take out DOJ inner race. 11. Take off DOJ cage from shaft and remove DOJ boot.
CAUTION: Be sure to wrap shaft splines with vinyl tape to prevent boot from scratches.
12. Remove BJ boot in the same procedure as DOJ boot. 13. Thus, disassembly of axle is
completed, but BJ is unable to be disassembled.
D: ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Use specified grease.
BJ side: Molylex No. 2 (Part No. 723223010)

Page 83
Page 2954
CLEANING

Page 1897
Page 4809
Page 6108
subject to this recall is taken into dealer new or used inventory, or is in the dealership for service,
necessary steps should be taken to ensure the recall correction has been made before selling or
releasing the vehicle.
PARTS INFORMATION
Prior to the release of this recall, dealers will automatically be shipped a quantity of replacement
right and left front seat inner slide rail assemblies equivalent to 60% of their vehicle sales.
Additional quantities of the replacement inner seat rail assemblies will be available through normal
parts supply after 3/10/01. In order to maintain an adequate part supply, SOA requests that Dealers
only order parts necessary to supply anticipated demand.
IDENTIFY THE AFFECTED INNER FRONT SEAT RAIL THAT REQUIRES REPLACEMENT
Note:
Only manually adjustable driver and passenger front seats are affected. Outer front seat slide rails
are NOT affected. Power driver seats are NOT affected.
There is no inspection procedure. SOA has predetermined the affected front seat inner slide rail(s)
for each vehicle. It will be necessary to access the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry in the Dealer
Communication System in order to determine the appropriate repair procedure for each vehicle.
The description next to the campaign code will identify the inner slide rail that requires
replacement. Only replace the seat rail identified in the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry.
REPAIR PROCEDURES
Replace the appropriate front seat inner slide rails by following the procedures outlined below and
by referring to procedures found in Section 7 - SE of the 2001 Legacy and Outback Service Manual
as indicated.
1. Prepare for Seat Assembly Removal
Note:
Before proceeding, as a matter of customer courtesy, record radio settings prior to disconnecting
the battery. Please remember to reset the radio and clock when repairs have been completed.
^ Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal before starting seat removal.
2. Seat assembly removal
Remove the seat from the vehicle by following the instructions in steps 2 through 11 in section A of
the Service Manual: Removal. Please use extreme care when removing the seat assembly to avoid
damage to the vehicle body, seat or trim.
^ Vehicles equipped with side air bag - disconnect the side air bag connector located under the
seat cushion.
Caution:
Wait 20 seconds or more after disconnecting the battery before disconnecting the side air bag
connector.
^ Vehicles equipped with heated seats - disconnect the seat heater connector.
^ Disconnect the seat belt warning system connector.
Note:
Make seat bolt removal easier by moving the seat to full forward position when removing the two
rear bolts, and move the seat to full rear position when removing front two bolts.
Page 3501
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2764
Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove lower cover.
3. Disconnect connector from fuel pump relay. 4. Remove fuel pump relay from mounting bracket.
INSTALLATION

Front Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Front Wiper Motor
Front Wiper Motor
1. When battery is connected to terminal of connectors, confirm that motor operates at low speed.
2. When battery is connected to terminal of connectors, confirm that motor operates at high speed.
3. Connect battery to terminals of connector, and remove terminal connection with motor rotated at
low speed, and stop wiper motor through
operation.
4. Connect battery and confirm that motor stops at automatic stop position after motor operates at
low speed again.
Locations
Page 744
Check the high tension cables for carbon tracks (leakage) If leakage is evident, the high tension
cables should be replaced and the ignition coil cleaned (see Figure 2 and refer to Step 3).
Step 3) Ignition Coil Cleaning Procedure (if carbon track is less than 5 mm)
^ If there is any evidence of carbon, clean the surface of the ignition coil using a clean, soft rag
dampened with water.
^ Permit the ignition coil to dry.
^ Clean the same area of the ignition coil using a clean soft rag dampened with Isopropyl alcohol.
Note:
Do not insert the high tension cables until the ignition coil is dry.
PART INFORMATION
The high tension cables for Impreza and Forester have changed to a silicone rubber boot which
has a shiny appearance Please note that the part numbers have not changed The Legacy and
Outback high tension cables also have a silicone rubber boot.
Page 89

Page 6285
H/L (4L)-01
4-Light Model
Page 2444
Note:
ABS
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications A/C Refrigerant Oil
A/C Refrigerant Oil
A/C Refrigerant Capacity 4.50 oz.

Map Light: Testing and Inspection
Spot Light

Page 1825
11. Connect over flow hose.
12. Install air intake duct. 13. Lift-up the vehicle.
14. Connect radiator outlet hose and heater hose to water pump.
15. Connect connectors to radiator main fan (A) and sub fan (a) motors.
16. Install under cover. 17. Lower the vehicle.

Page 4570
14. Remove bolt and clamp from rear floor. 15. Detach grommet from rear floor. 16. Remove cable
assembly from cabin by forcibly pulling it backward. 17. Detach parking brake cable from cable
guide at rear trailing link.
INSTALLATION
Install (new) parking brake assembly in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: -
Be sure to pass cable through cable guide inside the tunnel.
- Be sure to adjust the lever stroke.

Page 1885

Page 4639
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 4514
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2671
Electrical - Low Battery Voltage Affects Other Systems
Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Low Battery Voltage Affects Other Systems
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
If you should encounter a dead battery, especially if the voltage had dropped below 7 volts, there is
a possibility that other components may have been affected. Charge the baffery following
established procedure using the Midtronics test equipment. Pay affention to the electrical
equipment such as relays, radio, horns, lights and other like equipment. All items should be
checked for proper operation prior to releasing the vehicle back to the customer.
Page 699
1. Place vehicle on a turning radius gauge. 2. While depressing brake pedal, turn steering wheel
fully to the left and right. With steering wheel held at each fully turned position, measure both
the inner and outer wheel steering angle.
Steering angle:
Adjustment Turn tie-rod to adjust steering angle of both inner and outer wheels.
CAUTION: ^
Check toe-in.
^ Correct boot if it is twisted.

Page 3641
Disclaimer
Page 3011
Ignition System - Spark Plug Replacement Intervals
Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Spark Plug Replacement Intervals
PLATINUM SPARK PLUG CHANGE INTERVALS
The Techline occasionally gets calls concerning the change intervals on platinum plugs and why
some need to be changed at 30,000 miles and others at 60,000 miles. The reason for this is the
spark plugs on 2.5L NA engines, the electrode side of this plug is platinum but the plug core side is
not platinum. Therefore, it is a maintenance interval every 30,000 miles. On the 2.5L Turbo and
3.OL engines, both the electrode side and the plug core side are platinum. Therefore, it is a
maintenance interval every 60,000 miles.
Page 4670
2. Install front ABS sensor on strut and wheel apron bracket.
3. Place a thickness gauge between ABS sensor's and tone wheel's tooth face. After standard
clearance is obtained over the entire perimeter, tighten
ABS sensor on housing to specified torture.
CAUTION: Check the marks on the harness to make sure that an distortion exists.
4. After confirmation of the ABS sensor clearance, connect connector to ABS sensor. 5. Connect
connector to battery ground cable.
Page 1056
Page 1318
23. Remove fuel injector pipe.
24. Remove bolt which installs fuel pipes on intake manifold. 25. Remove fuel pipe assembly and
pressure regulator, from intake manifold.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install fuel pipe assembly and pressure regulator, etc. to intake manifold.
2. Tighten bolt which installs fuel pipes on intake manifold.
3. Connect right side fuel hose to injector pipe, and tighten clamp screw.
Page 36
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS ECU
Applications/Service
NUMBER: 06-31-03 DATE: 07/15/03
APPLICABILITY: 2000-04MY Legacy, Outback, Baja, Impreza, and Forester Vehicles
INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
1) The identification mark is located on the upper surface of the hydraulic unit.
2) When the hydraulic pressure system is found to be the source of trouble, replace the entire
hydraulic unit and the ECU assembly.
3) When the ECU is solely replaced, always confirm that the identification mark on the packaging of
the ECU spare part is same as that of the hydraulic unit and the ECU assembly. This identification
mark is embossed on the top of the aluminum housing of the hydraulic unit. If the electronic control
module is the reason for replacement, this unit only is to be replaced. Replacing the the assembly
is not a matter for warranty.
4) Do not reuse the screws removed from the hydraulic and ECU assemblies. When reassembling
the hydraulic unit and the ECU, use new screws (P/No: 27585FE010).
REPAIR PROCEDURE
4) Remove the air cleaner case from the inner fender well.
Removal of ECU
NOTE:
Specifications
CLEARANCE
Intake 0.20 +/- 0.02 mm
Exhaust 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm

Page 6362
OIL/P-01
Page 4027

Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
1. DOOR SWITCH
2. REAR GATE LATCH SWITCH
3. TRUNK ROOM LIGHT SWITCH

Page 2378
Engine Control Module: Diagrams AT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 5284
Refrigerant: Service Precautions
1. HFC-134a A/C SYSTEM
- Unlike the old conventional HFC-12 system components, the cooling system components for the
HFC-134a system such as the refrigerant and compressor oil are incompatible.
- Vehicles with the HFC-134a system can be identified by the label "A" attached to the vehicle.
Before maintenance, check which A/C system is installed in the vehicle.
2. REFRIGERANT
- The HFC-12 refrigerant cannot be used in the HFC-134a A/C system. The HFC-134a refrigerant,
also, cannot be used in the HFC-12 A/C system.
- If an incorrect or no refrigerant is used, poor lubrication will result and the compressor itself may
be damaged.
3. HANDLING OF REFRIGERANT
- The refrigerant boils at approx. -30 °C (-22 °F). When handling it, be sure to wear safety goggles
and protective gloves. Direct contact of the refrigerant with skin may cause frostbite. If the
refrigerant gets into your eye, avoid rubbing your eyes with your hands. Wash your eye with plenty
of water, and receive medical treatment from an eye doctor.
- Do not heat a service can. If a service can is directly heated, or put into boiling water, the inside
pressure will become extremely high. This may cause the can to explode. If a service can must be
warmed up, use hot water in 40 °C (104 °F) max.
- Do not drop or impact a service can. (Observe the precautions and operation procedure
described on the refrigerant can.)
- When the engine is running, do not open the high-pressure valve of the manifold gauge. The
high-pressure gas will back-flow resulting in an explosion of the can.
- The refrigerant is non-toxic and harmless under normal operating circumstance, but it may
change to phosgene (a noxious fume) under open flames or high temperatures (caused by a
cigarette or heater).
- Provide good ventilation and do not work in a closed area.
- Never perform a gas leak test using a halide torch-type leak tester.
- In order to avoid destroying the ozone layer, prevent HFC-134a from being released into the
atmosphere. Using a refrigerant recovery system, discharge and reuse it.
Page 2868
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 6384
Page 6714
Page 256


Page 2356

Page 768
Page 661
CAUTION: ^
screws.
harness assembly.
Page 3852
Page 6284
Dimmer Switch: Electrical Diagrams
H/L (2L)-01
2-Light Model
Page 6185
Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Command Switch
Check continuity between cruise control command switch terminals. If NG, replace cruise control
command switch.
Page 816
Page 4810
Page 4786
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 1651
Coolant Reservoir: Specifications
Coolant Overflow Reservoir
Reservoir Tank Capacity .....................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................. 0.45 L
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5361
Air Bag Harness: Testing and Inspection Front Sub Sensor Harness
INSPECTION

Page 2887
Interrupt Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1627
Page 2844
Disclaimer
Page 4539
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:

Page 3529
6. Remove the crossmember. 7. Remove the rear cushion rubber.
B: INSTALLATION
1. PITCHING STOPPER
1. Install the pitching stopper.

Tightening torque: T1: 50 Nm (5.1 kgf-m, 37 ft. lbs.) T2: 58 Nm (5.9 kgf-m, 43 ft. lbs.)
2. Install the air intake duct and cleaner case.
2. CROSSMEMBER AND CUSHION RUBBER 1. Install the rear cushion rubber.
2. Install the crossmember.
Tightening torque: T1: 35 Nm (3.6 kgf-m9 26 ft. lbs.) T2: 75 Nm (7.6 kgf-m, 55 ft. lbs.)
3. Remove the transmission jack. 4. Install the heat shield cover. 5. Install the front center, rear
exhaust pipes and the muffler.
Page 135

Page 4494
CAUTION: Place a wooden block as shown in Figure to prevent damage to piston.
5. Remove piston seal from caliper body cylinder. 6. Remove lock pin boot and guide pin boot.
ASSEMBLY
14 inch TYPE 1. Clean caliper body interior using brake fluid. 2. Apply a coat of brake fluid to piston
seal and fit piston seal in groove on caliper body. 3. Apply a coat of brake fluid to the entire inner
surface of cylinder and outer surface of piston. 4. Apply a coat of specified grease to boot and fit in
groove on ends of cylinder and install piston boot onto cylinder.
Grease: NIGLUBE X-2 (Part No. 003606000)
5. Insert piston into cylinder.
6. Position boot in grooves on cylinder and piston. 7. Apply a coat of specified grease to lock pin
and guide pin outer surface, cylinder inner surface, and boot grooves.

Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL
REMOVAL
1. Open hood. 2. Remove wiper arm. 3. Remove front panel seal.
4. Loosen clips to remove cowl panel.
INSTALLATION

Page 2271
Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection MT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 4969
Page 5952
When using the 360° flexible wand, turn the stop screw counterclockwise 3 turns from closed, and
adjust the air pressure to 80 psi.
When using the 90° hook wand, turn the stop screw counterclockwise 3 turns from closed, and
Gun Disassembly And Clean out
Important:
The spray equipment must be cleaned between vehicle applications. X-121B (Black Wax) must be
removed from the gun and lines prior to applying the X-121 (Oil) to the next vehicle. Use the
following procedure for equipment cleaning.
1) Turn the spray gun stop screw (as pictured above) clockwise until completely closed Blow the
360° flexible and 90° hook wands clear with air by pulling the spray gun trigger.
2) Disconnect the gun from the air supply.
3) Remove the spray tube using the quick disconnect.
4) Relieve the pressure from the gun by slowly turning the paint pot to the left until all the air
escapes. Do not use the gun trigger to relieve pressure from the pot. This will cause the wax to flow
into the air line supply of the gun.
5) Remove the paint pot and drain any remaining wax. Rinse the pot with mineral spirit based
solvent.
If the gun is to be stored for more than 4 weeks, completely clean the gun with mineral spirits.
Always store the gun assembled. Do not soak the 360° flexible or 90° hook wands in solvent.
Prolonged exposure to solvent will cause damage.

REPAIR PROCEDURES DETAILS
Step 1: Raise vehicle on a lift.
Step 2: Remove the left and right rear wheels.
Step 3: Identify the component name of the rear sub-frame assembly as follows:
(A) Front Crossmember
(B) RH/LH Side Member
(C) Rear Crossmember
Step 4: Clean the entire rear sub-frame assembly
Note:
It is important that the rear sub-frame be properly cleaned in order for the rust proofing process to
be effective. Use caution not to damage components such as emission lines.
(a) Clean the outside of the entire sub-frame assembly of mud, dirt, salt and other debris using a
high pressure washer.
(b) Clean the inside of the entire sub-frame assembly by carefully applying high pressure water
through the bottom holes of the
Page 493
Note:
Page 914
Disclaimer
Page 3184

Page 5060
Notification letters will be sent to owners of vehicles originally sold in or currently registered in
"salt-belt" states. SOA will prepare and mail those letters on or around July 7, 2003. A copy of the
Owner Notification Letter is included.
OWNERS LOCATED OUTSIDE THE AFFECTED "SALT-BELT" STATES
Notification letters will only be mailed to owners of vehicles that were originally sold, or at one time
registered, in "salt-belt" states.
After release of this recall, vehicles proviously registered in a non-"salt-belt" state may relocate into
a "salt-belt" area. In some cases, the vehicle may be registered in a "non-salt-belt" state, and
driven in a "salt-belt" area. These vehicles may not show coverage when checked using the
Vehicle Coverage Inquiry in the Dealer Communication System (DCS). SOA requests that dealers
located in "salt-belt" states check all vehicles within the affected VIN range for recall coverage. If it
is determined that an owner of a vehicle, within the affected VIN range, relocates or uses the
vehicle in a "salt-belt" area, dealers are requested to contact the DCS department and request a
WWM-96 recall control number be issued. The dealer should perform this procedure on this
procedure on the vehicle at no cost to the customer.
bulletin.
Vehicles in Dealer Inventory
correct all affected vehicles in their inventory (new, used or demo). Additionally, whenever a vehicle
New or used vehicles listed in a recall/campaign that are in dealer stock must be:
1) Immediately identified.
2) Tagged or otherwise marked to prevent their delivery or use prior to inspection and/or repair
3) Inspected and/or repaired in accordance with the instructions outlined in this Product Campaign
Bulletin.
bulletin to correct all affected vehicles in their inventory (new, used, demo) prior to the vehicle
being placed in service may be subject to civil penalties of up to $5,000 per violation (i.e., for each
vehicle), as provided in 49 USC sub-section 30165(a) of the Safety Act, and will also be in breach
of the Subaru Dealer Agreement.
PARTS INFORMATION
Special Tools
Each dealer located in the affected "salt-belt" states will automatically be shipped, at no cost, one
rust-proofing spray gun set that contains a spray gun and necessary lines, nozzles and wands.
Dealers located outside of the affected "salt-belt" states can order the spray gun kit by contacting
their District Service Operations Manager.
Rust-proofing Materials
Note:
The rust-proofing material is packaged in cases of 12 one quart containers ( 2 quarts of Nox-Rust
X-210 and 10 quarts of X-121B). Each case contains enough material to rust-proof 10 vehicles.
Prior to the release of this recall, only dealers located in affected "salt-belt" states will automatically
be shipped a quantity of rust-proofing material equivalent to 40% of their vehicle sales, or up to a
maximum of 15 cases. It will be necessary for dealers located outside of affected "salt-belt" states
to order rust-proofing material as needed.
Note:
SOA Will notify owners who either purchased or at one time resided in a "salt- belt" state. Some of
these owners may no longer live in a salt-belt" area. In these cases, it will be necessary for dealers
located outside the "salt-belt" area to order supplies to rust-proof these affected vehicles.
Parking Brake Warning Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 4168

Page 2070
AT VEHICLES
Page 3102
ECM Reprogramming Instructions
Tools needed: Select Monitor, short programming cable, P/N 22775Z0C00, and Select Monitor
Reprogramming Cartridge P/N 24082X0A54.
Important:
Only use the specified Select Monitor Programming Cable for reprogramming.
Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Specifications

Page 703
4. Measure distance "L" between center line of loci of the axles.
Thrust angle: Less than 30' when "L" is equal to or less than 23 mm (0.91 inch).
Adjustment 1. Make thrust angle adjustments by turning toe-in adjusting bolts of rear suspension
equally in the same direction. 2. When one rear wheel is adjusted in a toe-in direction, adjust the
other rear wheel equally in toe-out direction, in order to make thrust angle
adjustment.
3. When left and right adjusting bolts are turned incrementally by one graduation in the same
direction, the thrust angle will change approximately
10' ["L" is almost equal to 7.5 mm (0.295 inch)]. Thrust angle: 0° ± 30'
Page 3495
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 657
Page 959
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................. Dexron III
Page 3208

Page 1675
7. Disconnect over flow hose.
8. Remove reservoir tank.
9. Remove radiator main fan motor assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE: When the main fan motor assembly cannot be installed as is, loosen the sub fan motor
assembly securing bolts to install it.
Page 2330

Page 3392

Page 2001

Carrier Pinion Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Horn Switch

Page 1660
Page 4176

Page 4048
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Solar Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Sun-Load Sensor (Auto A/C)
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Wiring Diagram
Page 2262
Part 2
Page 1720
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 3291
8. Disconnect ATF cooler hoses from ATF filter.
NOTE: ^
9. Remove AT cooler pipe from frame.
10. Remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet pipes.
CAUTION: When removing outlet pipe, be careful not to lose ball and spring used with retaining
screw.
Tail Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
1. HEADLIGHT RELAY
Check continuity between terminals when terminal No.4 is connected to battery and terminal No.3
is grounded.
2. TAIL AND ILLUMINATION RELAY
Page 2754
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Case
A: REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector from intake air temperature sensor. (MT vehicles)
3. Loosen clamp which connects air cleaner case to throttle body. 4. Disconnect hoses from air
cleaner case.
5. Remove bolts which install air cleaner case to stays. 6. Remove air cleaner case.
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
Inspect for cracks and loose connections.

INSPECTION

Transverse Link
Control Arm: Service and Repair Transverse Link
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect stabilizer link from transverse link.
2. Remove bolt securing ball joint of transverse link to housing. 3. Remove nut (do not remove
bolt.) securing transverse link to crossmember.
4. Remove two bolts securing bushing bracket of transverse link to vehicle body at rear bushing
location. 5. Extract ball joint from housing.
6. Remove bolt securing transverse link to crossmember and extract transverse link from
crossmember.
INSTALLATION
1. Temporarily tighten the two bolts used to secure rear bushing of the transverse link to body.
NOTE: These bolts should be tightened to such an extent that they can still move back and forth in
the oblong shaped hole in the bracket (which holds the bushing).
2. Install bolts used to connect transverse link to crossmember and temporarily tighten with nut.
CAUTION: Discard loosened self-locking nut and replace with a new one.
3. Insert ball joint into housing. 4. Connect stabilizer link to transverse link, and temporarily tighten
bolts.
CAUTION: Discard loosened self-locking nut and replace with a new one.
Page 526
Page 6091
Diagrams
Page 2454
Page 5974
Carpet: Service and Repair Luggage Floor Mat
LUGGAGE FLOOR MAT
REMOVAL
Remove clips, then detach rear floor mats and boxes.
INSTALLATION

Page 1475
Page 3283
CAUTION: Align ST with torque wrench while tightening AT oil filter.
ST 498545400 OIL FILTER WRENCH
3. Install ATF filter to bracket.
4. Install ATF filter assembly to vehicle.
5. Install front left mud guard. 6. Add ATF.

Ignition Switch
the body harness.
ignition connector.

Page 4204
Page 2703
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair
FUEL DELIVERY, RETURN AND EVAPORATION LINES
REMOVAL
1. Set vehicle on the lift. 2. Release fuel pressure. 3. Open fuel filler flap lid and remove fuel filler
cap. 4. Remove fuel tank. 5. Remove fuel filler pipe. 6. Remove floor mat.
7. Remove fuel delivery pipes and hoses, fuel return pipes and hoses, evaporation pipes and
hoses.
Page 4634
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 6341

Page 80
Page 552
Page 619
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
bumper.
Page 3570
Page 3100
Page 2549
C: REMOVAL

Page 5471
Page 2692
13. Fuel return hose C 14. Evaporation hose G 15. Clamp 16. Grommet 17. Fuel pipe ASSY 18. Air
vent hose A 19. Evaporation hose H 20. Evaporation hose I 21. Air vent hose B 22. Air vent pipe
23. Evaporation hose J 24. Evaporation hose K 25. Evaporation hose L 26. Fuel tank pressure
sensor hose 27. Fuel filler hose 28. Evaporation pipe B 29. Fuel tank pressure sensor 30. Fuel filler
pipe 31. Ring A 32. Fuel filler cap 33. Ring B 34. Packing 35. Shut valve 36. Evaporation hose M
37. Evaporation hose N 38. Canister 39. Canister lower bracket 40. Cushion rubber 41. Canister
upper bracket 42. Drain valve 43. Drain filter 44. Drain filter hose A 45. Drain valve hose 46. Drain
filter hose B 47. Pressure control solenoid valve 48. Evaporation hose O 49. Evaporation pipe C
50. Pipe protector 51. Evaporation hose P 52. Pressure control solenoid valve hose 53. Canister
front bracket
Tightening torque: N.m (kgf-m, ft-lb) T1: 4.5 (0.46, 3.3)
T2: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
T3: 18 (1.8, 13.0)
T4: 23 (2.3, 16.6)
T5: 33 (3.4, 25)

Page 2932
Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 2565
Page 5604
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Side Airbag Sensor
REMOVAL
20 seconds before starting work. 3. Remove center pillar lower trim. 4. Remove Outer Belt
(FRONT).
5. Remove bracket (A), and then remove cap (B).
6. Using E12 TORX(R) remove two TORX(R) nuts, and then detach side airbag sensor (A).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Use new TORX(R) nuts during re-assembly.
Front Sub Sensor
REMOVAL
20 seconds before starting work. 3. Remove front bumper.
Page 4256
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Vehicle Dynamics Control (Vdc)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery around cable.
2. Remove lower cover of instrument panel and disconnect connectors on the back side of the
cover.
3. Remove three bolts which secure the fuse box onto body side, then move the fuse box aside.
4. Remove two bolts which install VDCCM onto body side bracket.
Page 3195
Page 2421
INSTALLATION

Page 6315
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
A: SPECIFICATIONS
Connecting Rod Bearing:
Oil Clearance:
Standard
......................................................................................................................................................
0.020 - 0.046 mm (0.0008 - 0.0018 inch) Limit ....................................................................................
.................................................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch)
Thickness At Center Portion:
Standard
......................................................................................................................................................
1.486 - 1.498 mm (0.0585 - 0.0590 inch) 0.03 mm (0.0012 inch)
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 1.504 -
1.512 mm (0.0592 - 0.0595 inch)
0.05 mm (0.0020 inch)
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 1.514 -
1.522 mm (0.0596 - 0.0599 inch)
0.25 mm (0.0098 inch)
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 1.614 -
1.622 mm (0.0635 - 0.0639 inch)
Connecting Rod Bushing:
Clearance Between Piston Pin And Bushing:
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
........................ 0 - 0.022 mm (0 - 0.0009 inch) Limit ...........................................................................
........................................................................................................... 0.030 mm (0.0012 inch)
Page 4769
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 1753
Remove the hose from the reservoir tank. Cut 20 mm from the bottom of the hose at a 45° angle.
Reinstall hose in reservoir tank.
Start engine and permit to fully warm up.
Turn off engine and allow to fully cool down.
Recheck coolant level in reservoir and add coolant if needed.
Note:
Warranty/Claim Information
Page 2477
Transmission Mount: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Repair or replace parts if the results of the inspection below are not satisfactory.
1. PITCHING STOPPER Make sure that the pitching stopper is not bent or damaged. Make sure
that the rubber is not stiff, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
2. CROSSMEMBER AND CUSHION RUBBER Make sure that the crossmember is not bent or
damaged. Make sure that the cushion rubber is not stiff, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 2575
Specifications
Page 1780
Page 3865
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Limited Warranty coverage period, please refer to the
Warranty Labor Time Guide for the applicable labor operation numbers and labor time. Please use
Fail Code JAB-48.
Disclaimer
Evaporative Shut Valve: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

Page 1876

Page 6731
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
Combination Switch (Light)
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel lower cover. 2. Remove screws which secure upper column cover to
lower column cover. 3. Disconnect connector from combination switch.
4. Remove screws which secure switch and remove switch.
INSTALLATION

Page 4217
C: REMOVAL

Page 3079
^ Rear vehicle speed sensor
15. Remove oil pan.
NOTE: Drain oil into a container.
16. Disconnect duty solenoids and ATF temperature sensor connectors. Remove connectors from
clip and disconnect connectors at 9 places.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Pass the harness assembly through the hole in the transmission case.
Page 6426

Page 5860
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Service and Repair
Rear Gate Latch Lock Actuator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear gate latch assembly.
2. Remove the rear gate lock actuator.
INSTALLATION

Page 1784

Page 2126
Disclaimer
Page 715
A: INSPECTION

properly.
MANUAL.
NOTE: ^
Page 804
3) Remove bolt, and then remove resonator chamber.
4) Disconnect spark plug cords from spark plugs (#1 and #3 cylinders). 5) Disconnect PCV hose
from rocker cover (RH). 6) Remove bolts, then remove rocker cover (RH).
9. When inspecting #2 and #4 cylinders;
1) Disconnect battery cables, and then remove battery and battery carrier.
2) Remove the two bolts which hold washer tank.

Page 894
bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Manual.
Page 4268
4. Bleed air from the pressure gauges. 5. Perform VDC sequence control. 6. When the hydraulic
FR caliper bodies. 13. Perform VDC sequence control. 14. When the hydraulic unit begins to work,
performs
4. CHECKING THE HYDRAULIC UNIT VDC OPERATION WITH BRAKE TESTER 1. Prepare for
operating VDC sequence control.
Page 5714
replace the switch.
Page 1256
Oil Filter: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. After installing oil filter, run engine and make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE: The filter element and filter case are permanently jointed; therefore, interior cleaning is not
necessary.
2. Check the engine oil level.

Page 3750
Differential Mount: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground terminal from battery. 2. Jack-up the vehicle.
3. Using a transmission jack, support rear differential, and remove rear differential member.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install rear differential member.
Page 5916
Page 3452
Page 5986
Disarming
Arming

Page 5791
6. Remove seven clips of trim panel using clip remover to remove trim panel.
INSTALLATION

Page 2935
Brake Caliper: Customer Interest Brakes - Squealing Noise
NUMBER: 06-30-01R DATE: 03/06/02

of brake shims)

FOLLOWING VINS)
modification.
FIELD PROCEDURE:
shims.
Note:
way.
Page 5864
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair
Rear Gate Outer Handle
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear gate lower trim. 2. Remove the rear gate latch rod.
3. Remove the nut holding the rear gate outer handle, and then remove the rear gate outer handle.
INSTALLATION

Page 4497
NIGLUBE RX-2 (Part No. 003606000)
6. Install the piston boot to the caliper body, and attach boot rind.
7. Apply a coat of specified grease to guide pin, outer surface, sleeve outer surface, cylinder inner
surface, and boot grooves.
8. Install guide pin boot on caliper body. 9. Install lock pin boot on caliper body and insert lock pin
sleeve into place.
Page 2744
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
IDLE AIR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
2. Disconnect connector from idle air control solenoid valve.
3. Disconnect air by-pass hose (A) from idle air control solenoid valve.
4. Remove idle air control solenoid valve from throttle body.
AT VEHICLES
Page 262

Page 5007
4. Remove bolts which secure link front to rear arm and detach link front.
NOTE: Link front bushing cannot be replaced alone. Always replace link front and bushing as a
single unit.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally, install link front and tighten nuts
^ Install link front with protruded side facing front.
INSPECTION
Visually check link front for damage or bends.
Stabilizer Link Rear
REMOVAL

Page 935
Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair Replacement
A: REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: ^
The FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT3 or 4 brake fluid must be used.
^ Cover bleeder with waste cloth, when loosening it, to prevent brake fluid from being splashed
over surrounding parts.
^ Avoid mixing different brands of brake fluid to prevent degrading the quality of the fluid.
^ Be careful not to allow dirt or dust to get into the reservoir tank.
NOTE: ^
During bleeding operation, keep the clutch reservoir tank filled with brake fluid to eliminate entry of
air.
^ Clutch pedal operating must be very slow.
^ For convenience and safety, it is advisable to have two people working.
^ The amount of brake fluid required is approximately 70 ml (2.4 US fl. oz. 2.5 Imp fl. oz.) for total
clutch system.
1. Either jack-up vehicle and place a safety stand under it, or lift-up vehicle. 2. Remove both front
and rear wheels. 3. Draw out the brake fluid from reservoir tank with syringe. 4. Refill reservoir tank
with recommended brake fluid.
Recommended brake fluid: FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT3 or 4 brake fluid
5. Bleed air from oil line with the help of a co-worker.

Page 5387
Roll Connector: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection
INSPECTION
- Combination switch and roll connector is cracked or deformed.

Service and Repair
Clutch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Clean transmission exterior.
3. Remove oil pan.
4. Disconnect solenoid and sensor connectors. Remove connectors from clip and disconnect
connectors at 8 places.
Page 4066
DISCLAIMER
Set Load Rating
Pressure Plate: Specifications sb00legac_210repsm3-002a
sb00legac_210repsm3-002a
Clutch Cover Bolts 15.7 Nm
Diaphragm Set Load kg 580 kgf

Page 1363
4. Place the syringe into the overflow reservoir and push the coolant out of the syringe.
5. Shake the bottle of cooling system conditioner until all contents are thoroughly mixed.
6. Pour the entire bottle of cooling system conditioner into the radiator.
NOTE:
Do NOT pour the cooling system conditioner into the overflow reservoir. The conditioner Will settle
at the bottom of the reservoir and not mix in the cooling system.
7. Reinstall the original radiator cap.
8. Remove rags from around the radiator filler neck.
9. Start the vehicle and let it run until the engine is warm. This ensures the conditioner circulates
and there are no air pockets in the cooling system.
Service Procedure on a HOT Engine
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position (engine off).
2. Turn the air conditioning "ON" to cycle the cooling fans. Leave the air conditioning "ON" for
approximately two (2) minutes. This will lower the pressure in the cooling system.
NOTE:
The pressure relief on a "HOT" engine is approximate. Caution should always be taken when
removing the radiator cap on a "HOT" engine. Additional A/C "ON" time may be required to relieve
cooling system pressure properly.
3. Turn off the air conditioning.
4. Return the ignition key to the LOCK ("OFF") position.
5. Follow procedure for COLD engine listed above.
Credit for performing this Service Campaign will be based on the submission of properly completed
Add Engine Cooling System Conditioner - Use the following information for claim submission:
Page 6221
Page 6854
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear Wiper Arm
Adjustment
1. Operate rear wiper once.
2. Align blade to rear defogger heat wire (A).

Page 4496
1. Remove the boot ring.
2. Remove the piston boot. 3. Gradually supply compressed air via inlet of caliper body to force
piston out.
CAUTION: -
Place a wooden block as shown in Figure to prevent damage to piston.
- Do not apply excessively high-pressure.
4. Remove piston seal from caliper body cylinder. 5. Remove lock pin sleeve and boot from caliper
body. 6. Remove guide pin boot.
ASSEMBLY
1. Clean caliper body interior using brake fluid. 2. Apply a coat of brake fluid to piston seal and fit
piston seal in groove on caliper body. 3. Apply a coat of brake fluid to the entire inner surface of
cylinder and outer surface of piston. 4. Insert piston into cylinder.
Grease:
Page 4980
6. Secure valve assembly to ST1 and ST2.
7. Put ST3 over pinion, and insert oil seal, then force-fit oil seal into housing using ST4.
ST1 926370000 INSTALLER A ST2 34099FA100 STAND BASE ST3 926360000 INSTALLER A
ST4 927620000 INSTALLER B
NOTE: ^
Apply specified power steering fluid to oil seal and ST3, being careful not to damage oil seal lip.
^ Push oil seal until ST3 contacts housing end face.
8. Remove ST3, and fit backing washer. 9. Force-fit ball bearing using ST3.
ST1 926370000 INSTALLER A ST2 34099FAIOO STAND BASE ST3 927640000 INSTALLER B
NOTE: Be careful not to tilt ball bearing during installation.
10. Install snap ring using snap ring pliers.
NOTE: Rotate snap ring to check for proper installation.
Rack Housing Oil Seal

Front Exhaust Pipe
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Front Exhaust Pipe
A: REMOVAL
2. Disconnect front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. 3. Lift-up the vehicle.
4. Disconnect rear oxygen sensor connector.
5. Separate front and center exhaust pipe assembly from rear exhaust pipe.
WARNING: Be careful, exhaust pipe is hot.

Page 4195
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2500
Page 5321
Step 1 - 6
- Sensor identified that sunlight is at maximum. Then, A/C system is controlled to COOL side.
- Sensor identified that sunlight is at minimum. Then, A/C system is controlled to HOT side.
NOTE: When the sunload sensor is checked inside the passenger compartment or in the shade,
code "25" may appear on the indicator. Always check the sunload sensor in a place where it
senses direct sunlight.
Page 1619

Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 1849
1. Install front exhaust pipe to center exhaust pipe.
CAUTION: Replace gaskets with new ones.
2. Install front and center exhaust pipe assembly to the vehicle.
3. Temporarily tighten bolt which installs front and center exhaust pipe assembly to hanger bracket.
5. Install under cover.
6. Tighten bolts which install front and center exhaust pipe assembly to rear exhaust pipe.

Electrical Specification
A/C - Performance Concerns
Aspirator: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Performance Concerns
TITLE: Automatic A/C System Aspirator Tubes
APPLIES TO: All models with Auto A/C
SERVICE TIP:
Subaru has received some calls on vehicles equipped with the Automatic Climate Control system
with the concern of the heater blowing cold air.
If you get such a concern, make certain the system's aspirator tube is properly connected and if so,
also make sure it's not kinked or restricted by a harness or something else.
The vehicle's aspirator tube tells the system what the cabin temperature is. Without this input, it
cannot adjust the system properly to maintain the correct temperature.
Also, be aware that this can cause the a/c system to not cool properly as well in warmer
temperatures.
This tube should be inspected anytime you have a poor heating/cooling concern on these vehicles.
Page 540
Page 6249

Front Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection Front Catalytic Converter
INSPECTION
holes or rusting.
Page 3387

Trunk Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection

Page 4713
Alternator: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. ROTOR
1. Slip ring surface
Inspect slip rings for contamination or any roughness of the sliding surface.
Clean or polish with #500 to #600 emery paper if defective.
2. Slip ring outside diameter
Measure slip ring outside diameter. It slip ring is worn, replace rotor.
3. Continuity test
Check continuity between slip rings. If continuity does not exist, replace rotor.
Page 2176
4. Overheating
White or light gray insulator with black or gray brown spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate
engine overheating. Moreover, the appearance results from incorrect ignition timing, loose spark
plugs, wrong selection of fuel, hotter range plug, etc. It is advisable to replace with plugs having
colder heat range.
Air Cleaner
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove bolt (A) which install air cleaner case to stays. 2. Remove the clip (B) above the air
cleaner case. 3. Remove air cleaner.
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Fasten with a clip after inserting the lower tab of the case.
C: INSPECTION
Replace if excessively damaged or dirty.

Page 4869
Page 3383

Diagrams
Fixed Glass (Sedan)

Page 3817
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Lift-up vehicle, and remove rear wheel cap and wheels.
CAUTION: Be sure to loosen and retighten axle nut after removing wheel from vehicle. Failure to
follow this rule may damage wheel bearings.
3. Unlock axle nut. 4. Remove axle nut using a socket wrench. 5. Remove rear differential
assembly.
6. Remove axle nut and drive shaft. If it is hard to remove, use ST1 and ST2.
ST1 926470000 AXLE SHAFT PULLER ST2 927140000 PLATE
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage tone wheel when removing rear drive shaft.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Insert BJ into rear hub splines.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage tone wheel.
2. Using ST1 and ST2, pull drive shaft into place.
ST1 922431000 AXLE SHAFT INSTALLER ST2 927390000 ADAPTER
CAUTION: Do not hammer drive shaft when installing it.
3. Tighten axle nut temporarily. 4. Install rear differential. 5. While depressing brake pedal, tighten
axle nut using a socket wrench.
Tightening torque: 235 Nm (24 kgf-m, 174 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: ^
Use a new axle nut for rear use only (Olive color).
^ Always tighten axle nut before installing wheel on vehicle. If wheel is installed and comes in
contact with ground when axle nut is loose, wheel bearings may be damaged.
^ Be sure to tighten axle nut to specified torque. Do not overtighten it as this may damage wheel
bearing.
6. After tightening axle nut, lock it securely.

Page 1207

Page 2368
Page 561
Page 4322
3. Remove bush, spacer and spring. 4. Remove the brake pedal pad.
ASSEMBLY
1. Attach stop light switch, etc. to pedal bracket temporarily. 2. Clean inside of bores of clutch pedal
and brake pedal, apply grease, and set bushings into bores. 3. Align bores of pedal bracket, clutch
pedal and brake pedal, attach brake pedal return spring and clutch pedal effort reducing spring
(vehicle with
hill holder), and then install pedal bolt.
NOTE: Clean up inside of bushings and apply grease before installing spacer.
4. Set brake pedal position by adjusting position of Stop light switch.

Page 3841
Page 4792
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Service and Repair
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
REMOVAL
1. Remove heater unit. 2. Remove screws to separate heater unit case.
3. Remove heater core.
INSTALLATION

Page 1549
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Mandatory Replacement Fluids
NUMBER: 01-151-00
DATE: 07/15/00
NOTE:
reference.
Department.
DISCLAIMER
Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
Page 2617
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(H6)-243B Engine
Page 3760
OWNER NOTIFICATION
owner notification is scheduled to be mailed in early January, 2001.
DEALER CAMPAIGN RESPONSIBILITY
Dealers are to promptly inspect all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to the vehicle owner
Page 5924
Important:
solvent.

Note:
Page 458
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
Neutral Safety Switch: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
ground terminal.
C: INSPECTION
1. BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH Inspect the back-up light switch. Refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Warning Indicators.
2. NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 2. Disconnect connector neutral
position switch.
Service and Repair
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 2017
Oil Filter: Mechanical Specifications
Oil Filter Type Full-Flow Filter Type
Filtration Area 1,000 cm2
Outer Diameter X Width 80 x 70 mm
Oil Filter To Engine Thread size M20 x 1.5

Page 39
For vehicles within the warranty period, this repair can be claimed using the warranty information
shown.
Disclaimer
Page 601
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5519

Page 3028

Page 3813
CAUTION: Use specified grease.
BJ side: NTG2218 (Part No. 28093AAOOO) SFJ side: SSG6003 (Part No. 28093TAOOO)
1. Place BJ boot and small boot band on BJ side of shaft.
2. Place drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION: Do not place drive shaft directly in the vise; use wooden blocks.
3. Apply a coat of specified grease [60 to 70 g (2.12 to 2.47 oz.)] to BJ. 4. Apply an even coat of
specified grease [20 to 30 g (0.71 to 1.06 oz.)] to the entire inner surface of boot. Also apply grease
to shaft.
NOTE: The inside of the larger end of BJ boot and the boot groove shall be cleaned so as to be
free from grease and other substances.
5. Install boot projecting portion to BJ groove. 6. Set large boot band in place.
7. Install boot projecting portion to shaft groove.

General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1668

Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 4871
Relay And Fuse
Fuse/Relay Panel Details

Page 4782
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 1170
1. Install crankshaft sprocket. 2. Install camshaft sprocket. 3. Install timing belt assembly. 4. Install
belt cover. 5. Install crankshaft pulley. 6. Install V-belt.
Page 1407
Timing Belt
1. Remove timing belt guide. (MT vehicle only)
2. If alignment mark a and/or arrow mark (which indicates rotation direction) on timing belt fade
away, put new marks before removing timing belt
as shown.
1. Turn crankshaft using ST. Align mark a of sprocket to cylinder block notch b and ensure that
right side cam sprocket mark c, cam cap and
cylinder head matching surface d and/or left side cam sprocket mark e and belt cover notch f are
properly adjusted.
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET

Page 4047
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 3503
Intake Air Temperature and Pressure Sensor
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Air Temperature and Pressure Sensor
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect spark plug cord from ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
3. Disconnect connector from intake air temperature and pressure sensor.
4. Remove intake air temperature and pressure sensor.

Specifications
Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications
Clearance Between Shaft and Arm Standard 0.020 - 0.054 mm
Limit 0.10 mm
Page 4271
CAUTION: Do not drop or bump relay box.
INSTALLATION
1. HYDRAULIC UNIT (H/U)
1. Install hydraulic unit. 2. Connect hydraulic unit ground cable to body.
3. Connect brake pipes to their correct hydraulic unit connections. 4. Secure hydraulic unit
connector to connector bracket.
5. Connect connector to hydraulic unit. 6. Install air intake duct. 7. Connect ground cable to battery.
2. RELAY BOX
1. Install relay box and connector bracket.

Page 6296
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 6144
Disclaimer
Page 3890
Page 4035
Page 3427
Page 5756
2. WAGON
CAUTION: -
Handle bumper carefully to avoid damage to bumper face.

- Do not damage body during removal or installation of bumper.
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Fit slider (A) to guide pin (B) securely.
Page 5570
Confirm that all six (6) tamper resistant TORX head bolts are present (as illustrated). If any of the
bolts are missing it will be necessary to replace the seatbelt assembly. Do not attempt to substitute
missing bolts.
If all bolts are present, use a No. TR 20 TORX driver to check for proper bolt torque as indicated
below. If necessary, tighten the bolts to the proper torque specification.
Note:
The number 3 bolt is partially covered by a tab on the retractors plastic cover. Carefully bend the
tab back enough to access the bolt. Do not attempt to remove the plastic cover.
Tightening torque for No. 1 and 2 bolts 22 +/- 2 kgf.cm (19 +/- 2 in-lb) Tightening torque for No. 3 -
6 bolts 13 +/- 2 kgf.cm (11 +/- 2 in-lb)
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
If during the inspection process any of the seatbelt retractor cover bolts were found to be missing,
replace the seatbelt assembly following the procedures in the applicable Service Manual.
RENTAL CAR
requires right front seatbelt replacement provided:
1. The LOT number found on the original seatbelt matches the affected one and the seatbelt
requires replacement because one or more of the retractor cover bolts were found to be missing.
2. The part is ordered VOR next day air.
Credit for performing this Service Program will be based on the submission of properly completed
Inspection Only - Verification of the right front seatbelt lot number. An affected lot number is not
present, indicating that further inspection is not necessary. A total of 0.2 labor hours will be
automatically credited upon claim submission.
Page 88
Exterior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams

Page 2073
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
AT VEHICLES

Page 4815
Page 6415
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 6440
Page 4779
Fuse: Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 4255
3. Connect brake pipes to their correct ABSCM&H;/U connections. 4. Using cable clip, secure
ABSCM&H;/U harness to bracket. 5. Connect connector to ABSCM&H;/U.
CAUTION: -
Be sure to remove all foreign matter from inside the connector before connecting.
- Ensure that the ABSCM&H;/U connector is securely locked.
6. Install air intake duct. 7. Connect ground cable to battery. 8. Bleed air from the brake system.
Page 3281
3. Using ST, remove ATF filter.
4. Get new ATF filter and apply a thin coat of ATF to the oil seal
^ ATF Filter Assembly
1. Remove battery. 2. Drain ATF completely. 3. Remove front left mud guard.
4. Release clamp of IN, OUT of oil filter hose, and remove hose from pipe.
NOTE: ^
Plug the pipe.
^ Put a mark etc., to distinguish IN, OUT on pipe and hose.
5. Remove oil filter bracket installation nut. 6. Remove ATF filter assembly. 7. Using ST, remove
ATF filter.
8. Get new ATF filter and apply a thin coat of ATF to the oil seal.
B: INSTALLATION
1. 2.5L MODEL 1. Install ATF filter. Turn it by hand, being careful not to damage oil seal. 2. Using
ST, tighten ATF filter to transmission case.
Calculate ATF filter torque specifications using the following formula. T2 = L1/(L1 + L2) x T1 T1: 14
Nm (1.4 kgf-m, 10.1 ft. lbs.) [Required torque setting] T2: Tightening torque L1: ST length 0.078 m
(3.07 inch) L2: Torque wrench length
Page 1484
Page 2869
Disclaimer
Page 3289
NOTE: ^
7. Remove ATF cooler pipe from frame.
8. Remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet pipes.
CAUTION: When removing outlet pipe, be careful not to lose ball and spring used with retaining
screw.
2. 3.0L MODEL 1. Remove battery and washer tank. 2. Lift-up the vehicle.

Page 6374
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 3848
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
^ Before removing propeller shaft, wrap metal parts with a cloth or rubber material.
^ In case of DOJ type, before removing propeller shaft, wrap metal parts (installed at the rubber
boot of center DOJ) with a cloth or rubber material, as shown in the figure. Rubber boot may be
damaged due to interference with adjacent metal parts while bending the DOJ during removal.
1. Disconnect ground terminal from battery. 2. Move select lever or gear shift lever to "N". 3.
Release the parking brake. 4. Jack-up vehicle and support it with sturdy racks. 5. Remove center
exhaust pipes. 6. Remove rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
7. Remove heat shield cover.
8. Remove the four bolts which hold propeller shaft to rear differential.
NOTE: ^
Put matching mark on affected parts before removal.
^ Remove all but one bolt.
9. Remove the two bolts which hold center bearing to vehicle body.
Page 2929

Page 3596
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission assembly from vehicle body.
2. Install ST on flywheel.
ST 498497100 CRANKSHAFT STOPPER
3. Remove clutch cover and clutch disc.
CAUTION: ^
Take care not to allow oil on the clutch disc facing.
^ Do not disassemble either clutch cover or clutch disc.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install flywheel and ST.
2. Insert ST into the clutch disc and install them on the flywheel by inserting the ST end into the
pilot bearing.
ST 499747100 CLUTCH DISC GUIDE

Page 1105
8. Using ST1 and ST2, press sub seal into place. 9. Apply sufficient grease to oil seal lip. Specified
grease: SHELL 6459N
CAUTION:
^ Do not apply pressure more than 3.92 kN (0.4 ton, 0.4 US ton, 0.4 Imp ton).
^ If specified grease is not available, remove bearing grease and apply Auto Rex A instead.
^ Do not mix different types of grease.
10. Install back plate to rear housing. Tightening torque:52 ± 6 Nm (38.3 ± 4.3 ft. lbs.).
11. Using ST1 and ST2, press bearing into hub.
ST1 927080000 HUB STAND ST2 927450000 HUB INSTALLER
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure more than 25 kN (2.5 ton, 2.3 US ton, 2.5 Imp ton).
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the rattle of bearing, give the tires a shake with grasping both the upper and lower sides
of the tire. And also inspect to rotate the wheel
smoothly.
2. The lean of axis direction: Limit: Maximum 0.05mm (0.0020 in).
3. Inspect the removed parts for wear and damage. If defective replace with new ones.
CAUTION: If bearing is faulty, replace it as the bearing set. Be sure to replace oil seal at every
overhaul.
4. Install knuckle.
Page 3382

Coolant Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of
Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
Page 140

INSPECTION

Page 4335
BRAKE/W-01
Page 4656
7. Remove bolts which hold roll connector and steering angle sensor onto steering column.
8. Remove roll connector and steering angle sensor.
NOTE: Do not turn steering angle sensor as it's center position has been recognized by VDCCM.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Ensure that front wheels are set in straight forward direction.
1. Place steering angle sensor on steering column, confirming that the sensor is positioned as in
the figure. 2. Conduct centering of roll connector.
3. Place roll connector over steering angle sensor and tighten bolts which secure roll connector and
steering angle sensor.
Front Differential
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Front Differential
A: REPLACEMENT
2. Drain differential gear oil completely.
CAUTION: Directly after the engine has been running, the differential gear oil is hot. Be careful not
to burn yourself.
NOTE: Tighten differential gear oil drain plug after draining differential gear oil.
3. Pour gear oil into the gauge hole.
Recommended fluid: Use GL-5 or equivalent. Gear oil capacity: 1.2 l (1.3 US qt., 1.1 Imp qt.)
4. Check the level of the differential gear oil.
1. Ensure the vehicle is in safe condition.
NOTE: Do not check the oil level nor add oil to the case with the front end of the vehicle jacked-up;
this will result in an incorrect reading of the oil level.
2. Check whether the oil level is between the upper (F) and lower (L) marks. If it is below the lower
limit mark, add oil until the level reaches the
upper mark.
Page 2517
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 3958
8. Remove cushion rubber from body.
9. Remove joint and then extract straight pin.
10. Remove gear shift lever.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install the joint to the transmission and secure with the straight pin.
2. Insert gear shift lever from room side.
NOTE: After inserting rod and stay, temporarily put them onto transmission mount.
Page 516
{Engine Control System} in Selection Menu. 8. Select {1. Current Data Display & Save} in Engine
Control System Diagnosis. 9. Select {1.12 Data Display} in Data Display Menu.
10. Adjust throttle position sensor to the proper position to match with the following specifications.

Page 976
Fluid - Differential: Description and Operation
^ Rear differential gear oil Recommended oil
brands.
Page 5941
Additional quantities of the rust-proofing material will be available through the "Genuine Subaru
Automotive Chemical" program on Subarunet after 6/21/03. In order to maintain an adequate part
supply, SOA requests that Dealers only order quantities necessary to satisfy anticipated demand.
through your Regional / Distributor Service Office.
Listed below is claim entry information
Clean and Rust-proof Rear Suspension Sub-frame - Use the following information for claim
submission:
Enter labor operation 161-251 for 0.9 labor hours.
Enter the applicable part number. Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus applicable handling
allowance.
Page 1591

Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid DOT 3 or 4

Page 1001
Refrigerant: Service Precautions
2. REFRIGERANT
- The HFC-12 refrigerant cannot be used in the HFC-134a A/C system. The HFC-134a refrigerant,
also, cannot be used in the HFC-12 A/C system.
- If an incorrect or no refrigerant is used, poor lubrication will result and the compressor itself may
be damaged.
3. HANDLING OF REFRIGERANT
- The refrigerant boils at approx. -30 °C (-22 °F). When handling it, be sure to wear safety goggles
and protective gloves. Direct contact of the refrigerant with skin may cause frostbite. If the
refrigerant gets into your eye, avoid rubbing your eyes with your hands. Wash your eye with plenty
of water, and receive medical treatment from an eye doctor.
- Do not heat a service can. If a service can is directly heated, or put into boiling water, the inside
pressure will become extremely high. This may cause the can to explode. If a service can must be
warmed up, use hot water in 40 °C (104 °F) max.
- Do not drop or impact a service can. (Observe the precautions and operation procedure
described on the refrigerant can.)
- When the engine is running, do not open the high-pressure valve of the manifold gauge. The
high-pressure gas will back-flow resulting in an explosion of the can.
- The refrigerant is non-toxic and harmless under normal operating circumstance, but it may
change to phosgene (a noxious fume) under open flames or high temperatures (caused by a
cigarette or heater).
- Provide good ventilation and do not work in a closed area.
- Never perform a gas leak test using a halide torch-type leak tester.
- In order to avoid destroying the ozone layer, prevent HFC-134a from being released into the
atmosphere. Using a refrigerant recovery system, discharge and reuse it.
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

Page 3886
Page 6001
NOTE: When installing rear quarter upper trim, be sure to set rear mole as shown in the figure.
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Testing and Inspection
1. TRANSMITTER BATTERY
Measure voltage between battery (+) terminal and (-) terminal.
NOTE: -
Battery discharge occurs during measurement. Complete measurement within 5 seconds.
- During battery voltage measurement, voltage falls more than 1.8 volts in 3 seconds period. If NG,
replace the battery. (Use CR2032 or equivalent.)
Page 2776

Page 1995
Page 3026

Page 1022
- When storing a removed airbag module, do not place any objects on it or pile airbag modules on
top of each other. If the airbag inflates for some reason when it is placed with its pad side facing
downward or under any object, a serious accident may result.
- Do not discard undeployed airbag modules. They could easily cause a serious accident if
accidentally deployed.
- Do not damage the airbag module or drop it.

Page 1585

Page 2550
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 1804
Page 3588
Fail Code JAB-48.
Disclaimer
Page 4216
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
B: ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the three inhibitor switch securing bolts. 2. Shift the select lever to the N range.
3. Insert ST as vertical as possible into the holes in the inhibitor switch lever and switch body.
4. Tighten the three inhibitor switch bolts.
5. Repeat the above checks. If the inhibitor switch is determined to be "faulty", replace it.
Page 1373
purpose is unlawful. Accordingly dealers are urged to limit the use of this listing only for the
purpose of completion of this service program.
OWNER NOTIFICATION
SOA prepare and mail an Owner Notification Letter to owners of the affected vehicles. Because of
the number of vehicles affected and parts availability, owner notification will occur on or about the
dates listed in the following four stages.
1999 MY - February 16, 2004 2000 MY - March 1, 2004 2001 MY - April 1, 2004 2002 MY - May 3,
2004
A copy of the owner notification letter is included at the end of this bulletin.
OWNER REIMBURSEMENT FOR PREVIOUS REPAIRS
Owners are being advised in the owner notification letter, found at the end of this bulletin, that if
they have previously paid an authorized Subaru dealer for repairs related to this Service Program,
they may be entitled to reimbursement. The owners are further advised, to qualify for any
reimbursement they must submit the original repair invoice to Subaru of America, Inc. Please
review the owner notification letter, which explains this procedure so that you are familiar with it,
and can assist owners with any questions.
FUTURE MAINTENANCE
In the future, it will be necessary to add Genuine Subaru Coding System Conditioner to the coding
system of affected vehicles whenever the engine coolant is replaced. As a reminder, owners will be
sent update pages with their notification letter that instructs them to add the pages to their Owner's
Manual and Warranty and Maintenance Booklet Except for the initial application associated with
this campaign, the cost of adding the conditioner is the owner's responsibility.
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET WARRANTY EXTENSION
For owners of affected vehicles that have this Service Program performed promptly, SOA is
extending coverage under the Subaru Limited Warranty for cylinder head gasket external coolant
leaks to a period of 8 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first Warranty coverage begins on
the date the vehicle was delivered to the first retail purchaser. If the vehicle was used as a
demonstrator or company vehicle before being sold at retail, warranty coverage begins on the date
the vehicle was first placed in such service.
As a further condition for this extended warranty coverage to apply, the owner must properly
maintain the vehicle's cooling system in accordance with the recommended maintenance schedule
and Genuine Subaru Cooling System Conditioner must be added each time the engine coolant is
replaced. Resulting damage caused by a lack of maintenance or low coolant level will not be
covered. Replacement of the Cooling System Conditioner during inspection and maintenance
services is not covered under warranty.
Dealers are to promptly service vehicles subject to this Service Program at no charge to the vehicle
owner regardless of mileage, age of the vehicle, or ownership.
bulletin.
correct affected vehicles in their inventory (new, used, demo). Additionally, whenever a vehicle
subject to this Service Program is taken into dealer new or used inventory, or is in the dealership
for service, necessary steps should be taken to ensure the Service Program correction has been
made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
^ Immediately identified.
^ Tagged or otherwise marked to prevent their delivery or use prior to inspection and/or repair.
Page 4510
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 4041
Part 3
Page 527
Page 1501
Locations
FUEL FILLER PIPE

Page 3693
3. Align bores of pedal bracket, clutch pedal and brake pedal, attach brake pedal return spring and
clutch pedal effort reducing spring (vehicle with
hill holder), and then install pedal bolt.
NOTE: Clean up inside of bushings and apply grease before installing spacer.

Page 1852
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Rear Exhaust Pipe
A: REMOVAL
1. Separate rear exhaust pipe from center exhaust pipe.
CAUTION: Be careful exhaust nine is hot.
2. Separate rear exhaust pipe from muffler.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pull down rear exhaust pipe.
3. Remove rear exhaust pipe.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install rear exhaust pipe to muffler.

Page 3355
Only remove those bolts identified in the drawing. It is not necessary to remove the fluid strainer in
order to remove the valve body.
Some models have a fluid pipe between the valve body and transmission case. The pipe must be
removed before removing the valve body bolts. The chart identifies those vehicles.
Remove all but two of the valve body attaching bolts (bolts are noted as A and B types). Loosen
the two remaining bolts enough to allow the remaining transmission fluid to drain.
While the transmission is draining, clean the liquid gasket from the transmission pan.
Peel the liquid gasket with a suitable scraper and then remove any remaining gasket with a 3M
Scotchbright Roll Lock Disk # 07481 (red) or equivalent.
While holding the valve body remove the remaining two bolts and remove the valve body from the
transmission assembly. Place the valve body in a clean, secure area.
Important:
Be sure that the valve body remains in the upright position, otherwise oil will drain from the
accumulator valves.
Parking Rod Replacement
Confirm manual plate is in gear range "3" and drive the straight pin out of the select lever by using
a 4 mm diam. pin remover. Remove and discard the old pin. A new pin is provided in the parking
rod kit.
Turn the manual plate until the detent spring is released as pictured.
Page 4545
"neutral". 3. Operate the brake tester. 4. Perform ABS sequence control. 5. When the hydraulic unit
begins to work, check the following working sequence.

Page 6259
PINPOINT TEST A: MIRROR FACE DOES NOT DARKEN
NOTE:
Mirror will only darken when forward facing (toward windshield) light sensor reads low light (night
conditions) and rear facing (toward drier) light sensor is exposed to light source such as headlights
through rear window.
PINPOINT TEST B: MIRROR FACE IS ALWAYS DARK

Locations
Page 6271
Disarming
Arming

REMOVAL

Page 277
Page 2501
Page 250
Page 1175
Page 4207
Service and Repair
Synchronizer Ring: Service and Repair
Page 37
assembly.
CAUTION:
figure 2.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Page 4026

Page 3770
OWNER NOTIFICATION
DEALER CAMPAIGN RESPONSIBILITY
Dealers are to promptly inspect all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to the vehicle owner
Page 499
Service and Repair
Spoiler: Service and Repair
SPOILER
REMOVAL
1. Open trunk lid. 2. Remove electrical connector (a) of high-mounted stop light. 3. Remove
mounting nut of rear spoiler to remove rear spoiler.
CAUTION: -
When removing nut, do not drop it into trunk
- Pay attention to avoid damage during removal or installation.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Clean mounting surfaces of trunk lid and spoiler before
installation.
Page 3992

Page 6431
H/L (4L)-01
4-Light Model
Diagrams
Page 4297
INSPECTION
1. ABS SENSOR
2. SENSOR GAP
wheel.
and calculating.
inch)

Page 2653
If you have any questions, please contact the Technical Support Line.
DISCLAIMER
Page 6277
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 5383

Page 2150

Page 952
Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications FLUID
FLUID
75W-90 80W-90 GL5

Page 3517
6. While preventing adjusting nut B from moving with a wrench, tighten adjusting nut A.
7. After completion of fitting, make sure that the select lever operates smoothly all across the
operating range.
M/T - Pops Out of Reverse gear
Reverse Idler Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Pops Out of Reverse gear
NUMBER: 03-49-02R DATE: 04/23/04
APPLICABILITY: 1999-2002MY Subaru Vehicles With Manual Transmission
SUBJECT: Popping Out of Reverse
INTRODUCTION
This bulletin replaces the previous bulletin, 03-49-02. Please discard all copies of the previous
bulletin.
If you encounter a customer complaint of vehicle popping out of reverse, refer to the appropriate
section of the applicable MY Service Manual for proper diagnosis. If diagnostic procedures are
exhausted, the cause may be excessive incline by free-play inside the gear and hub assembly, and
reverse gear dimension. As you encounter this customer complaint, use the chart for counter
measure parts. Modified parts are now available which have reduced tolerances inside the gear
and hub assembly; and the reverse gear dimension has been changed.
PARTS LIST
Page 3213

Page 2995
Page 2377
Part 3
Page 1893
Page 4720
Alternator: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assemly
DISASSEMBLY
1. Heat the portion (A) of rear cover to 50 °C (122 °F) with heater drier.
2. Remove the four through bolts. Then insert the tip of a flat-head screwdriver into the gap
between the stator core and front bracket. Pry then apart
to disassemble.
3. Hold rotor with a vise and remove pulley nut.
CAUTION: When holding rotor with vise, insert aluminum plates or wood pieces on the contact
surfaces of the vise to prevent rotor from damage.
4. Remove rotor from front cover.

Page 4511
Specifications
Page 2552
Page 1179
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
Page 5048
Spray time: 12 sec.
SIDE MEMBER RIGHT HAND FRONT (C)
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into hole (C) at front end of the side member until it touches the outer
tube of the rear bushing at the other end of the side member. Spray anti-rust wax for 8 seconds
while pulling the spray nozzle back to the original opening.
Spray time: 8 sec.
SIDE MEMBER LEFT HAND FRONT (G)
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into hole (G) at front end of the side member until it touches the outer
while puling the spray nozzle back to the original opening.
Spray time: 8 sec.
SIDE MEMBER RH / LH CENTER (picture D & E / H & I)
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into the hole (D or H) at center of the side member toward the
crossmember front until it touches the crossmember front. Spray anti-rust wax for 4 seconds while
pulling the spray nozzle back to the original opening.
Also insert the 360° spray nozzle into the hole (D or H) at center of the side member toward the
rear until it touches the outer tube of the rear bushing at the rear end of the side member. Spray
anti-rust wax for 4 seconds while pulling the spray nozzle back to the original opening.
Spray time: 8 sec. X 2 locations = 16 sec.
SIDE MEMBER RIGHT & LEFT HAND CENTER (F/J)
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into the hole (D or H) at center of the side member in an upright
position until it touches the upper side. Spray anti-rust wax for 2 seconds.
CROSSMEMBER REAR (K, L, & M)
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into the opening at left or right end of the crossmember rear until it
touches the side member at the other side. Spray anti-rust wax for 8 seconds while pulling the
spray nozzle back to the original opening.
In addition to the above work, insert the 360° spray nozzle into the same openings at the left and
right ends of the crossmember rear in an upright position until it touches the upper part of the
member. Spray anti-rust wax for 1 second. Spray time: 1 sec. X 2 locations = 2 sec.
Step 8: Application of anti-rust wax (NOX RUST X - 121 Black) to outside of the sub-frame.
Use the 90° hook wand. Turn the stop screw counterclockwise 3 turns from dosed, and adjust the
air pressure to 80 psi. Sprayed amount: 20oz (600cc). Targeted layer thickness should be a
minimum of 2 mil.
(1) Spray anti-rust wax onto the entire subframe surface, hem flange and welded flange of the
crossmember front, the side member left and right and crossmember rear under side.
Spray time : 4 min.
(2) Lower the lift to facilitate the spray work and spray anti-rust wax onto the upper surfaces and
side surfaces of the left and right side members.
Spray time : 2 min.

Step 9: Clean-up and Drying
(1) Wipe off the overflowed wax with a soft cloth.
(2) Make sure the holes located at the bottom of the members accessed in the repair are not
clogged with wax. If clogged, clean the holes thoroughly.
(3) Allow at least one hour drying time before using the vehicle.
Page 3010
Page 3294
1. Install the oil cooler outlet and inlet pipes.
2. Install ATF cooler pipe to frame.
3. Connect ATF cooler hose to transmission.
NOTE: ^
Install so that the hose is not folded over, excessively bent, or twisted.
^ Be careful to insert the hose to the specified position.

Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Shifter A/T: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
E: INSPECTION
1. Inspect removed parts by comparing with new ones for deformation, damage and wear. Correct
or replace if defective. 2. Confirm the following parts for operating condition before assembly.
Moving condition of the selector lever upper... it should move smoothly.
Page 6555

Page 529
Page 5727
Amplifier: Testing and Inspection
Measure resistance between terminal and amplifier body.

Page 2018
Page 537
C: REMOVAL

Page 1718
Page 5702
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 386
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 2143
Page 254
Page 4091
Page 4795
Page 858
Oil Filter: Tools and Equipment
Oil Filter Wrench
AST tool# 5040
66.5mm, 14 flats, Oil Filter Wrench for Subaru. Fits all 2.5L 4-cylinder motors (except Justy and
Loyale). Fits both Subaru factory filter #15208AA100 and Suzuki factory filter #16510-03G00. Also
fits 2008 U.S. model Smart Car.
- 66.5mm with 14 Flats
- Applicable to Subaru 2.5L 4-Cylinder Motors (except Justy and Loyale)
- Fits Suzuki factory filter# 16510-03G00
- Fits 2008 U.S. Model Smart Car
- Made in USA

Page 3350
The second owner notification letter will be sent in January 2003. The letter will advise owners that
repair parts are available.
owners and provide them with a copy of the owner
Page 3122
INSTRUCTIONS FOR OBTAINING THE CALIBRATION IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (CID) FROM
THE ECM
This procedure should only be followed when ECM reprogramming is not possible and you must
contact Subaru Tech Line.
STATE EMISSION TESTING ADVISORY
After ECM reprogramming, the OBD system's readiness code monitors will set to "incomplete".
Normally, the vehicle needs to be driven under a variety of conditions before the readiness code
monitors will indicate "complete". (See the November 1999 Subaru Technical Support T.I.P.S. and
the State I/M Program Advisory Bulletin, number 11-68-02, dated 3/5/02 for details.)
Page 4541
Page 2505
Vehicle - Flat Towing Information
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Information
NUMBER: 01-162-05
DATE: 06/28/05
APPLICABILITY: STi Vehicles, All Model Years
SUBJECT: Towing Recommendations
INTRODUCTION
AWD Subaru vehicles with manual transmissions can be towed with all four wheels on the ground
and the transmission in neutral. STi vehicles with 6 Speed Manual Transmissions can also be
towed with all four wheels on the ground and the transmission in neutral. In addition, STi vehicles
with 6 Speed Manual Transmissions require that the Driver's Control Center Differential (DCCD) is
set in manual mode and the DCCD control dial set to the furthest rearward position.
Please refer to the owner's manual for addition important information on towing Subaru vehicles.
Disclaimer
Page 1266
17. Remove oil strainer.
18. Remove baffle plate.
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Before installing oil pan, clean sealant from oil pan and engine block.
1. Install baffle plate.
2. Install oil strainer onto baffle plate.
CAUTION: Replace O-ring with a new one.

Page 1838
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Rear Catalytic Converter
REAR CATALYTIC CONVERTER
REMOVAL
The front and rear catalytic converter and center exhaust pipe are integrated into one unit.
Therefore, the removal and installation procedures are the same as the those for the front catalytic
converter.
INSTALLATION
Therefore, the removal and installation procedures are the same as the ones described under front
catalytic converter.
Page 4266
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
2. Check valve relay and motor relay for discontinuity or short circuits.

CAUTION: -
8. Remove pressure gauges from FL and FR caliper bodies.

Page 6430
H/L (2L)-01
2-Light Model
Page 3221
Page 4205

Page 4296
Output voltage can be checked by the following method. Install resistor and condenser, then rotate
wheel about 2.75 km/h (2 MPH) or equivalent.
ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the gap using spacer (Part No. 26755A000).

Page 1503
Page 2320
Page 3771
bulletin.
Dealers are also to promptly perform the applicable service procedures outlined in this bulletin to
subject to this recall campaign is taken into dealer new or used inventory, or is in the dealership for
service, necessary steps should be taken to ensure the recall procedure has been completed
PARTS INFORMATION
Please Do Not Stock Order Parts.
Because the number of vehicles produced with the affected LOT number is relatively small,
replacement parts should only be ordered for vehicles that have been confirmed to have a right
front axle housing with the affected LOT number. Parts should be ordered VOR next day air. The
VIN should be entered in the P0 reference field. The additional airfreight charges may be included
with the Recall/Campaign claim submission.
SOA has prepared a special right front axle housing kit, part number SOA550H100, that contains a
right front axle housing that has been pre-assembled with wheel bearings, snap ring and grease
seals. The kit also contains all other parts necessary to complete this repair.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. Inspect the lot number on the right (passenger side) front axle housing
as pictured.
2. If the lot number is OF15, replace the housing. If there is any other lot number, replacement is
not necessary.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Important:
Attempting to perform service procedures other then those recommended in the applicable Subaru
Service Manual will cause damage to components.
Page 170
Part 2
Page 3990
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid
2WD Refill ............................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 3.3L (7.0 Pints) 4WD Refill .........................................................
........................................................................................................................................... 3.5L (7.4
Pints)
Page 2924
Page 2244
System Diagnosis
Front Door Panel: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
If sealing cover is damaged, replace it with a new one.

Page 2161
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 4250
performs
"neutral".
Page 711
7. After connecting pressure regulator vacuum hose, measure fuel pressure.
Fuel pressure: Standard: 206 - 235 kPa (2.1 - 2.4 kg/cm2)
NOTE: The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa (0.1 to 0.2 kg/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than
standard values during high-altitude operations.
Page 2724
6. Insert canister hoses approximately 25 to 30 mm (0.98 to 1.18 in) into the lower end of
evaporation pipe assembly and tighten clamp.
7. Tighten bolt which holds evaporation pipe assembly on body. 8. Insert air vent hose (A),
evaporation hose (H) approximately 25 to 30 mm (0.98 to 1.18 in) into the lower end of evaporation
pipe assembly and
hold clip.
1. DOOR SWITCH

Page 5207
Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Heater Duct
Heater Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove heater unit.
2. Remove front seat.
3. Remove front side sill cover.
4. Pull off floor mat to remove heater duct.
INSTALLATION

Page 168
Part 3
Page 4749
CAUTION: Change engagement position of overrunning clutch and make sure it is not slipping.
3. Stall test
Using the same test equipment used for load test, apply brake to lock starter armature. Then
measure voltage, current, and torque values. Measured values must meet the following standard.
NOTE: Low rotating speed or excessive current during no- load test may be attributable to high
rotating resistance of starter due to improper assembling. Small current and no torque during stall
test may be attributable to excessive contact resistance between brush and commutator; whereas,
normal current and insufficient torque may be attributable to shorted commutator or poor insulation.
Starter can be considered normal if it passes no load and stall tests; therefore, load test may be
omitted.
Page 2045
Page 4569
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up vehicle. 2. Remove rear tires and wheels. 3. Remove rear cushion. 4. Remove console
box from front floor. 5. Loosen parking cable adjusting nut and console bracket.
6. Remove parking brake lever.
7. Unbend parking brake lever pawls and remove cable.
8. Roll up floor mat and remove clamps. 9. Remove equalizer cover.
10. Remove inner cable end from equalizer. 11. Pull out parking brake cable from rear brake. 12.
Pull out clamp from rear brake. 13. Remove bolt and bracket from trailing link bracket.
Page 2237

Page 2951
LH SIDE
Page 3419

Page 5365
Air Bag Harness: Service and Repair Front Sub Sensor Harness
REMOVAL
bumper.
INSTALLATION
Page 4951
CAUTION: Do not place oil pump directly in the vise, use soft pads and hold oil pump lightly to
protect the pump.
8. Pry oil seal off using a screwdriver.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch inner surface of casing.
ASSEMBLY
1. Reassembly precautions
1. Whenever O-rings, oil seals, and snap rings are removed, they must be replaced with new ones.
2. Thoroughly wash parts and allow to dry. They must be kept free from cleaning oil and dust. 3.
Reassembly procedure must be performed in clean place. Ensure that parts are kept away from
waste threads or other dust particles.
4. Cleaning oil tends to stay inside the front casing. Remove it completely by blowing compressed
air. 5. Ensure that parts are free from rust. (Use specified hydraulic oil for rust prevention after
cleaning and drying.) 6. Reverse the sequence of disassembly procedures.
2. Apply grease to oil seal and inner surface of front casing (at bearing location).
CAUTION: Make sure that the front body internal surfaces are free from damage.
3. Temporarily install rear cover to front body. 4. Attach ST to front body. Using a press, install oil
seal.
ST 34199AE030 INSTALLER
5. Install pump pulley to front body. 6. Using ST, place oil pump in a vise. ST 34199AE020
ATTACHMENT
7. Remove rear cover. 8. Using 10-mm box wrench, tap retaining ring into shaft groove.
Page 3196
Page 919
Check all disassembled parts for wear, damage or other abnormalities. Repair or replace faulty
parts as required.
CAUTION: Although surface layer materials of rubber hoses have excellent weathering resistance,
heat resistance and resistance for low temperature brittleness, they are likely to be damaged
chemically by brake fluid, battery electrolyte, engine oil and automatic transmission fluid and their
service lives are to be very shortened. It is very important to keep the hoses free from before
mentioned fluids and to wipe out immediately when the hoses are adhered with the fluids.
Since resistance for heat or low temperature brittleness are gradually declining according to time
accumulation of hot or cold conditions for the hoses and their service lives are shortening
accordingly, it is necessary to perform careful inspection frequently when the vehicle is used in hot
weather areas, cold weather area and/or a driving condition in which many steering operations are
required in short time.
Particularly continuous work of relief valve over 5 seconds causes to reduce service lives of the
hoses, the oil pump, the fluid, etc. due to over heat.
So, avoid to keep this kind of condition when servicing as well as driving.
Page 5541
PARTS INFORMATION
There is only a very small possibility that replacement of the right front seatbelt will be necessary.
Part replacement is only necessary when the seatbelt retractor cover is found to have missing
bolts. Parts should only be ordered for vehicles that have been confirmed to have this condition.
The part should be ordered VOR next day air. The VIN should be entered in the P0 reference field.
The additional airfreight charges may be included with the Recall/Campaign claim submission.
Check the LOT number on the right front seatbelt. The label, illustrated, is located on the seatbelt
webbing near the lower anchor point at the B-pillar. If LOT number 51634 or 51658 is found it will
be necessary to check the seatbelt retractor cover bolt torque. If any other LOT number is found,
no further action is necessary.
If LOT number 51634 or 51658 is found on the right front seatbelt, It will be necessary to check the
seatbelt retractor cover bolt torque. Remove the "B" pillar cover. Remove the seatbelt retractor as
illustrated.
Brakes - Premature/Uneven Disc Brake Pad Wear
Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Premature/Uneven Disc Brake Pad Wear
NUMBER: 06-33-04 DATE: 01/15/04
APPLICABILITY: 2001 2003MY Subaru Vehicles (Refer to Specific Model/Modification

Applicability)
SUBJECT: Disc Brake Pad Modification
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to address unevenly or prematurely worn brake pads. There is the
possibility that the pads are too tight in the caliper and have insufficient clearance as a result of rust
buildup and dirt. If that is the case, the backplate of the disc brake pads will need to be slightly filed
no more than 0.1 mm (0.0039") on each end to remove the rust.
NOTE:
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IS NOT APPLICABLE TO NEW BRAKE PADS.
Be extremely careful when filing the backplate of the inner and outer brake pad. Make sure that
both ends are filed evenly; do not file shorter than the dimensions shown below (Figure 1 & 2).
Failure to do so will create a rattle or crank noise. After filing, make sure to apply grease on both
ends of the backplate where filed.
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Limited Warranty period, this repair can be claimed using
the table.
Page 3313
DISCLAIMER
Page 4140

Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
TRUNK LID OPENER 1. Remove the rear seat. 2. Remove the center pillar lower trim and side sill
cover on the passenger side. Remove the rear pillar lower trim. Pull back the floor mat.
Remove the clip holding the cable.
3. Remove the bolt. Remove the opener pull handle. 4. Remove the cable from the opener pull
handle. 5. Remove the striker from the trunk lid.
6. Remove the cable from the striker.

INSTALLATION
TRUNK LID OPENER Install in the reverse order of removal.

Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection Front Catalytic Converter
INSPECTION
holes or rusting.
Page 4461
secured firmly.
Note:
Disclaimer
Page 6261
PINPOINT TEST C: COMPASS DISPLAY IS INACCURATE
PINPOINT TEST D: THERE IS NO COMPASS DISPLAY

Page 6425
Page 410
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 1379
Page 6369
Page 12
Page 4112
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Page 3955
Shifter M/T: Testing and Inspection
E: INSPECTION
1. Check each part (bush A, cushion rubber, spacer, boot, stay and rod, etc.) for deformation,
damage and wear. Repair or replace any defective part.
Determine defective parts by comparing with new parts.
2. Check the swing torque of the rod in relation of the gear shift lever.
If the torque exceeds the specification, replace bushing or retighten nuts. Rocking torque: 0.7 Nm
(0.07 kgf-m, 0.5 ft. lbs.) or less
Page 1785
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 5293
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Replacement
NOTE:
- If a component is replaced, add an appropriate amount of compressor oil.
- When replacing the compressor, the new compressor will already have the specified amount of oil
in it. Install the new compressor after removing the same amount of oil that is remaining in the
compressor removed.
Page 1384
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
Engine; Service and Repair; Disassembly and Reassembly; Cylinder Head Assembly.
Page 6884
Wiper Blade Heater Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper Deicer Switch
REMOVAL
Remove driver side switch panel, and then remove wiper deicer switch.
INSTALLATION

Page 223
Page 921
NOTE: Fluid level is specified at optimum position (range) for ordinary use. Accordingly, if the
vehicle is used often under hard conditions such as on very rough roads or in mountainous areas,
fluid may bleed out from cap air vent hole. This is not a problem. If a customer complains strongly
and is not likely to be satisfied with the leakage, lower the fluid level to the extent that fluid will not
bleed out under the conditions described, and have the customer check the fluid level and its
quality more frequency than usual.
Page 4396
secured firmly.
Note:
Disclaimer
INSPECTION

Child Seat: Technical Service Bulletins Child Restraint - Top Tether Anchor Kit Installation
NUMBER: 17-04-99
DATE: 11/17/99

Page 1499
Page 945
Coolant: Testing and Inspection
B: INSPECTION
1. RELATIONSHIP OF SUBARU COOLANT CONCENTRATION AND FREEZING

TEMPERATURE The concentration and safe operating temperature of the SUBARU coolant is
shown in the diagram. Measuring the temperature and specific gravity of the coolant will provide
this information.
[Example] If the coolant temperature is 25°C (77°F) and its specific gravity is 1.054, the
concentration is 35% (point A), the safe operating temperature is -14 °C (7°F) (point B), and the
freezing temperature is -20°C (-4°F) (point C).
2. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE CONCENTRATION OF THE COOLANT To adjust the

concentration of the coolant according to temperature, find the proper fluid concentration in the
above diagram and replace the necessary amount of coolant with an undiluted solution of SUBARU
genuine coolant (concentration 50). The amount of coolant that should be replaced can be
determined using the diagram.
[Example] Assume that the coolant concentration must be increased form 25% to 40%. Find point
A, where the 25% line of coolant concentration intersects with the 40% curve of the necessary
coolant concentration, and read the scale on the vertical axis of the graph at height A. The quantity
of coolant to be drained is 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts 1.8 Imp quarts). Drain 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts
1.8 Imp quarts) of coolant from the cooling system and add 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts 1.8 Imp quarts)
of the undiluted solution of SUBARU coolant.
Page 3428
DISCLAIMER
AT Vehicles
Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection AT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 6750
C/L-02
Page 3567

Page 4049
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION

Page 3215
Page 6226
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 6620
Page 4666
INSPECTION
1. ABS SENSOR
2. SENSOR GAP
wheel.
and calculating.
inch)

Page 1041
AT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 2166
Page 2036
Page 5940
bulletin.
Bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Special Tools
Note:
Note:
Page 1141
^ Do not remove oil seal unless necessary.
^ Do not scratch journal surface when removing oil seal.
3. CAMSHAFT (RH)
a. Remove camshaft cap.
(1) Remove bolts (a) through (b) in alphabetical sequence.
(2) Equally loosen bolts (c) through (j) all the way in alphabetical sequence.
(3) Remove bolts (k) through (p) in alphabetical sequence using ST. ST 499497000 TORX PLUS
(4) Remove camshaft cap.
a) Remove camshaft (RH). b) Remove oil seal. c) Remove plug from rear side of camshaft (RH).
CAUTION: ^
Do not remove oil seal unless necessary.
^ Do not scratch journal surface when removing oil seal.

Oil Filter: Mechanical Specifications
Oil Filter Type Full-Flow Filter Type
Filtration Area 1,000 cm2
Outer Diameter X Width 80 x 70 mm
Oil Filter To Engine Thread size M20 x 1.5

Page 288
Sunroof Switch
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Sunroof Switch
Check continuity between terminals when operating the switch.

Page 4213
Page 5141
table.
Disclaimer
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
propeller shaft.
Page 2134
Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Check for:
1. Damage to cords, deformation, burning or rust formation of terminals
2. Resistance values of cords
Resistance value: #1 cord: 5.6 - 10.6 #2 cord:7.3 - 13.7 #3 cord: 5.9 - 11.1 #4 cord: 7.3 - 13.7
Page 1894
Page 85
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 172
REMOVAL

Page 1241
4) Remove generator lock bolt. 5) Remove bolt which install generator on bracket.
3. Disconnect connector from oil pressure switch. 4. Remove oil pressure switch from engine
cylinder block. 5. Connect oil pressure gauge hose to cylinder block.
7. Start the engine, and measure oil pressure.
Oil pressure: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) or more at 800 rpm 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) or more
at 5,000 rpm
CAUTION: ^
If oil pressure is out of specification, check oil pump, oil filter and lubrication line.
^ If oil pressure warning light is turned ON and oil pressure is in specification, replace oil pressure
switch.
NOTE: The specified data is based on an engine oil temperature of 80°C (176°F).
8. After measuring oil pressure, install oil pressure switch.

Service and Repair
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
Rear Outer Handle
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim. 2. Remove the sealing cover. 3. Remove the rear door latch
assembly.
4. Remove the two bolts and nut. Remove the rear outer handle.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to remove the door panel. This will deform it.
INSTALLATION

Page 4119
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5263
Caution:
claim submission.
allowance.
Page 2416
INSTALLATION

Page 1614
Page 6361
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2025
DISCLAIMER
Page 6286
NOTE:
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Restraint System - Seat Belts Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Seat Belts Retract Slowly
NUMBER: 17-08-04
DATE: 11/12/04
APPLICABILITY: 2000~01 MY Legacy and Outback Vehicles
SUBJECT: Slow Retraction of Seatbelts

INTRODUCTION
If you encounter a customer complaint of the seat belts retracting slowly the following procedure
should be performed.
PARTS INFORMATION
Tape Kit; Part # 64699AE000 (Includes one Velcro strip and two pieces of plastic tape).
Caution:
Do not perform this procedure at temperatures below 0°C or 32°F as the tape will not adhere
sufficiently. Do not reuse the plastic tape following initial application.
1) Pull the seatbelt out approximately 1 foot or 30 cm and place a binder clip (available at office
supply stores) on the belt to prevent it from retracting. Place at least two layers of masking tape to
the top edge of the lower pillar trim to prevent any scratches from the clip (see Figure 1).
2) Take the Velcro tape and slide it through the belt guide with the rough surface facing the guide
(smooth side against the belt) (see Figure 2).
Page 3902
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
1. MANUAL TRANSMISSION
1. Drain gear oil by removing drain plug after allowing the engine to cool for 3 to 4 hours.
2. Reinstall drain plug after draining gear oil and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 44 ± 3 Nm (4.5 ± 0.3 kg-m, 32.5 ± 2.2 ft.lb)
CAUTION: -
Be sure to place a gasket between the transmission case and drain plug.
- Replace the gasket with a new one.
3. Fill transmission gear oil through the oil level gauge hole up to the upper point of level gauge.
Gear oil capacity: 3.5 l (3.7 US qt, 3.1 Imp qt)

Page 1662
Page 6697
Horn Switch: Service and Repair
Horn Switch
REMOVAL
WARNING: Before servicing, be sure to read the notes for proper handling of the driver airbag
module.
1. Remove the driver's airbag module.
INSTALLATION

Page 2317
Refer to the illustrations above for more details on locating the appropriate sensors.
Note:
Page 2851
Disclaimer
Page 536
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 5587
CAUTION: The deployment tool should be kept shorted until just before deployment of the
pretensioner.
6. Connect deployment tool connector (1D) and pretensioner yellow connector.
7. Install pretensioner on the wheel with the tire. Then, bundle three wire automotive harness [each
with a sectional area of 1.25 sq.mm (0.00194 sq
in) or more], and bind them twofold around the pretensioner bracket and the wheel.
8. Put a tire without the wheel on the tire installed with pretensioner. Put on an additional tire with
the wheel on top, and then fasten them tight with
rope.
9. Move the battery at least 5 m (16 ft) from the vehicle, and secure the nearby area. Connect the
deployment tool alligator clip to the battery minus
terminal.
Page 1992
Note:
Note:
Page 3604
Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair Replacement
A: REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: ^
The FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT3 or 4 brake fluid must be used.
^ Cover bleeder with waste cloth, when loosening it, to prevent brake fluid from being splashed
over surrounding parts.
^ Avoid mixing different brands of brake fluid to prevent degrading the quality of the fluid.
^ Be careful not to allow dirt or dust to get into the reservoir tank.
NOTE: ^
During bleeding operation, keep the clutch reservoir tank filled with brake fluid to eliminate entry of
air.
^ Clutch pedal operating must be very slow.
^ For convenience and safety, it is advisable to have two people working.
^ The amount of brake fluid required is approximately 70 ml (2.4 US fl. oz. 2.5 Imp fl. oz.) for total
clutch system.
1. Either jack-up vehicle and place a safety stand under it, or lift-up vehicle. 2. Remove both front
and rear wheels. 3. Draw out the brake fluid from reservoir tank with syringe. 4. Refill reservoir tank
with recommended brake fluid.
Recommended brake fluid: FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT3 or 4 brake fluid
5. Bleed air from oil line with the help of a co-worker.

Page 5507
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 786
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Champion: RC10YC4 Champion: RC8YC4 NGK:BKR6E-11 ND:K20PR-U11
Page 848
Fuel Filter: Locations
In engine compartment
Page 5516
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 3642
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Check operating cylinder for damage. If operating cylinder is damaged, replace it. 2. Check
operating cylinder for fluid leakage or damage on boot. If any leakage or damage is found, replace
operating cylinder.
Subaru Crank Pulley Wrench - AST Tool # SU499977100
Crankshaft: Tools and Equipment Subaru Crank Pulley Wrench - AST Tool # SU499977100
Subaru Crank Pulley Wrench
AST tool# SU499977100
Used to hold the crankshaft.
- Contact AST for pricing

Page 4671
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear
REMOVAL
3. Remove fuel tank cover
4. Disconnect rear ABS sensor connector.
5. Remove rear sensor harness from clip on body side.

Page 4770
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 3349
Page 1709
Caution:
claim submission.
allowance.
Page 6464
Air Vent Grille
Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Air Vent Grille
Air Vent Grille
REMOVAL
1. AIR VENT GRILLE DRIVER SIDE
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Set tilt steering to the lowest position. 3. Disconnect
each electrical connector to remove front cover (A) and switch panel (B). 4. Loosen screw (C) to
remove center panel (D).
5. Remove meter visor (E).
6. Loosen screws to remove grille.
2. AIR VENT GRILLE PASSENGER SIDE

Page 1723
C/TEMP-01 - Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge System

Page 5618
Alarm Horn Relay: Service and Repair
Security Horn Relay
REMOVAL
Remove the mounting nuts and detach the security horn relay (near the fuse box).
INSTALLATION

Page 2696
1. Set new retainer (B) to connector (A). 2. Push pipe into connector completely.
NOTE: At this time, two clicking sounds are heard.
CAUTION: -
Pull the connector to ensure it is connected securely.
- Ensure the two retainer pawls are engaged in their mating positions in the connector.
- Be sure to inspect hoses and their connections for any leakage of fuel.
2. Connect fuel delivery hose to pipe with an overlap of 20 to 25 mm (0.79 to 0.98 in).
Type A: When fitting length is specified. Type B: When fitting length is not specified.
Page 3275
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
1. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
1. Drain ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) by removing drain plug after allowing the engine to
cool for 3 to 4 hours.
2. Reinstall drain plug after draining ATF, and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 24.5 ± 2.0 Nm (2.5 ± 0.2 kg.m, 18.1 ± 1.4 ft.lb)
Recommended fluid: Dexron II, IIE or III type automatic transmission fluid
Fluid capacity: 9.3(+0.3/-0) l (9.8(+0.3/-0) US qt, 8.2(+0.3/-0) Imp qt)
4. Run the vehicle until the ATF temperature rises to 60 to 80°C (140 to 176°F) and check the ATF
level.
2. ATF FILTER
NOTE: ATF filter is maintenance free part. ATF filter needs replacement, when it has physically
damaged or ATF leaked.
Page 5606
INSTALLATION

Page 2777

Page 763

Page 5847
Hood Latch: Adjustments
Loosen the bolt. Adjust the lock assembly while moving it up and down.
Page 1335
19. Install air assist injector solenoid valve to bracket.
20. Connect air by-pass hoses to air assist solenoid valve.
21. Connect connector to air assist solenoid valve. 22. Install throttle body to intake manifold.
CAUTION: Replace gasket with a new one.
23. Connect connector to throttle position sensor and idle air control solenoid valve.
Page 4626
REMOVAL
cover.
Page 4772
MPS-01 - Multiple Power Socket System

Page 787
INSPECTION
1. Normal
2. Carbon fouled
3. Oil fouled
Page 2677
Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid: Service and Repair
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL
4. Disconnect connector from pressure control solenoid valve.
5. Disconnect two evaporation hoses from pressure control solenoid valve.
6. Remove pressure control solenoid valve from bracket.

Page 5035
Page 3703
A: REMOVAL
switch.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 4958
other parts.
Diagrams
Intake Unit With Evaporator

Page 3304

Page 2000
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 2420
REMOVAL

Page 6720
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams

T/C-01
NOTE:
Page 2028
C: REMOVAL

Page 6892
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Motor
Rear Wiper Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear wiper arm.
2. Remove cap (A), nut (B), and spacer (C) from rear wiper shaft. 3. Remove rear gate lower trim.
4. Unclip clip of harness and disconnect connector of wiper motor.
5. Loosen bolts to remove wiper motor assembly (A).
INSTALLATION
2. Install rear wiper cushion with the arrow mark facing up, as shown in the figure.
Page 5681
Interrupt Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5951
Ventilation
General and local exhaust.
Personal Protective Equipment
Caution:
Avoid prolonged skin contact.
Protective Gloves: Impervious gloves (Viton, PVOH, etc.)
Eye Protection: Safety glasses with side-shields or chemical goggle.
Other Protective Clothing or Equipment: If splashing is anticipated, wear a rubber apron and boots
or other protective equipment to minimize contact.
Necessary tools and supplies:
SPRAY EQUIPMENT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The pressure pot is equipped with an adjustment valve (or stop screw) to adjust the ratio of product
to air. This adjustment valve will have to be adjusted in order to achieve optimal spray pattern for
each material. The adjustment valve is identified in the diagram.
Before filling the gun, turn the stop screw clockwise until completely closed. Draw a line down the
middle of the stop screw using a marker. This line will be used to determine the number of turns
needed for optimal spray of the waxes.
Settings For Nox-Rust(R) X-210 Corrosion Preventive Penetrant
When using the 360° flexible wand, turn the stop screw counterclockwise 1/2 turn from dosed, and
adjust the air supply pressure to 40 psi.
Settings For Nox-Rust(R) X-121 Black Corrosion Preventive Coating (Note: Product should he
room temperature for proper application.)
Clutch Switch: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeaking Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Page 5448

Page 6387
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4748
Connect two battery negative leads onto terminal 50 and onto switch body respectively. Then
connect battery positive lead onto terminal C. Next, disconnect lead from terminal 50. Pinion should
return immediately.
7. PERFORMANCE TEST
The starter is required to produce a large torque and high rotating speed, but these starter
characteristics vary with the capacity of the battery. It is therefore important to use a battery with
the specified capacity whenever testing the starter. The starter should be checked for the following
three items: -
No-load test Measure the maximum rotating speed and current under a no-load state.
- Load test Measure the magnitude of current needed to generate the specified torque and rotating
speed.
- Stall test Measure the torque and current when the armature is locked.
1. No-load test
Run single starter under no-load state, and measure its rotating speed, voltage, and current, using
the specified battery. Measured values must meet the following standards:
2. Load test (For reference)
Perform this test to check maximum output of starter. Use test bench which is able to apply load
(brake) to starter. Measure torque value and rotating speed under the specified voltage and current
conditions while controlling braking force applied to starter.
Navigation System - Display Dimmer In Cold Temps
Navigation Display: Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Display Dimmer In Cold
Temps
NAVIGATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION IN COLD WEATHER
There is a possibility that the navigation display illumination may become dark under low
temperature conditions. The display will brighten as it warms up. This is a normal function and no
repairs should be attempted.
Page 4023

Page 535
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Specifications
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
Specified Grease Shell 6459N
Caution: If specified grease is not available, remove
bearing grease and apply Auto Rex A instead. Do not mix
different types of grease.

Page 2796

Page 2790
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Make sure the inner cable is not twisted or frayed. 2. Make sure the outer cable is not cracked.
Page 4331

Page 162
Part 1
Page 569
Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front
INSPECTION
1. ABS SENSOR
2. SENSOR GAP
wheel.
and calculating.
ABS sensor clearance = B - A ABS sensor standard clearance: 0.3 - 0.8 mm (0.012 - 0.031 inch)
3. OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Page 235
Page 813
Timing Belt: Specifications
30,000 Miles Inspect 60,000 Miles Inspect 90,000 Miles Inspect 105,000 Miles Replace
Page 1513
area.

Page 2997
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1881
Page 3253
Page 3040
DISCLAIMER
Page 5761
1. Remove grille using sharp-edged screwdriver.
CAUTION: Wrap screwdriver with vinyl tape to prevent damage to interior parts.
INSTALLATION

Page 2227

Page 571
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE: ^
Page 3738
Page 4721
5. Remove three screws from front cover and then bearing retainer and ball bearing.
6. Remove bolt which secure battery terminal bolt, and remove rear cover. Remove nuts which
secure diode plate, and remove stator and rear cover.
7. Separate diode plate from stator coil.
1. Cut the connecting position (A) of stator coil to diode.
2. Unsolder connection (B) and throughout the lead wire of stator coil.
3. Remove stator coil from diode plate.
8. Remove bolts which secure IC regulator, diode and brush holder.

Page 5958
Page 1496
Page 6719
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 5109
2. Remove bolt securing stabilizer clamps to sub frame.
3. Remove support sub frame RH. (When removing RH side link rear.)
4. Remove stabilizer link.
6. Remove bolt securing link rear to rear arm. 7. Scribe an alignment mark on link rear adjusting
bolt and sub frame.
Page 4960

Service and Repair
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
THROTTLE BODY
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
3. Disconnect accelerator cable (A). 4. Disconnect cruise control cable (B). (With cruise control
model)
5. Disconnect connectors from throttle position sensor (A), idle air control solenoid valve (B) and
intake manifold pressure sensor (C). 6. Disconnect air by-pass hose (D) from idle air control
solenoid valve.
Page 2167
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 6624

Page 6712
Page 3098
Page 4269
"neutral". 3. Operate the brake tester. 4. Perform ABS sequence control. 5. When the hydraulic unit
begins to work, check the following working sequence.

Locations
Security System
Page 5568
Dealers are to promptly service all vehicles subject to this service program at no charge to the
bulletin.
Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect front ABS sensor connector located next to front
strut mounting house in engine compartment.
3. Remove bolts which secure sensor harness to strut.
4. Remove bolts which secure sensor harness to body. 5. Remove bolts which secure front ABS
sensor to housing, and remove front ABS sensor.
CAUTION: -
- Do not null sensor harness during removal.
INSTALLATION
1. Temporarily install front ABS sensor on housing.

Page 843
Example:
CAUTION: Align ST with torque wrench while tightening ATF filter.
3. Add ATF.
2. 3.0L MODEL ^
ATF Filter
1. Install AT oil filter. Turn it by hand, being careful not to damage oil seal. 2. Using ST, tighten AT
oil filter to transmission case.
Calculate AT filter torque specifications using the following formula. T2 = L1/(L1 + L2) x T1 T1: 14
Example:
ATF Filter Assembly
Example:
Page 3254
Specifications
Idle Speed

Page 1678
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor
A: REMOVAL
4. Disconnect connector of sub fan motor. 5. Lower the vehicle.
6. Remove air intake duct. 7. Remove bolts which hold sub fan shroud to radiator.
Page 1347

Page 2327
Page 4587

Page 6652

ABS
Page 3239
Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications FLUID
FLUID
75W-90 80W-90 GL5

CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Page 987
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Grade ...................................................................................................................................................
................................. SH or SJ Energy Conserving II Above -20° C (0° F) .........................................
.......................................................................................................................................... 10W-30,
10W-40 Below 40° C (100° F) .............................................................................................................
.................................................................. 5W-30 (preferred)
Page 1621

Page 6628
Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams

Page 869
Note:
Page 771
Page 549
Page 1480

Page 5469
This new requirement for 2000 model year vehicles may cause customer demand for installation of
top tether anchor kits on earlier model vehicles. You should be prepared to install these factory
supplied top tether anchor kits on customer request in 1985 and later Subaru vehicles. Anchor kits
are not available for 1987 and 1988 lusty models (which began in 1989 MY) in accordance with
Chart 1 as shown. Installation instructions are included with the anchor kit. Anchor points are
shown in Figures 1 through 5 for all models. On 1995 through 1999 Legacy Sedan vehicles, the
package shelf material is not cut out at the anchor pint location. You must locate the threaded
anchor point from the trunk side of the package shelf and cut out the package shelf material to
accommodate the anchor kit bolt.
INSTALLATION OF ANCHOR KIT

Page 1030
Fuse: Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 424
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3538
Page 2389
5. Remove nuts which hold ECM to bracket.
6. Remove clip from bracket.
7. Disconnect ECM connectors and take out ECM.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: When replacing ECM, be careful not to use the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage
to the fuel injection system.
Page 2559
Page 224

Ignition Cable: Customer Interest Ignition System - DTC's P0301/P0302/P0303/P0304
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 6209
Page 5848
Hood Latch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the bolt. Remove the hood lock assembly.
3. Remove the release cable from the lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Apply grease to parts that rub.
- Make sure the release cable works properly after installation.

Page 2291
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
IDLE AIR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
3. Disconnect air by-pass hose (A) from idle air control solenoid valve.
AT VEHICLES
Page 143

Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 4225
15. Remove oil pan.
B: INSTALLATION
1. HEADLIGHT RELAY
is grounded.
Page 2688
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3540

NUMBER: WWM-96
DATE: July 2003
INTRODUCTION
AFFECTED VEHICLES
NOTE:
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 33
4) Remove the air cleaner case from the inner fender.
Removal of ECU
NOTE:

assembly
CAUTION:
figure 2.
5) Remove the 6 torx head screws (T20) which join the hydraulic unit and the ECU.
NOTE:

Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 6578
the table.
Disclaimer
Page 5306
Relays
(2).

Page 5718
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2157
Page 1967
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Air Temperature Sensor
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector from intake air temperature sensor.
3. Remove intake air temperature sensor from air cleaner case.
INSTALLATION

Page 2071

Page 2006

Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5404
Side Airbag Sensor
REMOVAL
(FRONT).
INSTALLATION
Front Sub Sensor
REMOVAL
Page 857
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove access lid.
2. Remove oil filter with ST.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Get a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of engine oil to the seal rubber. 2. Install oil filter by
turning it by hand, being careful not to damage seal rubber. 3. Tighten more (approximately 2/3 to
3/4 turn) after the seal rubber contacts the oil pump case. Do not tighten excessively, or oil may
leak.
Page 2475
Page 842
4. Get new ATF filter and apply a thin coat of ATF to the oil seal
^ ATF Filter Assembly
1. Remove battery. 2. Drain ATF completely. 3. Remove front left mud guard.
4. Release clamp of IN, OUT of oil filter hose, and remove hose from pipe.
NOTE: ^
Plug the pipe.
^ Put a mark etc., to distinguish IN, OUT on pipe and hose.
5. Remove oil filter bracket installation nut. 6. Remove ATF filter assembly. 7. Using ST, remove
ATF filter.
B: INSTALLATION
1. 2.5L MODEL 1. Install ATF filter. Turn it by hand, being careful not to damage oil seal. 2. Using
ST, tighten ATF filter to transmission case.
Calculate ATF filter torque specifications using the following formula. T2 = L1/(L1 + L2) x T1 T1: 14
Page 4089
B: INSTALLATION

SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL

RH SIDE

Page 6576
2) Remove the three screws from the backside of the fog light assembly (see Figure 1)
3) Remove the bulb and cord. Caution: Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb.
4) Remove aiming screws (see Figure 2). Caution: Be careful not to misplace the springs.
Page 4363
NIGLUBE RX-2 (Part No. 003606000)
6. Install the piston boot to the caliper body, and attach boot rind.
7. Apply a coat of specified grease to guide pin, outer surface, sleeve outer surface, cylinder inner
surface, and boot grooves.
8. Install guide pin boot on caliper body. 9. Install lock pin boot on caliper body and insert lock pin
sleeve into place.
Page 4972
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 6765
5. Loosen screws to pull control unit slightly out of center console. 6. Disconnect connector from
antenna cable to remove control unit.
INSTALLATION
1. AUTO A/C
2. MANUAL A/C
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Before installation, set temperature control switch to
"FULL HOT".
Page 2562
Page 1488
Page 3894
Locations
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations
Connector Location
Daytime Running Light Control Module - (B96, B242)

Page 4077
15. Remove oil pan.
B: INSTALLATION
Service and Repair
Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Lift-up vehicle and remove front tires and wheels.
3. Remove both stabilizer and jack-up plate. 4. Disconnect tie-rod end from housing. 5. Remove
front exhaust pipe.
6. Remove front transverse link from front crossmember and body. 7. Remove nuts attaching
engine mount cushion rubber to crossmember. 8. Remove steering universal joint. 9. Disconnect
power steering pipe from steering gear box.
10. Lift engine by approximately 10 mm (0.39 inch) by using chain block. 11. Support crossmember
with a jack, remove nuts securing crossmember to body and lower crossmember gradually along
with steering gearbox.
CAUTION: When removing crossmember downward, be careful that tie-rod end does not interfere
with SFJ boot.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Always tighten rubber bushing when wheels are in full contact with the ground and
vehicle is curb weight.
Tightening torque:
Transverse link bushing to crossmember: 100 Nm (10.2 kgf-cm, 74 ft. lbs.) Stabilizer to bushing: 25
Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18.1 ft. lbs.) Tie-rod end to housing: 27.0 Nm (2.75 kgf-cm, 19.9 ft. lbs.) Front
cushion rubber to crossmember: 74 Nm (7.5 kgf-cm, 54.2 ft. lbs.) Universal joint to pinion shaft: 24
Nm (2.4 kgf-cm, 17.4 ft. lbs.) Crossmember to body: 100 Nm (10.2 kgf-cm, 74 ft. lbs.)
2. Purge air from power steering system.
INSPECTION
Check crossmember for wear, damage and cracks, and correct or replace if defective.
Page 6801
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
Rear Quarter Glass
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
1. Cut off nozzle tip as shown in the figure. 2. Install glass in the same procedure as for windshield
glass.
CAUTION: -
carefully.
4. After curing of adhesive, pour water on external surface of vehicle to check that there are no
water leaks.
Page 86
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 1248
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
1. Park vehicle on a level surface. 2. Remove oil level gauge and wipe it clean. 3. Reinsert the level
gauge all the way. Be sure that the level gauge is correctly inserted and in the proper orientation.
4. Remove it again and note the reading. If the engine oil level is below the "L" line, add oil to bring
the level up to the "F" line. 5. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan before checking the level. 6. Just after driving or while the engine is warm,
engine oil level may show in the range between the "F" line and the notch mark. This is caused by
thermal expansion of the engine oil.
7. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add oil above the "F" line when the engine is cold.
Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Camshaft Sprocket 57.9 + or - 3.6 Ft Lbs.

Page 539
Page 6510
Page 3155
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Page 1536
Water Pump: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from the battery. 2. Lift-up the vehicle.
5. Disconnect connectors from radiator main fan (A) and sub fan (B) motors.
Page 6386

M/T - Cold Clutch Judder
Clutch Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Cold Clutch Judder
NUMBER:03-51-02R DATE: 05/01/03
APPLICABILITY:
All 1999-2002MY and some 2003MY 2.5L Vehicles; All 2002MY and some 2003MY 2.0L WRX
Vehicles
SUBJECT: Cold Clutch Judder (revised bulletin)

INTRODUCTION
In the event you encounter a customer concern of cold clutch judder that goes away after the first
few applications, replacement of some clutch parts will be necessary to repair the vehicle. Prior to
replacing these parts, you should confirm the engine and transmission mounting is not broken,
loose, or misaligned.
These countermeasure parts were installed into production as listed.
Vehicles after the listed countermeasure, or repairs to vehicles after the clutch set has been
installed, can be repaired using individual parts as needed. Repair history should be checked to
determine what parts are currently in the vehicle. The parts system should be checked for any
future information regarding these parts.

Page 2578
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4819
Page 4835
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
FAPS-01 - Front Accessory Power Supply System

Page 3160
Case: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect transmission harness connector from stay.
NOTE: Lift-up lever behind connector and disconnect it from stay.
2) Disconnect the air breather hoses.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install air breather hoses.
2) Insert inhibitor switch and transmission connector into stay.
C: INSPECTION
Make sure the hose is not cracked or clogged.

Page 3626
1. Apply a coat of grease to the contacting surfaces of the push rod and piston before installation.
Grease: SILICONE GREASE G40M (Part No. 004404003)
2. To assemble the master cylinder, reverse the sequence of disassembly procedure.

Page 4279
Part 2 of 2
2. YAW RATE SENSOR SIGNAL

Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL FILLER PIPE
REMOVAL
WARNING:
3. Open fuel filler flap lid and remove filler cap.
4. Remove screws holding packing in place. 5. Lift-up the vehicle. 6. Remove rear wheel nuts.
Page 3673
Disclaimer
Page 1481

Page 1989
Page 3821
CAUTION: Be careful so that the end of the band is in close contact with clip.
18. Fix up boot on BJ in the same manner.
NOTE: Extend and retract DOJ to provide equal grease coating.

ABS
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair ABS
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground terminal. 2. Remove console cover. 3. Disconnect connector from G
sensor. 4. Remove G sensor from body.
CAUTION: Do not drop or bump G sensor.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Do not install G sensor in the wrong direction. There is an arrow mark on the sensor
showing which side faces the vehicle front.
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid
Rear Capacity ......................................................................................................................................

.......................................................... 0.8L (1.7 Pints)
Page 3798
5. Using flat bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring. 6. Using ST1, support housing securely.
7. Using ST2, press inner race to drive out outer bearing.
CAUTION: ^
Do not remove outer race unless it is faulty.
^ Discard outer race after removal.
^ Do not replace inner or outer race separately; always replace as a unit.
8. Using ST and a hydraulic press, drive hub bolts out. ST 927080000 HUB STAND
CAUTION: Be careful not to hammer hub bolts. This may deform hub.
D: ASSEMBLY
1. Attach hub to ST securely.
ST 927080000 HUB STAND
2. Using a hydraulic press, press new hub bolts into place.
CAUTION: Be sure to press hub bolts until their seating surfaces contact the hub.
Service and Repair
Wheel Cover: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
Pry off the full wheel cap with a wheel cap remover inserted between openings in the cap.
INSTALLATION
Align the valve hole in the wheel cap with the valve on the wheel and secure the wheel cap by
tapping four points by hand.
INSPECTION
1. Check wheels for missing wheel caps. 2. Check pawls of wheel caps for damage or bend. 3.
Check wheel caps for cracks.
Page 5140
balanced
PROCEDURE
reduced.
^ VIN
^ Mileage
Page 2961
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
Page 6717
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4637

Page 1332
7. Install fuel injectors.
CAUTION: Always use new O-rings.
NOTE: Do not forget to install the fuel injector securing clip.
8. Tighten bolt which installs injector pipe on intake manifold.
9. Tighten two bolts which install fuel pipes on the left side of intake manifold.
Page 152
Page 1941
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector from camshaft position sensor.
3. Remove bolt which installs camshaft position sensor to camshaft position sensor support.
4. Remove bolt which installs camshaft position sensor support to camshaft cap LH.
Page 2658
INSPECTION
port.
Service and Repair
Sun Visor: Service and Repair
SUN VISOR
REMOVAL
Remove mounting screws then detach sun visor (A) and hook (B).
INSTALLATION

Page 589
REMOVAL
Page 3114
bulletin.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Dealers will automatically be shipped the necessary special select monitor reprogramming cables
and cartridges for this campaign at no charge. If additional reprogramming cables and cartridges
are needed, please contact your District Service Operations Manager for ordering instructions.
Part numbers are as follows:
Select Monitor Reprogramming Cable - 22775Z0C00 Select Monitor Reprogramming Cartridge -

24082X0A54
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Using the Select Monitor Reprogramming Cable, Part Number 22775Z0C00, connect the Select
Monitor to the vehicle's Diagnostic Link Connector ( DLC) located in the vehicle's lower left dash
panel. Insert the appropriate "Diagnostic" cartridge for the vehicle being serviced, and retrieve and
record any diagnostic trouble codes previously stored in the ECM.
If no codes are found, proceed to the "ECM Reprogramming Precautions and Instructions" section
of this bulletin.
If trouble codes are found, refer to the table for the correct repair procedure. Make any necessary
repairs and clear all codes prior to reprogramming the ECM.
Important:
Only use the specified Select Monitor Programming Cable for reprogramming. The Select Monitor
should remain "off" until instructed to turn "on" while following the reprogramming instructions.
NOTE:
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor should ONLY be replaced when trouble code P0031, P0130 or
P1133 is present and should not be replaced for any other reason. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensors
that have been replaced should not be returned unless requested through the Service Part Return
System.
ECM Reprogramming Precautions
Before reprogramming the ECM, the following precautions must be observed:
1) Only use the appropriate reprogramming cable P/N 22775Z0C00 for ECM reprogramming.
2) Keep the vehicle at least 150 feet (50 meters) from high voltage power lines.
3) Keep the vehicle at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any machinery that creates high voltage.
4) Keep the vehicle at least 6 feet (2 meters) away from other vehicles that may generate electrical
"noise". (Example: Other vehicle being checked for ignition spark, etc.)
5) Keep the vehicle at least 6 feet (2 meters) away from any electrical device that can generate an
electronic wave, such as mobile phones, pagers,
Page 564
Page 481
NOTE: The extraction area of the knock sensor cord must be positioned at a 45° angle relative to
the engine rear.
3. Install air cleaner case.

Page 3071
C: REMOVAL

Page 2163

Page 1267
3. Apply fluid packing to mating surfaces and install oil pan.
Fluid packing: THREE BOND 1215 or equivalent
4. Tighten bolts which install oil pan onto engine block.
5. Lower engine onto front crossmember.
6. Tighten nuts which install front cushion rubber onto front crossmember.
7. Install front and center exhaust pipes.
CAUTION: Always use the new gaskets.

Page 1666
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 5103
13. Loosen nut securing rear link to rear arm.
14. Loosen nut securing upper link to rear arm. 15. Remove bolts securing rear arm to links and
remove rear arm.
INSTALLATION
1. Use a transmission jack to support the rear arm. 2. Install rear arm and temporarily tighten bolts
securing rear arm to links. 3. Install bearing unit. 4. Install bolt securing ABS sensor to rear arm. 5.
Install bolt securing brake hose to rear arm. 6. Install bolt securing parking brake cable clamp to
rear arm. 7. Place jack (furnished with vehicle) upside down and position it between link rear and
sub frame. Adjust jack position so rear shock absorber is
aligned with rear arm at their corresponding holes. Install lower shock absorber bolts.
CAUTION: Put a cloth between jack and its mating area to protect link rear and sub frame from
scratches.
8. Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally and tighten nuts and bolts securing rear
arm, link front, link rear, link upper and shock
absorber.

Page 4302
REMOVAL

Page 4830
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual - Multiple Systems
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Mainshaft: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Pops Out of Reverse gear
NUMBER: 03-49-02R DATE: 04/23/04
INTRODUCTION
bulletin.
PARTS LIST
Page 6250
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Flywheel: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Cold Clutch Judder
NUMBER:03-51-02R DATE: 05/01/03
APPLICABILITY:
Vehicles

INTRODUCTION

Page 5093
5. Set the coil spring correctly so that its end face fits well into the spring seat as shown. 6. Install
helper and dust cover to the piston rod.
7. Pull the piston rod fully upward, and install rubber seat and spring seat.
NOTE: Ensure that upper spring seat is positioned as shown in figure.
8. Install strut mount to the piston rod, and tighten the self-locking nut temporarily.
CAUTION: Be sure to use a new self-locking nut.
9. Using hexagon wrench to prevent strut rod from turning, tighten self-locking nut with ST.
ST 927760000 STRUT MOUNT SOCKET Tightening torque: 54 Nm (5.5 kgf-cm, 39.8 ft. lbs.)
10. Loosen the coil spring carefully.
INSPECTION
Check the disassembled parts for cracks, damage and wear, and replace with new parts if
defective.
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wiper Blade
REMOVAL
While pushing locking clip up, pull out blade from arm to arrow direction.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Confirm that clip was locked securely.
Page 6349
All 2001 MY SUBARU vehicles are 50-State certified and conform to California's Low Emission
Vehicle emission standards. Additionally, all 2001 models are All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)) equipped.
Summarized in the chart shown is a pictorial reference for the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC)
location by 2001 model line. Also included in this chart is the U.S. EPA's Diagnostic Link Connector
mapping grid number, which corresponds to the agency's mapping diagram as shown.
DISCLAIMER
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection
Rear Gate Latch Lock Actuator
If NG, replace the rear gate latch lock actuator.

Page 5676
the bracket.

Specifications
Muffler: Specifications
Muffler Rear Pipe To Muffler 48 Nm

Page 1045
Locations
Ignition Coil: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC's P0301/P0302/P0303/P0304
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 4169
Page 6334
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 5411

Service and Repair
Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Brake/Tail Light Bulb
REMOVAL
SEDAN (COMBINATION LIGHT)
SEDAN (FINISHER LIGHT)

INSTALLATION

Page 4939
NOTE: Fluid level is specified at optimum position (range) for ordinary use. Accordingly, if the
vehicle is used often under hard conditions such as on very rough roads or in mountainous areas,
fluid may bleed out from cap air vent hole. This is not a problem. If a customer complains strongly
and is not likely to be satisfied with the leakage, lower the fluid level to the extent that fluid will not
bleed out under the conditions described, and have the customer check the fluid level and its
quality more frequency than usual.
Page 5064
Page 759
Page 1487

Page 875
Note:
Note:

Page 3073
Page 4196
Page 4240
2) Connect the select monitor and confirm in the first dislay that the model year, driving system and
transmission system are correct.
NOTE:
shown.
Disclaimer
Locations
Page 301
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 6337

Identification
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Identification
This article was updated by bulletin number: 11-92-08
Date: 01/05/09
INTRODUCTION
For information purposes only.
sensor 3.
O2 sensor.
Locations
Fuse Locations
Front
INSPECTION
1. ABS SENSOR
2. SENSOR GAP
wheel.
and calculating.
3. OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Page 1799
Page 378
Step 1 - 6
Page 3003

Page 3006
Page 4743
AT Vehicles
Diagrams
Page 4893
1. Adjust tire pressure to specifications. 2. Set vehicle under "curb weight" conditions. (Empty
luggage compartment, install spare tire, jack, service tools, and top up fuel tank.) 3. Set steering
wheel in a wheel-forward position. 4. Suspend thread from wheel arch (point "A" in figure below) to
determine a point directly above center of spindle. 5. Measure distance between measuring point
"A" and center of spindle.
CAMBER
Inspection 1. Place front wheel on turning radius gauge. Make sure ground contacting surfaces of
front and rear wheels are set at the same height.
2. Set ST into the center of the wheel, and then install the wheel alignment gauge.
ST 927380002 ADAPTER
Adjustment 1. Loosen two self-locking nuts located at lower front portion of strut.
CAUTION: ^
When adjusting bolt needs to be loosened or tightened, hold its head with a wrench and turn
self-locking nut.
^ Discard loosened self-locking nut and replace with a new one.
2. Turn camber adjusting bolt so that camber is set at the specification.

Page 6314
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4641
BRAKE/W-01
Page 3892

Page 1752
Note:
Note:

Page 5206
1. Remove grille using sharp-edged screwdriver.
CAUTION: Wrap screwdriver with vinyl tape to prevent damage to interior parts.
INSTALLATION

Page 118
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 4947
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove ground terminal from battery. 2. Remove pulley belt cover bracket.
3. Loosen lock bolt and slider bolt and remove power steering pump drive V-belt. 4. Disconnect
connector from power steering pump switch.
5. Disconnect pipe C and suction hose from oil pump.
CAUTION: ^
clean cloth.
6. Remove bolts which install power steering pump bracket.
7. Place oil pump bracket in a vise, remove two bolts from the front side of oil pump.
CAUTION: Do not place oil pump bracket directly in the vise; use soft pads and hold oil pump
lightly to protect the pump.
Page 1346
Page 6260
Page 2315
Page 3043
Part 3
Page 556
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor Front Sensor 7 Nm
Rear Sensor 7 Nm
Page 5003
5. Tighten the following points in the order shown below when wheels are in full contact with the
ground and vehicle is curb weight.
1. Transverse link and stabilizer
2. Transverse link and crossmember
3. Transverse link rear bushing and body
Tightening torque: 245 Nm (25 kgf-cm, 181 ft. lbs.)
NOTE: ^
Move rear bushing back and forth until transverse link-to-rear bushing clearance is established (as
indicated in figure.) before tightening.
^ Check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.
DISASSEMBLY
Front Bushing
Using ST, press front bushing out of place. ST 927680000 INSTALLER & REMOVER SET
Rear Bushing
1. Scribe an aligning mark on transverse link and rear bushing.

Page 5534
7) Remove the other tape backing (red or blue) and apply it to the belt guide as indicated
previously. Again, make sure there are no creases, waves or bubbles (see Figure 9).
8) Remove the binder dip and masking tape that was attached in the first step. Move the belt back
and forth as indicated to ensure complete adhesion of the tape. Make sure that the belt moves
freely and retracts properly (see Figure 10).
9) Repeat this process with the belt guide on the opposite side.
Note:
If the above procedure does not improve the retraction of the seatbelt, the seatbelt itself may be
dirty. If that is the case, the belt should be cleaned using warm water and a neutral detergent. If
you should decide to clean the belt prior to performing this procedure, then ensure that the belt and
guide are completely dry before attempting any tape installation.
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Warranty period, this repair may be claimed using the table.
Disclaimer
Page 5331
Relays
(2).

Page 6239
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 4058
Page 3829
TOOL REQUIRED
- Or Equivalent
DISASSEMBLE
CAUTION:
Page 3510
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove four washers and then detach rubber boot.
2. Remove bolts and then remove cable bracket and plate. 3. Twist the select lever grip and then
remove select lever grip. 4. Detach indicator cover.
5. Disconnect connector and then remove solenoid assembly. 6. Remove pattern plate.
7. Remove stopper.
Specifications

Brake Caliper: Customer Interest Brakes - Squealing Noise
NUMBER: 06-30-01R DATE: 03/06/02

of brake shims)

FOLLOWING VINS)
modification.
FIELD PROCEDURE:
shims.
Note:
way.
Page 5956
Spray time: 12 sec.
Spray time: 8 sec.
Spray time: 8 sec.
minimum of 2 mil.
Spray time : 4 min.
Spray time : 2 min.

Page 5533
5) With the clear side of the tape against the seatbelt and the red and blue backing strips spread
apart; slide the piece through the guide so that the red and blue backing strips are straddling it. The
adhesive on the dear tape should be facing the belt guide (see Figures 6 and 7).
6) When applying the tape make sure there are no creases, waves or bubbles. Apply the tape
completely.
Remove the tape backing (red or blue) from one side and adhere the tape to the belt guide. Using
your fingers, ensure that the adhesive portion is in full contact with the guide and that no creases,
waves or bubbles are present (see Figure 8).
Page 6309
Page 2346

Page 817
Timing Belt: Description and Operation
Timing Belt
- A single timing belt drives two camshafts (one in the left bank and one in the right bank). The belt
also drives the water pump by its non-toothed side.
- The timing belt teeth have a specially designed round profile which contributes to quiet operation.
The timing belt is made of strong and inflexible core cords, wear-resistant canvas and heat
resistant rubber material.
- A hydraulic automatic belt tension adjuster always keeps the belt taut to the specified tension.
Any manual belt tension adjustment is unnecessary.
NOTE: *: The #1 piston is at TDC when the piston position mark on the crankshaft sprocket is
aligned with the timing mark on the cylinder block. **: The #1 piston is at TDC on the compression
stroke when the piston position mark on the camshaft sprocket is aligned with the timing mark on
the belt cover.

Page 3412

Page 1593

Page 2941
Page 2041
Locations
Relay And Fuse

Page 705
Alignment: Tools and Equipment
Front Suspension / Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
Front Suspension / General Purpose Tools
GENERAL PURPOSE TOOLS

Page 1410
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Inspection
Timing Belt
1. Check timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks, and wear. If any fault is found, replace belt.
2. Check the condition of back side of belt; if any crack is found, replace belt.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant contact the belt. Remove quickly and
thoroughly if this happens.
- Do not bend the belt sharply.
Bending radius: h 60 mm (236 inch) or more
Automatic Belt Tension Adjuster
1. Visually check oil seals for leaks, and rod ends for abnormal wear or scratches. If necessary,
replace faulty parts.
CAUTION: Slight traces of oil at rod's oil seal does not indicate a problem.
2. Check that the adjuster rod does not move when a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) is applied
to it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness.
3. If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves freely when applying 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.), check it
using the following procedures:
1. Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the end surface of the cylinder. Repeat this motion 2 or 3
times.
2. With the adjuster rod moved all the way up, apply a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) to it.
Check adjuster rod stiffness.
3. If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves down, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly with a new one.
CAUTION:
- Always use a vertical type pressing tool to move the adjuster rod down.
- Do not use a lateral type vise.
- Push adjuster rod vertically.
- Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually taking more than three minutes.
- Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807 N (1,000 kg, 2,205 lbs.).
- Press the adjuster rod as far as the end surface of the cylinder. Do not press the adjuster rod into
Page 4384
secured firmly.
Note:
Disclaimer
Page 5677
Alarm Module: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove front cover (A).
3. Remove screws (B) and then detach center panel (C) while disconnecting connector. 4. Remove
two screws.
NOTE: Before removing the screw, apply a few turns of butyl tape to the tip of the service tool. This
prevents the screw from falling during removal.
5. Remove radio and security control module together while disconnecting connector.
INSTALLATION

Page 1798
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL

RH SIDE

Page 3963
8. Connect rod to gear shift lever.
9. Check the swing torque of the rod in relation to the gear shift lever.
If the torque exceeds the specification, replace bushing or retighten nuts. Rocking torque: 0.7 Nm
(0.07 kgf-m, 0.5 ft. lbs.) or less
10. Check that there is no excessive play and that parts move smoothly.
Page 3971
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. PITCHING STOPPER 1. Disconnect battery ground terminal. 2. Remove the air intake duct and
cleaner case.
3. Remove the pitching stopper.
2. CROSSMEMBER AND CUSHION RUBBER 1. Disconnect battery ground terminal. 2. Jack-up

vehicle and support it with sturdy racks. 3. Remove the center, rear exhaust pipes and muffler.
CAUTION: When removing exhaust pipes, be careful each exhaust pipe does not drop out.
4. Remove the heat shield cover.
5. Set the transmission jack under the transmission.
CAUTION: Always support transmission case with a transmission jack.
6. Remove the rear crossmember. 7. Remove the rear cushion rubber.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 4845
Page 163
Part 2
Page 5178
Step 1 - 6
Fan speed, outlets and inlets are not switched when AUTO or ECON switch is ON.
Page 5038
Page 4069
C: REMOVAL

Page 989
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
B: REPLACEMENT
1. Drain engine oil by loosening engine oil drain plug.
2. Open engine oil filler cap for quick draining of the engine oil. 3. Replace drain plug gasket.
4. Tighten engine oil drain plug after draining engine oil.
5. Fill engine oil through filler pipe up to upper point on level gauge. Make sure that vehicle is
placed level when checking oil level. Use engine oil
of proper quality and viscosity, selected in accordance with the table in figure. Recommended oil
API classification SJ or SH with the words "Energy Conserving or Energy Conserving II", CCMC
specification G4 or G5, ACEA specification A1, A2 or A3, or New API mark displayed on the
container (If it is impossible to get SJ or SH grade, you may use SG grade.)
Engine oil capacity: Upper level 4.0 L (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp quarts) Lower level 3.0 L (3.2 US qt, 2.6
Imp quarts)
Page 4860
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 4971
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 3267
2.5L model
3.0L model
Page 5831
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
Rear Window Glass
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect electrical connectors from rear defogger terminals. 2. Remove glass in the same
procedure as for windshield glass.
INSTALLATION
1. Bond dam rubber and matching pin. 2. Install glass in the same procedure as for windshield
glass. 3. Connect rear defogger terminals.
CAUTION: -
When door is opened/closed after glass is bonded, always lower door glass and then open/close
door carefully.

water leaks.
Page 1699
Page 2020
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Check sprocket teeth for abnormal wear and scratches. 2. Make sure there is no free play
between sprocket and key. 3. Check crankshaft sprocket notch for sensor for damage and
contamination of foreign matter.
Page 550
Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03

INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURE
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
5) Add brake fluid.
For Turbo models
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.


Page 1541
6. Install automatic belt tension adjuster which tension rod is borded with pin. 7. Install timing belt.
8. Install V-belts.
9. Install radiator main fan and sub fan motor assemblies.
10. Install reservoir tank.

Page 3832
grease: SHELL 6459N
CAUTION:
INSPECTION
smoothly.
overhaul.
4. Install knuckle.
Page 701
CAMBER
WHEEL TOE-IN
Inspection 1. Using a toe-in gauge, measure rear wheel toe-in.
Toe-in: 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch)
2. Mark rear sides of left and right tires at height corresponding to center of spindles and measure
distance "A" between marks. 3. Move vehicle forward so that marks line up with front sides at
height corresponding to center of spindles.
4. Measure distance "B" between left and right marks. Toe-in can then be obtained by the following
equation:
Adjustment 1. Loosen self-locking nut on inner side of link rear.

Page 3842
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service Precautions
C: CAUTION
^ Wear working clothing, including a cap, protective goggles, and protective shoes during
operation.
^ Use SUBARU genuine grease etc. or the equivalent. Do not mix grease etc. with that of another
grade or from other manufacturers.
^ Apply grease onto sliding or revolution surfaces before installation.
^ Before installing O-rings or snap rings, apply sufficient amount of grease to avoid damage and
deformation.
Page 1700
bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Manual.
Page 3307
Page 3996

Page 3988
Page 3658
Disclaimer
Page 6116
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove power window main switch panel.
2. Remove four hook to remove remote control mirror switch.
INSTALLATION

Page 4107
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
Page 3351
notification letter. They should also arrange to make the required correction according to the
instructions in the service procedure section of this bulletin.
Bulletin.
being placed in service may be subject to civil penalties of up to $5,000 per violation (i.e. for each
vehicle), as provided in 49 USC Section 30165(a) of the Safety Act, and will also be in breach of
the Subaru Dealer Agreement.
PARTS INFORMATION
Each dealer will automatically be sent a quantity of replacement parts (except Dexron III ATF)
equal to 60% of the number of affected vehicles allocated to the dealer of record.
Replacement Transmissions
Affected vehicles that have had a new or remanufactured replacement transmission with an
affected parking rod have been identified. Owners of these vehicles will be notified and included in
this recall. This may include vehicles that are outside of the affected VIN range.
Any new or remanufactured transmission purchased from SOA after November 18, 2002 will not
require replacement of the parking rod. All new and remanufactured transmissions shipped from
SOA warehouse inventory after November 18, 2002 have been inspected and modified as
necessary. Only those transmissions in warehouse inventory affected by the WWK-94 parking rod
recall have had the parking rod replaced. Those transmissions can be identified in one or more of
the ways listed below.
If a replacement transmission, purchased after November 18, 2002, is installed in a vehicle
affected by the WWK-94 parking rod recall, do not perform the recall. Contact the CDS department
at SOA to have the recall closed and identified as completed.
Remanufactured Transmissions (part number ending in R1):
^ The converter housing of the transmission shall have a self-adhesive label reading "WWK94"
affixed to it
^ "WWK94" is ink stamped or written on the boss next to the transmission serial number on top of
the converter housing
^ The remanufacturers identification tag (also affixed to the converter housing) shall have
"WWK94" stamped into it following the serial number in the serial number field
^ The plastic shipping container shall have two "WWK94" self adhesive labels applied to it. One on
the front and one on the side
^ The shipping container may also bear "WWK94" stencil painted in white on the top or side of the
container in lieu of the self-adhesive labels
New Transmissions (straight part number or part number ending in S1):
^ The shipping container will bear "WWK94" stencil painted on the top or side of the container
^ The wooden crate will bear "WWK94" stencil painted on the top or side of the crate

Page 339
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
Brakes; Antilock Brake System; Lateral Accelerometer Sensor.
Page 3429
Control Module: Testing and Inspection

Part 1
Page 772
DISCLAIMER
Page 4171

Page 6793
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
Front Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove door trim. 2. Remove sealing cover. 3. Remove outer weatherstrip.
4. Remove inner stabilizer. 5. Remove outer mirror.
6. Remove gusset.
7. Operate the power window switch to move glass to the position shown in the figure, and then
remove the two nuts from service holes.
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove airbag module.
WARNING: Always refer to Restraint Systems before performing airbag module service (if so
equipped).
3. Remove steering wheel nut, then draw out steering wheel from shaft using steering puller.
NOTE: Steering wheel must be removed at the straight ahead position.
4. Remove the screw securing lower steering column cover. 5. Remove two screws securing upper
steering column cover.
6. Release the lock of harness band and disconnect connector of steering angle sensor.
Page 323
Page 519

Page 2451
Page 1458
Disclaimer
Page 4574
Parking Brake Lever: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove console cover. 2. Forcibly pull parking brake lever 3 to 5 times. 3. Adjust parking brake
lever by turning adjuster until parking brake lever stroke is set at 7 to 8 notches with operating force
of 196 N (20 kg, 44
lbs.).
4. Tighten lock nut. 5. Install console cover.

Page 3391
Cooling System - Radiator Cap
Radiator Cap: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Radiator Cap
NUMBER: 09-45-06 DATE: 11/28/06
SUBJECT: Radiator Cap
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide the inspection and cleaning procedure for the radiator cap.
Whenever servicing the coolant/radiator, it is imperative that the filler neck and cap are clean of all
contaminants and debris.
If foreign material is left in the filler neck sealing area, it will become embedded in the rubber seal
and will prevent the cap from sealing properly. Before making the determination that the radiator
cap is faulty, perform the following repair procedure.
Caution:
The engine cooling system is under pressure and may be extremely hot. To prevent personal injury
or vehicle damage, be sure to take appropriate precautions while performing this procedure.
1) Wash and clean the rubber seal surface(s) "A" using clean water and a soft bristle brush.
2) Carefully open the negative pressure valve. Using clean water and a soft bristle brush wash and
clean the mating surface "B" between the valve and the rubber seal.
Note:
Clean thoroughly. Failure to do so will prevent the cap from holding pressure.
3) After cleaning, check valve-opening pressure of cap using a cap tester according to the
applicable service manual.
4) Clean the filler neck sealing surface of any and all contaminants.
Note:
If the valve opening pressure stays within the predetermined specification the cap is reusable. Only
replace caps that failed the pressure test.
Special note:
If the vehicle has any record of overheating the cap may not be reusable even afier cleaning due to
the deterioration of the sealing materials.
For vehicles under the Basic New Car Limited Warranty period, this repair may be claimed using
the table.
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 3023
Page 4598
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Using Gauges
INSPECTION
OPERATION CHECK (WITH GAUGES)

CAUTION: When checking operation, be sure to securely apply the hand brake.
- Checking with gauges
Connect gauges as shown in Figure. After bleeding air from pressure gauges, proceed to each
check.
- Air tightness check
1. Start engine and keep it running until a vacuum of 66.7 kPa (500 mm-Hg, 19.69 inch-Hg) = point
A is indicated on vacuum gauge. Do not
depress brake pedal.
2. Stop engine and watch the gauge. If the vacuum drop range is less than 3.3 kPa (25 mm-Hg,
0.98 inch-Hg) within 15 seconds after stopping
engine, brake booster is functioning properly. If defective, the cause may be one of those listed
below. -
Check valve malfunction
- Leak from vacuum hose
- Leak from the shell jointed portion or stud bolt welded portion
- Damaged diaphragm
- Leak from valve body seal and bearing portion
- Leak from plate and seal assembly portion
- Leak from poppet valve assembly portion
- Loaded air tightness check

Page 642

Page 4210

Page 1303
5. Remove bolts which install power steering pump bracket.
6. Disconnect connector from power steering pump switch.
7. Remove power steering tank from the bracket by pulling it upwards.
8. Place power steering pump and tank on the right side wheel apron.
Page 1899
DISCLAIMER
Page 3541
Page 1302
2. Remove V-belt covers.
3. Loosen lock bolt and slider bolt, and remove power steering pump drive V-belt.
4. Remove bolts which hold power steering pipes onto intake manifold protector.
NOTE: Do not disconnect power steering hose.

Page 2551
Page 2355
Page 4262
assembly.
CAUTION:
figure 2.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Page 4855
Page 3135
B: INSTALLATION

Page 3038

Page 3742
The tables shown above contain additional information for recommended materials listed in the
repair manuals for individual models. For additional warranty submission information please refer
the materials policy in Section 13.9 of the CDS Policies and Procedures Manual.
Disclaimer
Page 446

Page 4768
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 3562

Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid DOT 3 or 4

Page 3212

Page 6383
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 150
Page 4314
specification.

Page 580

Page 2922

Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 563
Page 1586
Page 6246
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 2943
DISCLAIMER
Page 3572
Valve Body: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove the oil pan.
NOTE: ^
Remove and clean the magnet.
^ Remove the old gasket on the oil pan and transmission case completely.
5. Remove the control valve.

Page 4028

Specifications

Page 171
Part 3
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03

INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURE
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
5) Add brake fluid.
For Turbo models
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.


Page 2736
11. Remove fuel sub level sensor. 12. Drain fuel from fuel tank by using hand pump.
WARNING: Do not use a motor pump when draining fuel.
13. After draining fuel, reinstall fuel sub level sensor.
NOTE: If you have not removed fuel tank yet, proceed with the procedure below for installation.
Diagrams
Control Assembly: Diagrams
Control Unit (Manual A/C)
Page 2219
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 6295

Page 3546
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 6653

Page 6715
Page 1556
Coolant: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT 1. Lift-up the vehicle.
3. Remove drain cock to drain engine coolant into container.
NOTE: Remove radiator cap so that engine coolant will drain faster.
FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 1. Fill engine coolant into radiator up to filler neck position.
Coolant capacity (fill up to "FULL" level): MT model: Approximately 6.4 L (6.8 US quarts 5.6 Imp
quarts) AT model: Approximately 6.3 L (6.7 US quarts 5.5 Imp quarts)
CAUTION: The SUBARU Genuine Coolant containing antifreeze and anti rust agents is especially
made for SUBARU engine, which has an aluminum crankcase. Always use SUBARU Genuine
Coolant, since other coolant may cause corrosion.
2. Fill engine coolant into reservoir tank up to upper level. 3. Attach radiator cap and reservoir tank
cap properly. 4. Warm-up engine completely for more than five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm. 5. If
engine coolant level drops in radiator, add engine coolant to filler neck position. 6. If engine coolant
level drops from upper level of reservoir tank, add engine coolant to upper level. 7. Attach radiator
cap and reservoir tank cap properly.
Page 2580
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 1309
8. Install air cleaner case stay RH and engine harness bracket, and connect engine harness
connector to bulkhead connectors.
9. Connect brake booster hose.
MT Vehicles
AT Vehicles
10. Connect engine coolant hose to throttle body.

Page 1859

Page 5373

Page 4492
3. Remove lock pin. 4. Raise caliper body and move it toward vehicle center to separate it from
support. 5. Remove support from back plate.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow foreign particles to enter inlet (at brake hose connector).
INSTALLATION
1. Install disc rotor on hub. 2. Install support on back plate.
CAUTION: -
Always replace the pads for both the left and right wheels at the same time. Also replace pad clips
if they are twisted or worn.
- A wear indicator is provided on the inner disc brake pad. If the pad wears down to such an extent
that the end of the wear indicator contacts the disc rotor, a squeaking sound is produced as the
wheel rotates. If this sound is heard, replace the pad.
- Replace pads if there is oil or grease on them.
and pad clip. 4. Install pads on support. 5. Install caliper body on support.
6. Connect brake hose.
CAUTION: -
The brake hose must be connected without any twist.
- Replace brake hose gaskets with new ones.
7. Bleed air from brake system.

Page 4513

Page 6111
Replacement of front seat inner slide rail(s) - Use the following claim submission information for
replacement of front seat inner slide rail(s). All properly submitted claims will receive an automatic
credit of 0.5 labor hours for replacement of one front seat inner slide rail or 0.8 labor hours for
replacement of both front seat inner slide rails. Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus the
applicable handling allowance. (Refer to section 13, Claim Administration, of the Subaru Policies,
Guidelines & Procedures Manual for recall/campaign reimbursement policies.)
Claims will automatically be credited labor and parts according to the appropriate repair procedure
for the individual vehicle as determined in the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry of the Dealer
Communication System.
Disclaimer
Page 1966
INSTALLATION

Page 3189
Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection
HAZARD SWITCH Check continuity between terminals when operating the switch.
Page 151
Page 3555
15. Remove oil pan.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 144
ABS
Page 2519
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 3066
Page 264
Page 1328
19. Remove engine harness from intake manifold. 20. Remove purge control solenoid valve.
21. Remove bolt which installs injector pipe on intake manifold as shown in figure.
22. Remove bolt which installs injector pipe on intake manifold.
23. Remove two bolts which hold fuel pipes on the left side of intake manifold. 24. Remove fuel
injectors.
Page 4180
Page 3420
Page 313
- Steering angle sensor center positioning
recognize what position the vehicle is in. For procedures for the above two settings, refer to
Electronic Brake Control Module; Testing and Inspection.
Page 968
Transmission gear oil Recommended oil
2. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)

1. Drain differential gear oil by removing drain plug after allowing the engine to cool for 3 to 4
hours.
2. Reinstall drain plug after draining differential gear oil and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 44 ± 3 Nm (4.5 ± 0.3 kg-m, 33 ± 2.2 ft.lb)
CAUTION: -
3. Fill differential gear oil through the oil level gauge hole up to the upper point of level gauge.
Differential gear oil capacity: 1.1 - 1.3 l (1.2 - 1.4 US qt, 1.0 - 1.1 Imp qt)
Page 4547
CAUTION: Do not drop or bump relay box.
INSTALLATION
1. Install hydraulic unit. 2. Connect hydraulic unit ground cable to body.
3. Connect brake pipes to their correct hydraulic unit connections. 4. Secure hydraulic unit
connector to connector bracket.
5. Connect connector to hydraulic unit. 6. Install air intake duct. 7. Connect ground cable to battery.
2. RELAY BOX
1. Install relay box and connector bracket.

Page 3217

Page 1287
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove generator from bracket.
1) Disconnect connector and terminal from generator.
2) Remove V-belt cover.
3) Loosen lock bolt and slider bolt, and remove front side V-belt.
Page 3352
Parking Pawl Rod Replacement - Use the following information for claim submission:
Enter the applicable part number(s). Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus applicable
handling allowance.
Disclaimer
Repair Procedures
^ Park the vehicle over a lift
^ Turn the engine off and leave the ignition switch in the "Off" position
^ Place the transmission shift selector in the "3" range position

Page 2545
Page 5447

Page 501
Note:
Note:
Page 4034
Page 2453
Page 3020

Page 3469
15. Remove oil pan.
B: INSTALLATION
Brakes - ABS ECU Applications/Service
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS ECU
NUMBER: 06-31-03 DATE: 07/15/03
INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE
Removal of ECU
NOTE:
Page 1633
DISCLAIMER
Page 498
Page 995
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................
............................. Dexron IIE or Dexron III ATF
Page 4805
Page 3061
Page 3804
3. REAR AXLE
Page 2843
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 4756
13. Remove retainer and roller from housing.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop retainer and roller.
14. Remove coil spring from magnetic switch.
ASSEMBLY
Observe the following:
1. Before assembling, lubricate disassembled parts at the points shown in "COMPONENT

PARTS".
Grease: ESSO BEACON 325 SHELL ALVANIA GREASE RA or equivalent
2. Assembling magnetic switch, clutch, and housing.
To assemble, first install clutch to magnetic switch, then install idle gear, and finally install clutch.
CAUTION: -
Do not forget to install steel ball and coil spring to clutch.
- Attach bearing to idle gear before hand.
3. Installing armature to yoke

Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Component Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # WWK-94 Date: 021201
NUMBER: WWK-94 DATE: 12/2002
APPLICABILITY: 2001-03MY Legacy and Outback 4EAT 2002-03MY Impreza 4EAT 2002-03MY
Forester 4EAT 2003MY Baja 4EAT
SUBJECT: 4EAT Parking Pawl Rod
INTRODUCTION
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that affected vehicles may have been produced
with an improperly manufactured transmission parking pawl rod. The parking pawl rod may not
provide sufficient spring tension to immediately engage the parking pawl to the park gear when the
transmission is placed in the "Park" position. This may allow the vehicle to move/roll prior to
engaging.
This recall will involve the replacement of the transmission parking pawl rod and related parts on
affected vehicles.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
^ 2001-03 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback with 4EAT.
^ 2002-03 MY Impreza with 4EAT.
^ 2002-03 MY Forester with 4EAT.
^ 2003 MY Baja with 4EAT.

Page 4816
Page 4517
BRAKE/W-01
Page 5870
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trunk Room Mat
TRUNK ROOM MAT
REMOVAL
Draw out trunk room mat, and detach box.
INSTALLATION

Page 1439
Page 2108
INSPECTION
port.
Diagrams
Page 6649
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2341

Service and Repair
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair
HELPER
REMOVAL
1. Jack-up the rear part of the vehicle, support it with safety stands (rigid racks).
2. Using ST, remove helper.
ST 20099AE030 HELPER
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: 30 Nm (3.1 kgf-cm, 22 ft. lbs.)
INSPECTION
Check helper for cracks, fatigue or damage.

Page 1867

Page 6190
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5006
DISASSEMBLY
Using ST, press bushing out of place. ST 20099AE010 INSTALLER & REMOVER
ASSEMBLY
1. Using ST, press bushing into place.
ST 20099AE010 INSTALLER & REMOVER
CAUTION: Outer bushing has a "directional" design. Be sure to install bushing with longer inner
housing side facing vehicle rear.
INSPECTION
Visually check link upper for damage or bends.
Stabilizer Link Front
REMOVAL
3. Remove bolt securing link front to sub frame.

Connecting Rod Nut
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Components/Tightening Torque
Page 5605
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
bumper.
Component Locations
Side Air Bag: Component Locations

Page 6225
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 6312
Specifications
Idle Speed

Page 4214
DISCLAIMER
Page 4218
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 5312
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
Ambient Sensor (Auto A/C)
REMOVAL
connector.
INSTALLATION

Page 1464
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 5625
REMOVAL
two screws.
INSTALLATION

INSPECTION

Coolant Reservoir: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of
Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
Specifications
Exhaust Pipe: Specifications
Exhaust Pipe Front Pipe To Cylinder Head 30 Nm
Center Pipe To Rear Pipe 18 Nm
Hanger Bracket 35 Nm
Page 3853
1. SPECIAL TOOLS
2. GENERAL PURPOSE TOOLS
Page 4502
Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Check that brake fluid level remains between "MIN" and "MAX". If out of the specified range,
refill or drain fluid. If fluid level becomes close to
"MIN", refill fluid.
2. Check fluid for discoloration. If fluid color has excessively changed, drain the fluid and refill with
new fluid.
Page 1909
Part 2
Page 1796

Page 5231
side to the specified torque with a torque wrench. If only one wrench is used to tighten, the
tightening torque will be excessive or insufficient. This may cause a pipe distortion or gas leak,
resulting in damage to hoses and pipes.
- After tightening, using a clean shop towel to remove excess oil from the connections and any oil
which may have run on the vehicle body or other parts.
- If any leakage is suspected after tightening, do not retighten the connections, Disconnect the
connections, remove the O-rings, and check the O-rings, threads, and connections.
Page 13
the bracket.

Page 4859
Page 5396

Auto A/C
Manual A/C

Page 4359
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Front
DISASSEMBLY
14 inch TYPE 1. Clean mud and foreign particles from caliper body assembly and support.
2. Gradually supply compressed air via caliper body brake hose to force piston out.
CAUTION: -
3. Remove piston boot.
4. Remove piston seal from caliper body cylinder. 5. Remove guide pin and boot from caliper body.
15 inch AND 16 inch TYPE 1. Clean mud and foreign particles from caliper body assembly and
support.
2. Using a standard screwdriver, remove boot ring from piston. 3. Remove boot from piston end. 4.
Gradually supply compressed air via caliper body brake hose to force piston out.
INSPECTION

Page 4219
Specifications
Firing Order

Page 6513
Page 3687
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Testing and Inspection
E: INSPECTION
1. CLUTCH PEDAL
Move clutch pedal pads in the lateral direction with a force of approximately 10 N (1 kg, 2 lb.) to
ensure pedal deflection is in specified range.
CAUTION: If excessive deflection is noted, replace bushings with new ones.
Deflection of clutch pedal: Service limit 5.0 mm (0.197 inch) or less

Page 6530
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2376
Part 2
Page 6665
HORN RELAY
Page 2047
Rear Sensor 7 Nm
Page 1913
Part 3
Page 5913
submission:
allowance.
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Wiring Diagram
Page 3991

Page 2306
DISCLAIMER
Page 4298
ADJUSTMENT

Page 2946
INSPECTION
1. Normal
2. Carbon fouled
3. Oil fouled
Page 5118
grease: SHELL 6459N
CAUTION:
INSPECTION
smoothly.
overhaul.
4. Install knuckle.
Page 3486
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Page 6402
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
propeller shaft.
Page 2211
REMOVAL
Service and Repair
COWL PANEL
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 6096
Replacement of front seat inner slide rail(s) - Use the following claim submission information for
replacement of front seat inner slide rail(s). All properly submitted claims will receive an automatic
credit of 0.5 labor hours for replacement of one front seat inner slide rail or 0.8 labor hours for
replacement of both front seat inner slide rails. Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus the
applicable handling allowance. (Refer to section 13, Claim Administration, of the Subaru Policies,
Guidelines & Procedures Manual for recall/campaign reimbursement policies.)
Claims will automatically be credited labor and parts according to the appropriate repair procedure
for the individual vehicle as determined in the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry of the Dealer
Communication System.
Disclaimer
Page 3395

Page 650
Page 5354

Page 5191
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Remove glove box.
3. Remove mounting bolts of harness stay.
4. Remove nuts of keyless unit stay and CRU unit stay. 5. Disconnect connector of sunroof.
6. Disconnect servo connector.
7. Disconnect motor connector. 8. Remove 3 screws.

Page 6747
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Specifications
Radiator: Specifications
Radiator Type Down Flow, Pressrue Type
Core Dimenisions Height 691.5 mm
Width 340 mm
Thickness 16 mm
Fins Corrugated Fin Type

Page 3106
Disclaimer
Page 2153
Page 3625
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove straight pin and reservoir tank.
2. Remove oil seal.
3. Move the cylinder boot backward. 4. Remove snap ring.
CAUTION: Be careful when removing the snap ring to prevent the rod, washer, piston and return
spring from flying out.
D: ASSEMBLY
Page 349
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 697
NOTE: Moving the adjusting bolt by one scale graduation changes camber by approximately 0°10'.
3. Tighten the two self-locking nuts.

CASTER
Page 1680
3. Remove bolts which install fan motor onto shroud.
D: ASSEMBLY

Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
INSPECTION

Page 6167
B: Must be coated evenly on cam end inner connection. C: Cover must be inserted securely, until
tip of cable touches cover stopper.
Page 1278

Page 1409
1. Remove belt idler (No. 1).
2. Remove automatic belt tension adjuster assembly.

Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
PROCEDURE
CAUTION: -
The FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOTS or 4 brake fluid must be used.
- Cover bleeder with waste cloth when loosening it to prevent brake fluid from being splashed over
surrounding parts.
- Avoid mixing different brands of brake fluid to prevent degrading the quality of the fluid.
- Be careful not to allow dirt or dust to get into the reservoir tank.
NOTE: -
Start with the brakes (wheels) connected to the secondary chamber of the master cylinder.
- The time interval between two brake pedal operations (from the time when the pedal is released
to the time when it is depressed another time) shall be approximately 3 seconds.
- The air bleeder on each brake shall be released for 1 to 2 seconds.
1. MASTER CYLINDER
NOTE: If master cylinder is disassembled or reservoir tank is empty, bleed master cylinder.
1. Disconnect brake line at primary and secondary sides. 2. Carefully depress and hold brake
pedal.
3. Close outlet plug with your finger, and release brake pedal. 4. Repeat above steps 2 and 3 until
master cylinder is completely bled. 5. Install brake pipes to master cylinder.
Tightening torque:8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
2. BRAKE LINE
NOTE: -
During bleeding operation, keep the brake reservoir tank filled with brake fluid to eliminate entry of
air.
- Brake pedal operating must be very slow.
- For convenience and safety, two people should do the work.
1. Make sure that there is no leak from joints and connections of the brake system.
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 2008
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
AT VEHICLES

Page 1826
18. Connect battery ground cable. 19. Fill coolant.

Page 4172

Page 2141
Page 3116
Antenna Amplifier: Testing and Inspection
Measure resistance between terminal and amplifier body.

Page 5719
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams

T/C-01
NOTE:
Page 393
H/L (2L)-01
2-Light Model
Page 6456
Tachometer: Service and Repair
Tachometer
REMOVAL
Disassemble combination meter, and then remove tachometer and water temperature gauge
assembly.
INSTALLATION

Brake Caliper: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Squealing Noise
NUMBER: 06-30-01R DATE: 03/06/02

of brake shims)

FOLLOWING VINS)
modification.
FIELD PROCEDURE:
shims.
Note:
way.
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 1000
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant Type R-134a

Page 335
3. Install rear sensor harness brackets in the original positions and install harness on the relic 4.
Place a thickness gauge between ABS sensor's and tone wheel's tooth face. After standard
ABS sensor on rear arm to specified torque. ABS sensor standard clearance: 0.44 - 0.94 mm
(0.0173 - 0.0370 inch) Tightening torque: 32 Nm (3.3 kgf-m, 24 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: Check the marks on the harness to make sure that no distortion exists. (RH: white, LH:
yellow)
5. After confirmation of the ABS sensor clearance, connect connector to ABS sensor and install
fuel tank cover. 6. Connect connector to battery ground cable.
Page 4118
B: INSTALLATION

Page 5726
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 5441
DISCLAIMER
Page 2298
the engine rear.

Page 2275
INSTALLATION
Page 4521
Page 1066
DISCLAIMER
Specifications
Page 2871
Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Using accurate tester, inspect the following items, and replace if defective.
1. Primary resistance 2. Secondary coil resistance
CAUTION: If the resistance is extremely low, this indicates the presence of a short-circuit.
Specified resistance:
Primary Side
[Primary side] Between terminal No.1 and No.2 0.73 Ohms ± 10% Between terminal No.2 and No.4
0.73 Ohms ± 10%
Secondary Side
[Secondary side] Between (A) and (B) 12.8 kOhms ± 15% Between (C) and (D) 12.8 kOhms ± 15%
3. Insulation between primary terminal and case: 10 MOhms or more.

Page 2665
4. Remove bolts which install power steering pump to bracket.
5. Disconnect connector from power steering pump switch.
6. Remove power steering tank from the bracket by pulling it upwards.
7. Place power steering pump and tank on the right side wheel apron.
Page 6546
Locations
Page 261
Page 5515
Page 50
CAUTION: -
Page 4722
CAUTION: Do not apply a shock or load to IC regulator cooling fins.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
- When disassembling generator, replace rear ball bearing.
- When soldering starter coil to diode, do not touch lead wire with solder for more than 5 seconds.
- Before installing rear cover, insert pin from outside of rear cover so that holds brush. After
installing rear cover, remove pin.
- When installing rear cover, heat portion (A) to 50 °C (122 °F) with heater drier.
Alternator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector and terminal from generator.
3. Remove V-belt cover.
4. Remove front side V-belt.

Service Precautions
CAUTION:
Page 3230
Part 2
Page 4858
Page 4973
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 1786
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2274
REMOVAL

NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 1719

Page 6716

Diagrams
1 of 2
2 of 2
Page 1313
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
MT Vehicles
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect engine ground terminal from intake manifold.
2. Disconnect connector from ignition coil and ignitor assembly. 3. Remove ignition coil and ignitor
assembly.
4. Disconnect connectors from throttle position sensor (A), idle air control solenoid valve (B) and
intake manifold pressure sensor (C). 5. Disconnect air by-pass hose (D) from idle air control
solenoid valve. 6. Disconnect air by-pass hose (E) from intake manifold.
Page 1279
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 3825
1. SPECIAL TOOLS
2. GENERAL PURPOSE TOOLS
Page 751
Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual - Multiple Systems Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 1415
3) Tighten remaining bolts.
1. Install front belt cover.
2. Install LH belt cover.
3. Install crankshaft pulley. 4. Install pulley bolt
To lock crankshaft, use ST 499977100 Crankshaft Pulley Wrench.
a. Clean the crankshaft pulley thread using an air gun. b. Apply engine oil to the crankshaft pulley
bolt seat and thread. c. Tighten the bolt temporarily with tightening torque of 44 Nm (4.5kg-m, 33
ft.lbs.) d. tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Tightening torque: 177 Nm (18.0 kg-m, 130.2 ft. lbs.)
e. Confirm that the tightening angle of the crankshaft pulley bolt is 65° or more, if not replace
crankshaft pulley bolt.
Caution: Conduct the tightening procedures by confirming the turning angle of the crankshaft pulley
bolt referring to the gauge indicated on the belt cover.
Diagrams
Page 5569
PARTS INFORMATION
illustrated.
Page 3414

Page 792
LH SIDE
Page 2236

Page 1508
4. Overheating
colder heat range.
Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
1. BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH (M/T)
2. INHIBITOR SWITCH (A/T)

Page 2548
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 5875
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Testing and Inspection
Trunk Lid Lock Assembly
1. Check the striker for bending or abnormal wear. 2. Check the safety lever for improper
movement. 3. Check other levers and the spring for rust formation and unsmooth movement.
Page 2882
the engine rear.

AT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 2080
REMOVAL
Page 4699
Disclaimer
Page 2561
Page 1364
allowance.
Disclaimer
Page 4029

Page 5586
9. Connect the other terminal of deployment tool to the battery plus terminal. Then deploy the
pretensioner.
CAUTION: -
Alter deployment, pretensioner is especially hot. Leave it unattended for 40 minutes.
10. Remove outer belt (front).
11. Wrap the deployed pretensioner in an airtight vinyl bag, and then discard it.
Deploying After Removal From Vehicle
1. Fold backrest all the way forward, then move front seat all the way forward. 2. Turn ignition
switch OFF, disconnect the ground cable from the battery, and wait for more than 20 seconds
before starting work. 3. Remove outer belt (front).
4. Cut off seat belt as close to retractor as possible. 5. Short terminal to alligator clip furnished as a
deployment tool.
Deployment tool: (Part No. 98299PA030)

Page 6612
Map Light: Service and Repair
Spot Light
REMOVAL
1. Remove lens (A) and spotlight mounting screw (B). 2. Disconnect harness connectors and
remove spotlight.
INSTALLATION

Page 2830
Disclaimer
Page 4885
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 3924
Disclaimer
REMOVAL

Page 4022

Page 1489
Page 5733
T/C-01 - Trailer Wire Harness (Option)

Page 6865
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wiper Blade
DISASSEMBLY
Pull on side (A) of the wiper rubber stopper and remove the rubber from the blade assembly.
ASSEMBLY
1. Insert the wiper rubbber onto the blade so that the stopper is in the position shown (at the bottom
of the wiper arm)
2. Make sure the wiper rubber is securely fastened to the pull stopper (A).
Page 4418
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the brake pad. 2. Remove the support.
NOTE: Remove support only when replacing it or the rotor. If need not be removed when servicing
3. Remove the disc rotor.
NOTE: If disc rotor seizes up within the hub, drive disc rotor out by installing an 8-mm bolt in holes
B on the rotor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the disc rotor. 2. Install the support.
CAUTION: -
- When replacing the pad, replace pads of the left and right wheels at the same time.
3. Install the pads and the caliper body.

Page 161
Part 3
Page 4189
Part 3
Page 3554
CAUTION: ^
screws.
harness assembly.
Page 3386

Page 6299
Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Electrical Diagrams

C/L-01
Service and Repair
Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair
Cruise Control Module
REMOVAL
2. Remove nut, then remove cruise control module (A) and the other electrical control module (B)
while disconnecting connector. 3. Disconnect cruise control module and the other electrical control
module.
INSTALLATION

Page 3332
Only remove those bolts identified in the drawing. It is not necessary to remove the fluid strainer in
order to remove the valve body.
Some models have a fluid pipe between the valve body and transmission case. The pipe must be
removed before removing the valve body bolts. The chart identifies those vehicles.
Remove all but two of the valve body attaching bolts (bolts are noted as A and B types). Loosen
the two remaining bolts enough to allow the remaining transmission fluid to drain.
While the transmission is draining, clean the liquid gasket from the transmission pan.
Scotchbright Roll Lock Disk # 07481 (red) or equivalent.
While holding the valve body remove the remaining two bolts and remove the valve body from the
transmission assembly. Place the valve body in a clean, secure area.
Important:
Be sure that the valve body remains in the upright position, otherwise oil will drain from the
accumulator valves.
Parking Rod Replacement
Confirm manual plate is in gear range "3" and drive the straight pin out of the select lever by using
a 4 mm diam. pin remover. Remove and discard the old pin. A new pin is provided in the parking
rod kit.
Turn the manual plate until the detent spring is released as pictured.
Hydraulic Hose: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03

INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURE
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
5) Add brake fluid.
For Turbo models
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.


Page 3918
Disclaimer
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Testing and Inspection
Rear Gate Outer Handle
1. Inspect the rod for deformation. 2. Make sure the lever and rod move smoothly.
Page 820
Timing Belt
1. Remove timing belt guide. (MT vehicle only)
2. If alignment mark a and/or arrow mark (which indicates rotation direction) on timing belt fade
away, put new marks before removing timing belt
as shown.
1. Turn crankshaft using ST. Align mark a of sprocket to cylinder block notch b and ensure that
right side cam sprocket mark c, cam cap and
cylinder head matching surface d and/or left side cam sprocket mark e and belt cover notch f are
properly adjusted.
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET

Page 4685
C: INSPECTION
with new one.

Page 3539
Page 3561
Page 5542
missing bolts.
Note:
6 bolts 13 +/- 2 kgf.cm (11 +/- 2 in-lb)
RENTAL CAR
Page 5752
Rear Bumper (Wagon)
REMOVAL
1. SEDAN
CAUTION: -

- To avoid damage to bumper, lay removed bumper on sheet spread on the floor. Do not lay it
directly on the floor.
1. Lift-up the vehicle. 2. Remove bolts and clips.

Page 1506
Page 6054
Roof Rack Frame: Service and Repair Crossbar
CROSSBAR
REMOVAL
1. Remove TORX(R) bolt T30 from each cross end support. 2. Rotate lower clamp of each end
support about 90 degrees downward to remove crossbar.
CAUTION: Do not damage roof panel during removal or installation.
INSTALLATION
1. Rotate lower clamp of each end support about 90 degrees downward. 2. Set crossbar so that
front direction arrow on the right top face of crossbar points in the direction of vehicle front, and
place crossbar end support at
position 152.4 mm (6.00 in) back from joint of front roof rail support and roof rail.
3. Set crossbar so that front direction arrow on the right top face of crossbar points in the direction
of vehicle front, and place crossbar end support at
position 152.4 mm (6.00 in) back from joint of rear roof rail support and roof rail.
4. Tighten end support and lower clamp using TORX(R) bolt T30.
Page 1231
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Loosen the lock nut (A).
2. Loosen the slider bolt (B). 3. Remove the A/C belt.
4. Remove the A/C belt tensioner.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install a new belt, and tighten the slider bolt so as to obtain the specified belt tension. 2. Tighten
the slider bolt (B).
3. Tighten the lock nut (A).
Tightening torque: Lock nut (A): 22.6 Nm (2.3 kgf-m, 16.6 ft. lbs.)
Page 4952
9. Install pressure plate as shown in the figure.
10. Apply specified hydraulic oil to O-rings and fit them into front casing and pressure plate. 11.
Install seal ring to pressure plate.
12. With knock pin positions aligned, install rear cover.
CAUTION: Loosely tighten bolts in the sequence (A), (B), (C), and (D) shown in figure. Then,
tighten in the same sequence.
13. When reassembly procedures have been completed, turn shaft by hand to ensure it turns
smoothly. If it binds or other unusual conditions are
evident, disassemble again and check for foreign matter trapped on sliding surfaces and improper
installation. Eliminate the cause of trouble.
14. Check the following:
^ Excessive play in pulley shaft
^ Ditch deflection of pulley
^ Resistance to rotation of pulley
^ Measurement of generated oil pressure

Page 4436
5. Connect parking brake cable to parking lever.
6. While positioning shoes (one at a time) in groove on wheel cylinder, secure shoes. 7. Fix shoes
by connecting hold-down cup to hold-down pin. 8. Connect lower shoe return spring. 9. Set the
outside diameter of brake shoes less than 0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.020 to 0.031 inch) in comparison with
the inside diameter of brake drum.
10. Match the holes on hub and drum and install drum on hub.
Page 6199
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Lighting Switch
1. LIGHTING SWITCH
Turn Signal Switch

Page 5717
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 3385

Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 7
Security Horn Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3027
Page 4847
Fuse: Application and ID
Fuse Locations
Page 4716
2. Diodes on "-" side Continuity of proper diodes on "-" side
5. IC REGULATOR
1. Compose a circuit diagram as shown in figure.
2. Check operation as shown in chart.

Page 4182
Page 263
Page 510

Page 268

Part 1
Ignition Switch
the body harness.
ignition connector.

Page 3065
Locations
Relay And Fuse

Page 5413

A/C - Blower Motor Resistor Repairs
Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Resistor Repairs
TITLE: Blower Motor Resistor Repairs
APPLIES TO: All models
SERVICE TIP:
If you get a vehicle in with a repeat blower motor resistor complaint and you have checked the
blower motor for excessive draw, we suggest you replace the blower motor at the same time you
install a new resistor.
Subaru has received some calls where vehicles have come back after having the blower motor
resistor replaced. Changing out the blower motor and resistor at the same time has repaired the
vast majority of these vehicles.
Page 1708
bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Manual.
Page 3333
Rotate the manual plate to align notch and hole and then remove the parking rod.
Install the new parking rod into the transmission case and onto the manual plate.
Note:
For identification the new parking rod Will have a green band painted on it.
Align the manual plate with the select lever and install the new straight pin provided in the kit. Do
not reuse the original pin.
Move the manual plate and confirm that it works correctly.
Caution:
Do not put the transmission in "P" range, since the shift lock may activate.
Place the manual plate to "N" range.
Remove all liquid gasket from the mating surface of the transmission case.
Scotchbright Roll Lock Disk # 07515 (light blue) or
Service and Repair
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground terminal from battery. 2. Set tires to straight-ahead position. 3. Remove
airbag module. Refer to Restraint Systems.
WARNING: Always refer to "Air Bag System" before performing airbag module service (if so
equipped). Refer to Restraint Systems.
4. Remove steering wheel nut, and then draw out steering wheel from shaft using steering puller.
NOTE: Make matching marks on steering wheel and steering column in advance.
INSTALLATION
1. Align center of roll connector. 2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Align matching marks on steering wheel and steering column.
Tightening torque: 4.5 Nm (4.5 kgf-cm, 32.5 ft. lbs.) Column cover-to-steering wheel clearance: 2 -
4 mm (0.08 - 0.16 inch)
equipped). Refer to Restraint Systems
CAUTION: Insert roll connector guide pin into guide hole on lower end of surface of steering wheel
to prevent damage. Draw out airbag system connector, horn connector and cruise control
connectors from guide hole of steering wheel lower end.
INSPECTION
1. Check steering wheel for deformation. If the deformation is excessive, replace steering wheel. 2.
Check splines on steering wheel for damage. If the damage is excessive, replace steering wheel.
Page 4767

Page 5355

Locations
Relay And Fuse

Page 4932
Disclaimer
Page 3359
Verify Repair
Check parking mechanism for proper operation by setting vehicle into Park on a slight incline.
Confirm vehicle remains stationary.
Page 1976
new ones.
Page 5252
10. Loosen bolts and nuts of heater unit to remove heater unit.
INSTALLATION

Page 2212
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:

Page 6400
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 6042
Paint: Application and ID

Page 300
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Service and Repair
Wheel Cover: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
Pry off the full wheel cap with a wheel cap remover inserted between openings in the cap.
INSTALLATION
Align the valve hole in the wheel cap with the valve on the wheel and secure the wheel cap by
tapping four points by hand.
INSPECTION
1. Check wheels for missing wheel caps. 2. Check pawls of wheel caps for damage or bend. 3.
Check wheel caps for cracks.
Page 1052
Page 2564
Page 5063
Page 2496
Page 2755
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Intake Duct
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove bolts which install air intake duct on the front side of body.
3. Remove air intake ducts as a unit.
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
Inspect for cracks and loose connections. Check that no foreign objects are mixed in the air intake
duct.
Lighting - Fog Lamp Lens/Body Replacement
Fog/Driving Lamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Fog Lamp Lens/Body Replacement
NUMBER: 07-54-05
DATE: 11/21/05
APPLICABILITY: 2000-04MY Legacy Outback; 2003-06MY Baja
SUBJECT: Front Fog Light Lens & Reflector
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to inform you that the front fog light lens and body are now available
separately from the fog lamp assembly. If the fog light lens and/or body need to be replaced refer
to the repair information listed.
PARTS INFORMATION
1) Remove the fog lamp assembly; refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Page 6282
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 1788

Page 5553
Disclaimer
Sunroof Switch

Page 3037
Page 4555
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
If any damage, deformation, wear, swelling, rust, and other faults are found on the primary piston
assembly, secondary piston assembly, supply valve stopper, or gasket, replace the faulty part.
CAUTION: -
The primary and secondary pistons must be replaced as complete assemblies.
- The service limit of the clearance between each piston and the master cylinder inner diameter is
0.11 mm (0.0043 inch).
- When handling parts, be extremely careful not to damage or scratch the parts, or let any foreign
matter get on them.
Page 5820
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair
Rear Door Latch Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim. 2. Remove the sealing cover. 3. Remove the rear inner remote.
4. Remove the three screws and bolt. 5. Disconnect the connector. Remove the rear door latch
assembly.
INSTALLATION

Page 2945
Specifications
Idle Speed

Page 4583
Page 5753
3. Loosen clips to remove trunk rear trim.
4. Remove hook (A) to pull off rear side of trunk side trim.
5. Remove two nuts from each side to remove rear bumper.

Page 1824
6. Install automatic belt tension adjuster which tension rod is borded with pin. 7. Install timing belt.
8. Install V-belts.
9. Install radiator main fan and sub fan motor assemblies.

Page 2193
cover (LH).
PULLEY WRENCH
CAUTION: ^
end face.
±0.0008 inch)
Service and Repair
License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair
License Plate Light
REMOVAL
1. Remove license plate light mounting screw (A) and then remove the lens (B) 2. Remove the
bulb.
INSTALLATION

Page 6566
2) Remove the three screws from the backside of the fog light assembly (see Figure 1)
3) Remove the bulb and cord. Caution: Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb.
4) Remove aiming screws (see Figure 2). Caution: Be careful not to misplace the springs.
Pressure Switch (Dual Switch)
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Pressure Switch (Dual Switch)
1. Connect the manifold gauge to the service manifold on the high-pressure side. 2. Remove the
pressure switch harness connector. Using a circuit tester, inspect the ON-OFF operation of the
pressure switch.
Page 2483
ABS
Page 1600
Service and Repair
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Parking Brake System; Service and Repair.
Page 3509
4. Set location of selector lever at "N" position. 5. Set location of selector arm installed on the
transmission body at "N" position. 6. Pass cable through selector arm pin and then connect it using
a washer and snap pin.
7. Attach cable clamp to transmission case with the bolts.
8. Insert the thread portion of the other inner cable and into the connector hole of the selector lever,
and fix the other outer cable end to the bracket. 9. Adjust the inner cable length.
1. Put connector into contact with nut.
2. Tighten nut (B).
10. After completion of fitting, make sure that the selector lever operates smoothly all across the
operating range. 11. Connect the harnesses and check the following items.
1. The engine starts operating when selector lever is in position "P", but not in other positions. 2.
The back-up light is lit when the selector lever is in position "R", but not in other positions.
12. Check shift-lock system.
1. Ensure ignition switch rotates from "ACC" to "LOCK" when the selector lever is set at "P". Also
check that ignition key can be removed only
from the "LOCK" position.
2. Ensure selector lever moves from "P" to any other position when the brake pedal is depressed
with ignition key set at "ON" or "START".
Page 3356
Rotate the manual plate to align notch and hole and then remove the parking rod.
Install the new parking rod into the transmission case and onto the manual plate.
Note:
For identification the new parking rod Will have a green band painted on it.
Align the manual plate with the select lever and install the new straight pin provided in the kit. Do
not reuse the original pin.
Move the manual plate and confirm that it works correctly.
Caution:
Do not put the transmission in "P" range, since the shift lock may activate.
Place the manual plate to "N" range.
Remove all liquid gasket from the mating surface of the transmission case.
Scotchbright Roll Lock Disk # 07515 (light blue) or
Page 2132
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 6076
1. Remove the various pieces of the anchor kit from the package and assemble the anchor bolt
through the anchor bracket, spacer and washer (Figure 6).
Service and Repair
Front Fender: Service and Repair
FENDER PANEL
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground (-) cable from battery. 2. Remove side spoilers. (If fitted) 3. Remove side
protectors and fender protectors. (OUTBACK) 4. Remove front bumper face. 5. Remove headlights.
6. Remove mud guard. 7. Remove bolts and clips to remove front fender.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. When fender panel is installed, clearance between
fender panel and hood or front fender must be equal.
Page 2756
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: 33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.6 ft. lbs.)
C: INSPECTION
Inspect for cracks and loose connections.

Page 1031
Page 6422
Page 3410

Page 2043
Page 2965
B: INSTALLATION

Page 6252
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Service Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Type Centrifugal Impeller Type
Discharge Performance I Discharge 20 L/min.
Pump speed-Total Engine Coolant Head 760 rpm - 0.3 mAq
Engine Coolant Temperature 85 deg. C
Discharge Performance II Discharge 100 L/min.

Discharge Performance III Discharge 200 L/min.
Impeller Diameter 76 mm
Number Of Impeller Vanes 8
Pump Pulley Diameter 60 mm
Clearance Between Impeller and Case Standard 0.5 - 0.7 mm
Limit 1.0 mm
Thrust Runout Of Impeller End 0.5 mm

Page 781
Page 5732
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 5920
Page 1317
19. Remove fuel injector while lifting up fuel injector pipe.
20. Disconnect air by-pass hoses from intake manifold.
21. Loosen clamp which holds front left side fuel hose to injector pipe and remove the pipe from
clamp.
22. Loosen clamp which holds front right side fuel hose to injector pipe and remove the pipe from
clamp.
Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications FLUID
FLUID
Fluid Type The FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 Or 4 brake Fluid Must Be Used
Page 2725
9. Insert evaporation hose (I) to pressure control solenoid valve and hold clip.
10. Tighten bolt which holds fuel filler pipe on body and tighten bolt which holds fuel pressure
sensor on fuel filler pipe.
11. Insert fuel filler hose approximately 35 to 40 mm (1.38 to 1.57 in) over the lower end of fuel filler
pipe and tighten clamp.
12. Jack-up the rear sub frame and tighten bolts which hold rear sub frame on body.
Page 737
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 546

Page 6466
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 6208
command switch.
Page 2595
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Rear Catalytic Converter
REAR CATALYTIC CONVERTER
REMOVAL
Therefore, the removal and installation procedures are the same as the those for the front catalytic
converter.
INSTALLATION
Therefore, the removal and installation procedures are the same as the ones described under front
catalytic converter.
Clutch Slave Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03

INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURE
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
5) Add brake fluid.
For Turbo models
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.


Page 754

Page 3773
A total of 0.2 labor hours will be automatically credited upon claim submission.
Inspection and Replacement - Use the following claim submission information if the right front axle
housing was found to contain the affected lot number and replacement was necessary.
For right front axle housing inspection and replacement enter labor operation 161-182 for 2.2 labor
hours. The claim will automatically be credited an additional 0.2 labor hours for inspection. A total
of 2.4 labor hours will be credited.
allowance. If the part was ordered for overnight delivery, add the additional freight charge as a
sublet with comments indicating "sublet for overnight freight".
Disclaimer
pressure switch.
Page 4095
B: INSTALLATION

Page 157
DISCLAIMER
Locations
Relay And Fuse

Page 5152
Wheels: Service and Repair Steel Wheel
REMOVAL
nuts and wheels.
NOTE: ^
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
miles).
INSPECTION
necessary.
Page 6758
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. WITH AUTO A/C
2. WITH MANUAL A/C
Brakes - Brake Pad Rust Prevention
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pad Rust Prevention
PREVENTIVE MEASURE FOR SURFACE RUST AROUND DISK BRAKE PAD
If you encounter a complaint that the brake pad is not sliding properly or that a squeaking type
noise can be heard even though the brake performance is normal, and the vehicle is operated in
the salt belt or coastal areas, there is a possibility the brake pad portion may have some surface
rust on it. The cure is to apply a thin coat of grease (Molykote AS-880N or equivalent) to the parts
as shown below.
1) Apply a thin coat of Molykote AS-880N (P/N: K0777YA010) or equivalent to frictional portion
between pad and inner shim.
Page 4790
Page 4025
Page 2194
clearances.
NOTE: ^
facing up.

Page 3728
Fail Code JAB-48.
Disclaimer
Page 4854
Page 3905
Rear differential gear oil Recommended oil
brands.
5. Instal filler bolt or plug onto rear differential gear case firmly.
CAUTION: -
Always use a new aluminium gasket. (2200 cc AT model)
- Apply fluid packing to plug. (Except 2200 cc AT model)
Fluid packing:
THREE BOND 1105 or equivalent
Tightening torque: 2200 cc AT model: 341 4 Nm (3.5 ± 0.4 kg-m, 25 ± 2.9 ft.lb) Except 2200 cc AT
model: 491 9.8 Nm (5 ± 1 kg-m, 36 ± 7.2 ft.lb)
Page 4037
Page 4612
assembly.
CAUTION:
figure 2.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Without Using Gauges
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Without Using Gauges
INSPECTION
OPERATION CHECK (WITHOUT GAUGES)
CAUTION: When checking operation, be sure to securely apply the hand brake.
- Checking without gauges This method cannot determine the exact portion which has failed, but it
can provide a rough understanding of the nature of the failure if checking is conducted in
accordance with the following procedures.
- Air tightness check
Start engine, and run it for 1 to 2 minutes, then turn it off. Depress brake pedal several times
applying the same pedal force as that used in ordinary braking operations. The pedal stroke should
be greatest on the 1st depression, and it should become smaller with each successive depression.
If no change occurs in the pedal height while in a depressed state, brake booster is faulty.
NOTE: -
In the event of defective operation, inspect the condition of the check valve and vacuum hose.
- Replace them if faulty and conduct the test again.
- If no improvement is observed, check precisely with gauges.
- Operation check
1. With engine off, depress brake pedal several times applying the same pedal force and make
sure that the pedal height does not vary with each
depression of the pedal.
2. With brake pedal depressed, start engine. 3. As engine starts, brake pedal should move slightly
toward the floor. If no change occurs in the pedal height, brake booster is faulty.
NOTE: If faulty, check precisely with gauges.
- Loaded air tightness check Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and turn off engine while
the pedal is still depressed. Keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds; if no change occurs in the
pedal height, brake booster is functioning normally; if the pedal height increases, it is faulty.
NOTE: If faulty, check precisely with gauges.

Page 1331
3. Connect right side fuel hose to injector pipe, and tighten clamp screw.
4. Install fuel injector pipe.
5. Connect left side fuel hose to injector pipe, and tighten clamp screw.
6. Connect air assist hoses.

General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 4153
Page 1494
Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Jack-up vehicle, support it with safety stands, and
remove front wheels.
3. Unlock axle nut. 4. Remove axle nut using a socket wrench.
CAUTION: Be sure to loose and retighten axle nut after removing wheel from vehicle. Failure to
5. Remove stabilizer link. 6. Remove disc brake caliper from housing, and suspend it from strut
using a wire.
If disc rotor seizes up within hub, drive disc rotor out by installing an 8-mm bolt in screw hole on the
rotor.
Page 4206
Page 4038
DISCLAIMER
Page 3394
Page 943
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type Always Use SUBARU Genuine Coolant

Page 3014
DISCLAIMER
ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Remove air intake duct from engine compartment to
facilitate removal of ABSCM&H;/U. 3. Use an air gun to get rid of water around the ABSCM&H;/U.
CAUTION: The contact will be insufficient if the terminal gets wet.
4. Pull off the lock of the ABSCM&H;/U connector to remove it. 5. Disconnect connector from
ABSCM&H;/U.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let water or other foreign matter contact the ABSCM&H;/U terminal.
6. Unlock cable clip. 7. Disconnect brake pipes from ABSCM&H;/U.
CAUTION: Wrap brake pipes with vinyl bag to avoid spilling brake fluid on vehicle body.
8. Remove ABSCM&H;/U ground terminal from bracket. 9. Remove ABSCM&H;/U from engine
compartment.
CAUTION: -
ABSCM&H;/U cannot be disassembled. Do not attempt to loosen bolts and nuts.
- Do not drop or bump ABSCM&H;/U.
- Do not turn the ABSCM&H;/U upside down or place it on its side.
- Be careful to prevent foreign particles from getting into ABSCM&H;/U.
- Apply a coat of rust-preventive wax (Nippeco LT or GB) to bracket attaching bolt after tightening.
- Do not pull harness when disconnecting connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Install ABSCM&H;/U.
CAUTION: Confirm that the specifications of the ABSCM&H;/U conforms to the vehicle
specifications.
2. Install ABSCM&H;/U ground terminal to bracket.

Page 4647
Lateral Accelerometer: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Dynamics Control (VDC)
INSPECTION
1. LATERAL G SENSOR SIGNAL

Part 1 of 2
Security Horn Relay
Page 500
Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair
FUEL
OPERATION
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE
WARNING: -
Place "NO FIRE" signs near the working area.
1. Disconnect connector from fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and run it until it stalls. 3. After
the engine stalls, crank it for five more seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
2. DRAINING FUEL
WARNING: -
Place "NO FIRE" signs near the working area.
1. Set vehicle on the lift.
4. Remove front right side fuel tank cover.

Page 783
Page 3893
Page 5104
DISASSEMBLY
Front Bushing 1. Using ST-A, B, press front bushing out of place.
ST-A, B 20099AE020 INSTALLER & REMOVER SET 1. Set ST-A in position with larger inside
diameter side facing up. 2. Set rear arm with protruded bushing side facing down.
3. Place ST-B on upper side of bushing, then press bushing out of position.
Rear Bushing
Using ST-C and bearing puller, press rear bushing out of place. ST-C 20099AE040 INSTALLER &
REMOVER SET
ASSEMBLY
Front Bushing 1. Using ST-A, B, press bushing into trailing link.
ST-A, B 20099AE020 INSTALLER & REMOVER SET 1. Set ST-A in position with smaller inside
diameter side facing up. 2. Set rear arm in position with outer side of vehicle body facing down. 3.
Place bushing on upper side of rear arm. 4. Place ST-B on upper side of bushing, then press
bushing into position.
Page 4836
MPS-01 - Multiple Power Socket System

NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 1098
CAUTION: ^
55 g (1.94 oz) weight used with aluminum wheel is not available.
^ Balance weights are available for use with any of 14- to 16-inch wheels.
Page 6041
Vendor Stock Numbers
Subaru Technical Support does not supply paint mixing formulas, you must contact your paint
supplier.
Page 4065
Page 2233

Diagrams
Page 4989
Service limit: Maximum load; 8.43 N (0.86 kg, 1.90 1b) or less
Page 2528

Page 967
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
1. MANUAL TRANSMISSION
1. Drain gear oil by removing drain plug after allowing the engine to cool for 3 to 4 hours.
2. Reinstall drain plug after draining gear oil and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 44 ± 3 Nm (4.5 ± 0.3 kg-m, 32.5 ± 2.2 ft.lb)
CAUTION: -
3. Fill transmission gear oil through the oil level gauge hole up to the upper point of level gauge.
Gear oil capacity: 3.5 l (3.7 US qt, 3.1 Imp qt)

Page 4278
INSPECTION

Part 1 of 2
Page 2508

Page 1242
9. Install generator and V-belt in the reverse order of removal, and adjust the V-belt deflection.
Page 5073
sub-frame.
Important:
process.
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 5074
steps 5 and 6) (The letter-identified areas show nozzle insertion points and dotted lines show the
direction in which nozzles should be inserted.)
Spray time of anti-rust agent and length of spray nozzle to be inserted into the sub-frame
corresponding to the holes located at bottom of the frame are identified in the following information.
Important:
Place a container under the vehicle to catch any excess anti-rust agent from the drain holes.
Anti-rust Agent Application Detail:
CROSSMEMBER FRONT
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into the opening (A) until it touches the bushing outer tube at the other
side. Spray anti-rust agent for 8 seconds while pulling the spray nozzle back to the original opening
(A).
Spray time: 8 seconds.
SIDE MEMBER LEFT & RIGHT HAND
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into the hole (B or C) located at front end of the bottom of the side
member until it touches the rear bushing outer tube at the other end. This area is approximately 19
inches (480 mm) long. Spray anti-rust agent for 5 seconds while pulling the spray nozzle back to
the original opening (B or C).
Spray time: 5 sec. (2 locations = 10 sec.)
CROSSMEMBER REAR
Insert the 360° spray nozzle into opening (D) located in bottom of the crossmember rear at the right
end connected to the side member until it touches the side member of the other side. This area is
approximately 23 inches (590 mm) long. Spray anti-rust agent for 6 seconds while pulling the spray
nozzle back to the original opening (D).
Spray time: 6 sec.
Step 7: Application of anti-rust wax (NOX RUST X-121 Black).
Use flexible 360° type nozzle. Turn the stop screw counterclockwise 3 turns from closed, and
adjust the air pressure to 80 psi. Sprayed amount: 13.5oz (400cc).
The holes in which the spray nozzle should be inserted and the direction fro which the spray nozzle
should be applied are depicted in the figure above. (The letter-identified areas show nozzle
insertion points and dotted lies show the direction in which nozzles should be inserted.)
Page 2996

Diagrams
Page 1845
Exhaust Pipe: Testing and Inspection Rear Exhaust Pipe
C: INSPECTION
holes or rusting. 3. Make sure the cushion rubber is not worn or cracked.
Wiper Blade Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2264
Part 1
Front Suspension
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Check, adjust and/or measure wheel alignment in accordance with procedures indicated in figure:
WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT
Page 6889
Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Wiper Motor
Rear Wiper Motor
1. Connect battery to wiper motor connector and confirm that wiper motor operates.
2. Connect battery to terminal of connector and remove terminal connections with motor rotated,
and stop wiper motor through operation.
3. Connect battery and confirm that motor stops at automatic stop position after motor operates at
low speed again.
Page 5224
INSTALLATION
1. AUTO A/C
2. MANUAL A/C
"FULL HOT".
Page 6253
FAPS-01
Page 3851
Page 5559
3) Move the Velcro back and forth in a sanding motion to remove any particle build up on the guide.
Make sure all residue is removed from the belt guide in order for the tape to adhere securely (see
Figure 3).
4) Do not remove the (red and blue) backing of the tape at this time (see Figure 4). Spread the red
and blue backing strips and gently begin to release an approximately 2 mm wide strip of backing
the length of the clear center tape (see Figure 5). Once this heavier adhesive portion is released,
press the backing strip back down, so no adhesive is exposed. Do this for both the red and blue
backing strip. This will make final removal of the backing strips much easier.
Page 2717
7. Remove rear wheel.
8. Remove front right side fuel tank cover.
Page 270
Part 3
Page 6683
Parking Switch
4. PARKING SWITCH
Page 808
NOTE: ^
facing up.
Page 5344
greatly lowered.
Page 156
Page 3080
stay.
Page 6222
Page 2507
Rear Sensor 7 Nm
Page 4707
Battery: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove battery cable holder (A) from battery rod. 2. Disconnect the positive (+) terminal after
disconnecting the negative (-) terminal of battery.
3. Remove flange nuts from battery rods and take off battery holder. 4. Remove battery.
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque: 3.4 N.m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)

NOTE:
- Clean battery cable terminals and apply grease to retard the formation of corrosion.
- Connect the positive (+) terminal of battery and then the negative (-) terminal of the battery.
Front Exhaust Pipe
Exhaust Pipe: Testing and Inspection Front Exhaust Pipe
C: INSPECTION
holes or rusting.
Page 4913
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................
............................. Dexron IIE or Dexron III ATF
Service Precautions
CAUTION:
Page 2251
Service and Repair
PROCEDURE
CAUTION: -
surrounding parts.
NOTE: -
1. MASTER CYLINDER
pedal.
2. BRAKE LINE
NOTE: -
air.
Page 4729
A: REMOVAL
switch.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 6262
PINPOINT TEST E: SOME SEGMENTS OF DISPLAY DO NOT WORK
PINPOINT TEST F: DISPLAY DOES NOT DIM AT NIGHT
PINPOINT TEST G: DISPLAY IS ALWAYS DIM

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS
We welcome and encourage feedback regarding failure details. In addition to listing this information
on the back of the repair order, we would appreciate any entries into the claim comments field. As
an additional reminder, please remember to replace the spring clip" included with the original mirror
with the one found in each kit. Failure to perform this step may result in a loose mirror.
Disclaimer
Page 2324
Page 1435
A: INSPECTION

properly.
MANUAL.
NOTE: ^
Page 4633
Page 3542
Page 1324
2. Disconnect connector from ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
3. Remove ignition coil and ignitor assembly.
5. Remove intake air temperature and pressure sensor from intake manifold.
Page 3621
Clutch Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
E: INSPECTION
If any damage, deformation, wear, swelling, rust or other faults are found on the cylinder, piston,
push rod, fluid reservoir, return spring and gasket, replace the faulty part.
Page 6879
Wiper Blade Heater: Testing and Inspection
Wiper Deicer
CAUTION: When wiping stain on glass off with cloth, use a dry and soft cloth and move it in the
direction of the heat wire extension to avoid damage to the heat wire.
1. Turn ignition switch to ON. 2. Turn defogger switch to ON.
3. Wrap tips of tester pins with aluminum foil to avoid damage to heat wire.
4. Measure voltage at wire center with DC voltmeter.
NOTE: -
If the measured value is 12 volts, heat wire is open between wire center and positive (+) end.
- If zero volt, heat wire is open between wire center and ground.
5. Apply positive lead of voltmeter to positive terminal of voltmeter, and then move negative lead
along the wire up to the negative terminal end. If
voltage changes from zero to several volts during movement of lead, heat wire is open at the
voltage change point.
Page 4148

Page 4378
Application Chart
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 4428
Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. If the inside surface of brake drum is streaked, correct the surface. And, if it is unevenly worn,
taperingly streaked, or the outside surface of brake
drum is damaged, correct or replace it.
2. Measure the drum inner diameter.

Page 2351

Page 2695
8. In engine compartment, detach fuel delivery hoses, return hoses and evaporation hose.
9. Separate quick connector on fuel delivery, return line and evaporation line.
1. Clean pipe and connector, if they are covered with dust. 2. Hold connector (A) and push retainer
(B) down. 3. Pull out connector (A) from retainer (B).
CAUTION: Replace retainer with new ones.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect quick connector on fuel delivery and return line.
CAUTION: -
Always use a new retainer.
- Make sure that the connected portion is not damaged or has dust. If necessary, clean seal
surface of pipe.
Page 5070
Page 217
Page 6310
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 1872

Page 5481
Disclaimer
Page 131

Page 2948
ADJUSTMENT
Service and Repair
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair
Receiver Drier
REMOVAL
refrigerant. 3. Disconnect pressure switch harness (A). 4. Disconnect pipe (B).
5. Loosen mounting bolts (C) to remove receiver drier.
CAUTION: The receiver drier contains a desiccant. After disconnecting receiver drier, plug it to
avoid moisture.
If receiver drier is replaced, add appropriate amount of compressor oil to the compressor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Replace O-rings with new ones, and apply compressor oil.
Front Suspension
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Suspension
WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT
Page 5596

Page 4264
shown.
Disclaimer
Information
Date: 01/05/09
INTRODUCTION
sensor 3.
O2 sensor.
Page 2316
Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
A: REPLACEMENT
3. Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. 4. Remove the heat shield cover. 5. Remove the
propeller shaft. 6. Using ST, remove the oil seal.
ST 398527700 PULLER ASSY
7. Using ST, install the oil seal.
ST 498057300 INSTALLER
8. Install the propeller shaft. 9. Install the heat shield cover.
10. Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. 11. Pour ATF and check the ATF level.
Page 2640
2. Check pedal stroke and free play by operating accelerator pedal by hand.
If it is not within specified value, adjust it by turning nut connecting accelerator cable to throttle
body. Free play at pedal pad: L 1 - 4 mm (0.04 - 0.16 inch) Stroke at pedal pad: A 50 - 55 mm (1.97
- 2.17 inch) Accelerator cable lock nut tightening torque: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 9 ft. lbs.)
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the clip, and then remove the accelerator pedal from the bracket.
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Disconnection and Connection
Driver's Airbag, Side Airbag and Pretensioner Connector
OPERATION
DRIVER'S AIRBAG, SIDE AIRBAG AND PRETENSIONER
How to disconnect:
1. Push lock arm (A).
2. With lock arm (A) pushed in, move slide lock (B) in the direction of the arrow. 3. With slide lock
(B) pulled, remove lock arm (A) to its original position, and then pull in the direction of the arrow
and separate the connector.
How to connect:
CAUTION: Be sure to insert the connector in until it locks. Then pull on it gently to make sure that it
is locked.
Front Sub Sensor and Side Airbag Sensor Connectors
OPERATION
How to disconnect:
Ignition Switch
the body harness.
ignition connector.

Page 762

Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
Camshaft Bend Limit 0.020 mm
Thrust Clearance Standard 0.030 - 0.090 mm
Limit 0.11 mm
Cam Lobe Height Intake Standard 39.485 - 39.585 mm
Limit 39.385 mm
Exhaust Standard 39.257 - 39.357 mm
Limit 39.157 mm
Camshaft Journal Outer Diameter 31.928 - 31.945 mm

Camshaft Journal hole Inner Diameter 32.000 - 32.018 mm
Oil Clearance Starndard 0.055 - 0.090 mm
Limit 0.10 mm
Front
Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Front
REMOVAL
1. Jack-up the front part of the vehicle and support it with safety stand (rigid racks). 2. Remove
jack-up plate from lower part of crossmember.
3. Remove bolts which secure stabilizer to crossmember.
4. Remove bolts which secure stabilizer link to front transverse link.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: ^
Install bushing (on front crossmember side) while aligning it with paint mark on stabilizer.
^ Ensure that bushing and stabilizer have the same identification colors when installing.
2. Always tighten rubber bushing location when wheels are in full contact with the ground vehicle is
curb weight.
Tightening torque:
Jack-up plate to crossmember. 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Stabilizer link to front transverse link.
30 Nm (3.1 kgf-cm, 22 ft. lbs.) Stabilizer to crossmember. 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18.1 ft. lbs.)
INSPECTION
1. Check bushing for cracks, fatigue or damage. 2. Check stabilizer link for deformities, cracks, or
damage, and bushing for protrusions from the hole of stabilizer link.
Page 1211
NOTE: ^
facing up.
Page 581

Page 2569

Page 2778
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
AT VEHICLES

Page 3348
The first owner notification letter was sent in November 2002. The letter will explain the parking rod
condition and advise owners that repair parts will be available in January 2003. The letter will also
explain the importance and need to use the parking brake.
Specifications
CLEARANCE
Intake 0.20 +/- 0.02 mm
Exhaust 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm

Page 1850
7. Tighten bolt which holds front and center exhaust pipe assembly to hanger bracket.
8. Connect rear oxygen sensor connector. 9. Lower the vehicle.

Page 5105
CAUTION: ^
Install bushing with painted side facing up.
^ Install front bushing in the proper direction, as shown in figure.
Rear Bushing 1. Using ST-C, D and bearing puller, press bushing into trailing link.
ST-C, D 20099AE040 INSTALLER & REMOVER SET 1. Insert bushing into bore in ST-D.
2. Set ST-C, ST-D and bearing puller in position, as shown in the figure, and press bushing into
position.
INSPECTION
Check trailing links for bends, corrosion or damage.

Page 2361
DISCLAIMER
Page 3451
Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2044
Page 5729

Page 3164
Page 5400
Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Sub Sensor
INSPECTION
- Front sub sensor, mounting bracket, and connector are damaged.

Page 2503
Page 5049
Page 125

Diagrams
Page 6537
Dome Lamp: Testing and Inspection
Room Light

Page 6360
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 6730
Parking Switch
4. PARKING SWITCH
Page 1376
allowance.
Disclaimer
Page 6718
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 6293
Page 6355
second letter.
NOTE:
Component Locations

Page 1717
Page 2426
INSTALLATION

Page 2544
Page 46

Page 6550

Page 885
Page 673
REMOVAL
1. WITH AUTO A/C
2. WITH MANUAL A/C
Page 266
Page 2148

Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 409
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 389

Main Harness
Air Bag Harness: Service and Repair Main Harness
REMOVAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the ground cable from the battery and wait for at least 20
seconds before starting work. 3. Remove instrument panel.
4. Disconnect connector from airbag control module.
5. Disconnect front sub sensor connector (blue) from airbag main harness.
6. Detach clips from steering support beam, and remove main harness.
INSTALLATION

Page 1643
Note:
Page 127

Diagrams
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) Terminal Arrangement

Page 1479
Page 6444

Page 2160
DISCLAIMER
General Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
Brake Drum Type Drum (Leading-Trailing Type)
Diameter 228.6 mm
Clearance Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Specifications
Fuel Pressure

Page 4479
Note:
Note:

Service Precautions
CAUTION:
Page 1652
Coolant Reservoir: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Make sure the engine coolant level is between full and low.
Page 5744
Front Bumper: Removal and Replacement
FRONT BUMPER
Front Bumper
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Handle bumper carefully to avoid damage to bumper face.

1. Open hood. 2. Remove negative cable of battery. 3. Pull off front side of front mud guard to
remove bolts.
Page 4678
Page 2718
10. Tighten fuel drain plug and then install front right side tank cover. 11. Remove rear exhaust
pipe and muffler.
NOTE: To facilitate removal, apply a coat of SUBARU CRC to matching area of rubber cushions in
advance.
1. Separate rear exhaust pipe from center exhaust pipe.
2. Remove left and right rubber cushions.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pull down muffler.
3. Remove front rubber cushion and detach muffler assembly.

Page 6446
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2093
the engine rear.

Page 1304
8. Disconnect spark plug cords from spark plugs. 9. Disconnect PCV hose from intake manifold.
MT Vehicles
AT Vehicles
10. Disconnect engine coolant hose from throttle body.
11. Disconnect brake booster hose.

Page 1624

Page 258

Page 4635
Aluminum Wheel
Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel
REMOVAL
nuts and wheels.
NOTE: ^
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
miles).
INSPECTION
necessary.
CAUTION Aluminum wheels are easily scratched. To maintain their appearance and safety, do the
following: 1. Do not damage aluminum wheels during removal, disassembly, installation, wheel
balancing, etc. After removing aluminum wheels, place them on
Cooling System - Warranty Repair Coolant Usage
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Warranty Repair Coolant Usage
NUMBER: 09-42-05
DATE: 04/15/05
SUBJECT: Cautions Concerning Engine Coolant
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to inform of cautions concerning engine coolant.
When adding, replacing or servicing the cooling system always use Genuine Subaru Long Life
Coolant. Genuine Subaru Long Life Coolant is a phosphate (non-amine) type and is specially
formated for all Subaru vehicles equipped with aluminum engines and radiators. Coolant of other
types may not provide the proper protection to aid against corrosion of aluminum parts. If an
equivalent must be used, make sure it is a phosphate (non-amine) type. As a reminder, use of
Genuine Subaru Long Life Coolant is mandatory on all repairs paid for by Subaru of America, Inc,
that require the replenishment of coolant. This holds true for any claim type.
Do not use flushing machines.
If a flushing machine has been used to service other brand vehicles with copper radiators, a
chemical reaction between copper ions and Subaru coolant may occur. This could also cause
clogging of the radiator.
If regular flushing is required, only use fresh tap water. Do not use hard water. Hard water will
create calcium build-up which will clog the radiator.
Whenever the coolant is changed, you must add Genuine Subaru Cooling System Conditioner.
Genuine Subaru Cooling System Conditioner has been tested and approved for aluminum engines
and radiators.
Do not use after-market coolant reinforcement agents, sealers and/or flushing agents as those
chemicals could corrode aluminum parts.
Disclaimer
Page 1592

Page 1281
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 5453
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
and dust.
control module.
in the figure.
INSTALLATION
Page 1378
Page 154
Page 4546
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
facilitate removal of hydraulic unit. 3. Disconnect connector from hydraulic unit.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let water or other foreign matter contact the H/U terminal.
4. Unlock cable clip. 5. Disconnect brake pipes from hydraulic unit.
6. Remove nuts and bolt which secure hydraulic unit bracket, and remove hydraulic unit from
engine compartment.
CAUTION: -
Hydraulic unit cannot be disassembled. Do not attempt to loosen bolts and nuts.
- Do not drop or bump hydraulic unit.
- Do not turn the hydraulic unit upside down or place it on its side.
- Be careful to prevent foreign particles from getting into hydraulic unit.
- When a new hydraulic unit is installed, apply a coat of rust-preventive wax (Nippeco LT or GB) to
bracket attaching bolt after tightening.
- Do not pull harness disconnecting harness connector.
2. RELAY BOX 1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Remove air intake duct from engine
compartment to facilitate removal of relay box. 3. Disconnect connector from relay box. 4. Unlock
cable clip.
5. Remove nuts which secure relay box, and remove relay box and connector bracket.
Page 5488
Seat Belt: Locations
Front Seat Belt

Page 1800
Page 469
REMOVAL

MT Vehicles
Engine Control Module: Diagrams MT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 5552
missing bolts.
Note:
6 bolts 13 +/- 2 kgf.cm (11 +/- 2 in-lb)
RENTAL CAR
Page 2721
19. Disconnect evaporation hose (I) from pressure control solenoid valve.
20. Remove bolt which holds evaporation pipe assembly on body. 21. Disconnect fuel filler hose.
22. Remove bolt which holds fuel pressure sensor on fuel filler pipe and remove bolt which holds
fuel filler pipe on body.
23. Disconnect canister hose from evaporation pipe assembly.

REMOVAL
or more.
INSTALLATION
removal easier.

Locations
Page 2329
Front Speaker
Speaker: Service and Repair Front Speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door trim.
2. Remove front speaker mounting screws. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove front
speaker.
INSTALLATION

Page 1736
10. Connect connectors to radiator main fan motor and sub fan motor.
11. Connect radiator outlet hose.

Page 230
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Wiring Diagram
Page 2786
CAUTION: Always use a new gasket.
Tightening torque: Throttle body: 22 N.m (2.2 kgf-m, 15.9 ft-lb)
Air cleaner case: 6.4 N.m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

Page 5159
8. Using ST, press hub bolt out.
ST 927080000 HUB STAND.
INSPECTION
Check the removed parts for wear and damage. If defective, replace with a new one.
CAUTION:
^ If a bearing is faulty, replace it as the bearing set.
ASSEMBLE
1. Using ST, press new hub bolt into place.
CAUTION:
^ Ensure hub bolt closely contacts hub.
^ Use a 12 mm (0.47 inch) hole in the ST to prevent hub bolt from tilting during installation.
2. Remove foreign particles (dust, rust, etc.) from mating surfaces of hub and tone wheel, and
install tone wheel to hub (only vehicle equipped with
ABS).
CAUTION:
^ Ensure tone wheel closely contacts hub.
^ Be careful not to damage tone wheel teeth.

Page 2038
Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2125
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 4793
Fuse Locations
Page 5746
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Handle bumper carefully to avoid damage to bumper face.

Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Service Specifications
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)
Disc run-out ----- 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)

Page 1597
Interrupt Relay
Page 5071
Ventilation
Caution:

Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 6370
Page 2737
1. Connect fuel jet pump hose.
2. Connect connector from fuel sub level sensor.
3. Install sub service hole cover. 4. Set rear seat and floor mat.
Page 5957
Page 2944
Spark Plug
Plug Gap 0.039-0.043 in (1.0-1.1 mm)

Page 753
Coolant Line/Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 379
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
2. Insert a slotted screwdriver to remove sunload sensor.
3. Disconnect sunload sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensors and interior trims when removing them.
INSTALLATION
Locations
Page 5151
a rubber mat, etc.
2. While vehicle is being driven, be careful not to ride over sharp obstacles or allow aluminum
wheels to contact the shoulder of the road. 3. When installing tire chain, be sure to install it properly
not to have a slack; otherwise it may hit wheel while driving. 4. When washing aluminum wheel,
use neutral synthetic detergent and water. Avoid using the cleanser including abrasive, hard
brushes or an
automatic car washer.

Page 5929
Page 1305
12. Remove air cleaner case stay RH and engine harness bracket, and disconnect engine harness
connectors from bulkhead harness connectors.
13. Disconnect connectors from engine coolant temperature sensor.
15. Disconnect connector from crankshaft position sensor.

Page 2452
Note:
Note:
Page 3713
Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair
Clutch, M/T; Clutch Release Bearing, M/T.
Page 2589
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection Rear Catalytic Converter
INSPECTION
holes or rusting.
Diagrams
Trunk Lid And Rear Gate Lock

Page 4150

Page 6232
Service and Repair
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Headlight Bulb
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Because the tungsten halogen bulb operates at a high temperature, dirt and oil on the bulb
surface reduces the bulb's service life Hold the flange portion when replacing the bulb. Never touch
the glass portion.
- Do not leave the headlight without a bulb for a long time. Dust, moisture, etc. entering the
headlight may affect its the performance.
1. SINGLE-BULB TYPE
1. Remove duct (A) (when right side headlight is removed) 2. Disconnect harness connector. 3.
Remove rubber cover. 4. Push to remove spring retainer, and then detach the headlight bulb.
2. DUAL-BULB TYPE
1. Remove duct (A) (when right side headlight is removed).
2. Remove back cover (A). 3. Disconnect harness connector.

Page 4636
Temperature Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2927
Page 821
2. Using white paint, put alignment and/or arrow marks on timing belts in relation to the crank
sprocket and cam sprockets.
Specified data:
Z1: 46.8 tooth length Z2: 43.7 tooth
4. Remove belt idler No. 2.
5. Remove timing belt.
Belt Idler and Automatic Belt Tension Adjuster Assembly

Page 1653
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect over flow hose from radiator filler neck position.
2. Remove bolts which install reservoir tank onto radiator main fan shroud. 3. Remove reservoir
tank.
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: 4.9 Nm (0.50 kgf-m, 3.6 ft. lbs.)
Page 5523
S/BELT-01
Page 6186
Service and Repair
Air Shrouded Injector Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair
AIR ASSIST INJECTOR SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL
NOTE: This solenoid valve is used on AT vehicles only.
2. Disconnect connector from air assist injector solenoid valve and disconnect air by-pass hoses.
3. Remove air assist injector solenoid valve from intake manifold.
INSTALLATION
Page 1023
Disarming
Arming

Page 1888
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 2579
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 752

Specifications
Torque Converter Clutch: Specifications
Torque Converter Clutch Type Symmetric, 3 Element, Single Stage, 2 Phase Torque Converter
Stall Torque Ratio 2.1 - 2.3
Nominal Diameter 246 mm
Stall Speed 2200 - 2700 rpm
At Sea Level
One-Way Clutch Sprague Type One-Way Clutch

Page 1735
5. Connect radiator inlet hose.
9. Connect ATF cooler hoses. (AT vehicles only)

Page 4719
5. Remove bolts which install generator onto bracket.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Check and adjust V-belt tension.

Page 5852
Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. HOOD OPENER
1. Remove the release cable from the hood lock.
2. Remove the bolt. Remove the opener lever.
INSTALLATION
1. HOOD OPENER

Page 5261
Page 1201
Piston Ring: Service and Repair
Page 3796
9. Connect tie-rod end ball joint and knuckle arm with a castle nut, and insert cotter pin into tie-rod
end.
10. While depressing brake pedal, tighten axle nut and lock it securely.
Tightening torque: 2.5L MODEL 186 Nm (19 kgf-m, 137 ft. lbs.) 3.0L MODEL 216 Nm (22 kgf-m,
159 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: ^
Use a new axle nut (3.0L model: Olive color, 2.5L model: Gold color).
bearing.
11. After tightening axle nut, lock it securely. 12. Install wheel and tighten wheel nuts to specified
torque.

Page 4856
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 2775
AT VEHICLES
Page 6469

Page 6245
Page 2502

Brakes - ABS ECU Applications/Service
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - ABS ECU
NUMBER: 06-31-03 DATE: 07/15/03
INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE
Removal of ECU
NOTE:
Page 3216

switch.
Page 3411
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 1509
ADJUSTMENT
Page 4757
CAUTION: Do not forget to put felt washer on armature shaft bearing.
4. Installing brushes
Assemble brush holder to yoke as shown, then assemble two yoke-side brushes to brush holder.
5. Installing end frame
When assembling end frame to yoke, align notched portion of end frame with lead wire grommet.
6. Installing yoke
When installing yoke to magnetic switch, align notch of yoke with protrusion of magnetic switch.
Page 219
Page 778
Page 5953
sub-frame.
Important:
process.
Page 5696
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 1326
11. Remove air assist injector solenoid valve from intake manifold.
12. Disconnect pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake manifold.

Page 2702
Fuel Supply Line: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Make sure that there are no cracks on the fuel pipes and fuel hoses. 2. Make sure that the fuel
pipe and fuel hose connections are tight.
Horn Switch

Page 4806
Page 6742
second letter.
NOTE:
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Wiring Diagram
Diagrams
Page 229
Page 1552
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type Always Use SUBARU Genuine Coolant

Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 4.0L (4.2 Qt)
Page 2537

Page 2140

Page 2270
Part 3
Page 1337
28. Connect connector to ignition coil and ignitor assembly. 29. Install engine ground terminal to
intake manifold.
Paint - Codes & Color Names
Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Codes & Color Names
NUMBER: 13-74-00
DATE: 07/1/00
APPLICABILITY: All 2001 MY Subaru Vehicles
SUBJECT: Paint Codes and Color Names
Note:
This is the most accurate information at the time of printing.
The various paint manufacturers designate their own stock numbers and their formulas are
updated on a continual basis. If there are any problems with the vendor numbers as shown, please
have body shop personnel contact the specific paint vendor for updated information.
The paint codes are found on the VIN Plate located on the Left Strut Tower. The color code is
depicted by a solid color or by a combined upper and lower color code.
Example: 1) Color Code: 54A = Black Granite Pearl 2) Color Code: BXG = Black Granite Pearl &
Titanium Pearl
2001 MY Legacy & Outback

Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Slides To Lower Anchor
Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Slides To Lower Anchor
NUMBER: 17-06-01R DATE: 05/11/05
APPLICABILITY: 1995 MY and after Legacy 1998 MY and after Forester 1993MY and after
Impreza 2003MY and after Baja 2006MY and after Tribeca
SUBJECT: Seat Belt Latch Slides to the Lower Seat Belt Anchor
DESCRIPTION
In the event you encounter a customer complaint of the seat belt latch sliding down the v~ebbing to
the lower seat belt anchor, it may be caused by the latch web stop button separating from the belt
webbing. This stop button may become loose and fall off if the belt webbing is jammed between the
body panel and door when the door is closed
Use the chart to locate and order the correct repair kit for your application.
REPAIR PROCEDURES
1) Inspect the belt webbing for damage. If damaged replace the seat belt assembly.
2) Remove any piece of broken stopper button from the belt webbing.
3) Lift the belt latch up and beyond the original stopper button location and hold in place using
adhesive tape.
4) Locate the original stopper hole (about 500mm up from bottom anchor) in the webbing and insert
the new male stopper button from the backside of
the belt Push the other part of the button over the pin sticking through the front belt webbing.
5) Using a suitable tool, crimp the two parts together until the new button thickness is 4.5~5.0mm.
6) Remove the adhesive tape from the latch and confirm the stopper button holds the latch in the
proper position.
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Limited Warranty period this repair can be claimed using the
table shown.
Page 3379

Page 3439
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION

Page 583
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
data.
AT VEHICLES
Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection
Front & Rear Motor Assembly
1. Make sure that power window motor rotates properly when battery voltage is applied to terminals
of motor connector. 2. Change polarity of battery connections to terminals to ensure that motor
rotates in reverse direction.
Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3002

Service and Repair
Spare Tire: Service and Repair
NOTE "T-type" tire for temporary use is prepared as a spare tire.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use a tire chain with the "T-type" tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit
properly and will result in damage to the vehicle and the tire.
^ Do not drive at a speed greater than 80 km/h (50 MPH).
^ Drive as slowly as possible and avoid passing over bumps.
REPLACEMENT
Refer to Removal and Installation of Steel Wheel for removal/installation of "T-type" tires. Refer to
Wheel; Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Replace with a conventional tire as soon as possible since the "T-type" tire is only for
temporary use.
INSPECTION
1. Check tire inflation pressure.
Specification: 412 kPa (4.2 kg1cm, 60 psi)
2. Take stones, glass, nails, etc. out of the tread groove. 3. Check tires for deformation, cracks,
partial wear, or wear.
CAUTION: Replace the tire with a new one.

Recall - Seat Belt Retractor Cover Bolt Torque
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Seat Belt Retractor Cover Bolt Torque
NUMBER: WWC-86 DATE: 12/2000
SUBJECT: Right Front Seatbelt Retractor Cover
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that affected models may have been produced with
the right front seatbelt retractor cover bolts improperly tightened.
This program will involve the inspection and possible tightening of the right front seatbelt retractor
cover bolts. In rare cases it may be necessary to replace the seatbelt assembly.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
2001 Subaru Legacy and Outback models.
NOTE:
Communication System (DCS).
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 618
Side Airbag Sensor
REMOVAL
(FRONT).
INSTALLATION
Front Sub Sensor
REMOVAL
Page 856
Oil Filter: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. After installing oil filter, run engine and make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE: The filter element and filter case are permanently jointed; therefore, interior cleaning is not
necessary.
2. Check the engine oil level.

Page 1996

Page 5502
Page 3346
In addition, some vehicles outside of the affected VIN range may have had a new or
remanufactured replacement transmission installed that contains an affected parking rod. SOA has
identified these vehicles and included them in this recall.
NOTE:
OWNER NOTIFICATION
There will be two owner notification letters sent to owners of affected vehicles.
Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Page 490
Page 5077
Page 5551
PARTS INFORMATION
illustrated.
Page 4042
A: REMOVAL
Except VTD model
VTD model
B: INSTALLATION
Recall 04V128000: Cruise Control Cable/Throttle Sticking
Cruise Control Servo Cable: Recalls Recall 04V128000: Cruise Control Cable/Throttle Sticking
DEFECT: On certain passenger and sport utility vehicles, the cruise control cable could come out
of its track on the cruise control lever and lodge on the control lever tab when the accelerator pedal
is released. If this condition occurs, the throttle will not return to the idle position and will remain in
an open position. If this occurs during vehicle operation, the driver could lose control of the vehicle,
which could result in a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will install a cruise control cable retaining clip to the cruise control lever tab on
the throttle shaft in order to prevent the cruise control cable from coming out of its track. The
manufacturer has reported that owner notification was expected to begin during April 2004. Owners
may contact Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Page 3035

Page 1183
Subaru Crankshaft Socket used to align crank to TDC while working with the timing belt.
- Made in U.S.A
- Call AST for pricing
Subaru timing crank Contact AST for pricing.

Specifications
Case: Specifications
Case, A/T 41 Nm
Page 1895

Page 3231
Part 3
Page 2905
the engine rear.

ABS
Page 2573
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 3229

Part 1
Page 4974

Page 4024

Page 1288
4) Remove generator lock bolt. 5) Remove bolt which install generator on bracket.
3. Disconnect connector from oil pressure switch. 4. Remove oil pressure switch from engine
cylinder block. 5. Connect oil pressure gauge hose to cylinder block.
7. Start the engine, and measure oil pressure.
Oil pressure: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) or more at 800 rpm 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) or more
at 5,000 rpm
CAUTION: ^
If oil pressure is out of specification, check oil pump, oil filter and lubrication line.
^ If oil pressure warning light is turned ON and oil pressure is in specification, replace oil pressure
switch.
NOTE: The specified data is based on an engine oil temperature of 80°C (176°F).
8. After measuring oil pressure, install oil pressure switch.

Diagrams
Rear Door Glass

Page 4072
Page 2850
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Monitoring System: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System
TITLE: Tire Pressure Monitoring System
SERVICE TIP:
If you receive customer concerns that their Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) warning light
came on when the vehicle was first started after sitting overnight and the light went out after driving
a few miles, there may NOT be anything wrong with the system. With the approach of colder
weather in many parts of the country the air pressure in the tire may have been below the pressure
threshold of the system. This threshold is 26.20 p.s.i.
For example purposes only, let's say that at 70°F the front tires are inflated to 32 p.s.i. and the rear
tires are inflated to 30 p.s.i. Overnight, the ambient temperature dropped down to 45°F. This would
decrease the pressure in the tires by 2.5 lbs. 70 - 45 = 25 degree change in temperature. Tire
pressure will drop 1 p.s.i. for every 10 degree change in temperature. 25 / 10 = 2.5 p.s.i. The rear
tire pressure of 30 p.s.i. minus a 2.5 p.s.i. drop in pressure due to the ambient temperature equals
27.5 p.s.i. Take into account any other factors such as the tire(s) being wet with rain, mud, snow, or
other substance, that reading could drop more. Also figure in the differences in tire pressure
measuring gauges when the tires were inflated and you have the possible reason for the TPMS
light coming on when the customers started driving their cars and the light going out after driving a
few miles. The tires have now warmed up and the warming of the tires will cause a pressure
increase in the tire and now satisfy the pressure threshold of the TPMS system. Hence, the light
goes out. So before diving into the system looking for a problem that may not be there, you may
want to question the owner as to the weather conditions in their area.
NOTE: The owners may want to adjust their tire pressures to compensate for the colder
temperatures in their area as the seasons change. At no time should the tires be over inflated to
compensate for this concern. Always observe the information in the vehicles Owner's Manual when
it comes to properly inflating the tires on customers' vehicles.
Page 6328
Disarming
Arming

Page 2779
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
data.
AT VEHICLES
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Highway Speed Vibration/Harshness/Noise
NUMBER: 05-50-10R DATE: 02/03/11
INTRODUCTION
DESCRIPTION
Wheel Imbalance
instructions.
Machine Setup
balancer
Page 5819
Rear Door Latch: Testing and Inspection
Front/Rear Door Latch Assembly
1. Make sure the rod is not deformed. 2. Make sure the lever and rod work smoothly. 3. Make sure
the child safety lock on the rear doors works properly.
Page 4575
Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up the vehicle. 2. Remove rear tire and wheel. 3. Remove rear cushion. 4. Loosen parking
cable adjusting nut and console bracket.
5. Remove parking brake lever.
6. Unbend parking brake lever pawls and remove cable.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: Parking brake lever: 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m,
13.0 ft. lbs.) Adjusting nut: 5.9 Nm (0.6 kgf-m, 4.3 ft. lbs.)
NOTE: -
Be sure to pass cable through guide inside the tunnel.
- Be sure to adjust the lever stroke.

Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft, Engine Bend Limit 0.035 mm
Crankpin and Crank Journal Out-of-Roundness 0.020 mm
Or Less
Grinding Limit 0.250 mm
Crankpin Outer Diameter Standard 51.984 - 52.000 mm
0.03 mm (0.0012 in) US 51.954 - 51.970 mm
0.05 mm (0.0020 in) US 51.934 - 51.950 mm
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) US 51.734 - 51.750 mm
Crank Journal Outer Diameter #1, #5, #3 Standard 59.992 - 60.008 mm
0.03 mm US 59.962 - 59.978 mm
0.05 mm US 59.942 - 59.958 mm
0.25 mm US 59.742 - 59.758 mm
#2, #4 Standard 59.992 - 60.008 mm
0.03 mm US 59.962 - 59.978 mm
0.05 mm US 59.942 - 59.958 mm
0.25 mm US 59.742 - 59.758 mm
Thrust Clearance Standard 0.030 - 0.115 mm
Limit 0.25 mm
Oil Clearance Standard 0.010 - 0.030 mm
Limit 0.040 mm
Crankshaft Bearing #1, #5 Standard 1.998 - 2.011 mm

0.03 mm (0.0012 in) US 2.017 - 2.020 mm
0.05 mm (0.0020 in) US 2.027 - 2.030 mm
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) US 2.127 - 2.130 mm
#2, #3, #4 Standard 2.000 - 2.013 mm
0.03 mm (0.0012 in) US 2.019 - 2.022 mm
0.05 mm (0.0020 in) US 2.029 - 2.032 mm
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) US 2.129 - 2.132 mm

Page 5046
Important:
CROSSMEMBER FRONT
(A).
CROSSMEMBER REAR
Spray time: 6 sec.
Page 4379
Disclaimer
Page 4473
Disclaimer
Page 2048

Page 2286
REMOVAL

Page 2751
Intake Air Duct: Service Precautions
B: CAUTION
operation.
^ Before disconnecting electrical connectors of sensor or units, be sure to disconnect negative

Page 2162
Service Precautions
CAUTION:
Page 4265
Page 2072

Page 2027
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 247

Tachometer: Testing and Inspection
Tachometer
Measure resistance between tachometer terminals. If NG, replace tachometer and water
Page 3934
Disclaimer
Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect connector from engine coolant temperature sensor. 4. Remove engine coolant
temperature sensor.
INSTALLATION

Page 6551
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2925
Page 5160
CAUTION:
bottom.

Page 3252
Page 4059
Page 5731
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 1375
4. Place the syringe into the overflow reservoir and push the coolant out of the syringe.
5. Shake the bottle of cooling system conditioner until all contents are thoroughly mixed.
6. Pour the entire bottle of cooling system conditioner into the radiator.
NOTE:
Do NOT pour the cooling system conditioner into the overflow reservoir. The conditioner Will settle
at the bottom of the reservoir and not mix in the cooling system.
7. Reinstall the original radiator cap.
8. Remove rags from around the radiator filler neck.
9. Start the vehicle and let it run until the engine is warm. This ensures the conditioner circulates
and there are no air pockets in the cooling system.
Service Procedure on a HOT Engine
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position (engine off).
2. Turn the air conditioning "ON" to cycle the cooling fans. Leave the air conditioning "ON" for
approximately two (2) minutes. This will lower the pressure in the cooling system.
NOTE:
The pressure relief on a "HOT" engine is approximate. Caution should always be taken when
removing the radiator cap on a "HOT" engine. Additional A/C "ON" time may be required to relieve
cooling system pressure properly.
3. Turn off the air conditioning.
4. Return the ignition key to the LOCK ("OFF") position.
5. Follow procedure for COLD engine listed above.
Credit for performing this Service Campaign will be based on the submission of properly completed
Add Engine Cooling System Conditioner - Use the following information for claim submission:
Page 2490
Page 5754
6. Loosen clips to remove upper beam (A) from bumper face.
7. Remove resin beam.
2. WAGON
CAUTION: -
1. Lift-up the vehicle. 2. Remove trailer hitch. 3. Remove bolts and clips.
4. Remove rear floor box. 5. Pull off rear end of rear quarter lower trim to remove cap.
Page 3282
Example:
CAUTION: Align ST with torque wrench while tightening ATF filter.
3. Add ATF.
2. 3.0L MODEL ^
ATF Filter
Example:
ATF Filter Assembly
Example:
Page 1722
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 128
Page 1310
11. Connect PCV hose to intake manifold. 12. Connect spark plug cords to spark plugs. 13. Install
power steering pump and tank on brackets.
1. Install power steering tank on bracket.
2. Connect connector to power steering pump switch.
3. Tighten bolts which install power steering pump on bracket.

Page 5520
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 1981
Page 3940
Disclaimer
Page 5518
AT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 2620
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(DOHC TURBO)-225B Engine
Page 2248
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 4673
Page 2363
Page 3814
8. Tighten boot bands using ST, torque wrench and socket flex handle.
ST 28099ACOOO BOOT BAND PLIER Tightening torque: Large boot band 157 Nm (16.0 kgf-m,
116 ft. lbs.) or more Small boot band 133 Nm (13.6 kgf-m, 98 ft. lbs.) or more
9. Place SFJ boot at the center of shaft.
10. Align alignment marks and install trunnion on shaft. 11. Install snap ring to shaft.
CAUTION: Confirm that the snap ring is completely fitted in the shaft groove.
12. Fill 100 to 110 g (3.53 to 3.88 oz.) of specified grease into the interior of SFJ outer race. 13.
Apply a coat of specified grease to free ring and trunnion.
14. Align alignment marks on free ring and trunnion and install free ring.
CAUTION: Be careful with the free ring position.

Page 806
clearances.
NOTE: ^
facing up.

Page 6684
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Transmission Oil Pan 4.9+/- 0.5 Newton Meters
Drain Plug 25 +/- 2 Newton Meters

Page 2635
Page 385
Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair
Sunroof Motor
REMOVAL
CAUTION: When removing clip, use great care to not damage the roof trim.
1. Completely close the sunroof. 2. Remove sunroof lid.
3. Confirm the matching mark of sunroof bracket link and the guide from sunroof opening. (If the
mark does not match, adjust to match the mark.) 4. Remove roof trim.
5. Remove motor cover. 6. Disconnect harness connector and remove sunroof motor mounting
screw.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Never rotate the sunroof motor while removed.
- Be careful not to move the sunroof cable when installing sunroof motor.
1. Check the matching mark (A) of sunroof motor.

Page 2481

Page 6236

Page 3516
Shift Cable: Adjustments
D: ADJUSTMENT
Move select lever from "P" position to "1" position. You should be able to feel the detentes in each
position. If the detentes cannot be felt or the position pointer is improperly aligned, adjust the cable.
1. Prior to removal, set lever to "N" position. 2. Remove rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
4. Loosen the adjusting nut on each side.
5. Turn adjusting nut B until it lightly touches the connector.

Page 3113
OWNER NOTIFICATION
SOA will prepare and mail an Owner Notification Letter to owners of affected vehicles on or around
April 24, 2002.
Page 5251
Heater Core Case: Service and Repair
Heater Unit
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Drain coolant from the radiator. 3. Remove air cleaner
case.
4. Release heater hose clamps in engine compartment to remove the hoses. 5. Remove A/C unit.
6. Using a Torx wrench, remove airbag control unit.
7. Disconnect connector of airbag main harness near steering support beam. 8. Loosen bolts and
nuts of support beam to remove support beam. 9. Disconnect servo connector.
Recall 01V034000: Seat Rail Latch Defect
Seat Track: Recalls Recall 01V034000: Seat Rail Latch Defect
Vehicle Description: Passenger vehicles equipped with manually-adjustable (non-powered) seats.
Certain inner front slide rail latch mechanisms may have been improperly welded. If an inner slide
rail latch mechanism breaks due to improper welding, forward and rearward seat adjustment will no
longer be possible. In the event of a crash, the slide rails could break, exposing the occupant to a
risk of injury. Dealers will replace one or both front seat inner slide rails. Owner notification began
March 30, 2001. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Subaru at
1-800-782-2783. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Page 4157
Page 6240
BRAKE/W-01
Pressure Plate: Customer Interest M/T - Cold Clutch Judder
NUMBER:03-51-02R DATE: 05/01/03
APPLICABILITY:
Vehicles

INTRODUCTION

Page 558
Page 3743
Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins A/T, M/T -
Crossmember Service Precautions
NUMBER: 03-53-04, 16-54-04 DATE: 08/20/04
APPLICABILITY: All A/T and M/T Vehicles
SUBJECT: Transmission Rear Cross-Member
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to prevent the possibility of damaging the bolts and/or threads that
secure the transmission rear cross member.
When performing service work or installing SOA's accessory short throw shifter, it is extremely
important that the transmission is supported properly when removing or reinstalling the cross
member. If not, damage to the bolts and/or threads will occur. Support the transmission using a
transmission jack, regardless if the vehicle is supported by a lift or car ramps (Figure 1). It is
recommended that hand tools be used for the removal and installation of the bolts. Inspect for bolt
thread damage and replace as necessary. Be sure to clean any protective wax from the mating
surfaces and be sure to start all bolts several threads by hand before using tightening tools. Note: If
severe damage is evident to the threads, the use of a Heli-coil(R) type kit is an approved repair
method.
During reinstallation torque sequence, below (Figure 2) and the torque specifications (Figure 3)
Page 5010
ST-A, B 20099AE000 INSTALLER & REMOVER
INSPECTION
Visually check link rear for damage or bends.

Page 3759
Page 525

Specifications
Fuel Pressure

Page 1868
Page 1330
27. Loosen clamp which holds front right side fuel hose to injector pipe and remove the pipe from
clamp.
28. Remove fuel injector pipe.
29. Remove bolt which installs fuel pipes on intake manifold. 30. Remove fuel pipe assembly and
pressure regulator, from intake manifold.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install fuel pipe assembly and pressure regulator, etc. to intake manifold. 2. Tighten bolt which
installs fuel pipes on intake manifold.
Page 1146
NOTE: Apply a coat of 3 mm (0.12 inch) diameter liquid gasket along edge of cam cap mating
surface.
(2) Temporarily tighten bolts (g) through (j) in alphabetical sequence.
(3) Install valve rocker assembly.
(4) Tighten bolts (a) through (h) in alphabetical sequence.
(5) Tighten TORX bolts (i) through (n) in alphabetical sequence using ST.
Page 6721
the wiring diagram(s)] to identify the appropriate Harness Connector Location diagram. For
example, the prefix letter "B" in the connector name "B-38" indicates the location is displayed in the
Bulkhead Wiring Harness Connector Location diagram.
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Diagrams
Page 1053
Relay And Fuse

Page 6443
Page 6518
H/L (2L)-01
2-Light Model
Page 5741
Page 1507
INSPECTION
1. Normal
2. Carbon fouled
3. Oil fouled
Page 197

Wipers/Washers - Wiper Blade Information
Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wiper Blade Information
12 WIPER BLADES - THE BASICS
When presented with a complaint indicating worn or noisy windshield wipers, please keep the
following checks in mind. First check the condition of the wiper's rubber inserts. They should not be
cracked, split or torn. If damaged, the inserts must be replaced. In all cases the blade frame itself
should be inspected to ensure that the pivot points move easily and that the frame is not bent or
otherwise damaged. Wipers with physically damaged blade frames are not a matter for warranty. If
the frame is in good shape, then only the rubber insert needs replacing. If the wiper and rubber
inserts appear undamaged, check the wiper performance to determine if the blades are streaking,
smearing or chattering as they go across the windshield.
The following information is supplied to assist in your understanding of the causes of wiper
streaking and chattering complaints and should be considered a maintenance tip. If you notice any
of these concerns, many times they are due to residue on the wipers, windshield, or both. To
correct these concerns, start by cleaning the windshield and the wiper blades rubber inserts. Clean
the windshield and the wiper inserts with a neutral non-abrasive cleaner, such as washer solvent
using a sponge or soft cloth. Do not use petroleum products, thinner, or other solvents, as these
will dry and damage the rubber and possibly the windshield. In terms of warranty handling if
physical damage is not present and if cleaning would not resolve the concern, only the wiper's
rubber inserts should require replacement. In the event that a direct replacement insert for the
original equipment blade is not available from Subaru, the wiper blade assembly should be
replaced with a Genuine Subaru replacement blade assembly (denoted by a part number
beginning with SOA such as S0A591U218). Please see June 05 Tech Tips for specific information
relating to 05 Legacy and Outback applications. The chart shown below contains a list of the
available replacement wiper inserts and blade assemblies from SOA Parts. Please refer to
www.subarunet.com > Fixed Operations> Price Book/CD Instructions> Price Book - Front Section
> Wiper Blades and Refills for the latest chart.
Page 1182
Crankshaft: Tools and Equipment Subaru Crankshaft Socket - AST Tool # SU499987500
Subaru Crankshaft Socket
AST tool# SU499987500

Page 2791
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove accelerator pedal. Refer to Accelerator Pedal; Service and Repair. 2. Separate
accelerator cable and accelerator pedal.
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
^ Do not apply grease to the throttle cable on the engine side.
2. Adjustment after pedal installation.

Page 4179
Page 3246

System Diagnosis
Rear Door Panel: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
If sealing cover gets damaged, replace it with a new one.

Page 5449

Page 6623
Page 3889
Page 6203
Clutch Switch
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3062
Page 3807
Axle Shaft Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rear Drive Shaft
E: INSPECTION
Check the removed parts for damage, wear, corrosion etc. If faulty, repair or replace. 1. DOJ
(Double Offset Joint)
Check seizure, corrosion, damage, wear and excessive play.
2. SFJ (Shudder-less Freering tripod Joint)
3. Shaft
Check excessive bending, twisting, damage and wear.
4. BJ (Bell Joint)
5. Boot
Check for wear, warping, breakage or scratches.
6. Grease
Check for discoloration or fluidity.

Page 3872
Flywheel: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Flywheel Fastener 51-55 Foot Lbs.
Torque Sequence
Timing Components
Page 2265
Part 2
Page 5698
Page 6095
6) Remove the seat rail assembly as pictured.
4. Install the replacement inner slide rail assembly and reassemble the seat assembly in the
reverse order of disassembly.
Properly torque components as follows:
Slide Rail assembly to seat frame bolts: 18 +/- 5 N-m (13.3 +/- 4 ft-lb)
Slide Rail assembly to seat frame screws: 7 +/- 1.5 Nm (5.2 +/- 1.1 ft-lb)
Seat Back to Slide Rail assembly screw: 10 +/- 2.5 Nm (7.4 +/- 1.8 ft-lb)
Seat Belt Buckle installation:30 N-m (22 ft-lb)
5. Reinstall the seat assembly in the vehicle.
Important:
To avoid the possibility of stripping the seat bolts, always begin installation by hand and only
tighten to the proper torque.
Slide Rail to floor, 4 Bolts: 53 N-m (39 ft-lb)
Verify the Slide Rail operates smoothly and both rails lock simultaneously. If the rails do not lock
simultaneously, adjust by loosening bolts and retightening them. For additional front seat slide rail
adjustment procedures, refer to Service Bulletin 12-58-93 dated 02/16/93.

Page 533
Front
INSPECTION
1. ABS SENSOR
2. SENSOR GAP
wheel.
and calculating.
3. OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 3288
Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. 2.5L MODEL 1. Remove battery and washer tank. 2. Lift-up the vehicle.
4. Remove the under cover.
5. Disconnect ATF cooler hose from radiator.
NOTE: ^
6. Disconnect ATF cooler hoses from pipes.

Page 3199
Service and Repair
Rear Cross-Member: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Separate front exhaust pipe and rear exhaust pipe. 2. Remove rear exhaust pipe and muffler. 3.
Remove rear differential. 4. Disconnect link front from sub frame. 5. Disconnect link rear from sub
frame. 6. Disconnect link upper from sub frame.
7. Place transmission jack under sub frame. 8. After removing bolts, remove sub frame and support
sub frame from vehicle body.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in reverse order of removal. 2. For installation and tightening torque of rear differential.
absorber.
INSPECTION
Check removed parts for wear, damage and cracks, and correct or replace if defective.
Page 1766
Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
1. Attach radiator cap to tester. 2. Increase pressure until tester gauge pointer stops. Radiator cap
is functioning properly if it holds the service limit pressure for five to six seconds.
Standard pressure: 93 - 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.26 kg/cm2, 14 - 18 psi) Service limit pressure: 83 kPa
(0.85 kg/cm2, 12 psi)
CAUTION: Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust from the cap in advance otherwise, results of
pressure test will be incorrect.
Page 5549
Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 2366
Page 3624
2. Connect push rod of master cylinder to clutch pedal, and install clevis pin and snap pin.
NOTE: Apply grease to clevis pin.
3. After bleeding air from system, ensure that clutch operates properly. 4. Install air cleaner case
and air intake duct.
Page 6356
Page 562
second letter.
NOTE:
Front Seat Belt
Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection Front Seat Belt
INSPECTION
1. OUTER BELT (FRONT)
Check for the following, and replace with new parts if necessary. -
Pretensioner is cracked or deformed.
- Seat belt is slackened, bent, or frayed. Seat belt is abnormally wound or extended.
2. INNER BELT (FRONT)
Check for the following, and replace with new parts if necessary. -
Inner belt is deformed or damaged.
- Seat belt buckle is engaged improperly.

Page 5504
Rear Door Trim
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Door Trim
REAR DOOR TRIM
Door Trim
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force to clip. Otherwise the clip may be broken.
1. Pull up inner remote cover toward you to remove upper hook. Pull down it to remove lower claw.
Remove inner remote cover.
Interrupt Relay
Page 6632
Parking Lamp: Service and Repair
Parking Lamp Bulb
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1306
16. Disconnect connector from oil pressure switch.
18. Disconnect fuel hoses from fuel pipes.
WARNING: -
Do not spill fuel.
- Catch fuel from hoses in a container or cloth.
19. Remove bolts which hold intake manifold onto cylinder heads.
Page 5376
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection
INSPECTION
- Control module, connector, and mounting bracket are damaged.
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove gear shift knob. 2. Remove console box.
3. Remove boot plate from body. 4. Remove rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
6. Remove stay from transmission bracket.
7. Remove rod from joint.

Page 5470
Page 2618
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(H6)-243C Engine
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(DOHC TURBO)-225 Engine

Page 1851
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Center Exhaust Pipe
A: REMOVAL
After removing the center and front exhaust pipes as one unit, separate them. Refer to the
procedure for removing the front exhaust pipe.
B: INSTALLATION
Install the center exhaust pipe and front exhaust pipe as one unit. Refer to the procedure for
installing the front exhaust pipe.
Page 269
Part 2
Page 2539
Page 4417
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Install disc rotor by tightening the five wheel nuts.
2. Set a dial gauge on the disc rotor. Turn disc rotor to check runout.
NOTE: Make sure that dial gauge is set 5 mm (0.20 inch) inward of rotor outer perimeter.
Disc rotor runout limit: 0.075 mm (0.0030 inch)
3. Measure disc rotor thickness.
NOTE: Make sure that micrometer is set 5 mm (0.20 inch) inward of rotor perimeter.
Security Horn Relay
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 3381

Page 6324
greatly lowered.
Page 899
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- When disconnecting/connecting hoses, do not apply excessive force them. Confirm that no
torsion and excessive tension exist after installing.
- Seal the disconnected hose with a plug or vinyl tape to prevent contamination from entering.
refrigerant.
3. Remove duct (A). 4. Remove hose attaching bolts (C). 5. Disconnect hose from evaporator unit.
6. Disconnect hose from compressor. 7. Remove low-pressure hose (A) from the vehicle. 8.
Remove hose attaching bolts (D). 9. Disconnect hose from compressor.
10. Disconnect hose from condenser.
11. Disconnect high-pressure hose (B) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: When disconnecting/connecting hoses, do not apply an excessive force them. Confirm
that no torsion and excessive tension exist after installing. Seal the disconnected hose with a plug
or vinyl tape to prevent contamination from entering.
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Charge refrigerant.

Page 6292
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 4516
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2328
ABS
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 5949
Page 2414
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Page 1615

Page 2181
area.

Page 5414
Side Air Bag: Service Precautions
Side Airbag Module
CAUTION:
When disconnecting and connecting airbag connector, be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF,
disconnect the ground cable from the battery, and wait for more than 20 seconds before starting
work.
The airbag module must not be disassembled.
The airbag module cannot be used again once inflated.
Do not check continuity of the airbag module (driver, passenger, and side) with airbag removed
from the vehicle.
The removed front seat with the airbag module must be kept at least 200 mm (8 in) away from
Page 5665
Speaker: Service and Repair Woofer
REMOVAL
1. Remove trim of woofer.
2. Remove woofer mounting screws. 3. Disconnect harness connector, and then remove woofer.
INSTALLATION

Page 115
Fuse Locations
Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 2615
List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) - Page EN(H6)-90 Engine
Page 774
Page 6336
Page 5078
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid
Total Capacity ......................................................................................................................................

........................................................... 9.5L (10.0 Qt) Service Capacity ..............................................
.................................................................................................................................................. 2.5L
(2.6 Qt)
Page 5106
Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Link Upper
REMOVAL
3. Remove bolt securing link upper to sub frame.
4. Remove bolts which secure link upper to rear arm and detach link upper.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally, install link upper and tighten nuts to
specified torque.

Diagrams
Page 5153
Wheels: Service and Repair Balancing
REPLACEMENT
1. Remove balance weights. 2. Using dynamic balancing, measure wheel balance.

3. Select a weight close to the value measured by dynamic balancing. 4. Install the selected weight
to the point designated by dynamic balancing. 5. Using dynamic balancing, measure wheel balance
again. Check that wheel balance is correctly adjusted.
INSPECTION
1. Proper wheel balance may be lost if the tire is repaired or if it wears. Check the tire for dynamic
balance, and repair as necessary. 2. To check for dynamic balance, use a dynamic balancer. Drive
in the balance weight on both the top and rear sides of the rim. 3. Some types of balancer can
cause damage to the wheel. Use an appropriate balancer when adjusting the wheel balance. 4.
Use genuine balance weights.
Page 4934
^ Be careful to keep pipe connections free from foreign matter.
6. Remove bolt A.
2.5 Model Disconnect pipe C from oil pump. Disconnect pipe D from return hose.
CAUTION: ^
clean cloth.
3.0 Model Disconnect pressure hose from oil pump. Disconnect return hose from return hose.
CAUTION: ^
clean cloth.
INSTALLATION
1. Tighten bolt A.
CAUTION: Visually check that hose between tank and pipe D is free from bending or twisting.
2.5 Model
Page 147
Page 2917

Page 4533
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove brake pipe from proportioning valve at four places. 2. Remove proportioning valve from
its bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble or adjust the proportioning valve. (The proportioning valve must be
replaced as an assembly.)
INSTALLATION
1. Install proportioning valve to bracket. 2. Connect brake pipes correctly to proportion in valve. 3.
Bleed air, then check each joint of brake pipe for oil leaks.
Tightening torque: Proportioning valve to brake pipe flare nut: 15 Nm (1.5 kgf-m, 10.8 ft. lbs.)
Proportioning valve to bracket: 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft. lbs.)
MT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 5578
completely.
Page 3888
Page 1910
Part 3
Page 116
Page 3502
Specifications
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications
Propeller Shaft Type DOJ Type
Front Propeller Shaft Joint-To-Joint Length: L1 mm A/T 629 mm
M/T 688 mm
Rear Propeller Shaft Joint-To-Joint Length: L2 mm 773 mm
Outside Diameter Of Tube: mm (inch) D1 63.5
D2 57.0
Page 1783
Page 1425
Timing Cover: Description and Operation
Belt Cover
^ The belt cover is made of lightweight, heat resistant synthetic resin molding. It constitutes a totally
enclosed housing with its cylinder block mating edges sealed with rubber gaskets. This effectively
protects the inside components from dust and liquid.
^ Rubber seals used between the cylinder block and the belt cover effectively reduces transmission
of noise and vibration.
^ The front belt cover has a line mark for ignition-timing checking.
Page 6554

Page 3185
Page 4188
Part 2
Page 1942
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:

Page 5560
completely.
Interrupt Relay
Page 112
Page 4998
3. The ball joint and cover that have been removed must be checked for wear, damage or cracks,
and any defective part must be replaced. 4. If the dust cover is damaged, replace with the new ball
joint.
Page 6517
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Diagrams
Front Door Glass

Page 2697
3. Connect evaporation hose to pipe by approx. 15 mm (0.59 in) from hose end.
Page 3324
Page 4351
secured firmly.
Note:
Disclaimer
Page 609

Page 6279

Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 4143
Page 2694
Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Set vehicle on the lift. 2. Release fuel pressure. 3. Open fuel filler flap lid and remove fuel filler
cap. 4. Remove fuel tank. 5. Remove fuel filler pipe. 6. Remove floor mat.
7. Remove fuel delivery pipes and hoses, fuel return pipes and hoses, evaporation pipes and
hoses.
Page 2600
Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL
2. Remove bolt which installs purge control solenoid valve onto intake manifold. 3. Take out purge
control solenoid valve through the bottom of the intake manifold.
4. Disconnect connector and hoses from purge control solenoid valve.
INSTALLATION
Page 251

Page 6395
Page 2187
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION: After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be careful not to burn yourself during
measurement.
1. After warming-up the engine, turn ignition switch to OFF. 2. Make sure that the battery is fully
charged. 3. Release fuel pressure. Refer to Powertrain Management; Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction. 4. Remove all the spark plugs. 5. Fully open throttle valve. 6. Check the starter motor for
satisfactory performance and operation.
7. Hold the compression gauge tight against the spark plug hole.
CAUTION: When using a screw-in type compression gauge, the screw (put into cylinder head
spark plug hole) should be less than 18 mm (0.71 inch) long.
8. Crank the engine by means of the starter motor, and read the maximum value on the gauge
when the pointer is steady. 9. Perform at least two measurements per cylinder, and make sure that
the values are correct.
Compression (350 rpm and fully open throttle): Standard 1,216 kPa (12.4 kg/cm2, 176 psi) Limit:
941 kPa (9.6 kg/cm2, 137 psi) Difference between cylinders: 49 kPa (0.5 kg/cm2, 7 psi), or less
Clutch Bleeding Procedure
Clutch Fluid: Service and Repair Clutch Bleeding Procedure
A: PROCEDURE
NOTE: Bleed air from oil line with the help of a co-worker.
1. Remove air chamber.
2. Fit one end of a vinyl tube into the air bleeder of operating cylinder and put the other end into a
brake fluid container.
3. Slowly depress the clutch pedal and keep it depressed. Then open the air bleeder to discharge
air together with the fluid.
Release the air bleeder for 1 or 2 seconds. Next, with the bleeder closed, slowly release the clutch
pedal.
4. Repeat these steps until there are no more air bubbles in the vinyl tube.
CAUTION: Cover bleeder with waste cloth when loosening it, to prevent brake fluid from being
5. Tighten air bleeder.
6. After depressing the clutch pedal, make sure that there are no leaks evident in the entire system.
7. After bleeding air from system, ensure that clutch operates properly.
Page 3112
Interrupt Relay
Page 3426

Page 196

Page 2010

Page 3201
Page 3961
6. Remove O-ring, then disconnect bush D.
7. Draw out straight pin, then remove bush C from gear shift lever.
D: ASSEMBLY
1. Clean all parts before assembly.
2. Mount the bush B and cushion rubber on the stay.

Page 4509
Page 2921

Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications PRESSURE
PRESSURE
Pressure at 700 Rpm 96 Kpa (14 Psi.) Min.
Pressure at 5000 Rpm 294 Kpa. (43 Psi.) Min.

Locations
Page 2075

Recall - Engine Control Module Reprogramming
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Recalls Recall - Engine Control Module
Reprogramming
NUMBER: WWF-89 DATE: 04/2002
APPLICABILITY: 2000-01MY Subaru Legacy and Outback 4EAT 2000-02MY Impreza MT5 or
4EAT 2001-02MY Forester MT5 or 4EAT
SUBJECT: Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming
INTRODUCTION
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that some affected vehicles listed below may
require ECM reprogramming. The ECM logic for the air/fuel ratio circuit may not be broad enough
to accept the signal parameters of the A/F ratio sensor. Should the A/F ratio sensor signal
repeatedly fluctuate beyond the parameters of the ECM logic, the CHECK ENGINE warning light /
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate steadily while the engine is running, advising the
driver of a malfunction and the need to seek repair service. Reprogramming the ECM will broaden
the allowable A/F ratio signal parameters and correct this condition.
This condition is a software issue and has no impact on vehicle emissions or driveability.
This service program will involve reprogramming the ECM on affected vehicles.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
^ 2000-01 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback with H4 engine and 4EAT transmission only. (Legacy
and Outback vehicles with the H6 engine or MT5 transmission are not affected.)
^ 2000-02 MY Impreza with MT5 or 4EAT. (Impreza WRX models are not affected.)
^ 2001-02 MY Forester with MT5 or 4EAT.
NOTE:
Page 4950
CAUTION: Never start the engine before feeding the fluid; otherwise vane pump might be seized
up.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Using ST, place oil pump in a vise and remove four bolts which secure rear cover.
ST 34199AE020 ATTACHMENT
2. Remove pressure plate.
3. Using a screwdriver, pry retaining ring off.
CAUTION: Do not remove cam ring, rotor, etc.
4. Install pressure plate. 5. Temporarily install rear cover to front casing.
6. Remove oil pump pulley. 7. Place oil pump in a vise.

Page 2576
Page 531
Page 6048
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 4957
greatly lowered.
Page 4791
Page 745
Disclaimer
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 799
A: INSPECTION
measurement.
Reverse Idler Gear: Customer Interest M/T - Pops Out of Reverse gear
NUMBER: 03-49-02R DATE: 04/23/04
INTRODUCTION
bulletin.
PARTS LIST
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Seat Belt Retractor Cover Bolt Torque
AFFECTED VEHICLES
NOTE:
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 4728
C: INSPECTION
with new one.

Service and Repair
Fuel Door: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
FUEL FLAP OPENER 1. Remove the rear seat. 2. Remove the center pillar lower trim and side sill
cover on the passenger side. Remove the rear pillar lower trim. Pull back the floor mat.
Remove the clip holding the cable.
3. Remove the bolt. Remove the opener pull handle. 4. Remove the cable from the opener pull
handle. 5. Remove the right rear quarter trim.
6. Rotate the fuel lock inside the quarter panel to left and remove.
INSTALLATION
FUEL FLAP OPENER Install in the reverse order of removal.

Page 5095
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up vehicle and remove rear wheels.
2. Remove clip and detach floor mat. (Wagon model) 3. Detach trunk mat. (Sedan model)
4. Roll up the trunk side trim. (Sedan model)
5. Remove bolt securing shock absorber to rear arm. 6. Use a jack to support the shock absorber.
7. Remove nuts securing shock absorber mount to body.
^ Wagon
Page 4784
Page 390
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4752
4. Remove air cleaner case stay.
5. Disconnect connector and terminal from starter.
6. Remove starter from transmission.
INSTALLATION

Page 4019
Page 1883
Page 5699

Fuel Level Sensor
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING:
INSTALLATION
WARNING:

Page 4318
Brake Pedal For MT Model

Page 6110
6) Remove the seat rail assembly as pictured.
4. Install the replacement inner slide rail assembly and reassemble the seat assembly in the
reverse order of disassembly.
Slide Rail assembly to seat frame bolts: 18 +/- 5 N-m (13.3 +/- 4 ft-lb)
Slide Rail assembly to seat frame screws: 7 +/- 1.5 Nm (5.2 +/- 1.1 ft-lb)
Seat Back to Slide Rail assembly screw: 10 +/- 2.5 Nm (7.4 +/- 1.8 ft-lb)
Seat Belt Buckle installation:30 N-m (22 ft-lb)
5. Reinstall the seat assembly in the vehicle.
Important:
To avoid the possibility of stripping the seat bolts, always begin installation by hand and only
tighten to the proper torque.
Slide Rail to floor, 4 Bolts: 53 N-m (39 ft-lb)
Verify the Slide Rail operates smoothly and both rails lock simultaneously. If the rails do not lock
simultaneously, adjust by loosening bolts and retightening them. For additional front seat slide rail
adjustment procedures, refer to Service Bulletin 12-58-93 dated 02/16/93.

Front Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front Wiper Arm
Front Wiper Arm
REMOVAL
1. Open hood. 2. Remove cap. 3. Loosen nut to remove arm.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Operate wiper once. 3. Align wiper blade to ceramic
print point mark (A) of front window pane.
Page 5942
Disclaimer
Repair Procedures

Page 2897
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3408

Page 6412

Page 4287
INSTALLATION
Page 4503
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: -
To always maintain the brake fluid characteristics, replace the brake fluid according to maintenance
schedule or earlier than that when used in severe condition.
- The FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOTS or 4 brake fluid must be used.
- Cover bleeder with waste cloth, when loosening it, to prevent brake fluid from being splashed over
surrounding parts.
NOTE: -
air.
- The amount of brake fluid required is approximately 500 ml (16.9 US fl oz. 17.6 Imp fl oz) for total
brake system.
1. Either jack-up vehicle and place a safety stand under it, or left up vehicle. 2. Remove both front
and rear wheels. 3. Draw out the brake fluid from master cylinder with syringe. 4. Refill reservoir
tank with recommended brake fluid.
Recommended brake fluid: FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOTS or 4 brake fluid
5. Install one end of a vinyl tube onto the air bleeder of and insert the other end of the tube into a
container to collect the brake fluid.
Rear right
Page 5356

Page 3377

Page 2145

Page 3962
3. Mount each part; boot, O-ring, bush A, spacer, bush B. bush D and straight pin on the gear shift
lever.
CAUTION: ^
Always use new O-rings.
^ Apply grease [DNIGTIGHT LYW No. 2 or equivalent] to the inner and side surfaces of the bush
when installing the spacer.
4. Insert the gear shift lever into the boot hole.
5. Install snap ring and stay to the bush D.
6. Tighten with locking wire to the extent that the boot will not come off.
CAUTION: Always use new locking wire.
7. Insert the rod into the boot hole.

Page 3972
1. PITCHING STOPPER
1. Install the pitching stopper.
2. Install the air intake duct and cleaner case.

2. CROSSMEMBER AND CUSHION RUBBER 1. Install the rear cushion rubber.
2. Install the crossmember.
3. Remove the transmission jack. 4. Install the heat shield cover. 5. Install the center, rear exhaust
pipes and the muffler.
Radiator Cap: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
Page 200
INSPECTION
Page 3778
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Specified type ......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................... SAE 75W - 90

Page 1136
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
Repair. 2. Remove crankshaft pulley. Refer to Cylinder Block Assembly; Pulley, Crankshaft;
Service and Repair. 3. Remove belt cover. Refer to Timing Components; Timing Cover; Service
and Repair. 4. Remove timing belt assembly. Refer to Timing Components; Timing Belt; Service
and Repair.
5. Remove camshaft sprocket No.1 and No. 2. To lock camshaft, use ST.
ST 499207100 CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH

B: INSTALLATION
1. Install camshaft sprocket No. 1 and No. 2. To lock camshaft, use ST.
lbs.)
CAUTION: Do not confuse left and right side camshaft sprockets during installation. The camshaft
sprocket No. 2 is identified by a projection used to monitor camshaft position sensor.
2. Install timing belt assembly. 3. Install belt cover. 4. Install crankshaft pulley. 5. Install V-belt.
Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2372
Page 2706
3. Connect evaporation hose to pipe by approx. 15 mm (0.59 in) from hose end.
Page 1542
11. Connect over flow hose.
14. Connect radiator outlet hose and heater hose to water pump.
15. Connect connectors to radiator main fan (A) and sub fan (a) motors.

Page 1322
17. Install fuel pipe protector LH.
18. Connect pressure regulator vacuum hose to intake manifold.
19. Install throttle body to intake manifold.

Page 2491
Page 1734
1. Attach radiator mounting cushions to holes on the vehicle.
2. Install radiator while fitting radiator pins to cushions.
NOTE: Fit pins on lower side of radiator into cushions on body side.
3. Install radiator brackets and tighten bolts.
4. Attach power steering hose to the radiator.

Page 6870
Page 3595
Clutch Disc: Specifications
Clutch Disc Facing Material Woven
O.D. x I.D. x Thickness 225 x 150 x 3.5 mm
Spline O.D. 25.2 mm
24 Teeth
Depth Of Rivet Head 0.3 mm
Limit For Runout 1.0 mm
At R = 107 mm
Page 5983
other parts.
Page 1848
7. Remove bolts which hold front exhaust pipe onto cylinder heads.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pull down front and center exhaust pipe assembly.
8. Remove bolt which installs front and center exhaust pipe assembly to hanger bracket. 9.
Remove front and center exhaust pipe assembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to let front and center exhaust pipe assembly fall off when removing as it is quite
heavy.
^ After removing front and center exhaust assembly, do not apply excessive pulling force on rear
exhaust pipe.
10. Separate front exhaust pipe from center exhaust pipe.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 2861
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 6749
Vanity Lamp: Electrical Diagrams

C/L-01
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Mandatory Replacement Fluids
NUMBER: 01-151-00
DATE: 07/15/00
NOTE:
reference.
Department.
DISCLAIMER
Page 3306
Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
The OEM does not provide a Maintenance Required Indicator for this model.
Page 567
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 1915
INSTALLATION
Page 6441
second letter.
NOTE:
Diagrams
Page 1923
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3454

Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Testing and Inspection
1. CHECK FOR MOVEMENT OF SUNSHADE
1. Place a cloth on sunshade, and attach a spring scale to sunshade edge using a cloth.
2. Pull spring scale to measure force required to move the sunshade.
Force required to move rear sunshade: Less than 24.5 ± 4.9 N (2.5 ± 0.5 kgf, 55 ± 1.1 lb)
NOTE: Considerable force is required to start sunshade moving, so take a scale reading when it
begins to move smoothly.
3. If the force required exceeds specifications, check the following points:
Sunroof lid, sunshade and guide rail assembly for improper installation.
Locations
Connector Location

Page 260
Page 1476

Page 5550
bulletin.
Page 6516
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 3763
A total of 0.2 labor hours will be automatically credited upon claim submission.
Inspection and Replacement - Use the following claim submission information if the right front axle
housing was found to contain the affected lot number and replacement was necessary.
For right front axle housing inspection and replacement enter labor operation 161-182 for 2.2 labor
hours. The claim will automatically be credited an additional 0.2 labor hours for inspection. A total
of 2.4 labor hours will be credited.
allowance. If the part was ordered for overnight delivery, add the additional freight charge as a
sublet with comments indicating "sublet for overnight freight".
Disclaimer
Information
Check Information
NUMBER: 11-62-00
DATE: 05/08/00
Page 2570
Page 6805
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
Rear Window Glass
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect electrical connectors from rear defogger terminals. 2. Remove glass in the same
procedure as for windshield glass.
INSTALLATION
1. Bond dam rubber and matching pin. 2. Install glass in the same procedure as for windshield
glass. 3. Connect rear defogger terminals.
CAUTION: -
When door is opened/closed after glass is bonded, always lower door glass and then open/close
door carefully.

water leaks.
Page 4144

Page 3064

AFFECTED VEHICLES
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 4785
Page 4837
RAPS-01 - Rear Accessory Power Supply System

Page 5954
Important:
CROSSMEMBER FRONT
(A).
CROSSMEMBER REAR
Spray time: 6 sec.
Page 4309
Page 2402
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:

Page 2057
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4778
Diagrams
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) Terminal Arrangement

Page 5161
grease: SHELL 6459N
CAUTION:
INSPECTION
smoothly.
overhaul.
4. Install knuckle.

Page 5510

Specifications
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Specifications
Dip Stick Tube, A/T Oil Charger Pipe 41 Nm

Page 1165
Connecting Rod: Service and Repair
Locations
Fuel Return Line: Locations
FUEL LINE
FUEL LINE
1. Clamp 2. Fuel delivery hose A 3. Fuel filter bracket 4. Fuel filter holder 5. Fuel filter cup 6. Fuel
filter 7. Evaporation hose F 8. Clip 9. Fuel delivery hose B
10. Fuel return hose 11. Fuel pipe ASSY 12. Fuel delivery hose C
Page 6790
Front Door Window Glass: Adjustments
Front Door Glass
NOTE: Before adjustment, ensure that all adjusting bolts of stabilizer, upper stopper, and sash are
loose and door glass is raised so that it is in contact with weatherstrip.
1. Temporarily tighten one adjusting bolt on one side of rear sash at the midpoint of slotted hole in
the inner panel. 2. Temporarily tighten regulator B-channel in a position slightly lower than midpoint
of slotted hole.
3. Lower door glass 10 to 15 mm (0.39 to 0.59 in) from fully closed position. While applying
outward pressure of 49.0 ± 4.9 N (5.0 ±0.5 kg, 11.0 ±
1.1 lb) (F) to upper edge of glass above midpoint of two outer stabilizers, press inner stabilizer until
it just touches the glass, then secure it.
4. For adjustment of clearance between front and rear glasses, loosen nuts (A) and (B), and move
glass sash back and forth until clearance becomes
the value shown.
5. For adjustment of upper and lower ends of center pillar, loosen adjusting nut (A) of B-channel
(B).
Page 4373
4) Apply a thin coat of Molykote M7439 or equivalent to caliper support.

Page 4345
secured firmly.
Note:
Disclaimer
Page 4693
3. Using the circuit tester, verify the current in neutral position. Also verify that there is no current in
positions other than neutral. 4. Replace defective parts.
Service and Repair
Rear Cross-Member: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Separate front exhaust pipe and rear exhaust pipe. 2. Remove rear exhaust pipe and muffler. 3.
Remove rear differential. 4. Disconnect link front from sub frame. 5. Disconnect link rear from sub
frame. 6. Disconnect link upper from sub frame.
7. Place transmission jack under sub frame. 8. After removing bolts, remove sub frame and support
sub frame from vehicle body.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in reverse order of removal. 2. For installation and tightening torque of rear differential.
absorber.
INSPECTION
Check removed parts for wear, damage and cracks, and correct or replace if defective.
Page 3422
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Wiring Diagram
Page 6547
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 2467

Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Thoroughly drain brake fluid from reservoir tank. 2. Disconnect fluid level indicator harness
connector. 3. Remove brake pipes from master cylinder. 4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts,
and take out master cylinder from brake booster.
CAUTION: Be extremely careful not to spill brake fluid. Brake fluid spilt on the vehicle body will
harm the painted surface; wipe it off quickly if spilt.
INSTALLATION
To install the master cylinder to the body, reverse the sequence of removal procedure. Tightening
torque: Master cylinder mounting nut 14 Nm (1.4 kgf-m, 10.1 ft. lbs.) Piping flare nut 15 Nm (1.5
kgf-m, 10.8 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: Be sure to use recommended brake fluid.

Page 6026
Power Door Lock Actuator: Service and Repair Rear Door Lock Actuator
Rear Door Lock Actuator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door latch assembly.
2. Remove the bolt. Remove the rear door lock actuator.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make sure the lock operates properly after installation.

Page 2480
Page 2139
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 1416
5. Install A/C belt tensioner. (With A/C model)
6. Install A/C belt. (With A/C model)

Page 4870

Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 5439
Page 4149

Page 5601
Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection Inspection Locations After A Collision
INSPECTION
FRONT SUB SENSOR
If the front section of vehicle as shown in the figure is damaged: Check for the following, and
replace damaged parts with new parts.
- Front sub sensor is cracked or deformed.
FRONT SUB SENSOR HARNESS
SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR
If the side section of vehicle as shown in the figure is damaged: Check for the following, and
- Side airbag sensor is cracked or deformed.
- Side airbag is deployed (operating side)
SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR HARNESS

Page 2235

Page 1822
17. Remove left-hand belt cover No. 2.
18. Remove tensioner bracket. 19. Disconnect heater hose from water pump.
20. Remove water pump.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install water pump onto left-hand cylinder head.
CAUTION: ^
Replace gasket with a new one.
^ When installing water pump, tighten bolts in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
figure.
Tightening torque: First: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Second: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft. lbs.)
Page 6648

Page 4739
Steering - Power Steering Groan/Vibration
Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering
Groan/Vibration
NUMBER: 04-11-04 DATE: 01/15/04

APPLICABILITY: 2000-2002MY Legacy Sedan, Wagon and Outback Vehicles w/ 2.5L Engines
SUBJECT: Power Steering Hose - New Style
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to address an abnormal noise (groan) coming from the power
steering pump and/or slight vibration in the steering wheel when turning at very low speeds.
The new style hose assembly was used in production starting in April, 2002 with the VINs shown.
PART NUMBER INFORMATION
Remove the bolt (A) and clamps (B) that secure the high-pressure power steering hose (Figure 1)
and confirm if the abnormal noise and/or vibration have been reduced. If so, leave the damps off;
no further action is required.
If the abnormal noise and/or vibration have not been reduced, replace the high-pressure power
steering hose with the updated hose, P/N 34610AE09B and leave the clamps off. If, after replacing
the hose the abnormal noise and/or vibration is still evident, replace the power steering pump.
CLAIM REIMBURSEMENT / WARRANTY INFORMATION
For vehicles within the Basic New Car Warranty period, refer to the Warranty Labor Time Guide for
claim information.
Page 4667
ADJUSTMENT

Page 2156
Page 1795
Page 3200

Page 2171
Page 5792
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Sealing Cover
FRONT SEALING COVER
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door trim. 2. Remove front speaker. 3. Using a spatula, remove sealer.
CAUTION: -
Carefully remove sealer. Excessive force will easily break the cover.
- If cover gets broken, replace it with a new one.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. When replacing sealing cover, use CEMEDINE 5430L
sealer. 3. Press sealer-applied area firmly to prevent any floating on surface.
Sealer: CEMEDINE 5430L or equivalent
CAUTION: -
Apply a uniform bead of sealer.
- Attach sealing cover, keeping it from becoming wrinkled.
- Breaks in the bead will allow water leakage and contamination.

Page 2678
INSTALLATION
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1725
Temperature Gauge: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
assembly.
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 4936
6. Connect pipes A and B to four pipe joints of gearbox. Connect upper pipe B first, and lower pipe
A second.
7. Install jack-up plate. 8. Connect battery minus terminal.
9. Feed the specified fluid.
NOTE: Never start the engine before feeding the fluid; otherwise vane pump might be seized up.
10. Finally check clearance between pipes and/or hoses, as shown above.
If clearance between cruise control pump and power steering hose is less than 10 mm (0.39 inch),
proceed as follows: 1. Move clamped section (A) (refer to figure above.) down to a point where pipe
is close to crossmember.
Pipe-to-crossmember clearance: 10 mm (0.39 inch), min.
2. Check that clearance between cruise control pump and power steering hose is at least 10 mm
(0.39 inch). If it is not, bend section (B) down
until a clearance of at least 10 mm (0.39 inch) is obtained.
INSPECTION
Page 1103
INSPECTION
CAUTION:
ASSEMBLE
CAUTION:
ABS).
CAUTION:

Locations
Page 117
Page 5561
Note:
Disclaimer
Page 2055
Page 613
INSPECTION

Page 476
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Replace belts, if cracks, fraying or wear is found.
2. Check drive belt tension and adjust it if necessary by changing generator installing position
and/or idler pulley installing position.
Belt tension (A)
replaced: 7 - 9 mm (0.276 - 0.354 inch) reused: 9 - 11 mm (0.354 - 0.433 inch)
(B)
replaced: 7.5 - 8.5 mm (0.295 - 0.335 inch) reused: 9.0 - 10.0 mm (0.354 - 0.394 inch)
Page 4558
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLING 1. Remove mud and dirt from the surface of brake
master cylinder. 2. Prepare tools necessary for disassembly operation, and arrange them neatly on
work bench. 3. Clean work bench.
2. DISASSEMBLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove pin with drift pin which secures reserve tank to
master cylinder.
2. Remove cylinder pin with magnetic pick-up tool while pushing in primary piston. 3. Pry up the
pawl and remove the piston retainer. (Without VDC)
NOTE: Piston may jump out from master cylinder.
4. Using pliers, remove C-ring. (With VDC)
NOTE: Piston may jump out from master cylinder.
5. Extract primary piston assembly and secondary piston assembly.
CAUTION: -
Do not disassemble the piston assembly; otherwise, the spring set value may be changed.
- Use brake fluid or methanol to wash inside wall of cylinder, pistons and piston cups. Be careful
not to damage parts when washing. If methanol is used for washing, do not dip rubber parts, such
as piston cups, in it for more than 30 seconds; otherwise, they may become swelled.
ASSEMBLY
1. PRECAUTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING 1. When assembling, be sure to use recommended brake

fluid. 2. Ensure that the inside wall of cylinder, pistons, and piston cups are free from dirt when
assembling.
Page 3049
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1523
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION: Inspection and adjustment of valve clearance should be performed while engine is cold.
1. Set the vehicle onto the lift. 2. Lift-up the vehicle.
4. Disconnect battery ground cable. 5. Lower the vehicle.
6. Remove timing belt cover (LH). 7. Remove rocker cover. 8. When inspecting #1 and #3
cylinders;
1) Remove bolt which secures air intake duct to radiator panel side.
2) Remove air intake duct as a unit.

Page 505

Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Highway Speed Vibration/Harshness/Noise
NUMBER: 05-50-10R DATE: 02/03/11
INTRODUCTION
DESCRIPTION
Wheel Imbalance
instructions.
Machine Setup
balancer
Page 6251
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2910
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Flex Plate Fasteners 51-55 Foot Lbs.
Torque Sequence
Page 3887

Page 6461
Page 4753
Starter Motor: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect lead wire from magnetic switch.
2. Remove through-bolts from end frame.
3. Remove yoke from magnetic switch.
4. Remove screws securing end frame to brush holder.

Page 1982
Page 4043
Except VTD model
VTD model
Page 6792
CAUTION: Do not tilt sash bracket to inner panel during adjustment. Otherwise smooth regulator
operation cannot be achieved.
10. Make adjustment of front sash in the same manner as that of rear sash.
CAUTION: Although front and rear sashes must, as a rule, be adjusted in the same manner, in
some door installation, the adjustment in a different manner may be required. However, adjustment
of one sash to the maximum amount and the other to the minimum amount is not permitted. Such
adjustment may result in application of excessive load to regulator.
11. After adjustments, tighten nuts. 12. After adjustment of glass, if there is a gap between outer lip
of gusset and glass surface, adjust the gap with adjusting bolt (A) in lower fitting part
of gusset to prevent generation of wind noise.
13. During adjustments, loosen other three clamping bolts. 14. After adjustment, tighten bolts and
nuts.
Page 4263
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:

Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Front Ball Joint Wear Limit
Specified play for replacement Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Refer to Ball Joint / Service and Repair, for proper
procedure to load ball joint for play measurement.

Page 1676
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove clip which holds motor connector onto shroud.
2. Remove nut which holds fan itself onto fan motor and shroud assembly.
3. Remove bolts which install fan motor onto shroud.
D: ASSEMBLY
Page 3182

Page 6367
Page 2058
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 5394

Page 2916

Page 770

Page 6577
5) Remove screws that secure bracket to fog lamp assembly (See Figure 3).
6) Remove bracket from fog lamp assembly (See Figure 4).
7) Replace lens and body as necessary.
8) Reinstall in reverse order of disassembly.
9) Using the chart shown, check and adjust aiming of fog light.
Specifications

Page 4944
Service limit.
Radial play (Direction 0.4 mm (0.016 inch) or less
Axial play (Direction ) 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less
2. Ditch deflection of pulley
Service limit. 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) or less
NOTE: Read the value for one surface of V ditch, and then the value for another off the dial.
3. Resistance to rotation of pulley
Service limit: Maximum load; 9.22 N (0.94 kg, 2.07 lb) or less
NOTE: ^
A rather higher value may be indicated when pulley starts turning.
^ Measure the load during rotation and make a judgment.
Hydraulic Pressure
CAUTION: ^
Be sure to complete all items aforementioned in "INSPECTION", prior to measuring hydraulic

pressure. Otherwise, pressure can not be measured correctly.
Page 2478
Page 1046
Page 148

Page 3574
7. Pour ATF into the oil charge pipe.
Recommended fluid: Dexron IIE or Dexron III type automatic transmission fluid Fluid capacity: 9.3 -
9.6 L (9.8 - 10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
8. Check the level of the ATF.

Page 565

Steering Shaft: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
STEERING SHAFT
The clearance between capsule (A) and tip of column bracket (B) on steering column upper side
should be within specifications.
If necessary, replace them with new parts.

Page 3660
Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove air chamber. 2. Drain clutch fluid. 3. Remove clutch pipe.
4. Unclip and remove hose from bracket. 5. Remove hose from operating cylinder.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE: Bleed clutch fluid.
1. MAIN SWITCH
Driver's Switch

Rear Left Switch
Rear Right Switch
2. SUB-SWITCH

Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
Page 1716
second letter.
NOTE:
Service Precautions
CAUTION:
Page 4755
9. Remove housing from magnetic switch.
10. Remove clutch from housing.
11. Take out steel ball from clutch.
CAUTION: Be careful not to lose steel ball.
12. Remove idle gear from housing.

Page 4001
Page 502
Page 2147
Page 3274
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................. Dexron III
Page 6390
BRAKE/W-01
Diagrams
Fixed Glass (Sedan)

Page 4429
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Loosen wheel nuts, jack-up vehicle, support it with rigid racks, and remove wheel. 2. Release
parking brake. 3. Remove brake drum from brake assembly.
NOTE:
- If it is difficult to remove brake drum, remove adjusting hole cover from drum, and then turn
adjuster assembly pawls using a slot-type screw-driver until brake shoe separates from the drum.
- If brake drum is difficult to remove, drive it out by installing an 8-mm bolt into bolt hole in brake
drum.
INSTALLATION
1. Set the outside diameter of brake shoes less than 0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.020 to 0.031 inch) in
comparison with the inside diameter of brake drum.
2. Match the holes on hub and drum and install drum on hub.
Page 5217
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
Condenser
REMOVAL
1. Using refrigerant recovery system, discharge refrigerant. 2. Disconnect ground cable from
battery.
3. Remove duct (A).
4. Disconnect high-pressure hose (A) and low- pressure hose (B) from condenser.
5. Remove radiator bracket (A).
6. Remove 2 bolts. While lifting condenser, pull it out through the space between the radiator and
the radiator panel.
Page 3136
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Page 1420
Timing Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
The automatic belt tension adjuster consists of a tensioner unit and a bracket. It maintains the
timing belt tension automatically at a specified level to enable the belt to transmit power correctly,
reduce operating noise and increase the life of the belt. The cylinder of the tensioner unit
incorporates an adjuster rod, wear ring, plunger spring, return spring, check ball and silicone oil.
The automatic belt tension adjuster gives tension to the belt by a levering action which is produced
by the push force of the tensioner unit's adjuster rod. It operates in the process detailed below.
^ Timing belt tensioning action When the belt becomes slack, the adjuster rod is pushed upward by
the return spring. The oil in the reservoir chamber, which is pressurized by the plunger spring to a
certain level, pushes open the check ball and flows into the oil pressure chamber to keep the
pressure constant. The thrust force F resulting from extension of the adjuster rod applies a
counterclockwise torque to the tensioner bracket, which causes the belt tension pulley at its end to
turn in the same direction. This applies tensioning pressure Pb to the timing belt.
^ Timing belt tension balancing action When the belt tension pulley is pushed against the timing
belt with pressure Pb, reaction force Tb of the timing belt generates the reaction force P at the point
on which the adjustor rod force is acting. This force P pushes the adjuster rod until it balances with
the sum of the thrust force F and the pressure of the oil in the oil pressure chamber. Therefore, the
timing belt tension is kept constant.
^ Overtension correction action If the tension of the timing belt increases excessively, the force P
becomes larger than the thrust force F and silicone oil is returned from the oil pressure chamber to
the reservoir chamber little by little until the force P balances again with the thrust force F. Thus the
timing belt tension is maintained at the specified level at all times.
Page 3050
Page 1235
Engine Mount: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove engine assembly. 2. Remove engine mounting from engine assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: Engine mounting: 34 Nm (3.5 kgf-m, 25.3
ft. lbs.)
C: INSPECTION
Make sure there are no cracks or other damage.

Service and Repair
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair
GLOVE BOX
REMOVAL
1. Remove stoppers.
2. Loosen screws to remove glove box.
INSTALLATION

Page 6359
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 4894
NOTE: Moving the adjusting bolt by one scale graduation changes camber by approximately 0°10'.
3. Tighten the two self-locking nuts.

CASTER
Page 3470
stay.
Page 5346
parts.
Page 2621
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(DOHC TURBO)-225C Engine
DISCLAIMER
Page 4588
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 5762
Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Heater Duct
Heater Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove heater unit.
2. Remove front seat.
3. Remove front side sill cover.
4. Pull off floor mat to remove heater duct.
INSTALLATION

Page 1625
replace the switch.
Page 4568
Parking Brake Cable: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Check the removed cable and replace if damaged, rusty, or malfunctioning. 1. Check for smooth
operation of the cable. 2. Check the inner cable for damage and rust. 3. Check the outer cable for
damage, bends, and cracks. 4. Check the boot for damage, cracks, and deterioration.
Page 3303
Page 3012

Page 887
Caution:
claim submission.
allowance.
Page 2488
C: REMOVAL

Page 698
2. Set ST into the center of the wheel, and then install the wheel alignment gauge. ST 927380002
ADAPTER
FRONT WHEEL TOE-IN
Inspection 1. Using a toe gauge, measure front wheel toe-in.
Toe-in: 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch)
equation:
Adjustment 1. Loosen the left and right side steering tie-rods lock nuts.
2. Turn the left and right tie rods equal amounts until the toe-in is at the specification.
Both the left and right tie-rods are right-hand threaded. To increase toe-in, turn both tie-rods
clockwise equal amounts (as viewed from the inside of the vehicle).
3. Tighten tie-rod lock nut.
CAUTION: Correct tie-rod boot, if it is twisted.
NOTE: Check the left and right wheel steering angle is within specifications.
STEERING ANGLE
Inspection
1. HEADLIGHT RELAY
is grounded.
Page 3190

Page 5826
2. Remove two hooks of switch panel to remove power window sub switch and disconnect
electrical connector.
3. Remove three screws and clips.
4. Remove seven clips of trim panel using clip remover to remove trim panel.
INSTALLATION

Page 2054
Page 1430
A: INSPECTION
hose.
manifold.
Page 2904
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3068
DISCLAIMER
Page 570
Page 169
Part 1
Page 2485
DISCLAIMER
Page 221

Page 3458
DISCLAIMER
Page 789
ADJUSTMENT
Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel Cylinder Cylinder Diameter 20.6 mm

Page 4897
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT

Page 2373
DISCLAIMER
Page 2606
Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair
VENT VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Remove fuel tank.
2. Move clips, and disconnect hoses from vent valve.
3. Remove nuts which install vent valve on fuel tank.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Replace rubber seat with a new one.

Page 503
Front Axle Shaft
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Axle Shaft
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Jack-up vehicle, support it with safety stands (rigid
racks), and remove front wheel cap and wheels. 3. Unlock axle nut. 4. Depress brake pedal and
remove axle nut using a socket wrench.
CAUTION: Be sure to loosen and retighten axle nut after removing wheel from vehicle. Failure to
5. Remove stabilizer link from transverse link. 6. Disconnect transverse link from housing.
7. Remove spring pin which secures transmission spindle to SFJ.
CAUTION: Use a new spring pin.
8. Remove front drive shaft assembly. If it is hard to remove, use ST1 and ST2.
ST1 926470000 AXLE SHAFT PULLER ST2 927140000 PLATE
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage oil seal lip and tone wheel when removing front drive shaft.
^ When front drive shaft is to be replaced, also replace inner oil seal.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Insert BJ into hub splines.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage inner oil seal lip and tone wheel.
Page 4362
1. Remove the boot ring.
2. Remove the piston boot. 3. Gradually supply compressed air via inlet of caliper body to force
piston out.
CAUTION: -
4. Remove piston seal from caliper body cylinder. 5. Remove lock pin sleeve and boot from caliper
body. 6. Remove guide pin boot.
ASSEMBLY
1. Clean caliper body interior using brake fluid. 2. Apply a coat of brake fluid to piston seal and fit
piston seal in groove on caliper body. 3. Apply a coat of brake fluid to the entire inner surface of
cylinder and outer surface of piston. 4. Insert piston into cylinder.
Grease:
Page 3007
Component Locations
Impact Sensor: Component Locations

Child Seat: Technical Service Bulletins Child Restraint - Top Tether Anchor Kit Installation
NUMBER: 17-04-99
DATE: 11/17/99

Subframe: Recalls Recall 03V153000: Frame Corrosion Issue
Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Page 255

Page 3144
Page 218

Page 6376
Outside Temperature Display: Testing and Inspection
Ambient Sensor
Measure resistance between ambient sensor terminals. If NG, replace the ambient sensor.
Page 1986
Page 5634
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 142
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
ABS
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 2940
Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications CAPACITY
CAPACITY
Refil Capacity Liters 1.2 Refil Capacity Pints 2.6

Page 1823
2. Install left-hand belt cover No. 2.
3. Install tensioner bracket.
4. Install left-hand camshaft sprockets by using ST.
lbs.)

Page 407

Page 492
Note:
Page 6875
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 5427
Step 1
Page 1746
Note:
Page 4187

Part 1
Page 6075

Page 6235
Page 3222
Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Page 3498

Component Locations
Roll Connector: Component Locations

Service and Repair
REMOVAL
temperature sensor.
INSTALLATION

Page 2829
Note:
PART INFORMATION
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2542

Locations
Page 3772
This damage may not be noticeable by a visual inspection but may result in future premature
failures of related components such as wheel bearings.
The following instructions should be followed carefully to ensure proper replacement of the right
front axle housing assembly.
Following the procedures found in section 5 of the 2001 Subaru Service Manual:
1) Remove the right front axle housing from the vehicle.

2) Remove the hub from the old housing.
3) Remove the old bearing inner race from the hub and discard.
4) Install the hub in the new pre-assembled replacement housing.
Note:
The replacement right front axle housing has been pre-assembled with wheel bearings, snap ring
and grease seals. The bearings have been pre-packed with the correct amount of grease and do
not require additional grease.
5) Install the new housing assembly using the new hardware provided. For proper assembly and
torque procedures, also refer to the Subaru publication, "Wheel Bearing Replacement Procedure:
A visual guide" (MSA5TT0001).
6) Check the vehicle's suspension by performing a four-wheel alignment. Adjust the suspension as
necessary.
RENTAL CAR
requires right front axle housing replacement provided:
1) The LOT number found on the original right front axle housing matches the affected one.
2) The part is ordered VOR next day air.
Inspection Only - Verification of the right front axle housing lot number. The affected lot number is
not present, indicating replacement is not necessary.
SERVICE TIP:
Page 2287
INSTALLATION


Page 2813
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:

Page 1535
Water Pump: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Check water pump bearing for smooth rotation. 2. Check water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3. Using a dial gauge, measure impeller runout in thrust direction while rotating the pulley.
"Thrust" runout limit: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch)
4. Check clearance between impeller and pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case: Standard 0.5 - 0.7 mm (0.020 - 0.028 inch) Limit 1.0
mm (0.039 inch)
5. After water pump installation, check pulley shaft for engine coolant leaks. If leaks are noted,
replace water pump assembly.
Page 1054
Fuse Locations
Page 4900
4. Measure distance "L" between center line of loci of the axles.
Thrust angle: Less than 30' when "L" is equal to or less than 23 mm (0.91 inch).
Adjustment 1. Make thrust angle adjustments by turning toe-in adjusting bolts of rear suspension
equally in the same direction. 2. When one rear wheel is adjusted in a toe-in direction, adjust the
other rear wheel equally in toe-out direction, in order to make thrust angle
adjustment.
3. When left and right adjusting bolts are turned incrementally by one graduation in the same
direction, the thrust angle will change approximately
10' ["L" is almost equal to 7.5 mm (0.295 inch)]. Thrust angle: 0° ± 30'
Page 6556

NOTE:
Page 721
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair
FUEL FILTER
REMOVAL
WARNING:
2. Disconnect fuel delivery hoses from fuel filter. 3. Remove filter from holder.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- If fuel hoses are damaged at the connecting portion, replace it with a new one.
- If clamps are badly damaged, replace with new ones.
2. Tighten hose clamp screws.

Page 392
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 4625
CAUTION: -
Page 4412
and pad inner shim. 3. Install pads on support. 4. Install caliper body on support.
NOTE: If it is difficult to push piston during pad replacement, loosen air bleeder to facilitate work.
Page 3293
3. Connect ATF cooler hose to pipe transmission side.
NOTE: ^
4. Connect ATF cooler hose to pipe of radiator side.
NOTE: ^
5. Install the under cover. 6. Install battery and washer tank. 7. Fill ATF.
NOTE: Make sure there are no ATF leaks in joints between the transmission, radiator, pipes, and
hoses.
2. 3.0L MODEL
Page 822
2. Remove automatic belt tension adjuster assembly.

Page 5460
parts.
Page 1983
Note:
Page 6468
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Mandatory Replacement Fluids
NUMBER: 01-151-00
DATE: 07/15/00
NOTE:
reference.
Department.
DISCLAIMER
Page 3491
2 of 2
Page 4652
Page 6626
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 6873
Page 2745
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES

Page 4648
Part 2 of 2

Fuel Level Sensor
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING:
INSTALLATION
WARNING:

Page 2174
Page 1164
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting Rod Bend Twist Limit 0.10 mm
Per 100 mm
Side Clearance Standard 0.070 - 0.330 mm
Limit 0.4 mm
Bearing - Oil Clearance Standard 0.020 - 0.046 mm
Limit 0.050 mm
Thickness at Center Portion Standard 1.486 - 1.498 mm
0.03 mm US 1.504 - 1.512 mm

0.05 mm US 1.514 - 1.522 mm
0.25 mm US 1.614 - 1.622 mm

Page 5869
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trunk Trim
TRUNK TRIM
REMOVAL
1. Remove clips, and then detach trunk rear trim (A). 2. Remove luggage hook (B) and clips, then
detach trunk side trim (C).
INSTALLATION

Page 2249
Page 615
INSPECTION
FRONT SUB SENSOR
SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR

Page 2459

Page 6316
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2358
Page 1538
11. Remove radiator main fan and sub fan assemblies.
12. Remove V-belts. 13. Remove timing belt.
14. Remove automatic belt tension adjuster.
16. Remove left-hand camshaft sprocket by using ST.

Page 1280
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 3702
C: INSPECTION
with new one.

Page 3390
Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Specifications
The Subaru transmission incorporates the transfer case within the unit and lubricates from a
common sump. For the fluid specification refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle or Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle specifications
Locations
Lamp Control Module: Locations
Connector Location
Illumination Control Module - (B43)

Page 2726
13. Tighten bolt which holds rear shock absorber to rear suspension arm.
14. Install heat shield cover. 15. Install rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
NOTE: To facilitate the procedure, apply a coat of SUBARU CRC to matching area of rubber
cushions in advance.
1. Install left and right rubber cushions.
2. Install front rubber cushion and attach muffler assembly.

Page 4282
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
made.
Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Specifications
The Subaru transmission incorporates the transfer case within the unit and lubricates from a
common sump. For the fluid specification refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle or Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle specifications
Page 693
Page 4064
Page 3308
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection

Combination Switch (Wiper)
- Inspect the continuity between each connector terminal. If continuity is not as specified, replace
the switch.
- Intermittent operation inspection
1. Turn the wiper switch to INT. 2. Adjust the intermittent control switch to MAX.
Page 2342
Page 6602
Horn Switch
REMOVAL
module.
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5521
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2711
Evaporative Shut Valve: Service and Repair
SHUT VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Drain fuel from fuel tank. 2. Remove fuel filler pipe.
3. Disconnect evaporation hoses from shut valve.
INSTALLATION

Page 3812
8. Place alignment mark on trunnion and shaft.
9. Remove snap ring and trunnion.
10. Remove SFJ boot. 11. Place drive shaft in a vise between wooden blocks.
CAUTION: Do not place drive shaft directly in the vise; use wooden block.
12. Raise boot band claws by means of screwdriver and hammer.
13. Cut and remove the boot.
CAUTION: The boot must be replaced with a new one whenever it is removed.
14. Thus, disassembly of axle is completed, but BJ cannot be disassembled.
D: ASSEMBLY
Page 5326
Step 1 - 6
Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION


Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Identification
Date: 01/05/09
INTRODUCTION
sensor 3.
O2 sensor.
Page 3795
12. Remove transverse link ball joint from housing. 13. Remove SFJ from transmission spindle.
14. Remove front drive shaft assembly from hub.
If it is hard to remove, use STs. ST1 926470000 AXLE SHAFT PULLER ST2 927140000 PLATE
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage oil seal lip and tone wheel when removing front drive shaft.
^ When replacing front drive shaft, also replace inner oil seal.
15. After scribing an alignment mark on camber adjusting bolt head, remove bolts which connect
housing and strut, and disconnect housing from strut.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install transverse link ball joint to housing.
2. While aligning alignment mark on camber adjusting bolt head, connect housing and strut.
3. Install ABS sensor on housing.
4. Install ABS sensor harness on strut. 5. Install disc rotor on hub. 6. Install disc brake caliper on
housing.
Tightening torque: 78 Nm (8 kgf-m, 57.9 ft. lbs.)
7. Install front drive shaft. 8. Connect stabilizer link.

Page 1343
Brake Hose
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Brake Hose
INSPECTION
Ensure there are no cracks breakage, or damage on hoses. Check joints to; fluid leakage. If any
cracks, breakage, damage or leakage is found, repair or replace hose.
Page 3072
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 2746
AT VEHICLES
CAUTION: Always use new gasket.

Page 1630
Specifications
Valve Spring: Specifications
Valve Spring Free Length 54.30 mm
Squareness 2.5 deg, 2.4 mm
Tension Spring Height 214.8 - 246.2 N at 45.0 mm
526.6 - 581.6 N at 34.7 mm

Page 3121
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 662
15. Remove oil pan.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 5728
Page 6335
Page 3831
CAUTION:
bottom.

Page 5213
Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection
1. MAGNETIC CLUTCH CLEARANCE
1. Check the clearance of the entire circumference around the drive plate and pulley.
Standard: 0.45 ± 0.15 mm (0.0177 ± 0.0059 in)
2. MAGNETIC CLUTCH OPERATION
1. Disconnect the compressor connector.
2. Connect the No.3 terminal of the compressor connector from the battery to the positive (+) lead.
Ground the negative (-) lead to the body. 3. Make sure the magnet clutch engages.
If NG, replace the compressor.

Page 6553
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 5955
Spray time: 12 sec.
Page 1724
Page 5269

Page 4147
Service Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump Type Centrifugal Impeller Type
Discharge Performance I Discharge 20 L/min.
Discharge Performance II Discharge 100 L/min.

Discharge Performance III Discharge 200 L/min.
Impeller Diameter 76 mm
Number Of Impeller Vanes 8
Pump Pulley Diameter 60 mm
Clearance Between Impeller and Case Standard 0.5 - 0.7 mm
Limit 1.0 mm
Thrust Runout Of Impeller End 0.5 mm

Page 3188

Page 134

Page 2470

Page 3209
Wheels/Tires - Wheel Lock Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Wheel Lock Installation/Removal
NUMBER: 15-125-07 DATE: 08/29/07
APPLICABILITY: All Vehicles SUBJECT: Subaru Wheel Locks
Introduction
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide the proper procedure for removing and installing Subaru
wheel locks. Failure to follow this procedure can cause damage to the wheel locks and/or wheels.
1) Remove one lug nut from each wheel. If wheel studs are dirty, clean with a wire brush prior to
installing locks. Use extreme care to prevent damage to the wheel.
2) By hand, install one wheel lock on each wheel.
3) Using the special wheel lock key and a torque wrench, tighten each wheel lock to the proper lug
nut torque specification (refer to the applicable Subaru Service Manual).
NOTE:
For ease of installation and removal, the wheel lock should always be the last lug nut tightened on
each wheel and should always be the first one removed.
WARNING:
Use of an impact wrench may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock and key.
Warranty Information
Wheel locks and/or keys that are damaged due to improper installation and/or removal is not a
matter for warranty.
Disclaimer
Page 1492
DISCLAIMER
Page 4333
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 5116
INSPECTION
CAUTION:
ASSEMBLE
CAUTION:
ABS).
CAUTION:

Page 2401
REMOVAL
Page 5089
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service Precautions
CAUTION
operation.
^ Use SUBARU genuine grease etc. or the equivalent. Do not mix grease etc. with that of another
grade or from other manufacturers.
^ Apply grease onto sliding or revolution surfaces before installation.
^ Before installing O-rings or snap rings, apply sufficient amount of grease to avoid damage and
deformation.
^ Before disposing shock absorbers, be sure to bleed gas completely. Also, do not throw away in
fire.
Page 6871
second letter.
NOTE:
Battery Amps. and Capacity
Battery: Specifications Battery Amps. and Capacity
Electrical
Electrical
Page 1821
11. Remove radiator main fan and sub fan assemblies.
12. Remove V-belts. 13. Remove timing belt.
14. Remove automatic belt tension adjuster.
16. Remove left-hand camshaft sprocket by using ST.

Page 3154
B: INSTALLATION

Fluid Filter - A/T: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Replace the part if any defect is found from the inspection. Check for rust, hole, ATF leaks, and
other damage.
Page 6413
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 5595

Page 2155

Page 1263
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Set the vehicle on lift arms. 2. Remove front wheels.
4. Remove air intake duct and air cleaner case.
5. Disconnect connector from front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
6. Remove pitching stopper.

Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications FLUID
FLUID
Fluid Type The FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 Or 4 brake Fluid Must Be Used
Page 1603
DISCLAIMER
Page 4640
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 579
AT VEHICLES
Page 2348
Page 3183
Page 2928
Page 1431
Page 2263
Part 3
Page 849
INSPECTION
port.
Page 1127
A: INSPECTION
measurement.
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
propeller shaft.
Page 602
the engine rear.

Page 6467
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 6300
C/L-02
Page 2443
Note:
Page 4584
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 6743
Page 4190
A: REMOVAL
Except VTD model
VTD model
B: INSTALLATION
Page 6002
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Upper Inner Trim
UPPER INNER TRIM
REMOVAL
1. Remove front mole (A). 2. Remove front pillar upper trim (B). 3. Detach front seat belt shoulder
anchor, then remove center pillar upper trim (C).
INSTALLATION
NOTE: When installing center pillar upper trim and front pillar upper trim, be sure to set front mole
as shown in figure.
Page 2538
Page 1730
Radiator: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Remove radiator cap, top off radiator, and attach tester to radiator in place of cap. 2. Apply a
pressure of 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) to radiator to check if:
1) Engine coolant leaks at/around radiator. 2) Engine coolant leaks at/around hoses or
connections.
CAUTION: ^
Engine should be off.
^ Wipe engine coolant from check points in advance.
^ Be careful to prevent engine coolant from spurting out when removing tester.
^ Be careful also not to deform filler neck of radiator when installing or removing tester.
Page 2455
Page 5945
Page 5412

Page 1187
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Testing and Inspection
C INSPECTION
1. Make sure the V-belt is not worn or otherwise damaged. 2. Check the tension of the belt. Refer
to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories; Drive Belt; Testing and Inspection; Procedures.
Page 5799
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
Front Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove door trim. 2. Remove sealing cover. 3. Remove outer weatherstrip.
4. Remove inner stabilizer. 5. Remove outer mirror.
6. Remove gusset.
7. Operate the power window switch to move glass to the position shown in the figure, and then
remove the two nuts from service holes.
Page 317
INSTALLATION
Page 1869

Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 3506
Page 4611
NUMBER: 06-31-03 DATE: 07/15/03
INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE
Removal of ECU
NOTE:
Page 5044
Important:
solvent.

Note:
Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Steering - Power Steering Groan/Vibration
NUMBER: 04-11-04 DATE: 01/15/04
INTRODUCTION
claim information.
Page 3354
Disconnect the wire connectors from each solenoid.
Note:
If the oil temperature sensor is integrated into the wire harness, disconnect the oil temperature
sensor from the clip on the valve body.
Applicable transmission numbers for different types of oil temperature sensor as shown.
Note:
Try the following procedure if it is difficult to remove the transfer solenoid connector.
Caution:
- Do not force wire connectors if removal is difficult.
- Do not cut wiring.
a) Hold the connector with tweezers.
b) Tilt the connector and pull it out of the hole.
If the transfer solenoid connector still can not be removed from the case, it will be necessary to
leave the harness attached during valve body removal. This method should only be used as a last
resort and otherwise, is not recommended.
Note:
Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
Page 1590
Page 4301
Service and Repair
Mud Flap: Service and Repair
MUD GUARD
REMOVAL
1. Jack-up the vehicle. 2. Loosen screws and clips to remove mud guard.
INSTALLATION
Insert hook into body, and tighten it with screw and clip.
Page 1312
14. Connect accelerator cable (A). 15. Connect cruise control cable (B). (With cruise control
models)
16. Install air intake duct and air cleaner assembly .
17. Connect connector to fuel pump relay.

Page 1483

Page 4226
stay.
Page 2974
Page 4846
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 3415
Page 3430
Part 2
Page 3041

Part 1
Page 5037
Specifications

Page 4601
2. Connect operating rod to brake pedal with clevis pin and snap pin.
3. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. 4. Mount master cylinder onto brake booster. 5.
Connect brake pipes to master cylinder. 6. Connect electric connector for brake fluid level indicator.
7. Adjust operating rod of brake booster.
Standard: L 145.3 mm (5.72 inch)
If it is not in specified value, adjust it by adjusting brake booster operating rod.
8. Measure the clearance between threaded end of stop light switch and stopper. If it is not in
specified value, adjust it by adjusting position of stop
light switch.
Page 6270

Without VDC
Page 4244
shown.
Disclaimer
Page 3849
10. Remove propeller shaft from transmission.
CAUTION: Be sure not to damage oil seals and the frictional surface of sleeve yoke.
NOTE: ^
Be sure to use an empty oil can to catch oil flowing out when removing propeller shaft.
^ Be sure to plug the opening in transmission after removal of propeller shaft.
11. Install the extension cap to transmission.
NOTE: If extension cap is not available, place vinyl bag over opening and fasten with string to
prevent gear oil or ATF from leaking.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Insert sleeve yoke into transmission and attach center bearing to body.
2. Align matching marks and connect flange yoke and rear differential.
3. Install heat shield cover. 4. Install center exhaust pipes. 5. Install rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
Page 1298
AT Vehicles
Page 2168

Page 4183
Page 5984
parts.
Page 4821
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 4391
Disclaimer
Page 1006
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Oil Type ...............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. ZXL200PG
Page 416
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
ground terminal.
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Clutch Disc: Customer Interest M/T - Cold Clutch Judder
NUMBER:03-51-02R DATE: 05/01/03
APPLICABILITY:
Vehicles

INTRODUCTION

Page 4238
Removal of ECU
NOTE:

assembly
CAUTION:
figure 2.
NOTE:

Page 2526
AT VEHICLES
Page 3250
Page 2541
Page 1477

Page 5322
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 5399
INSPECTION

Page 2173
Spark Plug
Plug Gap 0.039-0.043 in (1.0-1.1 mm)

Page 3993

Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 917
3.0 Model
1. Connect pipe D or pressure hose to oil tank.
2. Connect pipe C or return hose to oil pump.
CAUTION: Use a new gasket.
3. Tighten bolt A.
2. Temporarily connect pipes C and D to pipes (on the gearbox side). 3. Temporarily install clamp
E on pipes C and D.
CAUTION: Ensure that the letter "8" on each clamp are diagonally opposite each other as shown in
figure.
4. Tighten clamp E firmly.
5. Tighten joint nut.

Page 1663
Page 4946
3. Measure working pressure of control valve by turning wheel from stop to stop.
ST1 925711000 PRESSURE GAUGE ST2 34099AC020 ADAPTER HOSE B ST3 34099AC010
ADAPTER HOSE A Service limit: 9,611 - 10,199 kPa (98 - 104 kgf-cm2, 1,394 - 1,479 psi)
4. If it is within the specified value, measure steering effort. If it is not within specified value, replace
control valve itself or control valve and
pinion as a single unit with new ones.

Page 2383
Part 2
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 6311
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
equipped).
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Main Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove switch panel (a) while disconnecting connector.
2. Remove main switch by pushing it outward.
INSTALLATION

Rear Stabilizer Link
Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Link
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up the vehicle and remove rear wheel. 2. Remove bearing unit.
3. Remove bolt securing parking brake cable clamp to rear arm.
4. Remove bolt securing brake hose to rear arm.
5. Remove bolt securing ABS sensor to rear arm. 6. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake
pipe from wheel cylinder. (Drum brake model only)
CAUTION: Cover open end of wheel cylinder and pipe to prevent entry of foreign particles.
7. Suspend the back plate from sub frame.

Page 3731
Pressure Plate: Specifications SEQUENCE
SEQUENCE
Tighten Evenly in a Criss Cross Pattern

Page 2053
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 5102
8. Remove nut securing stabilizer link to rear arm.
9. Remove bolt securing shock absorber to rear arm.
11. Remove bolt securing rear arm to body.
12. Loosen nut securing front rink to rear arm.

Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Disconnection and Connection
OPERATION
DRIVER'S AIRBAG, SIDE AIRBAG AND PRETENSIONER
How to disconnect:
1. Push lock arm (A).
2. With lock arm (A) pushed in, move slide lock (B) in the direction of the arrow. 3. With slide lock
(B) pulled, remove lock arm (A) to its original position, and then pull in the direction of the arrow
and separate the connector.
How to connect:
CAUTION: Be sure to insert the connector in until it locks. Then pull on it gently to make sure that it
is locked.
Page 946
If a coolant concentration of 50% is needed, drain all the coolant and refill with the undiluted
solution only.
To prevent cooling system leaks, always add Genuine Subaru cooling system Conditioner (Part
No. SOA635071) whenever the coolant is replaced.
The content of this article/image reflects the changes called out by TSB - 18-74-04-mu.
Page 3389
OPERATION
How to disconnect:
How to connect:
CAUTION:
Page 1474

Page 1091
balanced
PROCEDURE
reduced.
^ VIN
^ Mileage
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
1. HEADLIGHT RELAY
is grounded.
Front
REMOVAL
CAUTION: -
INSTALLATION

Page 6676
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
ground terminal.
Page 841
Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. 2.5L MODEL
NOTE: The ATF filter is maintenance free. Replace only when there are obvious dents or damage
to the filter or if there is oil leakage from the joining area to the transmission.
2. 3.0L MODEL ^
ATF Filter

Page 5421
How to connect:
CAUTION:
Page 4850
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 4060
Page 4620
performs
"neutral".
Information
Check Information
NUMBER: 11-62-00
DATE: 05/08/00
Page 2593
1. Install front catalytic converter to front exhaust pipe.
2. Install front exhaust pipe and center exhaust pipe. And temporarily tighten bolt which installs
center exhaust pipe to hanger bracket.
4. Install center exhaust pipe to rear exhaust pipe.

Page 5068
Page 5712
second letter.
NOTE:
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
ground terminal.
C: INSPECTION
position switch.
Page 362
REMOVAL
module.
command switch.
INSTALLATION

Page 1255
Oil Filter: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oil Filter By-Pass Valve Opening Pressure 157 kPa

Page 358
command switch.
Page 4967
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 4794
Page 3536
Page 2800

Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid
Rear Capacity ......................................................................................................................................

.......................................................... 0.8L (1.7 Pints)
Page 1147
ST 499427000 TORX PLUS Tightening torque: 18 ± 2 Nm (1.8 ± 0.2 kg-m, 13.0 ± 1.4 ft. lbs.)
(6) Tighten bolts (o) through (v) in alphabetical sequence.
Tightening torque: 10 ± 2 mm (1.0 ± 0.2 kg-m, 7.2 ± 1.4 ft. lbs.)
(7) Tighten bolts (o) through (p) in alphabetical sequence.
(8) Apply a coat of grease to oil seal lips and install oil seal (A) on camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
CAUTION: Use a new oil seal.
ST1 499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE ST2 499587500 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(9) Install plug using ST.
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(10).RELATED PARTS
Install timing belt, camshaft sprockets and related parts.

Page 3104
INSTRUCTIONS FOR OBTAINING THE CALIBRATION IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (CID) FROM
THE ECM
This procedure should only be followed when ECM reprogramming is not possible and you must
contact Subaru Tech Line.
STATE EMISSION TESTING ADVISORY
After ECM reprogramming, the OBD system's readiness code monitors will set to "incomplete".
Normally, the vehicle needs to be driven under a variety of conditions before the readiness code
monitors will indicate "complete". (See the November 1999 Subaru Technical Support T.I.P.S. and
the State I/M Program Advisory Bulletin, number 11-68-02, dated 3/5/02 for details.)
Page 5918
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Page 3058
Page 2446
Page 803
A: INSPECTION
cylinders;

Page 5023
Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Rear
REMOVAL
1. Jack-up the rear part of the vehicle, support it with safety stands (rigid racks).
2. Remove bolts which secure stabilizer link to rear arm.
3. Remove bolts which secure stabilizer to sub frame.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque:
Stabilizer link to rear arm 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-cm, 32.5 ft. lbs.) Clamp to sub frame 40 Nm (4.1 kgf-cm,
30 ft. lbs.)
INSPECTION
1. Check bushing for cracks, fatigue or damage. 2. Check stabilizer links for deformities, cracks, or
damage, and bushing for protrusions from the hole of stabilizer link.
Page 5594

Page 1140
Camshaft: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. RELATED PARTS
Remove timing belt, camshaft sprockets and valve rocker assembly.
2. CAMSHAFT (LH)
a. Remove camshaft position sensor.
(1) Remove bolts (a) through (b) in alphabetical sequence.
(2) Equally loosen bolts (c) through (j) all the way in alphabetical sequence.
(3) Remove bolts (k) through (p) in alphabetical sequence using ST. ST 499497000 TORX PLUS
(4) Remove camshaft cap.
a) Remove camshaft (LH). b) Remove oil seal. c) Remove plug from rear side of camshaft (LH).
CAUTION:
Fluid Filter - A/T: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Replace the part if any defect is found from the inspection. Check for rust, hole, ATF leaks, and
other damage.
Page 6514

Page 4831

Page 1350
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 1197
Piston Pin: Service and Repair
Page 6092
owner notification is scheduled for mailing in mid-March, 2001.
bulletin.
Specifications
CLEARANCE
Intake 0.20 +/- 0.02 mm
Exhaust 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm

Page 6223

Page 387
Page 4197
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION

Page 582
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
AT VEHICLES

Page 3643
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove air cleaner case and air intake duct.
2. Remove clutch hose from operating cylinder.
CAUTION: Cover hose joint to prevent clutch fluid from flowing out.
3. Remove operating cylinder from transmission.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE: Before installing operating cylinder, apply grease (SUNLIGHT 2: P/N 003602010) to contact
point of release lever and operating cylinder.
2. After bleeding air from operating cylinder, ensure that clutch operates properly.
Page 1472

Page 3708
Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission assembly from vehicle body. 2. Remove the two clips from clutch release
lever and remove release bearing.
CAUTION: Be careful not to deform clips.
3. Remove release lever seal.
4. Remove release lever retainer spring from release lever pivot with a screwdriver by accessing it
through clutch housing release lever hole. Then
remove release lever.
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Before or during assembling, lubricate the following points with a light coat of grease. ^
Contact surface of lever and pivot
^ Contact surface of lever and bearing
^ Transmission main shaft spline (Use grease containing molybdenum disulphide.)
^ Contact surface of lever and operating cylinder
1. While pushing release lever to pivot and twisting it to both sides, fit retainer spring onto the
constricted portion of pivot.
Page 5497
OUTER BELT CENTER
CAUTION:
- During installation, make sure that seat belts are not twisted.
- After installation, make sure that seat belts can be smoothly extended and wound.
INNER BELT
CAUTION: During installation, make sure that seat belts are not twisted.
Page 1832
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection Rear Catalytic Converter
INSPECTION
holes or rusting.
Canister Purge Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Make sure hoses are not cracked or loose.

Page 1677
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Tightening torque: 4.4 Nm (0.45 kgf-m, 3.3 ft. lbs.)

Page 6557
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 555
DISCLAIMER
NUMBER: 06-31-03R DATE: 12/08/04
INTRODUCTION
REPAIR PROCEDURE

Page 2672
CAUTION: Replace O-rings and insulators with new ones.
LH SIDE
Page 1269
13. Install pitching stopper.
Tightening torque: T1: 49 Nm (5.0 kgf-m, 36.2 ft. lbs.) T2: 57 Nm (5.8 kgf-m, 42 ft. lbs.)
14. Install radiator upper brackets.
15. Install air intake duct. 16. Install front wheels.
17. Connect battery Ground cable. 18. Fill engine oil.

Sunroof Switch

Page 6063
Sunroof Switch
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
REMOVAL
temperature sensor.
INSTALLATION

Page 1102
TOOL REQUIRED
- Or Equivalent
DISASSEMBLE
CAUTION:
Page 1348
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 3255
DISCLAIMER
Locations
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1169
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
and Repair. 5. Remove camshaft sprocket. Refer to Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods; Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket; Service and Repair.
MT Vehicles
AT Vehicles
6. Remove crankshaft sprocket.
B: INSTALLATION
MT Vehicles
AT Vehicles
Page 1299
Intake Manifold: Testing and Inspection
A: INSPECTION
1. Warm-up the engine. 2. Disconnect the brake vacuum hose and install the vacuum gauge to the
hose fitting on the manifold.
3. Keep the engine at the idle speed and read the vacuum gauge indication.
By observing the gauge needle movement, the internal condition of the engine can be diagnosed
as described.
Vacuum pressure (at idling, A/C "OFF"): Less than -60.0 kPa (-450 mm Hg, -17.72 inch Hg)
Page 2024
Page 1150
Camshaft: Tools and Equipment Camshaft Alignment Bar AST (SU 250)
Subaru 2.5L Cam Alignment Bar
AST tool# SU 250

Page 4796
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 1408
2. Using white paint, put alignment and/or arrow marks on timing belts in relation to the crank
sprocket and cam sprockets.
Specified data:
Z1: 46.8 tooth length Z2: 43.7 tooth
5. Remove timing belt.
Belt Idler and Automatic Belt Tension Adjuster Assembly

Page 688
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Loosen screw to remove a steering column cover. 2. Disconnect connectors from combination
switches.
3. Loosen screw to remove combination switch.
INSTALLATION

Page 6590
4. Push to remove spring retainer (A) (low beam) or turn bulb assembly (B) counterclockwise (high
beam) , and then detach headlight bulb.
INSTALLATION

Page 5878
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Rear Gate Latch
Rear Gate Latch Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear gate lower trim. 2. Remove the rear gate key cylinder rod. 3. Remove the nut
holding the rear gate outer handle. Remove the stay.
4. Remove the three bolts. 5. Remove the two connectors and pull out the latch.
INSTALLATION

SERVICE TIP:
Page 1890

Page 5664
Speaker: Service and Repair Rear Speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door trim.
2. Remove rear speaker mounting screws. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove rear
speaker.
INSTALLATION

Page 5925
sub-frame.
Important:
process.
Page 5695
Page 232
Page 5347

Page 1135
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Page 2627
Operation
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Operation
NOTE: Before making repairs, conduct the oil return operation to return the compressor oil in
circulation with the refrigerant to the compressor.
1. Increase engine rpm to 1,500. 2. Turn ON the A/C switch. 3. Turn the temperature control switch
to MAX COOL. 4. Put in RECIRC position. 5. Turn the blower control switch to HI. 6. Leave in this
condition for 10 minutes.
Page 649
Page 3276
For the replacement procedures of the ATF filter, refer to "AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND
DIFFERENTIAL".
SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL

RH SIDE

Page 1985
Page 2923
Page 2705
1. Set new retainer (B) to connector (A). 2. Push pipe into connector completely.
NOTE: At this time, two clicking sounds are heard.
CAUTION: -
Pull the connector to ensure it is connected securely.
- Ensure the two retainer pawls are engaged in their mating positions in the connector.
- Be sure to inspect hoses and their connections for any leakage of fuel.
2. Connect fuel delivery hose to pipe with an overlap of 20 to 25 mm (0.79 to 0.98 in).
Type A: When fitting length is specified. Type B: When fitting length is not specified.
Page 5076
Spray time: 12 sec.
Spray time: 8 sec.
Spray time: 8 sec.
minimum of 2 mil.
Spray time : 4 min.
Spray time : 2 min.

Page 146
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 4220
Page 2254
Page 406
Page 3051
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION

Page 2822
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 1949
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Specifications
Identification
Date: 01/05/09
INTRODUCTION
sensor 3.
O2 sensor.
Page 3895
Page 3437
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1990
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant capacity 1.43lbs. (US)

Page 2482
Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair
DISPOSAL
1. GAS STAY
1. Cover with a vinyl case before drilling holes.

CAUTION: Prevent the vinyl case from being caught by drill cutting edge
2. Lift body side slightly with piston rods fully extended, and secure body side on vise stand. Drill a
hole in 2 to 3 mm (0.08 to 0.12 in) diameter
at a point 10 to 200 mm (0.39 to 7.87 in) from door side, and bleed gas stay completely.
CAUTION: Gas is colorless, odorless, and harmless. However, gas pressure may spray cutting
powder or oil. Be sure to wear dust-resistant goggles.
Page 3569
Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5505
Page 1390
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
and Repair.
5. Remove camshaft sprocket No.1 and No. 2. To lock camshaft, use ST.

B: INSTALLATION
1. Install camshaft sprocket No. 1 and No. 2. To lock camshaft, use ST.
lbs.)
CAUTION: Do not confuse left and right side camshaft sprockets during installation. The camshaft
sprocket No. 2 is identified by a projection used to monitor camshaft position sensor.
2. Install timing belt assembly. 3. Install belt cover. 4. Install crankshaft pulley. 5. Install V-belt.
Page 5796
Front Door Window Glass: Adjustments
Front Door Glass
NOTE: Before adjustment, ensure that all adjusting bolts of stabilizer, upper stopper, and sash are
loose and door glass is raised so that it is in contact with weatherstrip.
1. Temporarily tighten one adjusting bolt on one side of rear sash at the midpoint of slotted hole in
the inner panel. 2. Temporarily tighten regulator B-channel in a position slightly lower than midpoint
of slotted hole.
3. Lower door glass 10 to 15 mm (0.39 to 0.59 in) from fully closed position. While applying
outward pressure of 49.0 ± 4.9 N (5.0 ±0.5 kg, 11.0 ±
1.1 lb) (F) to upper edge of glass above midpoint of two outer stabilizers, press inner stabilizer until
it just touches the glass, then secure it.
4. For adjustment of clearance between front and rear glasses, loosen nuts (A) and (B), and move
glass sash back and forth until clearance becomes
the value shown.
5. For adjustment of upper and lower ends of center pillar, loosen adjusting nut (A) of B-channel
(B).
Page 5337
FRONT SUB SENSOR
SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR
MAIN HARNESS
ROLL CONNECTOR
- Combination switch or steering roll connector is cracked or deformed.

Page 1902
Part 2
A/C - Blower Motor Resistor Repairs
Blower Motor Resistor: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Resistor Repairs
TITLE: Blower Motor Resistor Repairs
SERVICE TIP:
If you get a vehicle in with a repeat blower motor resistor complaint and you have checked the
blower motor for excessive draw, we suggest you replace the blower motor at the same time you
install a new resistor.
Subaru has received some calls where vehicles have come back after having the blower motor
resistor replaced. Changing out the blower motor and resistor at the same time has repaired the
vast majority of these vehicles.
Page 3060
Page 1631

Page 4899
CAUTION: ^
When loosening or tightening adjusting bolt, hold bolt head and turn self-locking nut.
2. Turn adjusting bolt head until toe-in is at the specification.
NOTE: When left and right wheels are adjusted for toe-in at the same time, the movement of one
scale graduation changes toe-in by approximately 3 mm (0.12 inch).
3. Tighten self-locking nut.
Tightening torque: 120 Mm (12.2 kgf-cm, 88 ft. lbs.)

THRUST ANGLE
Inspection 1. Position vehicle on a level surface. 2. Move vehicle 3 to 4 meters directly forward. 3.
Determine locus of both front and rear axles.
Recall 02V282000: A/T Park Rod Assembly Replacement
Parking Pawl: Recalls Recall 02V282000: A/T Park Rod Assembly Replacement
DEFECT: Certain passenger and sport utility vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions were
produced with an improperly manufactured transmission parking rod. When the transmission
selector lever is placed in the "P" (PARK) position, the transmission park mechanism, which is
intended to hold the vehicle, may not engage. The vehicle could then move/roll without prior
warning, increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the automatic transmission parking rod assembly. The manufacturer
has reported that owner notification is expected to begin during January 2003. An interim owner
notification will be sent during November 2002. Owners should contact Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Wiper Blade Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection
Wiper Deicer Switch
Move wiper deicer switch to each position and check continuity between terminals. If NG, replace
the switch.
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Front Catalytic Converter
FRONT CATALYTIC CONVERTER
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. 4. Lift-up the vehicle. 5. Remove under cover.
6. Disconnect connector from rear oxygen sensor connector. 7. Separate center exhaust pipe from
rear exhaust pipe.
Page 5539
Page 5782
Front Door Latch: Testing and Inspection
Front/Rear Door Latch Assembly
1. Make sure the rod is not deformed. 2. Make sure the lever and rod work smoothly. 3. Make sure
the child safety lock on the rear doors works properly.
switch.
Page 272
Except VTD model
VTD model
Page 3620
Page 4589
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 916
^ Be careful to keep pipe connections free from foreign matter.
6. Remove bolt A.
2.5 Model Disconnect pipe C from oil pump. Disconnect pipe D from return hose.
CAUTION: ^
clean cloth.
3.0 Model Disconnect pressure hose from oil pump. Disconnect return hose from return hose.
CAUTION: ^
clean cloth.
INSTALLATION
1. Tighten bolt A.
CAUTION: Visually check that hose between tank and pipe D is free from bending or twisting.
2.5 Model
Page 5740
Almost restorable.
- Deep damage caused by scratching fences, etc. A dent cannot be repaired but a whitened or
swelled part can be removed.
- Deep damage such as a break or hole that requires filling Much of the peripheral grained surface
must be sacrificed for repair, and the degree of restoration is not really worth the expense. (The
surface, however, will become almost flush with adjacent areas.) Recommended repair kit: PP Part
Repair Kit (NRM)
Page 1805
DISCLAIMER
Locations
Relay And Fuse

Page 3901
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Specified type ......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................... SAE 75W - 90

Page 6549
Diagrams
Rear Door Glass

ABS
Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering
Groan/Vibration
NUMBER: 04-11-04 DATE: 01/15/04

INTRODUCTION
claim information.
Page 1994
Page 1617

Page 3497
Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
INSPECTION
1. Check power steering fluid for deterioration or contamination. If the fluid is highly deteriorated or
contaminated, drain it and refill with new fluid. 2. Check joints and units for oil leakage. If any oil
leaks are found, repair or replace the applicable part. 3. Inspect fluid level on flat and level surface
with engine "OFF" by indicator of reservoir tank.
If the level is at lower point or below, add fluid to keep the level in the specified range of the
indicator. If at upper point or above, drain fluid by using a syringe or the like.
1. Check at temperature 20°C (68°F) on reservoir surface of oil pump; read the fluid level on the
"COLD" side. 2. Check at temperature 80°C (176°F) on reservoir surface of oil pump; read the fluid
level on the "HOT" side.
INSTALLATION
1. Set ST on top of reservoir tank and fill it about half way with the specified fluid.
ST 34199AE040 OIL CHARGE
2. Continue to turn steering wheel slowly from lock to lock until bubbles stop appearing in the tank
while keeping the fluid at that level. 3. In case air is absorbed to deliver bubbles into piping
because the fluid level is lower, leave it about half an hour and then do the step 2. all over
again.
4. Start, and idle the engine. 5. Continue to turn steering wheel slowly from lock to lock again until
bubbles stop appearing in the tank while keeping the fluid at that level.
It is normal that bubbles stop appearing after three times turning of steering wheel.
6. In case bubbles do not stop appearing in the tank, leave it about half an hour and then do the
step 5 all over again. 7. Stop the engine, and take out safety stands after jacking up vehicle again.
Then lower the vehicle, and idle the engine. 8. Continue to turn steering wheel from lock to lock
until bubbles stop appearing and change of the fluid level is within 3 mm (0.12 inch). 9. In case the
following happens, leave it about half an hour and then do step 8 again.
1. The fluid level changes over 3 mm (0.12 inch). 2. Bubbles remain on the upper surface of the
fluid. 3. Grinding noise is generated from oil pump.
10. Check the fluid leakage at flare nuts after turning steering wheel from lock to lock with engine
running.
CAUTION: ^
Before checking, wipe off any fluid on flare nuts and piping.
Page 5067
Wiper Blade Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection
Wiper Deicer Switch
Move wiper deicer switch to each position and check continuity between terminals. If NG, replace
the switch.
Page 3830
INSPECTION
CAUTION:
ASSEMBLE
CAUTION:
ABS).
CAUTION:

Page 5532
Figure 3).
Page 4501
Brake Fluid: Service Precautions
ON VEHICLE SERVICE
WARNING: -
Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions;
- Eye contact - rinse thoroughly with water.
- Skin contact - wash with soap and water.
- If ingested - consult a physician immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is extremely damaging to paint. If fluid should accidentally touch painted
surface, immediately wipe fluid from paint and clean painted surface.
Page 1316
14. Remove engine harness from intake manifold. 15. Remove purge control solenoid valve.
16. Remove bolt which installs injector pipe or intake manifold as shown in figure.
17. Remove bolt which installs injector pipe on intake manifold.
18. Remove two bolts which hold fuel pipes on the left side of intake manifold.
Carrier Pinion Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 3220
Page 5438

Page 5458
greatly lowered.
Service and Repair
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair
Marker Lamp Bulb
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1307
20. Remove intake manifold.
INSTALLATION
1. Install intake manifold onto cylinder heads.
CAUTION: Always use new gaskets.
2. Connect fuel hoses.
3. Connect connector to camshaft position sensor.

Page 4191
Except VTD model
VTD model
Specifications
Alternator: Specifications Alternator
Alternator
Alternator Specs Rated Output Test Output
90 amps 65 amps at 2500 rpm

Page 3223

Page 4468
Note:
Page 2936
Page 4321
2. Adjustment of clutch pedal refer to procedure below, under Assembly. 3. Inspect after pedal
installation refer to Testing and Inspection.
DISASSEMBLY
1. MT MODEL 1. Remove the brake switch. 2. Remove the clutch pedal.
3. Remove the clutch master cylinder bracket.
4. Remove bush, spring and stopper. 5. Remove the brake pedal pad.
2. AT MODEL 1. Remove the brake switch.
2. Unbolt, and then remove the brake pedal.

NUMBER: WWM-96
DATE: July 2003
INTRODUCTION
AFFECTED VEHICLES
NOTE:
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Service and Repair
Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair
TRAILER HITCH
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up the vehicle. 2. Remove rubber cushion from body.
NOTE: If rubber cushion is hard to remove, apply SUBARU CRC.
SUBARU CRC (Part No. 004301003 )
3. Remove strap (a). 4. Remove bolts. Remove trailer hitch while lowering muffler.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. For installation method of bolt, see the figure.
Page 3331
Disconnect the wire connectors from each solenoid.
Note:
If the oil temperature sensor is integrated into the wire harness, disconnect the oil temperature
sensor from the clip on the valve body.
Applicable transmission numbers for different types of oil temperature sensor as shown.
Note:
Try the following procedure if it is difficult to remove the transfer solenoid connector.
Caution:
- Do not force wire connectors if removal is difficult.
- Do not cut wiring.
a) Hold the connector with tweezers.
b) Tilt the connector and pull it out of the hole.
If the transfer solenoid connector still can not be removed from the case, it will be necessary to
leave the harness attached during valve body removal. This method should only be used as a last
resort and otherwise, is not recommended.
Note:
Page 5912
bulletin.
Bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Special Tools
Note:
Note:
Page 3310
Page 1991
Page 494
Page 2592
CAUTION: Be careful, exhaust pipe is hot.
9. Remove front exhaust pipe and center exhaust pipe from hanger bracket.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pull down front exhaust pipe and center exhaust pipe.
10. Separate front catalytic converter from front exhaust pipe.
procedure for removing rear catalytic converter is the same as the description above.
INSTALLATION

Page 1497
Page 6748
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Air Vent Grille
Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Air Vent Grille
Air Vent Grille
REMOVAL
1. AIR VENT GRILLE DRIVER SIDE
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Set tilt steering to the lowest position. 3. Disconnect
each electrical connector to remove front cover (A) and switch panel (B). 4. Loosen screw (C) to
remove center panel (D).
5. Remove meter visor (E).
6. Loosen screws to remove grille.
2. AIR VENT GRILLE PASSENGER SIDE

ABS
Page 1628

Page 895
Caution:
claim submission.
allowance.
Page 2664
6. Remove spark plug cords from spark plugs (#1 and #3 cylinders).
7. Remove power steering pump and tank from brackets.
1. Remove V-belt covers.
2. Loosen lock bolt and slider bolt, and remove power steering pump drive V-belt.
3. Remove bolts which hold power steering pipes onto intake manifold protector.
Service Precautions
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service Precautions
Disposal of Pretensioner
CAUTION:
- Do not discard undeployed pretensioners, because they may cause serious personal injury when
- Deployment of the airbag should be done on a flat place free from any possible danger. Avoid
deploying outdoors during rainy or windy weather.
- Do not drop or damage pretensioner.
- Because deploying the airbag module causes a high-explosive noise, be sure to warn people in
the area, and do not allow anyone within a 5-meter (16 ft) radius of the disposal site.
- Some smoke will be emitted after deployment of the airbag module. Therefore, it must be
deployed in a well-ventilated area with no smoke alarms nearby.
- Wear gloves, goggles, and earplugs during this operation. Wash your hands afterwards.
- After deployment, the pretensioner is especially hot. Leave it unattended for 40 minutes, and then
discard it.
- Wrap the deployed the pretensioner in an airtight vinyl bag, and then discard it.
Page 2347

Service and Repair
Rear Shelf: Service and Repair
REAR SHELF TRIM
REMOVAL
1. Remove high-mounted stop light.
2. Remove rear seat backrest. 3. Remove inner seat belt RH, then disconnect inner seat belt RH
(A) and outer seat belt center (B).
4. Detach rear shelf trim through each rear outer seat belt from slits (A) and hole (B) of rear shelf
trim.
INSTALLATION

Page 1007
Refrigerant Oil: Service Precautions
2. COMPRESSOR OIL
- HFC-134a compressor oil has no compatibility with that for R12 system.
- Use only the manufacturer-authorized compressor oil for the HFC-134a system; only use
ZXL200PG.
- Do not mix multiple compressor oils. If HFC-12 compressor oil is used in a HFC-134a A/C
system, the compressor may become stuck due to poor lubrication, or the refrigerant may leak due
to swelling of rubber parts. On the other hand, if HFC-134a compressor oil is used in a HFC-12 A/C
system, the durability of the A/C system will be lowered.
- HFC-134a compressor oil is very hygroscopic. When replacing or installing/removing A/C parts,
immediately isolate the oil from the atmosphere using a plug or tape. In order to avoid moisture,
store the oil in a container with its cap tightly closed.
Page 2666
9. Disconnect connector from fuel injector.
10. Remove bolt which holds injector pipe to intake manifold.
11. Remove bolt which install injector pipe to intake manifold.
12. Remove fuel injector from intake manifold.

Page 4409
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear
INSPECTION
Check pad thickness (including back metal).
CAUTION: -
- Replace pad if there is oil or grease on it.

Page 3960
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble locking wire.
2. Remove rod from gear shift lever.
3. Remove snap ring from bush D, then disconnect stay. 4. Remove boot from gear shift lever.
5. Remove bush and cushion rubber from stay.

Specifications

NUMBER: 06-31-03R DATE: 12/08/04
INTRODUCTION
REPAIR PROCEDURE

Page 3328
notification letter. They should also arrange to make the required correction according to the
instructions in the service procedure section of this bulletin.
Bulletin.
being placed in service may be subject to civil penalties of up to $5,000 per violation (i.e. for each
vehicle), as provided in 49 USC Section 30165(a) of the Safety Act, and will also be in breach of
the Subaru Dealer Agreement.
PARTS INFORMATION
Each dealer will automatically be sent a quantity of replacement parts (except Dexron III ATF)
equal to 60% of the number of affected vehicles allocated to the dealer of record.
Replacement Transmissions
Affected vehicles that have had a new or remanufactured replacement transmission with an
affected parking rod have been identified. Owners of these vehicles will be notified and included in
this recall. This may include vehicles that are outside of the affected VIN range.
Any new or remanufactured transmission purchased from SOA after November 18, 2002 will not
require replacement of the parking rod. All new and remanufactured transmissions shipped from
SOA warehouse inventory after November 18, 2002 have been inspected and modified as
necessary. Only those transmissions in warehouse inventory affected by the WWK-94 parking rod
recall have had the parking rod replaced. Those transmissions can be identified in one or more of
the ways listed below.
If a replacement transmission, purchased after November 18, 2002, is installed in a vehicle
affected by the WWK-94 parking rod recall, do not perform the recall. Contact the CDS department
at SOA to have the recall closed and identified as completed.
Remanufactured Transmissions (part number ending in R1):
^ The converter housing of the transmission shall have a self-adhesive label reading "WWK94"
affixed to it
^ The remanufacturers identification tag (also affixed to the converter housing) shall have
"WWK94" stamped into it following the serial number in the serial number field
^ The plastic shipping container shall have two "WWK94" self adhesive labels applied to it. One on
the front and one on the side
^ The shipping container may also bear "WWK94" stencil painted in white on the top or side of the
container in lieu of the self-adhesive labels
New Transmissions (straight part number or part number ending in S1):
^ The shipping container will bear "WWK94" stencil painted on the top or side of the container
^ The wooden crate will bear "WWK94" stencil painted on the top or side of the crate

Page 87
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
temperature sensor.
INSTALLATION

AFFECTED VEHICLES
OWNER NOTIFICATION
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Wiring Diagram
Page 3388

Page 4745
short-circuited armature will cause the blade to vibrate and to be attracted to core. If the hacksaw
blade is attracted or vibrates, the armature, which is short-circuited, must be replaced or repaired.
5. Armature ground test
Using circuit tester, touch one probe to the commutator segment and the other to shaft. There
should be no continuity. If there is a continuity, armature is grounded. Replace armature if it is
grounded.
2. YOKE
Make sure pole is set in position.
3. OVERRUNNING CLUTCH
Inspect teeth of pinion for wear and damage. Replace if it is damaged. Rotate pinion in direction of
rotation (clockwise). It should rotate smoothly. But in opposite direction, it should be locked.
CAUTION: Do not clean overrunning clutch with oil to prevent grease from flowing out.
4. BRUSH AND BRUSH HOLDER

Page 1837
5. Tighten bolt which holds center exhaust pipe to hanger bracket.
6. Connect connector to rear oxygen sensor connector. 7. Install under cover. 8. Lower the vehicle.
procedure for installing rear catalytic converter is the same as the description above.
Specifications
Firing Order

Page 3192

Page 6012
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3198
Page 5492
Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection Rear Seat Belt
INSPECTION
OUTER BELT SIDE
Check for the following, and replace with new parts if necessary.
OUTER BELT CENTER
INNER BELT
- Inner belt is deformed or damaged.
- Seat belt buckle is engaged improperly.

Page 4602
CAUTION: Be careful not to rotate stop light Switch
9. Apply grease to operating rod connecting pin to prevent it from wearing.
Tightening torque (Air bleeder screw): 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
11. Conduct road tests to ensure brakes do not drag.

Page 1887
DISCLAIMER
Page 294
Service and Repair
Shift Fork: Service and Repair
Timing Components
Page 2998

Page 5751
Rear Bumper: Removal and Replacement
REAR BUMPER
Rear Bumper (Sedan)

Page 3070
B: ADJUSTMENT
MT Vehicles
Part 1
Specifications
Clutch Release Fork: Specifications
Clutch release lever ratio 1.6
Release Lever Stroke mm 12 - 13.6
Tightening Torque 37 Nm
Page 4783
Fuse Locations
Page 5655
The following CDs may cause problems when loading, playing, or ejecting due to the complexity of
your CD player's internal mechanisms.
Disclaimer
Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Piston Outer Diameter Standard - A 99.485 - 99.495 mm
Standard - B 99.475 - 99.485 mm
0.25 mm OS 99.725 - 99.735 mm
0.50 mm OS 99.975 - 99.985 mm
Standard Inner Diameter of Piston Pin Hole 23.000 - 23.006 mm

Page 2238

Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
propeller shaft.
Page 1583

Page 784
DISCLAIMER
Page 160
Part 2
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 2531

Page 5797
6. Adjust so that upper and lower ends of center pillar are the same size.
7. For glass stroke adjustment, close door, raise glass until positional relationship between glass
and weatherstrip becomes as shown. And secure the
glass so that upper stopper lightly touches the glass holder.
8. After stabilizer adjustment, carry out glass crimp adjustment. First, visually ensure positional
relationship between retainer & molding and glass of
the roof side, and then begin with rear sash adjustment. Adjust two adjusting bolts alternately step
by step to obtain dimensions shown below (cross-section A).
NOTE: If two nuts are loosened at the same time, sash moves back and forth. Therefore, when one
nut is adjusted, secure the other.
9. Make the same adjustment of two adjusting bolts of rear sash.

Page 1613

Page 553
Page 2543
Page 2468
REMOVAL
MT VEHICLES
AT VEHICLES

Page 2479
Page 2704
8. In engine compartment, detach fuel delivery hoses, return hoses and evaporation hose.
9. Separate quick connector on fuel delivery, return line and evaporation line.
1. Clean pipe and connector, if they are covered with dust. 2. Hold connector (A) and push retainer
(B) down. 3. Pull out connector (A) from retainer (B).
CAUTION: Replace retainer with new ones.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect quick connector on fuel delivery and return line.
CAUTION: -
Always use a new retainer.
- Make sure that the connected portion is not damaged or has dust. If necessary, clean seal
surface of pipe.
Page 1797
Page 4000
Page 3987

Page 6280

Page 6093
PARTS INFORMATION
Prior to the release of this recall, dealers will automatically be shipped a quantity of replacement
right and left front seat inner slide rail assemblies equivalent to 60% of their vehicle sales.
Additional quantities of the replacement inner seat rail assemblies will be available through normal
parts supply after 3/10/01. In order to maintain an adequate part supply, SOA requests that Dealers
only order parts necessary to supply anticipated demand.
IDENTIFY THE AFFECTED INNER FRONT SEAT RAIL THAT REQUIRES REPLACEMENT
Note:
Only manually adjustable driver and passenger front seats are affected. Outer front seat slide rails
are NOT affected. Power driver seats are NOT affected.
There is no inspection procedure. SOA has predetermined the affected front seat inner slide rail(s)
for each vehicle. It will be necessary to access the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry in the Dealer
Communication System in order to determine the appropriate repair procedure for each vehicle.
The description next to the campaign code will identify the inner slide rail that requires
replacement. Only replace the seat rail identified in the Vehicle Coverage Inquiry.
REPAIR PROCEDURES
Replace the appropriate front seat inner slide rails by following the procedures outlined below and
by referring to procedures found in Section 7 - SE of the 2001 Legacy and Outback Service Manual
as indicated.
1. Prepare for Seat Assembly Removal
Note:
Before proceeding, as a matter of customer courtesy, record radio settings prior to disconnecting
the battery. Please remember to reset the radio and clock when repairs have been completed.
^ Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal before starting seat removal.
2. Seat assembly removal
Remove the seat from the vehicle by following the instructions in steps 2 through 11 in section A of
the Service Manual: Removal. Please use extreme care when removing the seat assembly to avoid
damage to the vehicle body, seat or trim.
^ Vehicles equipped with side air bag - disconnect the side air bag connector located under the
seat cushion.
Caution:
Wait 20 seconds or more after disconnecting the battery before disconnecting the side air bag
connector.
^ Vehicles equipped with heated seats - disconnect the seat heater connector.
^ Disconnect the seat belt warning system connector.
Note:
Make seat bolt removal easier by moving the seat to full forward position when removing the two
rear bolts, and move the seat to full rear position when removing front two bolts.
Page 3330
^ Raise the vehicle hood and lift the transmission dipstick about 1 inch
^ Raise the vehicle on the lift
Note:
It is extremely important that the area in which this repair takes place remains clean to prevent
contamination of internal transmission parts.
Heat Shield Removal (H6 models only)
H6 models only - Remove the heat shield from the left front catalytic converter.
Transmission Oil Pan Removal
1. Drain the transmission fluid by removing the drain plug. While the transmission is draining,
remove the oil pan bolts.
2. When the transmission fluid has finished draining and the pan bolts have been removed, reinstall
the drain plug with the new gasket. Torque to 18.4 +/- 1.4 ft-lb. (25 +/- 2 Nm)
3. Separate the oil pan from the transmission case by using a liquid gasket cutter or similar tool.
Caution:
Do not insert a screwdriver or chisel between the oil pan and the transmission case. This will
damage the oil pan and transmission case. To prevent damage to the internal wire harness, do not
insert the gasket cutter beyond the lip of the pan.
4. Separate the oil pan from the rear side of the transmission and drain the remaining ATF.
Valve Body Removal

Page 2626
A: INSPECTION
hose.
manifold.
Page 6515
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 1117
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nut
Tightening Torque 88 ± 10 Nm (9 ± 1 kg-m, 65 ± 7 ft.lb.)
Tightening Sequence Installation
CAUTION: Tighten the wheel nuts in two or three steps by
gradually increasing the torque and working diagonally,
until the specified torque is reached.

Page 5540
bulletin.
Page 334
Page 4057

Page 6388
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 5190
Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection
Blower Motor Assembly
Connect motor connector terminal 1 from the battery to the positive (+) lead and terminal 2 to the
negative (-) lead. Make sure the motor runs smoothly.
Page 2384
Part 3
Page 3847
4. While holding propeller shaft near center bearing with your hand, move it up and down, and left
and right to check for any abnormal bearing free
play.
Page 6877
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 6445
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2281

Page 2484
Coolant Line/Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
Page 3025

Page 4672
CAUTION: -
INSTALLATION
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
temperature sensor.
INSTALLATION

Page 3537
Page 34
NOTE:
A) Do not insert anything into the gap between the ECU and the hydraulic unit
B) Do not pry the ECU, but pull it straight from the hydraulic unit
NOTE:
D) Do not blow compressed air onto the ECU surface or the hydraulic unit
NOTE:
of 2.65 +/- 0.30Nm(1.95 +/- 0.22ft-lbs) (26.4 inch-lbs).
6) Check if the screws are securely tightened by confirming no clearance between ECU and
NOTE:
tightening torque of 18 +/- 5Nm (13.28 +/- 3.69 ft-lbs) (44.28 inch-lbs).
NOTE:

Page 6373
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2436
new ones.
Page 51
REMOVAL
cover.
Page 4744
Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. ARMATURE
1. Check commutator for any sign of burns of rough surfaces or stepped wear. If wear is of a minor
nature, correct it by using sand paper.
2. Run-out test
Check the commutator run-out and replace if it exceeds the limit.
Commutator run-out:
Standard 0.02 mm (0.0008 in), or less
Service limit Less than 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
3. Depth of segment mold Check the depth of segment mold.
Depth of segment mold: 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Limit 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
4. Armature short-circuit test
Check armature for short-circuit by placing it on growler tester. Hold a hacksaw blade against
armature core while slowly rotating armature. A
Page 5713
Page 2568
Rear Sensor 7 Nm
Page 3312
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5317
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
AFFECTED VEHICLES
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 1878

Page 308
INSPECTION

Part 1 of 2
Page 2431
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 6403

Locations
Relay And Fuse

Specifications
Page 3476
Page 1032
Page 2052
Clutch Switch
Page 332
REMOVAL

Page 4288
4. Tighten bolts which install roll connector and steering angle sensor onto steering column. 5. Set
steering wheel to neutral and install it onto steering shaft.
Tightening torque: 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft. lbs.) Column cover-to-steering wheel clearance: 2 - 4
mm (0.08 - 0.16 inch)
6. Install airbag module to steering wheel.
WARNING: Always refer to Restraint Systems before performing the service operation.
made. -
recognize what position the vehicle is in. For procedures for the above two settings. Refer to
Diagrams
1 of 2
2 of 2
Page 3078
CAUTION: ^
screws.
harness assembly.
Page 928
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: -
To always maintain the brake fluid characteristics, replace the brake fluid according to maintenance
schedule or earlier than that when used in severe condition.
- The FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOTS or 4 brake fluid must be used.
- Cover bleeder with waste cloth, when loosening it, to prevent brake fluid from being splashed over
surrounding parts.
NOTE: -
air.
- The amount of brake fluid required is approximately 500 ml (16.9 US fl oz. 17.6 Imp fl oz) for total
brake system.
1. Either jack-up vehicle and place a safety stand under it, or left up vehicle. 2. Remove both front
and rear wheels. 3. Draw out the brake fluid from master cylinder with syringe. 4. Refill reservoir
tank with recommended brake fluid.
Recommended brake fluid: FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOTS or 4 brake fluid
5. Install one end of a vinyl tube onto the air bleeder of and insert the other end of the tube into a
container to collect the brake fluid.
Rear right
Page 226

REMOVAL
or more.
INSTALLATION
removal easier.

Page 3548
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 3074
Brakes - Premature/Uneven Disc Brake Pad Wear
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Premature/Uneven Disc Brake Pad Wear
NUMBER: 06-33-04 DATE: 01/15/04
APPLICABILITY: 2001 2003MY Subaru Vehicles (Refer to Specific Model/Modification

Applicability)
SUBJECT: Disc Brake Pad Modification
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to address unevenly or prematurely worn brake pads. There is the
possibility that the pads are too tight in the caliper and have insufficient clearance as a result of rust
buildup and dirt. If that is the case, the backplate of the disc brake pads will need to be slightly filed
no more than 0.1 mm (0.0039") on each end to remove the rust.
NOTE:
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IS NOT APPLICABLE TO NEW BRAKE PADS.
Be extremely careful when filing the backplate of the inner and outer brake pad. Make sure that
both ends are filed evenly; do not file shorter than the dimensions shown below (Figure 1 & 2).
Failure to do so will create a rattle or crank noise. After filing, make sure to apply grease on both
ends of the backplate where filed.
the table.
Page 4159
Page 4938
CAUTION: It is likely that although one judges fluid leakage, there is actually no leakage. This is
because the fluid spilt during the last maintenance was not completely wiped off. Be sure to wipe
off spilt fluid thoroughly after maintenance.
Page 5173
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nut
Tightening Torque 88 ± 10 Nm (9 ± 1 kg-m, 65 ± 7 ft.lb.)
Tightening Sequence Installation
CAUTION: Tighten the wheel nuts in two or three steps by
gradually increasing the torque and working diagonally,
until the specified torque is reached.

Page 1572
Note:
Note:

Page 4898
CAMBER
WHEEL TOE-IN
Inspection 1. Using a toe-in gauge, measure rear wheel toe-in.
Toe-in: 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch)
equation:
Adjustment 1. Loosen self-locking nut on inner side of link rear.

Lighting - Fog Lamp Lens/Body Replacement
Fog/Driving Lamp Socket: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Fog Lamp Lens/Body
Replacement
NUMBER: 07-54-05
DATE: 11/21/05
APPLICABILITY: 2000-04MY Legacy Outback; 2003-06MY Baja
SUBJECT: Front Fog Light Lens & Reflector
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to inform you that the front fog light lens and body are now available
separately from the fog lamp assembly. If the fog light lens and/or body need to be replaced refer
to the repair information listed.
PARTS INFORMATION
1) Remove the fog lamp assembly; refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 03V153000: Frame Corrosion Issue
Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Page 318
mm (0.08 - 0.16 inch)
made. -
Page 3518
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Prior to removal, set lever to "N" position. 2. Remove under cover. 3. Remove rear exhaust pipe
and muffler.
CAUTION: When removing exhaust pipes, be careful each exhaust pipe does not crop out.

Page 47
INSPECTION
ADJUSTMENT
VDCCM
- Suspension parts
steering operation.
Page 475
INSTALLATION

Page 4590
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 918
6. Connect pipes A and B to four pipe joints of gearbox. Connect upper pipe B first, and lower pipe
A second.
7. Install jack-up plate. 8. Connect battery minus terminal.
9. Feed the specified fluid.
NOTE: Never start the engine before feeding the fluid; otherwise vane pump might be seized up.
10. Finally check clearance between pipes and/or hoses, as shown above.
If clearance between cruise control pump and power steering hose is less than 10 mm (0.39 inch),
proceed as follows: 1. Move clamped section (A) (refer to figure above.) down to a point where pipe
is close to crossmember.
Pipe-to-crossmember clearance: 10 mm (0.39 inch), min.
2. Check that clearance between cruise control pump and power steering hose is at least 10 mm
(0.39 inch). If it is not, bend section (B) down
until a clearance of at least 10 mm (0.39 inch) is obtained.
INSPECTION
Page 3496
Page 1524

Mainshaft: Customer Interest M/T - Pops Out of Reverse gear
NUMBER: 03-49-02R DATE: 04/23/04
INTRODUCTION
bulletin.
PARTS LIST
Page 271
A: REMOVAL
Except VTD model
VTD model
B: INSTALLATION
Page 2870
Specifications
Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 6068
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Completely close rear sunroof lid and open sunshade. 2. Disconnect ground cable from battery.
3. Remove covers (A) then remove nuts (B). 4. Remove the sunroof lid carefully.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: When installing sunroof lid, be careful not to pinch the lip of lid.
Page 5487
Disclaimer
Page 6651
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Brake Hose
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose
REMOVAL
1. FRONT BRAKE HOSE
1. Separate brake pipe from brake hose. (Always use flare nut wrench and be careful not to deform
flare nut.) 2. Pull out clamp to remove brake hose. 3. Remove bolt at strut and union bolt.
2. REAR BRAKE HOSE 1. Separate brake pipe from brake hose.
NOTE: Always use flare nut wrench and be careful not to deform flare nut.
2. Pull out clamp to remove brake hose.
INSTALLATION
1. FRONT BRAKE HOSE 1. Route end of brake hose (on caliper side) through hole in brake hose
bracket at strut location.
Page 1055
Page 167
Part 2
Page 2566
Page 2581
Page 3357
equivalent.
Remove the gasket material from the three non-threaded holes in the case as shown.
Valve Body Installation
Caution:
Before installing the valve body, make sure that the seal (pictured) is in place.
Install the valve body while aligning the manual plate and manual valve. Do not tighten the valve
body bolts completely until confirming that the wire harness is not pinched. Tightening torque: 70
+/- 0.9 in-lb. (8 +/- 1 Nm).
Connect the connectors for each solenoid. When connecting, match the color of the harness with
that of the solenoid.
If oil temperature sensor is integrated into the harness, fix the oil sensor to clip.
Coat the oil pan with liquid gasket (as shown).
Caution:
Install the oil pan within 10 minutes of applying the liquid gasket, or as indicated by the
manufacturer's instructions.
Page 6283
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 2409
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 2780

Recall - Right Front Axle Housing
Inspection/Replacement
Differential Axle Housing: Recalls Recall - Right Front Axle Housing Inspection/Replacement
NUMBER: WXY-82 DATE: 12/2000
SUBJECT: Improper Casting of Right Front Axle Housing
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that a number of 2001MY Subaru Legacy and
Outback vehicles may have been manufactured with an improperly cast right front axle housing.
This program will involve the inspection of affected vehicles for possible right front axle housing
replacement.
VEHICLES INVOLVED
The affected vehicles are 2001 model year Subaru Legacy and Outback vehicles identified in the
VIN range chart. NOTE:
Locations
Fuse Locations
Page 4303
CAUTION: -
INSTALLATION
Page 2021

Page 5208
Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Heater Vent Duct
Heater Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel. 2. Remove nine screws.
3. Remove heater vent duct.
INSTALLATION

Page 6354
Specifications
NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 2159
Page 5715

Page 5110
8. Remove bolts securing link rear to sub frame, detach link rear.
CAUTION: To loosen adjusting bolt, always loosen nut while holding the head of adjusting bolt.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
Using transmission jack, support rear arm horizontally, install link rear and tighten nuts to specified
torque.
DISASSEMBLY
Using ST-A, B, press bushing out of place. ST-A, B 20099AE000 INSTALLER & REMOVER
ASSEMBLY
Using ST, press bushing into place.

Page 2915

Page 6017
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
Remove battery from transmitter.
NOTE: To prevent static electricity damage to transmitter printed circuit board, touch steel area of
building with hand to discharge static electricity carried on body or clothes before disassembling
transmitter.
INSTALLATION

General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Speedometer Head: Testing and Inspection
Speedometer
Measure resistance between speedometer terminals. If NG, replace speedometer and fuel gauge
assembly. If OK, replace combination meter printed circuit.
Page 1500

Identification
Date: 01/05/09
INTRODUCTION
sensor 3.
O2 sensor.
Page 1362
Bulletin.
bulletin to correct affected vehicles in their inventory (new, used, demo) prior to the vehicle being
placed in service may be in breach of the Subaru Dealer Agreement.
PARTS INFORMATION
Subaru Cooling System Conditioner
Note:
Subaru Cooling System Conditioner is packaged in cases that contain 12 bottles. Each affected
vehicle requires one (1) bottle. Each case contains enough material to treat 12 vehicles.
Prior to the release of this Service Program, each dealer will automatically be shipped a quantity of
Subaru Cooling System Conditioner equivalent to 40% of their vehicle sales, or up to a maximum
of 20 cases.
Additional quantities of the Cooling System Conditioner will be available through normal parts
channels after 2/15/04. In order to maintain an adequate part supply, SOA requests that Dealers
only order quantities necessary to satisfy anticipated demand.
REPAIR PROCEDURES
The repair procedure involves adding Subaru Cooling System Conditioner to the cooling system.
Follow the recommended procedure that applies to either a "Cold" or "Hot" engine.
Caution:
The engine cooling system is under pressure and may he extremely hot. To prevent personal injury
or vehicle damage he sure to take appropriate precautions while performing this procedure.
Service Procedure on a COLD Engine
NOTE:
Impreza and Forester vehicle system components are shown in the images below, but Legacy and
Outback models are similar. Consult your service manual for exact locations and illustrations.
1. Install rags around the radiator filler neck to prevent coolant from contaminating the engine area.
2. Take off the radiator cap and set aside.
3. Extract 125ml (4.23 oz.) of coolant from the radiator using a suitable device such as a piston
syringe, meat or poultry baster, antifreeze hydrometer, etc.
Page 1268
8. Connect connector to rear oxygen sensor.
9. Install under cover.
10. Lower the vehicle.
CAUTION: At this time, lower lifting device and release steel cables.
11. Remove lifting device and steel cables.
12. Connect connector to front oxygen (A/F) sensor.

Page 3550
Page 524
Page 1904
Part 1
Page 1327
15. Disconnect connectors from fuel injectors.
16. Disconnect connector from purge control solenoid valve. 17. Disconnect air by-pass hose from
purge control solenoid valve.
18. Remove harness bands (*) which hold engine harness onto intake manifold.

Page 2081
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:

Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Pulley Attaching Bolt 177 Nm

Page 704
NOTE: Thrust angle refers to a mean value of left and right rear wheel toe angles in relation to
vehicle body center line. Vehicle is driven straight in the thrust angle direction while swinging in the
oblique direction depending on the degree of the mean thrust angle.
Thrust angle: r = (a - B)/2
a: Right rear wheel toe-in angle B: Left rear wheel toe-in angle
NOTE: Here, use only positive toe-in values from each wheel to substitute for a and B in the
equation.
Page 1471
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 1504
DISCLAIMER
Page 6644
Engine - Rub Mark On Back Of Timing Belt
Timing Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Rub Mark On Back Of Timing Belt
rubbing mark on timing belt
This article addresses a rubbing mark on the back (flat) surface of the timing belt that is caused by
the belt contacting the timing belt guide. This mark does not have any effect on the performance of
the timing belt such as durability and no repairs should be attempted.
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 3535

Page 4988
Clean the disassembled parts with a cloth, and check for wear, damage, or any other faults. If
necessary, repair or replace faulty parts. Measurement of folding torque of universal joint is as
shown in the figures.
Service limit. Maximum load; 5.49 N (0.56 kg, 1.23 1b) or less
Service limit. Maximum load; 5.49 N (0.56 kg, 1.23 lb) or less
Service limit. Maximum load; 8.43 N (0.86 kg, 1.90 lb) or less
Page 2912
Page 3214

Page 4170

Page 947
Coolant: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT 1. Lift-up the vehicle.
3. Remove drain cock to drain engine coolant into container.
NOTE: Remove radiator cap so that engine coolant will drain faster.
FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 1. Fill engine coolant into radiator up to filler neck position.
Coolant capacity (fill up to "FULL" level): MT model: Approximately 6.4 L (6.8 US quarts 5.6 Imp
quarts) AT model: Approximately 6.3 L (6.7 US quarts 5.5 Imp quarts)
CAUTION: The SUBARU Genuine Coolant containing antifreeze and anti rust agents is especially
made for SUBARU engine, which has an aluminum crankcase. Always use SUBARU Genuine
Coolant, since other coolant may cause corrosion.
2. Fill engine coolant into reservoir tank up to upper level. 3. Attach radiator cap and reservoir tank
cap properly. 4. Warm-up engine completely for more than five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm. 5. If
engine coolant level drops in radiator, add engine coolant to filler neck position. 6. If engine coolant
level drops from upper level of reservoir tank, add engine coolant to upper level. 7. Attach radiator
cap and reservoir tank cap properly.
Hose/Line HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Flexible Hose
NOTE: If cracking, damage, or swelling is found on a hose, replace it with a new one.
Page 5179
REMOVAL
connector.
INSTALLATION

Page 4844
Page 2582
Page 2203
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

1. DOOR SWITCH

Page 1021
parts.
Service Manual - Emission Control System Corrections
Exhaust Gas Recirculation: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual - Emission Control System
Corrections
NUMBER: 18-70-01 DATE: 09/01/01
APPLICABILITY: 2001 MY Legacy Service Manual 2002 MY Impreza Service Manual
Page 6646
Locations
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 4061
Page 4917
3. Feed the specified power steering fluid.
3.0 Model
1. Install reservoir tank to bracket. 2. Connect pressure hose and suction hose to oil pump. 3. Feed
the specified power steering fluid.
INSPECTION
Check reservoir tank for cracks, breakage, or damage. If any cracks, breakage, or damage is
found, replace reservoir tank.
Page 4766
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Squealing Noise
NUMBER: 06-30-01R DATE: 03/06/02

of brake shims)

FOLLOWING VINS)
modification.
FIELD PROCEDURE:
shims.
Note:
way.
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 683
Wiper Blade Heater Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper Deicer Switch
REMOVAL
Remove driver side switch panel, and then remove wiper deicer switch.
INSTALLATION

Information
Date: 01/05/09
INTRODUCTION
sensor 3.
O2 sensor.
Radiator Cap: Customer Interest Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
Specifications
Clutch: Specifications Plate Number
Plate Number
Clutch, A/T High Clutch 4
Drive Plate and Driven Plate
Reverse Clutch 2
2 - 4 Brake 3
Low Clutch 6
Low and Reverse Brake 6

Page 2318
Note:
Page 5452
INSPECTION
Service and Repair
COWL PANEL
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 2191
A: INSPECTION
cylinders;

Page 2169
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
ground terminal.
C: INSPECTION
position switch.
Page 1972
the engine rear.

Page 1669
R/F (H4)-01 - Radiator Fan System

Page 2560
Page 4090
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Page 4901
NOTE: Thrust angle refers to a mean value of left and right rear wheel toe angles in relation to
vehicle body center line. Vehicle is driven straight in the thrust angle direction while swinging in the
oblique direction depending on the degree of the mean thrust angle.
Thrust angle: r = (a - B)/2
a: Right rear wheel toe-in angle B: Left rear wheel toe-in angle
NOTE: Here, use only positive toe-in values from each wheel to substitute for a and B in the
equation.
Page 2669
11. Disconnect connector from fuel injector.
12. Remove bolt which holds injector pipe to intake manifold.

Page 4532
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Install the oil pressure gauges to measure the master cylinder fluid pressure (front wheel brake
fluid pressure) and rear wheel cylinder fluid
pressure.
2. Bleed air from the oil pressure gauges.
3. Check the master cylinder fluid pressure and rear wheel cylinder fluid pressure. The standard
values are shown in Figure. 4. For the oil pressure in case of split point, refer to Specifications.
Page 2183
CLEANING

Page 5701
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2659
FUEL FILTER
REMOVAL
WARNING:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

Page 795
CLEANING

Specifications
Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications
Clearance Between Shaft and Arm Standard 0.020 - 0.054 mm
Limit 0.10 mm
Page 3787
ST 498447120 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
16. Install companion flange.
NOTE: Use a plastic hammer to install companion flange.
17. Tighten self-locking nut within the specified torque range so that the turning resistance of
companion flange becomes the same as that before
replacing oil seal. ST 498427200 FLANGE WRENCH
18. Reassembling procedure hereafter is the reverse of the disassembling.

Locations
Connector Location

Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 5360
Air Bag Harness: Testing and Inspection Side Airbag Harness
INSPECTION

Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
Check the removed cable and replace if damaged, rusty, or malfunctioning. 1. Check for smooth
operation of the cable. 2. Check the inner cable for damage and rust. 3. Check the outer cable for
damage, bends, and cracks. 4. Check the boot for damage, cracks, and deterioration.
Page 2146

Airbag Warning Light Remains On
Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Testing and Inspection Airbag Warning Light Remains On
DIAGNOSIS:
- Airbag warning light is faulty.
- Airbag control module to airbag warning light circuit is shorted or open.
- Grounding circuit is faulty.
- Airbag control module is faulty.
- (AB1) and (B31) are not connected properly.
- (AB6) is not connected properly to airbag control module.

CAUTION:
- Before diagnosing the airbag system, be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
ground cable from the battery, and wait more than 20 seconds before starting to work.
- Before replacing the airbag module, roll connector, control module, and sensor, reconnect each
part and confirm that the warning light operates properly.
- When inspecting the airbag main harness, disconnect the airbag module connector of the driver
and passenger seats for safety reasons.
Wiring Diagram
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 4283
Page 114
Relay And Fuse

ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS
INSPECTION
2. Check specifications of the mark with ABSCM&H;/U.

CAUTION: -

Page 515

Page 2352

Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection
1. Prepare Subaru Select Monitor kit. 2. Connect diagnosis cable to Subaru Select Monitor.
- A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
NOTE: -
Because ASV solenoid valve, FICD solenoid valve and air injection system diagnosis solenoid
valve are not installed, ASV Solenoid Valve, FICD Solenoid Valve and Pressure Switching Sol.2
will be displayed but non-functional.
- For detailed operation procedure, refer to the SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION
MANUAL.
Audio System - CD Player Information/Precautions
Compact Disc Player (CD): Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD Player
Information/Precautions
NUMBER: 15-120-07 DATE: 03/07/07
APPLICABILITY: All Models Equipped with an In-dash CD Changer/Player
SUBJECT: In-dash CD Changer/Player Discs
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this bulletin is to inform of cautions concerning compact discs. There have been an
increasing number of changers/players being replaced under warranty. We have found that the
majority of all failures are the result of the use of damaged CDs, non-compatible user-created CDs
and labels, or multiple CDs inserted at the same time jamming the player or damaging the CD. The
resultant damage to the player is generally not detected until after the audio exchange has been
completed.
Customers coming in with CD changer/player issues should be reminded at the time of the unit
exchange that the use of CDs as described above are the potential causes of problems.
We encourage you to make a copy of the In-dash CD Changer/Player page in this bulletin and
provide it to your customers when an exchange unit is installed.
Page 155
Page 3689
6. Push release lever until operating cylinder push rod retracts. Ensure that clutch fluid level in
reservoir tank increases. If clutch fluid level increases,
hydraulic clutch is properly adjusted; if fluid level does not increase or push rod does not retract,
replace master cylinder with new one.
7. Push release fork until operating cylinder push rod retracts. Check that clutch fluid level in
reservoir tank increases. 8. If clutch fluid level increases, hydraulic clutch play is correct. 9. If clutch
fluid level does not increase or push rod does not retract, clutch pedal must be readjusted.
10. Check the fluid level on the outside of the clutch master cylinder tank. If the level is below
"MIN", add clutch fluid to bring it up to "MAX".
Recommended clutch fluid: FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid
Locations
Page 5827
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Sealing Cover
REAR SEALING COVER
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door trim. 2. Remove rear speaker. 3. Using a spatula, remove sealer.
CAUTION: -
Carefully remove sealer. Excessive force will easily break the cover.
- If cover gets broken, replace it with a new one.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. When replacing sealing cover, use CEMEDINE 5430L
sealer. 3. Press sealer-applied area firmly to prevent any floating on surface.
Sealer: CEMEDINE 5430L or equivalent
CAUTION: -
Apply an uniform bead of sealer.
- Attach sealing cover, keeping it from becoming wrinkled.
- Breaks in the bead will allow water leakage and contamination.

Page 4585
Page 876
Note:
Page 1911
Part 1
Page 4662
Page 3120
ECM Reprogramming Instructions
Tools needed: Select Monitor, short programming cable, P/N 22775Z0C00, and Select Monitor
Reprogramming Cartridge P/N 24082X0A54.
Important:
Only use the specified Select Monitor Programming Cable for reprogramming.
Page 3247
Page 4528
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Line
REMOVAL
NOTE: Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the center brake pipe.
CAUTION: -
All Airbag system wiring harness and connectors are colored yellow. Do not use electrical test
equipment on these circuits.
- Be careful not to damage Airbag system wiring harness when servicing the center brake pipe.
- When removing the brake pipe, make sure that it is not bent.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the center brake pipe.
CAUTION: -
All Airbag system wiring harness and connectors are colored yellow. Do not use electrical test
equipment on these circuits.
- Be careful not to damage Airbag system wiring harness when servicing the center brake pipe.
- When installing the brake pipe, make sure that it is not bent.
- After installing the brake pipe and hose, bleed the air.
- After installing the brake hose, make sure that it does not touch the tire or suspension assembly,
etc. Brake pipe tightening torque: 15 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 10.8 ft. lbs.)
Roll Connector: Testing and Inspection Inspection Items (After A Collision)
INSPECTION
ROLL CONNECTOR
- Combination switch or steering roll connector is cracked or deformed.

1. DOOR SWITCH

Page 6452
Speedometer Head: Service and Repair
Speedometer
REMOVAL
Disassemble combination meter, and then remove speedometer and fuel gauge assembly.
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
PROCEDURE
CAUTION: -
surrounding parts.
NOTE: -
1. MASTER CYLINDER
pedal.
2. BRAKE LINE
NOTE: -
air.
Diagrams
1 of 2
2 of 2
Page 5097
Refer to Front Strut as a guide for inspection procedures.
DISPOSAL
CAUTION: ^
Completely discharge the gas from the shock absorber before disposal. Follow the disposal
procedure outlined below.
^ Do not disassemble shock absorber or place into a fire.
^ Drill holes before disposing of shock absorber.
^ Before handling shock absorber, be sure to wear goggles to protect eyes from gas, oil and/or
filings.
1. Place shock absorber on a flat and level surface with piston rod fully extended.
2. Using a 2 to 3 mm (0.08 to 0.12 inch) dia. drill, drill 30 mm (1.18 inch) deep holes in areas shown
in the figure.
Page 4747
1. Rotate bearing by hand; no binding should exist. 2. Rotate bearing rapidly; no abnormal noise
should be heard.
6. MAGNETIC SWITCH
CAUTION: -
The following magnetic switch tests should be performed with specified voltage applied.
- Each test should be conducted within 3 to 5 seconds. Power to be furnished should be one-half
the rated voltage.
1. Pull-in test
Connect two battery negative leads onto magnetic switch body and terminal C respectively. Then
connect battery positive lead onto terminal 50. Pinion should extend when lead connections are
made.
2. Holding-in test
Disconnect lead from terminal C with pinion extended. Pinion should be held in the extended
position.
3. Return test
Page 2657
Page 4156
Page 5366

Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 3197

Page 1874
Page 645
Page 5495
7. Turn over the floor mat to remove bolt. 8. Disconnect yellow connector of pretensioner harness,
and remove outer belt (front).
CAUTION: -
Do not drop or apply any impact to pretensioner.
- Pretensioner and bracket should be treated as an assembly. Do not attempt to disassemble it.
INNER BELT (FRONT)
1. Disconnect connector.
2. Remove anchor bolt, and then detach inner belt.
INSTALLATION
OUTER BELT (FRONT)
CAUTION:
- The parts on left and right are not identical. Before installation, make sure that the correct part is
used.
- Be careful not to twist belts during installation.
INNER BELT (FRONT)

Page 3685
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Specifications
Clutch Pedal Full Stoke 130 - 135 mm
Free Play 4 - 13 mm
Page 2239
Locations
Locations
Page 2360
Page 2292
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES

Service and Repair
Console: Service and Repair
CONSOLE BOX
REMOVAL
1. Remove shift knob (A) (MT model) and front cover (B).
2. Remove tray (A) and console cover (B).
3. Remove console box (A).
INSTALLATION

Page 5311
Step 1 - 6
Page 1588

Page 6396
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 3563
Page 746
INSPECTION
Check for:
Page 6291
Page 1277
Page 3619
Disclaimer
Page 5043
Ventilation
Caution:
Page 1871

Page 1589

Page 1250
The proper viscosity helps vehicle get good cold and hot starting by reducing viscous friction and
thus increasing cranking speed.
CAUTION: When replenishing oil, it does not matter if the oil to be added is a different brand from
that in the engine; however, use oil having the API classification and SAE viscosity No. designated
by SUBARU.
NOTE: If vehicle is used in desert areas with very high temperatures or for other heavy duty
applications, the following viscosity oils may be used: API classification: SJ or SH. SAE Viscosity
No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50.
6. Close engine oil filler cap. 7. Start engine and warm it up for a time.
8. After engine stops, recheck the oil level. If necessary, add engine oil up to upper level on level
gauge.
Page 1092
table.
Disclaimer
Page 4780
Recall - Front Seat Inner Slide Rail Replacement
Seat Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Front Seat Inner Slide Rail Replacement
NUMBER: WWD-87 DATE: 03/2001
SUBJECT: Front Seat Inner Slide Rail
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that some 2001 Legacy and Outback models
equipped with manually adjustable (non-powered) seats may have been produced with an
improperly welded front seat inner slide rail latch mechanism.
This program will involve replacement of the manually adjustable driver and/or passenger front seat
inner slide rail on affected vehicles. Power driver seats are not affected.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
2001 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback models.
NOTE:
Communication System (DCS). The description found next to the campaign code (WWD87) in the
Vehicle Coverage Inquiry will identify the seat(s) that requires inner seat rail replacement. Refer to
the section "IDENTIFY THE AFFECTED INNER FRONT SEAT RAIL THAT REQUIRES
REPLACEMENT" of this Bulletin for more details.
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 6375
O/TEMP-01
Locations
Connector Location

Page 833
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Loosen the lock nut (A).
2. Loosen the slider bolt (B). 3. Remove the A/C belt.
4. Remove the A/C belt tensioner.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install a new belt, and tighten the slider bolt so as to obtain the specified belt tension. 2. Tighten
the slider bolt (B).
3. Tighten the lock nut (A).
Tightening torque: Lock nut (A): 22.6 Nm (2.3 kgf-m, 16.6 ft. lbs.)
Page 5431
Step 1 - 4
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHARTS

Page 326
ADJUSTMENT

Page 2487
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 4270
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
facilitate removal of hydraulic unit. 3. Disconnect connector from hydraulic unit.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let water or other foreign matter contact the H/U terminal.
4. Unlock cable clip. 5. Disconnect brake pipes from hydraulic unit.
6. Remove nuts and bolt which secure hydraulic unit bracket, and remove hydraulic unit from
engine compartment.
CAUTION: -
Hydraulic unit cannot be disassembled. Do not attempt to loosen bolts and nuts.
- Do not drop or bump hydraulic unit.
- Do not turn the hydraulic unit upside down or place it on its side.
- Be careful to prevent foreign particles from getting into hydraulic unit.
- When a new hydraulic unit is installed, apply a coat of rust-preventive wax (Nippeco LT or GB) to
bracket attaching bolt after tightening.
- Do not pull harness disconnecting harness connector.
2. RELAY BOX 1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Remove air intake duct from engine
compartment to facilitate removal of relay box. 3. Disconnect connector from relay box. 4. Unlock
cable clip.
5. Remove nuts which secure relay box, and remove relay box and connector bracket.
Page 4504
6. Instruct your co-worker to depress the brake pedal slowly two or three times and then hold it
depressed. 7. Loosen bleeder screw approximately 1/4 turn until a small amount of brake fluid
drains into container, and then quickly tighten screw. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 above until there are
no air bubbles in drained brake fluid and new fluid flows through vinyl tube.
NOTE: Add brake fluid as necessary while performing the air bleed operation, in order to prevent
the tank from running short of brake fluid.
9. After completing the bleeding operation, hold brake pedal depressed and tighten screw and
install bleeder cap.
Tightening torque (Bleeder screw): 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
10. Bleed air from each wheel cylinder using the same procedures as described in steps 6 through
7 above. 11. Depress brake pedal with a force of approximately 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) and hold it
there for approximately 20 seconds. At this time check pedal
to see if it shows any unusual movement. Visually inspect bleeder screws and brake pipe joints to
make sure that there is no fluid leakage.
12. Install wheels, and drive vehicle for a short distance between 2 to 3 km (1 to 2 miles) to make
sure that brakes are operating properly.
Locations
Connector Location

Page 6511
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 4004
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Front
Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Front
INSPECTION
Page 3903
Transmission gear oil Recommended oil
2. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)

1. Drain differential gear oil by removing drain plug after allowing the engine to cool for 3 to 4
hours.
2. Reinstall drain plug after draining differential gear oil and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 44 ± 3 Nm (4.5 ± 0.3 kg-m, 33 ± 2.2 ft.lb)
CAUTION: -
3. Fill differential gear oil through the oil level gauge hole up to the upper point of level gauge.
Differential gear oil capacity: 1.1 - 1.3 l (1.2 - 1.4 US qt, 1.0 - 1.1 Imp qt)
Engine - Rub Mark On Back Of Timing Belt
Timing Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Rub Mark On Back Of Timing Belt
rubbing mark on timing belt
This article addresses a rubbing mark on the back (flat) surface of the timing belt that is caused by
the belt contacting the timing belt guide. This mark does not have any effect on the performance of
the timing belt such as durability and no repairs should be attempted.
Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Squealing Noise
NUMBER: 06-30-01R DATE: 03/06/02

of brake shims)

FOLLOWING VINS)
modification.
FIELD PROCEDURE:
shims.
Note:
way.
Page 4018

Page 1707
Page 2099
Page 594
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 6333
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Service and Repair
A: REPLACEMENT
2. Drain gear oil completely.
NOTE: Tighten drain plug after draining gear oil.
3. Remove rear exhaust pipe and muffler. 4. Remove heat shield cover. 5. Remove propeller shaft.
6. Using ST, remove the oil seal.
7. Using ST, install the oil seal.
8. Install the propeller shaft. 9. Install the heat shield cover.
10. Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. 11. Pour gear oil and check the oil level.
Coolant Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Comes Out Of
Reservoir
NUMBER: 08-52-08
DATE: 08/18/08
Introduction
Note:
Note:
Page 5270
bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Manual.
Page 514
AT VEHICLES
NUMBER: 09-45-06 DATE: 11/28/06
INTRODUCTION
Caution:
Note:
Note:
Special note:
the table.
Page 4211
Page 1034
Fuse Locations
Page 4714
4. Insulation test
Check continuity between slip ring and rotor core or shaft. If continuity exists, replace rotor.
5. Ball bearing
Check rear ball bearing. Replace it if it is noisy or if rotor does not turn smoothly.
2. STATOR
1. Continuity test
Inspect stator coil for continuity between its terminals. When there is no continuity between
individual terminals, cable is broken. Replace stator coil.
2. Insulation test
Inspect stator coil for continuity between stator core and each terminal. If there is continuity,
replace stator coil.
3. BRUSH
Page 5629
Interrupt Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1365
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Highway Speed Vibration/Harshness/Noise
NUMBER: 05-50-10R DATE: 02/03/11
INTRODUCTION
DESCRIPTION
Wheel Imbalance
instructions.
Machine Setup
balancer
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2920

Page 2693
Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Make sure that there are no cracks on the fuel pipes and fuel hoses. 2. Make sure that the fuel
pipe and fuel hose connections are tight.
Page 4039

Part 1
Page 2103
A: INSPECTION

properly.
MANUAL.
NOTE: ^
Page 710
A: INSPECTION
hose.
manifold.
Page 4097
Page 3123
CALIFORNIA/MASSACHUSETTS "VEHICLE EMISSION RECALL - PROOF Of CORRECTION "
CERTIFICATE
The California Air Resources Board and the Department of Motor Vehicles Registration/Recall
Program requires that all emission related Recall/Campaign or Service Program repairs be
completed before a vehicle registration is renewed. Please provide owners of vehicles registered in
the states of California and Massachusetts a completed "Vehicle Emission Recall - Proof of
Correction" certificate. Vehicle owners should be advised to retain this certificate because the
California/Massachusetts Department of Motor Vehicles may require they provide proof this service
program repair has been completed.
Credit to perform this Service Program will be based on the submission of properly completed
ECM Reprogramming Only - Use the applicable claim submission information for Reprogramming
the ECM.
For ECM Reprogramming enter labor operation 145-580 for 0.6 labor hours.
Replacement of the Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor and ECM Reprogramming - Use the applicable
claim submission information when trouble codes P0031, P0130 or P1133 were found and the
Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor is replaced and the ECM reprogrammed.
For Replacement of the Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor and ECM reprogramming enter Labor
Operation Number 145-515 for 0.9 labor hours. Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus the
applicable handing allowance.
Page 2530
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
data.
AT VEHICLES
Page 3347
Page 3131
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
Page 1665
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2387
Part 3
Page 2192

Page 5148
table.
Disclaimer
Page 4068
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 3143
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Page 4872
Fuse Locations
Page 6621
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 1265
12. Disconnect connector from rear oxygen sensor.
13. Remove front and center exhaust pipes.
14. Remove nuts which install front cushion rubber onto front crossmember. 15. Remove bolts
which install oil pan on cylinder block while raising up engine.
16. Insert oil pan cutter blade between cylinder block-to-oil pan clearance.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool in place of oil pan cutter.
Page 3688
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments
F: ADJUSTMENT
1. CLUTCH PEDAL
1. Turn clutch switch lock nuts until clutch pedal full stroke length is within specifications.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to turn clutch switch to adjust clutch pedal full stroke length.
NOTE: If lock nuts cannot adjust clutch pedal full stroke length to specifications, turn master
cylinder push rod to adjust it.
Specified clutch pedal full stroke: A 130 - 135 mm (5.12 - 5.31 inch) Tightening torque (Clutch
switch lock nut): T: 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
2. Turn master cylinder push rod so that clevis pin moves to the left and then to the right. Clevis pin
must move without resistance while it is rattling.
Tightening torque (Push rod lock nut): T: 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft. lbs.)
3. Depress and release clutch pedal 2 to 3 times to ensure that clutch pedal and release fork
operate smoothly. If clutch pedal and release fork do not
operate smoothly, bleed air from clutch hydraulic system.
4. Measure clutch pedal full stroke length again to ensure that it is within specifications. If it is not,
repeat adjustment procedures again from the
beginning. Specified clutch pedal full stroke: 130 - 135 mm (5.12 - 5.31 inch)
5. Move clevis pin to the left and then to the right. It should move without resistance while it is
rattling. If resistance is felt, repeat adjustment
procedures again from the beginning.

Page 2273
Part 3
Page 3741
Page 6759
INSTALLATION
1. AUTO A/C
2. MANUAL A/C
"FULL HOT".
Page 5290
Refrigerant Oil: Service Precautions
2. COMPRESSOR OIL
- HFC-134a compressor oil has no compatibility with that for R12 system.
- Use only the manufacturer-authorized compressor oil for the HFC-134a system; only use
ZXL200PG.
- Do not mix multiple compressor oils. If HFC-12 compressor oil is used in a HFC-134a A/C
system, the compressor may become stuck due to poor lubrication, or the refrigerant may leak due
to swelling of rubber parts. On the other hand, if HFC-134a compressor oil is used in a HFC-12 A/C
system, the durability of the A/C system will be lowered.
- HFC-134a compressor oil is very hygroscopic. When replacing or installing/removing A/C parts,
immediately isolate the oil from the atmosphere using a plug or tape. In order to avoid moisture,
store the oil in a container with its cap tightly closed.
Page 5069
Intake Manifold Torque
Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Torque

MT Vehicles
Front Suspension
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Suspension
FRONT STRUT
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel.
2. Remove bolt securing brake hose from strut. 3. Scribe an alignment mark on the camber
adjusting bolt which secures strut to housing.
4. Remove bolt securing the ABS sensor harness
5. Remove two bolts securing housing to strut.
CAUTION: While holding head of adjusting bolt, loosen self-locking nut.
6. Remove the three nuts securing strut mount to body.
INSTALLATION
1. Install strut mount at upper side of strut to body and tighten with nuts.
2. Position aligning mark on camber adjustment bolt with aligning mark on lower side of strut.
CAUTION: While holding head of adjusting bolt, tighten self-locking nut. Be sure to use new
self-locking nut.
Page 222

Page 4548
2. Secure relay box connector to connector bracket.
3. Connect connector to relay box. 4. Install air intake duct. 5. Connect ground cable to battery.
Trunk Lid Trim
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Trim
TRUNK LID TRIM
REMOVAL
Remove clips and detach trunk lid trim (A).
INSTALLATION

Page 760

Page 5271
Caution:
claim submission.
allowance.
Page 5094
Damper Strut 1. Check for oil leakage. 2. Move the piston rod up and down to check it operates
smoothly without any binding. 3. Play of piston rod
^ Measure the play as follows:
Fix outer shell and fully extend the rod. Set a dial gauge at the end of the rod: L [10 mm (0.39
inch)], then apply a force of W [20 N (2 kg, 4 lb)] to threaded portion. With the force of 20 N (2 kg, 4
lb) applied, read dial gauge indication: P1. Apply a force of 20 N (2 kg, 4 lb) in the opposite
direction of "W", then read dial gauge indication: P2.
The free play is determined by the following equation: Play = P1, P2 Limit of play. Less than 0.8
mm (0.031 inch) If the play is greater, replace the strut.
Strut Mount Check rubber part for creep, cracks and deterioration, and replace it with new one if
defective.
Dust Cover If any cracks or damage are found, replace it with a new one.
Coil Spring One having permanent strain should be replaced with a new one. When vehicle posture
is uneven, although there are no considerable reasons like tire puncture, uneven loading, etc.,
check coil spring for its free length referring to specifications, cracks, etc., and replace it with a new
one if defective.
Helper Replace it with new one if cracked or damaged.

Page 5711
Page 5036
Page 2266
Part 3
Page 4512
Page 2892
REMOVAL
Page 6338
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 1664

Page 6568
the table.
Disclaimer
Page 42
Page 966
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Specified type ......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................... SAE 75W - 90

Page 3142
B: INSTALLATION

Page 3873
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
CAUTION: Since this bearing is grease sealed and is of a non-lubrication type, do not wash with
gasoline or any solvent.
1. Damage of facing and ring gear
If defective, replace flywheel.
2. Smoothness of rotation
Rotate ball bearing applying pressure in thrust direction.
3. If noise or excessive play is noted, replace flywheel.

Specifications
Alignment: Specifications
Model Sedan Wagon OUTBACK
Front Camber (tolerance: ± 0°30' ) -0°05' -0°05' 0°20'
Caster (common difference: ± 3°05' 2°50' 2°40'
0°45' )
Toe-in 0 ± 3 mm ( 0 ± 0.12 in) Each toe-in angle: ± 0°15'
Kingpin angle 14°15' 14°15' 13°30'
Wheel arch height [tolerance: +12 388 mm (15.28 in) 388 mm (15.28 in) 424 mm (16.69 in)
/ -24 mm (+0.47 / -0.94 in)]
Diameter of stabilizer 20 mm (0.79 in) 21 mm (0.83 in)
Rear Camber (tolerance: ± 0°45' ) -0°30' -0°20' -0°10'

/ -24 mm (+0.47 / -0.94 in)]
Thrust angle 0° ± 30'
Diameter of stabilizer 14 mm (0.55 in)

Page 5730
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 2684
Page 4700
Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Rough Idle/CEL After Battery Disconnect
TITLE: Rough Idle/Check Engine Light After Battery Disconnect
APPLIES TO: 01-04 Legacy 01-04 Baja
SERVICE TIP:
Please be aware that a rough engine idle condition may occur when the vehicle's battery is
disconnected for less than 30 minutes. Clearing the memory with the Select Monitor will correct this
condition. If the battery is left disconnected for more than 30 minutes, the ECU will most likely clear
itself.
Please feel free to share this information with your customers who perform their own service work
or those who may have a need to disconnect their vehicle's battery such as during certain
accessory installations.
Page 3449

Page 5567
Page 4833
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2030
Page 1249
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
B: REPLACEMENT
1. Drain engine oil by loosening engine oil drain plug.
2. Open engine oil filler cap for quick draining of the engine oil. 3. Replace drain plug gasket.
4. Tighten engine oil drain plug after draining engine oil.
5. Fill engine oil through filler pipe up to upper point on level gauge. Make sure that vehicle is
placed level when checking oil level. Use engine oil
of proper quality and viscosity, selected in accordance with the table in figure. Recommended oil
API classification SJ or SH with the words "Energy Conserving or Energy Conserving II", CCMC
specification G4 or G5, ACEA specification A1, A2 or A3, or New API mark displayed on the
container (If it is impossible to get SJ or SH grade, you may use SG grade.)
Engine oil capacity: Upper level 4.0 L (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp quarts) Lower level 3.0 L (3.2 US qt, 2.6
Imp quarts)
Page 5430
Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Testing and Inspection Airbag Warning Light Remains Off
DIAGNOSIS:
- Fuse No.5 (in fuse box) is blown.
- Body harness circuit is open.
- Airbag warning light is faulty.
- Airbag main harness is faulty.
- Airbag control module is faulty.
CAUTION:
- Before diagnosing the airbag system, be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
ground cable from the battery, and wait more than 20 seconds before starting to work.
- Before replacing the airbag module, roll connector, control module, and sensor, reconnect each
part and confirm that the warning light operates properly.
- When inspecting the airbag main harness, disconnect the airbag module connector of the driver
and passenger seats for safety reasons.
Wiring Diagram
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5092
3. Install ABS sensor harness to strut.
4. Install bolts which secure brake hose to strut.
5. Install wheels.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Using a coil spring compressor, compress coil spring.
2. Using ST, remove self-locking nut.

ST 927760000 STRUT MOUNT SOCKET
3. Remove strut mount, upper spring seat and rubber seat from strut. 4. Gradually decreasing
compression force, and remove coil spring. Remove dust cover and helper spring.
ASSEMBLY
1. Before installing coil spring, strut mount, etc., on the strut, check for the presence of air in the
dampening force generating mechanism of the strut
since air prevents proper dampening force from being produced.
2. Checking for the presence of air
1. Place the strut vertically with the piston rod facing up. 2. Move the piston rod to the center of its
entire stroke. 3. While holding the piston rod end with fingertips, move the rod up and down. 4. If
the piston rod moves at least 10 mm (0.39 inch) in the former step, purge air from the strut.
3. Air purging procedure
1. Place the strut vertically with the piston rod facing up. 2. Fully extend the piston rod. 3. With the
piston rod fully extended, place the piston rod side down. The strut must stand vertically. 4. Fully
contract the piston rod. 5. Repeat 3 or 4 times from the first step.
NOTE: After completely purging air from the strut, be sure to place the strut with the piston rod
facing up. If it is laid down, check for entry of air in the strut as outlined under "Checking for the
presence of air".
4. Using a coil spring compressor, compress the coil spring.
NOTE: Make sure that the vertical installing direction of coil spring is as shown in figure.
Page 1993
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 1543

Page 6278
Page 4554
Page 3329
Parking Pawl Rod Replacement - Use the following information for claim submission:
Enter the applicable part number(s). Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus applicable
handling allowance.
Disclaimer
Repair Procedures
^ Park the vehicle over a lift
^ Turn the engine off and leave the ignition switch in the "Off" position
^ Place the transmission shift selector in the "3" range position

Page 1440
INSPECTION
port.
Page 3000

Page 4933
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery minus terminal.
2. Lift vehicle and remove jack-up plate.
3. Remove one pipe joint at the center of gearbox, and connect vinyl hose to pipe and joint.
Discharge fluid by turning steering wheel fully clockwise
and counterclockwise. Discharge fluid similarly from the other pipe.
CAUTION: Improper removal and installation of parts often causes fluid leak trouble. To prevent
this, clean the surrounding portions before disassembly and reassembly, and pay special attention
to keep dirt and other foreign matter from mating surfaces.
4. Remove clamp E from pipes C and D. 5. Disconnect Pipe C-D from pipe (on the gearbox side).
CAUTION: ^
When disconnecting pipe C-D, use two wrenches to prevent deformities.

Specifications
Clutch Release Bearing: Specifications
Release Bearing Grease-packed self-aligning

Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraint System - Seat Belts Retract Slowly
NUMBER: 17-08-04
DATE: 11/12/04

INTRODUCTION
PARTS INFORMATION
Caution:
Page 4811
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Locations
Connector Location

Page 5509
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 4902
Alignment: Tools and Equipment
Front Suspension / Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
Front Suspension / General Purpose Tools
GENERAL PURPOSE TOOLS

Page 3556
stay.
Service and Repair
Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair
UNIVERSAL JOINT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove universal joint bolts and then remove universal joint.
CAUTION: Scribe alignment marks on universal joint so that it can be reassembled at the original
serration.
INSTALLATION
1. Install universal joint.
1. Align bolts hole on the long yoke side of universal joint with the cutout at the serrated section of
shaft end, and insert universal joint. 2. Align bolt hole on the short yoke side of universal joint with
the cutout at the serrated section of gearbox assembly. Lower universal joint
completely.
3. Temporarily tighten bolt on the short yoke side. Raise universal joint to make sure the bolt is
properly passing through the cutout at the
serrated section.
4. Tighten bolt on the long yoke, then that on the short yoke side.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that universal joint bolt is tightened through notch in shaft serration.
^ Excessively large tightening torque of universal joint bolts may lead to heavy steering wheel
operation.
Standard clearance between gearbox to DOJ: Over 15 mm (0.59 inch)
2. Align center of roll connector.
CAUTION: Ensure that front wheel are set straight forward direction.
3. Install steering wheel and airbag module.
equipped). Refer to Restraint Systems.
INSPECTION
Auto A/C
Manual A/C

Page 6267
greatly lowered.
Page 2364

Page 969
Front differential gear oil Recommended oil
3. REAR DIFFERENTIAL
1. Drain oil by removing drain boll or plug. 2. Remove filler bolt or plug for quick draining oil. 3.
Tighten drain bolt or plug after draining oil.
CAUTION: -

Tightening torque: 2200 cc AT model: 3414 Nm (3.5 ± 0.4 kg-m, 25 ± 2.9 ft.lb) Except 2200 cc AT
model: 491 9.8 Nm (5 ± 1 kg-m, 36 ± 7.2 ft.lb)
4. After installing drain boll or plug onto rear differential gear case firmly, fill oil up fully to the mouth
of filler bolt or plug.
Oil capacity: 0.8 l (0.8 US qt, 0.7 Imp qt)

Interrupt Relay
Brakes - Brake Pad Rust Prevention
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Pad Rust Prevention
PREVENTIVE MEASURE FOR SURFACE RUST AROUND DISK BRAKE PAD
If you encounter a complaint that the brake pad is not sliding properly or that a squeaking type
noise can be heard even though the brake performance is normal, and the vehicle is operated in
the salt belt or coastal areas, there is a possibility the brake pad portion may have some surface
rust on it. The cure is to apply a thin coat of grease (Molykote AS-880N or equivalent) to the parts
as shown below.
1) Apply a thin coat of Molykote AS-880N (P/N: K0777YA010) or equivalent to frictional portion
between pad and inner shim.
Page 1971
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1729
Page 2727
3. Install rear exhaust pipe to center exhaust pipe.
16. Install fuel filler pipe protector.
17. Install rear right wheel. 18. Lower the vehicle. 19. Tighten wheel nuts.
20. Connect battery ground terminal. 21. Remove fuel filler pipe to under side of the vehicle.
Page 979
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential
A: REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect ground terminal from battery. 2. Jack-up vehicle and support it with sturdy racks.
3. Remove the oil drain plug and filler plug, and drain the gear oil.
CAUTION: Be careful not to burn your hands, because gear oil becomes extremely hot after
running.
4. Tighten oil drain plug.
Fluid packing: THREE BOND 1105 or equivalent Tightening torque: 49.0 Nm(5.0 kgf-m, 3fi2 ft. lbs.)
5. Fill differential carrier with gear oil to the upper plug level.
CAUTION: Carefully refill oil while watching the level. Excess or insufficient oil must be avoided.
Oil capacity: 0.8 L (0.8 US qt. 0.7 Imp qt.)
6. Install filler plug.
Fluid packing: THREE BOND 1105 or equivalent Tightening torque: T-type: 49.0 Nm (5.0 kgf-m,
3fi2 ft. lbs.) VA-type: 33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.6 ft. lbs.)
Page 794
INSTALLATION
RH SIDE
LH SIDE
Page 299
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 3732
Pressure Plate: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Pressure plate Fasteners 15.7+- 1.4 NM 11.6+- 1.1 Foot Lbs.

SERVICE TIP:
Page 674
INSTALLATION
1. AUTO A/C
2. MANUAL A/C
"FULL HOT".
Page 4559
3. Be extremely careful not to damage, scratch, or dent cylinder inside wall, pistons, and piston
cups. 4. Do not drop parts. Never attempt to use any part that has been dropped accidentally.
2. ASSEMBLING PROCEDURE 1. Assembling piston assembly: Apply recommended brake fluid

to inside wall of cylinder, and to outer surface of piston assembly, and install piston
assemblies carefully into cylinder.
2. Assembling cylinder pin:
3. Press the pawl and install the piston retainer into the master cylinder. (Without VDC) 4. Using
pliers, install C-ring in its groove. (With VDC)
CAUTION: Make sure to install it firmly to groove.
5. Install seal to reservoir tank. 6. Install pin with drift pins which secures reservoir tank to master
cylinder.
Engine Controls - DTC P1700, P1711, P1712
Wiring Harness: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P1700, P1711, P1712
TITLE: Diagnostic Trouble Codes After WWK-94
APPLIES TO: All models affected by WWK-94
SERVICE TIP:
If you have a vehicle come in with any of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), check the
Vehicle History to see if prior work was performed on the transmission that involved removal of the
transmission oil pan. Subaru has received several calls concerning these codes on vehicles where
the WWK-94 campaign had recently been done.
In most cases, these codes were the result of a loose ground wire in the transmission where it
fastens to the valve body. Tightening the ground wire was all it took to repair the problem.
Be advised that this condition is considered a comeback and is NOT a matter for warranty.
Diagrams
Intake Air Duct: Diagrams
A: COMPONENT
1 of 2
Page 6567
5) Remove screws that secure bracket to fog lamp assembly (See Figure 3).
6) Remove bracket from fog lamp assembly (See Figure 4).
7) Replace lens and body as necessary.
8) Reinstall in reverse order of disassembly.
9) Using the chart shown, check and adjust aiming of fog light.
Page 5577
Figure 3).
Page 5428
Step 2 - 6
Page 1896
Page 4712
Page 648
Page 5943
Page 4515
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 3769
Page 1257
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove access lid.
2. Remove oil filter with ST.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Get a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of engine oil to the seal rubber. 2. Install oil filter by
turning it by hand, being careful not to damage seal rubber. 3. Tighten more (approximately 2/3 to
3/4 turn) after the seal rubber contacts the oil pump case. Do not tighten excessively, or oil may
leak.
Page 5985

Page 4267
9. Remove air bleeder screws from the RL and RR caliper bodies.
performs
15. Read values indicated on the pressure gauges and check if they meet the standard values. 16.
1. Prepare for operating ABS sequence control. 2. Set the front wheels or rear wheels on the brake
tester and set the select lever's position at "neutral". 3. Operate the brake tester. 4. Perform ABS
sequence control. 5. When the hydraulic unit begins to work, check the following working
sequence.

3. CHECKING THE HYDRAULIC UNIT VDC OPERATION BY PRESSURE GAUGE 1. Lift-up

CAUTION: -
Page 2009
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
data.
AT VEHICLES
Page 6878
W/D-01
Front
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front
INSPECTION
Check read thickness A
CAUTION: -
- Replace pad if there is oil or grease on it.

Page 1037
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Page 2245

Page 2255

Page 3097
radios, etc.
6) Turn off all electronic devices that can generate electromagnetic waves (mobile phones, pagers,
etc. - no radios).
7) Turn off the vehicle's electrical devices before reprogramming (every light, seat heater, audio
system. Do not use the cigarette lighter, power seat switch, etc. during reprogramming)
8) Do not attempt ECM reprogramming if the vehicle's under hood temperature is below 32° F (0°
Celsius).
Clutch Pedal Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeaking Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Page 297
Page 2325
Page 700
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT

Page 2934

Page 5522
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 5685
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Locations
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 4765
Page 6535
C/L-03
Fuse Locations: For fuse locations refer to Starting and Charging / Power and ground Distribution:
See: Power and Ground Distribution
NOTE:
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
Page 6448

Diagrams
Heater Unit
Page 3871
Fail Code JAB-48.
Disclaimer
Page 6358

Page 6416
S/BELT-01
Page 5787
Front Door Panel: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
1. Using special tool, loosen body-side bolts of upper and lower hinges to align the position of front
door panel longitudinally and vertically.
ST 925610000 DOOR HINGE WRENCH
2. Loosen door-side bolts of upper and lower hinges to align the position of front door panel
vertically and laterally at the front end.
3. Loosen screw (A) and tap striker (B) using plastic hammer to adjust striker.
CAUTION: Do not use impact wrench. Welding area on striker nut plate is easily broken.
Page 1321
12. Connect hoses to purge control solenoid valve.
13. Install engine harness onto intake manifold. 14. Connect connectors to fuel injectors and purge
control solenoid valve.
15. Hold engine harness by harness band (*)
NOTE: Do not use harness band on harnesses where they are supposed to be protected by the
fuel pipe protector.
16. Install fuel pipe protector RH.

Page 4524
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Brake Line
INSPECTION
Ensure there are no cracks, breakage, or damage on pipes. Check joints for fluid leakage. If any
cracks, breakage, damage or leakage is found, repair or replace pipe.
NOTE: Use a mirror when inspecting low-visible part or back side.

Page 6233
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 2039
Page 1649
Note:
Note:

Page 4674
yellow)
Page 1210
B: ADJUSTMENT
PULLEY WRENCH
valve rocker nut.
CAUTION: ^
end face.
clearances.
Page 1601

Page 5417
Side Air Bag: Testing and Inspection Side Airbag Harness
INSPECTION

Page 2144

Service and Repair
A: REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect ground cable from battery. 2. Move select lever or gear shift lever to "N". 3. Release
the parking brake. 4. Remove rear differential protector. (if equipped)
5. Remove oil drain plug, and drain gear oil. 6. Install oil drain plug.
Tightening torque: T-type: 49 Nm (5.0 kgf-m, 36.2 ft. lbs.) VA-type: 33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.6 ft. lbs.)
7. Jack-up rear wheels and support the vehicle body with sturdy racks. 8. Remove rear exhaust
pipe and muffler.
9. Remove propeller shaft from body.
10. Remove self-locking nut while holding companion flange with ST.
ST 498427200 FLANGE WRENCH

Page 3999
Page 1349
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 5815
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
Rear Inner Remote
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim. 2. Remove the sealing cover. 3. Remove the two rod joints.
4. Remove the inner remote.
INSTALLATION

Page 1782
Page 944
Coolant: Service Precautions
Page 3393
Page 5783
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair
Front Door Latch Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim. 2. Remove the sealing cover. 3. Remove the front inner remote.
4. Remove the three screws and bolt. 5. Disconnect the connector. Remove the front door latch
assembly.
INSTALLATION

Page 2933
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Coolant Capacity MT 6.0 L
Approximate
AT 6.2 L
Page 331
Recall 01V034000: Seat Rail Latch Defect
Seat Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 01V034000: Seat Rail Latch Defect
Vehicle Description: Passenger vehicles equipped with manually-adjustable (non-powered) seats.
Certain inner front slide rail latch mechanisms may have been improperly welded. If an inner slide
rail latch mechanism breaks due to improper welding, forward and rearward seat adjustment will no
longer be possible. In the event of a crash, the slide rails could break, exposing the occupant to a
risk of injury. Dealers will replace one or both front seat inner slide rails. Owner notification began
March 30, 2001. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon
service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Subaru at
1-800-782-2783. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety
Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Page 3433
Except VTD model
VTD model
Page 2947
4. Overheating
colder heat range.
Page 4608
Removal of ECU
NOTE:

assembly
CAUTION:
figure 2.
NOTE:

Page 1209
clearances.
NOTE: ^
facing up.

Page 5289
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Oil Type ...............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. ZXL200PG
Page 1394
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
and Repair. 5. Remove camshaft sprocket. Refer to Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods; Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket; Service and Repair.
MT Vehicles
AT Vehicles
6. Remove crankshaft sprocket.
B: INSTALLATION
MT Vehicles
AT Vehicles
Specifications

Page 3997

Page 2445
Page 5670
Security Horn Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 773
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 3323
In addition, some vehicles outside of the affected VIN range may have had a new or
remanufactured replacement transmission installed that contains an affected parking rod. SOA has
identified these vehicles and included them in this recall.
NOTE:
OWNER NOTIFICATION
There will be two owner notification letters sent to owners of affected vehicles.
Page 6023
Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Rear Door Lock Actuator
Rear Door Lock Actuator
If NG, replace the door lock actuator.

Page 6238
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 1457
Note:
PART INFORMATION
Page 6471
REMOVAL
assembly.
INSTALLATION

Page 2242

Page 653
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 1642
Note:
Note:

Page 4937
Check all disassembled parts for wear, damage or other abnormalities. Repair or replace faulty
parts as required.
CAUTION: Although surface layer materials of rubber hoses have excellent weathering resistance,
heat resistance and resistance for low temperature brittleness, they are likely to be damaged
chemically by brake fluid, battery electrolyte, engine oil and automatic transmission fluid and their
service lives are to be very shortened. It is very important to keep the hoses free from before
mentioned fluids and to wipe out immediately when the hoses are adhered with the fluids.
Since resistance for heat or low temperature brittleness are gradually declining according to time
accumulation of hot or cold conditions for the hoses and their service lives are shortening
accordingly, it is necessary to perform careful inspection frequently when the vehicle is used in hot
weather areas, cold weather area and/or a driving condition in which many steering operations are
required in short time.
Particularly continuous work of relief valve over 5 seconds causes to reduce service lives of the
hoses, the oil pump, the fluid, etc. due to over heat.
So, avoid to keep this kind of condition when servicing as well as driving.
Page 4433
Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Measure the lining thickness.
Lining thickness: Standard 4.1 mm (0.161 inch) Service limit 1.5 mm (0.059 inch)
2. If the deformation or wear of back plate, shoe, etc. are notable, replace them. 3. When the shoe
return spring tension is excessively weakened, replace it, taking care to identify upper and lower
springs.
Page 4154
Page 4002

Service and Repair
Splash Guard: Service and Repair
FRONT UNDER COVER
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up the vehicle. 2. Loosen bolts and clips to remove under cover.
INSTALLATION

Page 6631
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 5659
Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove front cover (A).
2. Remove two screws (B) and then remove center panel (C) while disconnecting connector.
3. Remove fitting screws, and slightly pull radio out from center console. 4. Disconnect electric
connectors and antenna feeder cord and then disconnect heater control unit.
INSTALLATION

Page 6224
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection

- Inspect the continuity between each connector terminal. If continuity is not as specified, replace
the switch.
- Intermittent operation inspection
1. Turn the wiper switch to INT. 2. Adjust the intermittent control switch to MAX.
Page 2232

Campaign - Engine Cylinder Head Coolant Leaks
Technical Service Bulletin # WWP-99 Date: 040201
NUMBER: WWP-99
DATE: 02/2004
APPLICABILITY: 2000-2002MY Subaru Legacy and Outback; 1999-2002MY Impreza;

1999-2002MY Forester
SUBJECT: Engine Cooling System Conditioner
INTRODUCTION
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that over time, affected vehicles may develop small
external coolant leaks at engine cylinder head gaskets . This is the result of normal expansion and
contraction of engine components caused by the heating and cooling of these parts. To prevent
cylinder head gasket leaks from developing or to correct existing leaks, a special Subaru Cooling
System Conditioner should be added to affected vehicle cooling systems.
This Service Program will involve adding one bottle of Genuine Subaru Cooling System
Conditioner to the engine cooling system.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
2000-2002 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback with 2.5L engine.
1999-2002 MY Impreza with 2.5L engine.
1999-2002 MY Forester with 2.5L engine.
Affected vehicles are identified in the VIN range chart below. Only vehicles with a 2.5L engine are
affected.
NOTE:
Vehicles identified in the preceding chart may include VINs that were not distributed in the U.S.
market. Dealers will be provided a list of VINs that include the owner name and address. This
information will enable dealers follow-up with owners of potentially affected vehicles. These listings
contain owners names and addresses obtained from State Motor Vehicle Registration Records.
The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any other
Page 3228
DISCLAIMER
Page 2750
2 of 2
Page 1880
Page 2060
Page 1289
9. Install generator and V-belt in the reverse order of removal, and adjust the V-belt deflection.
Page 3692
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove clutch switches.
2. Remove clips, assist spring assembly and bush.
3. Remove spring pin and lever.
4. Remove clutch pedal and bushes.
5. Remove stopper, clip, O-ring, rod S, and then remove spring and bush S. 6. Remove stoppers
from clutch pedal. 7. Remove clutch pedal pad.
D: ASSEMBLY
1. Attach stop light switch, etc. to pedal bracket temporarily. 2. Clean inside of bores of clutch pedal
and brake pedal, apply grease, and set bushings into bores.
Page 2937
Page 776
Page 3309

Page 2877
Interrupt Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 4817
Relay And Fuse

Service and Repair
Steering Gear Seal: Service and Repair
REPLACEMENT
Valve Housing Oil Seal Specified steering grease: VALIANT GREASE M2 (Part No. 003608001) 1.
Pry off dust seal using screwdriver.
2. Remove snap ring using snap ring pliers.
3. Pry off oil seal using screwdriver.
CAUTION: After removing, check inside surface of valve housing for damage. If oil seal contacting
surface is damaged, replace valve housing with a new one.
4. Press-fit oil seal into valve housing using ST and press.
NOTE: Before fitting, coat oil seal fully with ATF DEXRON IIE or ATF DEXRON III.
5. Fit snap ring in snap ring groove using snap ring pliers.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil seal with snap ring pliers.
NOTE: Rotate snap ring to check for proper installation.
Pinion and Valve Assembly

Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
A: REMOVAL
1. Thoroughly drain brake fluid from reservoir tank.
2. Remove snap pin, clevis pin and separate push rod of master cylinder from clutch pedal. 3.
Remove air cleaner case and air intake duct. 4. Remove clutch pipe from master cylinder.
5. Remove master cylinder with reservoir tank.
CAUTION: Be extremely careful not to spill brake fluid. Brake fluid spilt on the vehicle body will
harm the paint surface; wipe it off quickly if spilt.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install master cylinder to body, and install clutch pipe to master cylinder.
CAUTION: Check that pipe is routed properly.
Tightening torque: T1: 15 Nm f1.5 kgf-m, 10.8 ft. lbs.) T2: 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 ft. lbs.)
Locations
Page 3101
Page 504
Specifications
Fuel Injector: Specifications Fuel Injector
Fuel Injector
Fuel Injector Resistance 5-20 ohms

Page 4166

CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Page 4063
Operation
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Operation
NOTE: Before making repairs, conduct the oil return operation to return the compressor oil in
circulation with the refrigerant to the compressor.
1. Increase engine rpm to 1,500. 2. Turn ON the A/C switch. 3. Turn the temperature control switch
to MAX COOL. 4. Put in RECIRC position. 5. Turn the blower control switch to HI. 6. Leave in this
condition for 10 minutes.
Page 5755
6. Loosen bolts to remove rear bumper.
7. Loosen clip (A) to remove bumper beam (B) from rear bumper face (C).
8. Remove resin beam from bumper beam.
INSTALLATION
1. SEDAN
CAUTION: -
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. 2. Fit slider (A) to guide pin (B) securely.
Page 4610
NOTE:
shown.
Disclaimer
Page 4544
4. Bleed air from the pressure gauges. 5. Perform VDC sequence control. 6. When the hydraulic
FR caliper bodies. 13. Perform VDC sequence control. 14. When the hydraulic unit begins to work,
performs
4. CHECKING THE HYDRAULIC UNIT VDC OPERATION WITH BRAKE TESTER 1. Prepare for
operating VDC sequence control.
Page 3219

Page 2441
Page 1329
1. Remove fuel injector securing clip.
25. Disconnect air bypass hoses from intake manifold.
26. Loosen clamp which holds front left side fuel hose to injector pipe and remove the pipe from
clamp.
Page 6655
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 1882

Page 3597
3. Install clutch cover on flywheel and tighten bolts to the specified torque.
NOTE: ^
When installing the clutch cover on the flywheel, position the clutch cover so that there is a gap of
120° or more between "0" marks on the flywheel and clutch cover. ("0" marks indicate the
directions of residual unbalance.)
^ Note the front and rear of the clutch disc when installing.
^ Temporarily tighten bolts by hand. Each bolt should be tightened to the specified torque in a
crisscross fashion.
4. Remove ST.
ST 499747100 CLUTCH DISC GUIDE
5. Install transmission assembly.

Page 5364
Air Bag Harness: Service and Repair Side Airbag Harness
REMOVAL
20 seconds before starting work. 3. Remove front seat. 4. Remove console box. 5. Roll up floor
mat, and then disconnect two 12-pin yellow connectors from airbag control module. 6. Disconnect
connector from side airbag sensor.
7. Detach clips, and then remove side airbag harness.
INSTALLATION

Page 3069
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 4145

Locations
Security System
Page 1811
^ The thermostat must be installed with the jiggle pin (A) facing to front side.
^ At this time, set the jiggle pin of thermostat for front side.
2. Fill coolant.
Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel Cylinder Cylinder Diameter 20.6 mm

Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
Page 3334
equivalent.
Remove the gasket material from the three non-threaded holes in the case as shown.
Valve Body Installation
Caution:
Before installing the valve body, make sure that the seal (pictured) is in place.
Install the valve body while aligning the manual plate and manual valve. Do not tighten the valve
body bolts completely until confirming that the wire harness is not pinched. Tightening torque: 70
+/- 0.9 in-lb. (8 +/- 1 Nm).
Connect the connectors for each solenoid. When connecting, match the color of the harness with
that of the solenoid.
If oil temperature sensor is integrated into the harness, fix the oil sensor to clip.
Coat the oil pan with liquid gasket (as shown).
Caution:
Install the oil pan within 10 minutes of applying the liquid gasket, or as indicated by the
manufacturer's instructions.
Specifications
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Specifications
Cooling Fan Motor Main Fan 75 W
Sub Fan 75 W
Page 6713
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 1903
Part 3
Page 5703
T/C-01 - Trailer Wire Harness (Option)

Page 3816
24. Fix up boot on BJ in the same manner.
NOTE: Extend and retract SFJ to provide equal grease coating.
Removal
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal
1. Remove A/C belt. (With A/C model)
2. Remove A/C belt tensioner. (With A/C model)
3. Remove crankshaft pulley bolt. To lock crankshaft, use ST 499977100 Crankshaft Pulley
Wrench. 4. Remove crankshaft pulley.
5. Remove belt cover (LH). 6. Remove front belt cover.

Page 823
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Inspection
Timing Belt
1. Check timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks, and wear. If any fault is found, replace belt.
2. Check the condition of back side of belt; if any crack is found, replace belt.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant contact the belt. Remove quickly and
thoroughly if this happens.
- Do not bend the belt sharply.
Bending radius: h 60 mm (236 inch) or more
1. Visually check oil seals for leaks, and rod ends for abnormal wear or scratches. If necessary,
replace faulty parts.
CAUTION: Slight traces of oil at rod's oil seal does not indicate a problem.
2. Check that the adjuster rod does not move when a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) is applied
to it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness.
3. If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves freely when applying 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.), check it
using the following procedures:
1. Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the end surface of the cylinder. Repeat this motion 2 or 3
times.
2. With the adjuster rod moved all the way up, apply a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) to it.
Check adjuster rod stiffness.
3. If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves down, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly with a new one.
CAUTION:
- Always use a vertical type pressing tool to move the adjuster rod down.
- Do not use a lateral type vise.
- Push adjuster rod vertically.
- Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually taking more than three minutes.
- Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807 N (1,000 kg, 2,205 lbs.).
- Press the adjuster rod as far as the end surface of the cylinder. Do not press the adjuster rod into
Page 6281
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 1142
B: INSPECTION
1. CAMSHAFT
a) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if necessary.

Limit: 0.020 mm (0.0008 inch)
b) Check journal for damage and wear. Replace if faulty.
c) Measure outside diameter of camshaft journal and inside diameter of cylinder head journal, and
determine the difference between the two (=
oil clearance). If oil clearance exceeds specifications, replace camshaft or cylinder head as
necessary.
d) Check cam face condition; remove minor faults by grinding with oil stone. Measure the cam
height H; replace if the limit has been exceeded.
Cam height: H
Cam base circle diameter A: IN: 27.5 mm (1.083 inch) EX: 27.0 mm (1.063 inch)
2. CAMSHAFT SUPPORT
Page 4781
Page 2230
Page 6622
Page 3396
Page 767

Page 1789
Page 5147
balanced
PROCEDURE
reduced.
^ VIN
^ Mileage
Page 3358
Apply the liquid gasket into the non-threaded holes as shown.
Install oil pan and bolts. Tightening torque: 43 +/- 4 in.lb. (5 +/- 0.5 Nm).
Reinstall exhaust heat shield cover (H6 Models only).
Tap the heat shield with a rubber or plastic hammer to confirm that it will not rattle.
Note:
In case the shield rattles, reposition the shield and retighten it.
Install ATF
Lower the vehicle from the lift.
Pour 5.5 quarts (5.2 liters) of Dexron III ATF into filler pipe.
Check for oil leaks.
Check oil level and oil level gauge. If oil level is incorrect, adjust accordingly.
Note:
The level of ATF varies with fluid temperature. Pay attention to the fluid temperature when
checking oil level.
Page 5461

Page 394
H/L (4L)-01
4-Light Model
Page 1519
A: INSPECTION
measurement.
Locations
Diagrams
Front Door Glass

Page 990
The proper viscosity helps vehicle get good cold and hot starting by reducing viscous friction and
thus increasing cranking speed.
CAUTION: When replenishing oil, it does not matter if the oil to be added is a different brand from
that in the engine; however, use oil having the API classification and SAE viscosity No. designated
by SUBARU.
NOTE: If vehicle is used in desert areas with very high temperatures or for other heavy duty
applications, the following viscosity oils may be used: API classification: SJ or SH. SAE Viscosity
No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50.
6. Close engine oil filler cap. 7. Start engine and warm it up for a time.
8. After engine stops, recheck the oil level. If necessary, add engine oil up to upper level on level
gauge.
Page 4021
Page 4997
Ball Joint: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel. 2. Pull out the cotter pin from the ball stud, remove the castle nut, and
extract the ball stud from the transverse link.
3. Remove the bolt securing the ball joint to the housing. 4. Extract the ball joint from the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. Install ball joint onto housing.
Torque (Bolt): 50 Nm (5.1 kgf-cm, 37 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: Do not apply grease to tapered portion of ball stud.
2. Connect ball joint to transverse link.
Torque (Castle nut): 39 Nm (4.0 kgf-cm, 29 ft. lbs.)
3. Retighten castle nut further within 60° until a slot in castle nut is aligned with the hole in ball stud
end, then insert new cotter pin and bend it
around castle nut.
4. Install front wheel.
INSPECTION
1. Measure play of ball joint by the following procedures. Replace with a new one when the play
exceeds the specified value.
1. With 686 N (70 kg, 154 lb) loaded in the direction shown in the figure, measure dimension l1.
2. With 686 N (70 kg, 154 lb) loaded in the opposite direction shown in the figure, measure
dimension l2. 3. Calculate plays from the following formula. S = l2 - l1 4. When plays are larger
than the following value, replace with a new one.
Front Ball Joint
Specified play for replacement: S
Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
2. When play is smaller than the specified value, visually inspect the dust cover.
Page 3874
Flywheel: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove transmission assembly.
2. Install ST on flywheel.
3. Remove clutch cover and clutch disc. Refer to Clutch, M/T; Service and Repair.
CAUTION: ^
Take care not to allow oil on the clutch disc facing.
^ Do not disassemble either clutch cover or clutch disc.
4. Using ST, remove flywheel.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install flywheel and ST.
2. Tighten the flywheel attaching bolts to the specified torque.

Page 5742
Page 4020

Page 1622

Page 5639
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
Remove battery from transmitter.
NOTE: To prevent static electricity damage to transmitter printed circuit board, touch steel area of
building with hand to discharge static electricity carried on body or clothes before disassembling
transmitter.
INSTALLATION

Page 6398
Page 4070
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 2873

Page 6276
Technical Service Bulletin # WWK-94 Date: 021201
NUMBER: WWK-94 DATE: 12/2002
APPLICABILITY: 2001-03MY Legacy and Outback 4EAT 2002-03MY Impreza 4EAT 2002-03MY
Forester 4EAT 2003MY Baja 4EAT
SUBJECT: 4EAT Parking Pawl Rod
INTRODUCTION
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that affected vehicles may have been produced
with an improperly manufactured transmission parking pawl rod. The parking pawl rod may not
provide sufficient spring tension to immediately engage the parking pawl to the park gear when the
transmission is placed in the "Park" position. This may allow the vehicle to move/roll prior to
engaging.
This recall will involve the replacement of the transmission parking pawl rod and related parts on
affected vehicles.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
^ 2001-03 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback with 4EAT.
^ 2002-03 MY Impreza with 4EAT.
^ 2002-03 MY Forester with 4EAT.
^ 2003 MY Baja with 4EAT.

Page 1020
other parts.
Page 2349

Page 1361
purpose is unlawful. Accordingly dealers are urged to limit the use of this listing only for the
purpose of completion of this service program.
OWNER NOTIFICATION
SOA prepare and mail an Owner Notification Letter to owners of the affected vehicles. Because of
the number of vehicles affected and parts availability, owner notification will occur on or about the
dates listed in the following four stages.
1999 MY - February 16, 2004 2000 MY - March 1, 2004 2001 MY - April 1, 2004 2002 MY - May 3,
2004
A copy of the owner notification letter is included at the end of this bulletin.
OWNER REIMBURSEMENT FOR PREVIOUS REPAIRS
Owners are being advised in the owner notification letter, found at the end of this bulletin, that if
they have previously paid an authorized Subaru dealer for repairs related to this Service Program,
they may be entitled to reimbursement. The owners are further advised, to qualify for any
reimbursement they must submit the original repair invoice to Subaru of America, Inc. Please
review the owner notification letter, which explains this procedure so that you are familiar with it,
and can assist owners with any questions.
FUTURE MAINTENANCE
In the future, it will be necessary to add Genuine Subaru Coding System Conditioner to the coding
system of affected vehicles whenever the engine coolant is replaced. As a reminder, owners will be
sent update pages with their notification letter that instructs them to add the pages to their Owner's
Manual and Warranty and Maintenance Booklet Except for the initial application associated with
this campaign, the cost of adding the conditioner is the owner's responsibility.
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET WARRANTY EXTENSION
For owners of affected vehicles that have this Service Program performed promptly, SOA is
extending coverage under the Subaru Limited Warranty for cylinder head gasket external coolant
leaks to a period of 8 years or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first Warranty coverage begins on
the date the vehicle was delivered to the first retail purchaser. If the vehicle was used as a
demonstrator or company vehicle before being sold at retail, warranty coverage begins on the date
the vehicle was first placed in such service.
As a further condition for this extended warranty coverage to apply, the owner must properly
maintain the vehicle's cooling system in accordance with the recommended maintenance schedule
and Genuine Subaru Cooling System Conditioner must be added each time the engine coolant is
replaced. Resulting damage caused by a lack of maintenance or low coolant level will not be
covered. Replacement of the Cooling System Conditioner during inspection and maintenance
services is not covered under warranty.
Dealers are to promptly service vehicles subject to this Service Program at no charge to the vehicle
owner regardless of mileage, age of the vehicle, or ownership.
bulletin.
correct affected vehicles in their inventory (new, used, demo). Additionally, whenever a vehicle
subject to this Service Program is taken into dealer new or used inventory, or is in the dealership
for service, necessary steps should be taken to ensure the Service Program correction has been
made before selling or releasing the vehicle.
Page 634
Page 1019
greatly lowered.
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
1. DOOR SWITCH

Page 6301
C/L-03
Page 491
Page 6371

Page 38
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:

Page 1931
Interrupt Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 766
1. HEADLIGHT RELAY
is grounded.
Page 2432
the engine rear.

Page 2107
Page 4807
Relay And Fuse

Page 3519
7. Disconnect cable from select lever and then remove cable bracket. 8. Remove select cable from
plate assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install select cable to plate assembly.
4. Install snap pin to range select lever. 5. Move the select lever to the "N" position, then adjust the
select cable position.
Specifications
Fuel: Specifications
Fuel Requirements
2.5 L engine .........................................................................................................................................

................................................. 87 octane or higher
3.0 L engine .........................................................................................................................................

................................................. 91 octane or higher
Page 1505
Spark Plug
Plug Gap 0.039-0.043 in (1.0-1.1 mm)

Page 4332
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 1620
Service and Repair
Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Backup Light Bulb
REMOVAL
1. Open trunk id and remove cover 2. Turn the socket and remove the bulb
INSTALLATION

Page 4413
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear
REMOVAL
1. Remove lock pin. 2. Raise caliper body. 3. Remove pad from support.
NOTE: If brake pad is difficult to remove, use the same procedure as for front disc brake pad.
INSTALLATION
and pad clip. 2. Install pad on support. 3. Install caliper body on support.
NOTE: If it is difficult to push piston during pad replacement, loosen air bleeder to facilitate work.
Page 3418

Page 450
REMOVAL
Page 1151
Constructed from lightweight aluminum Comparable to Subaru tool # 499207300 Camshaft
alignment tool for Subaru. Constructed from lightweight aluminum. Applicable to: 2.5L DOHC
non-turbo engines.
Contact AST for Pricing
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943

Page 3105
CALIFORNIA/MASSACHUSETTS "VEHICLE EMISSION RECALL - PROOF Of CORRECTION "
CERTIFICATE
The California Air Resources Board and the Department of Motor Vehicles Registration/Recall
Program requires that all emission related Recall/Campaign or Service Program repairs be
completed before a vehicle registration is renewed. Please provide owners of vehicles registered in
the states of California and Massachusetts a completed "Vehicle Emission Recall - Proof of
Correction" certificate. Vehicle owners should be advised to retain this certificate because the
California/Massachusetts Department of Motor Vehicles may require they provide proof this service
program repair has been completed.
Credit to perform this Service Program will be based on the submission of properly completed
ECM Reprogramming Only - Use the applicable claim submission information for Reprogramming
the ECM.
For ECM Reprogramming enter labor operation 145-580 for 0.6 labor hours.
Replacement of the Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor and ECM Reprogramming - Use the applicable
claim submission information when trouble codes P0031, P0130 or P1133 were found and the
Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor is replaced and the ECM reprogrammed.
For Replacement of the Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor and ECM reprogramming enter Labor
Operation Number 145-515 for 0.9 labor hours. Parts will be reimbursed at dealer cost plus the
applicable handing allowance.
Page 2149

Page 3799
NOTE: Use 12 Nm (0.47 in) dia. holes in HUB STAND to prevent bolts from tilting.
3. Clean dust or foreign particles from inside the housing.
4. Using ST1 and ST2, press a new bearing into place.
CAUTION: ^
Always press outer race when installing bearing.
Specified grease: SHELL 6459N
5. Using pliers, install snap ring in its groove.
CAUTION: Make sure to install it firmly to groove.
6. Using ST1 and ST2, press inner oil seal until it contacts circlip.
ST1 927410000 OIL SEAL INSTALLER ST2 927400000 HOUSING STAND
7. Invert ST and housing.
ST 927400000 HOUSING STAND

Page 3959
3. Mount cushion rubber on the body.
4. Connect rod to the joint.
5. Connect stay to transmission bracket.
6. Install heat shield cover.

Page 1667
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 1802
Page 2784
7. Disconnect engine coolant hoses from throttle body.
8. Remove bolts which install throttle body to intake manifold.
AT VEHICLES

Ignition Switch
the body harness.
ignition connector.

Page 1485
Diagrams
Parking Brake Warning Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5489
Rear Seat Belt

Page 4390
Application Chart
Page 6067
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Adjustments
1. ALIGNMENT OF HEIGHT BETWEEN SUNROOF LID AND ROOF PANEL
Loosen sunroof lid installation nuts and then adjust height by adding (max: two pieces) or
extracting (max: one piece) shims (standard: one piece) between sunroof lid and body.
Difference in height between sunroof lid and roof panel: L L: 2.0 ± 0.5 mm (0.079 ± 0.020 in)
Page 2388
REMOVAL

Page 4884
Page 2333

Page 644
Technical Service Bulletin # WWP-99 Date: 040201
NUMBER: WWP-99
DATE: 02/2004
APPLICABILITY: 2000-2002MY Subaru Legacy and Outback; 1999-2002MY Impreza;

1999-2002MY Forester
SUBJECT: Engine Cooling System Conditioner
INTRODUCTION
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that over time, affected vehicles may develop small
external coolant leaks at engine cylinder head gaskets . This is the result of normal expansion and
contraction of engine components caused by the heating and cooling of these parts. To prevent
cylinder head gasket leaks from developing or to correct existing leaks, a special Subaru Cooling
System Conditioner should be added to affected vehicle cooling systems.
This Service Program will involve adding one bottle of Genuine Subaru Cooling System
Conditioner to the engine cooling system.
AFFECTED VEHICLES
2000-2002 MY Subaru Legacy and Outback with 2.5L engine.
1999-2002 MY Impreza with 2.5L engine.
1999-2002 MY Forester with 2.5L engine.
Affected vehicles are identified in the VIN range chart below. Only vehicles with a 2.5L engine are
affected.
NOTE:
Vehicles identified in the preceding chart may include VINs that were not distributed in the U.S.
market. Dealers will be provided a list of VINs that include the owner name and address. This
information will enable dealers follow-up with owners of potentially affected vehicles. These listings
contain owners names and addresses obtained from State Motor Vehicle Registration Records.
The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any other
Page 807
B: ADJUSTMENT
PULLEY WRENCH
valve rocker nut.
CAUTION: ^
end face.
clearances.
Page 3004

Component Locations
Air Bag Harness: Component Locations

Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Front Wiper Motor and Link
REMOVAL
1. Remove cowl panel. 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector.
3. Loosen bolts and nuts to remove wiper link.
4. Loosen bolts and nut to remove motor.
INSTALLATION

Page 2319
Page 3494
Page 2497

Page 1566
Note:
Page 368
Step 1 - 6
Page 6248
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 464

Page 6552
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 590
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:

Page 6213
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Vehicle - Flat Towing Information
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Information
NUMBER: 01-162-05
DATE: 06/28/05
APPLICABILITY: STi Vehicles, All Model Years
SUBJECT: Towing Recommendations
INTRODUCTION
AWD Subaru vehicles with manual transmissions can be towed with all four wheels on the ground
and the transmission in neutral. STi vehicles with 6 Speed Manual Transmissions can also be
towed with all four wheels on the ground and the transmission in neutral. In addition, STi vehicles
with 6 Speed Manual Transmissions require that the Driver's Control Center Differential (DCCD) is
set in manual mode and the DCCD control dial set to the furthest rearward position.
Please refer to the owner's manual for addition important information on towing Subaru vehicles.
Disclaimer
Specifications

Page 2914
Page 2042

Interrupt Relay
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
A: REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column. 2. Disconnect connectors from stop light and clutch switches. 3.
Remove snap pins which secure lever to push rod and operating rod.
4. Remove clevis pins which secure lever to push rod and operating rod.
5. Remove nut which secures clutch master cylinder. 6. Remove bolts and nuts which secure brake
and clutch pedals, and remove pedal assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
^ Always use new clevis pins.
2. Adjustment of clutch pedal and adjustment after pedal installation.

Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 1679
8. Remove radiator sub fan shroud through the under side of vehicle.
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque: 4.9 Nm (0.50 kgf-m. 3.6 ft. lbs.)
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove clip which holds motor harness onto shroud.
2. Remove nut which holds fan itself onto fan motor and shroud assembly.
Page 5930
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Lock Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the trunk lid key cylinder rod. 2. Remove the lock assembly cover (A).
3. Remove the nut while holding the lock assembly. Remove the lock assembly (B).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Apply grease to parts that rub.
- Make sure the lock operates properly after installation.

Page 6899
3. Apply battery voltage to switch terminals 17 and 2, and inspect the voltage of terminals 7 and 2.
(Measure the voltage from after the second
time the wiper stops.) If operation is not as specified, replace the switch.
Page 2558

Page 81
second letter.
NOTE:
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 1905
Part 2
Page 2029
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 234

Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid
2WD Refill ............................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 3.3L (7.0 Pints) 4WD Refill .........................................................
........................................................................................................................................... 3.5L (7.4
Pints)
MT Vehicles
Part 1
Page 1490

Page 5371

Page 5923
Ventilation
Caution:
Front
REMOVAL
CAUTION: -
INSTALLATION

Page 4434
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Loosen wheel nuts, jack-up vehicle, support it with rigid racks, and remove wheel. 2. Release
parking brake. 3. Remove brake drum from brake assembly.
NOTE: -
If it is difficult to remove brake drum, remove adjusting hole cover from drum, and then turn
adjuster assembly pawls using a slot-type screwdriver until brake shoe separates from the drum.
- If brake drum is difficult to remove, drive it out by installing an 8-mm bolt into bolt hole in brake
drum.
4. Hold hold-down pin by securing rear of back plate with your hand. 5. Disconnect hold-down cup
from hold-down pin by rotating hold-down cup.
6. Disconnect lower shoe return spring from shoes. 7. Remove shoes one by one from back plate
with adjuster.
Page 4704
Battery: Testing and Inspection
WARNING:
- Electrolyte has toxicity; be careful handling the fluid.
- Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Especially at contact with eyes, blush with water for 15
minutes and get prompt medical attention.
- Batteries produce explosive gasses. Keep sparks, flame, cigarettes away.
- Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed space.
- For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when
working near any battery. Never lean over a battery.
- Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint-work because battery fluid is corrosive
acid.
- To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watch-bands, and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it while you are
at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit will
be caused.
1. EXTERNAL PARTS:
Check for the existence of dirt or cracks on the battery case, top cover, vent plugs, and terminal
posts. If necessary, clean with water and wipe with a dry cloth.
Apply a thin coat of grease on the terminal posts to prevent corrosion.
2. ELECTROLYTE LEVEL:
Check the electrolyte level in each cell. If the level is below MIN LEVEL, bring the level to MAX
LEVEL by pouring distilled water into the battery cell. Do not fill beyond MAX LEVEL.
3. SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF ELECTROLYTE:
1. Measure specific gravity of electrolyte using a hydrometer and a thermometer.
Specific gravity varies with temperature of electrolyte so that it must be corrected at 20 °C (68 °F)
using the following equation:
2. Measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte in the battery will disclose the state of charge of
the battery. The relation between the specific
gravity and the state of charge is as shown in figure.

Page 3456
Page 6327

Page 1274
Page 4665
ADJUSTMENT

General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 702
CAUTION: ^
When loosening or tightening adjusting bolt, hold bolt head and turn self-locking nut.
2. Turn adjusting bolt head until toe-in is at the specification.
NOTE: When left and right wheels are adjusted for toe-in at the same time, the movement of one
scale graduation changes toe-in by approximately 3 mm (0.12 inch).
Tightening torque: 120 Mm (12.2 kgf-cm, 88 ft. lbs.)

THRUST ANGLE
Inspection 1. Position vehicle on a level surface. 2. Move vehicle 3 to 4 meters directly forward. 3.
Determine locus of both front and rear axles.
Page 195

Page 1731
Radiator: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
5. Disconnect connectors of radiator main fan (A) and sub fan (B) motor.
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 6423
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 5327
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 5198
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
Power Transistor (Heater Blower Resistor)
REMOVAL
1. Remove glove box. 2. Disconnect power transistor connector.
3. Loosen 2 screws to remove power transistor.
INSTALLATION

Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Front Catalytic Converter
FRONT CATALYTIC CONVERTER
REMOVAL
3. Disconnect front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. 4. Lift-up the vehicle. 5. Remove under cover.
6. Disconnect connector from rear oxygen sensor connector. 7. Separate center exhaust pipe from
rear exhaust pipe.
Page 2499
Page 4435
CAUTION: Be careful not to bend parking brake cable excessively when removing brake shoes.
8. Disconnect parking brake cable from parking lever.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean back plate and wheel cylinder.
2. Apply grease to portions indicated by arrows in Figure.
3. Apply grease to adjusting screw and both ends of adjuster. 4. Connect upper shoe return spring
to shoes.
Page 149
Page 4293
NUMBER: 09-45-06 DATE: 11/28/06
INTRODUCTION
Caution:
Note:
Note:
Special note:
the table.
Page 1424
Page 6794
8. Take out glass door panel upward.
CAUTION: -
Do not turn regulator in the closing direction after removal of the glass. Otherwise gear may be
disengaged.
- Avoid impact and damage to the glass.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make sure that glass stay is placed securely in sash.
2. Adjust front door glass.

Page 4209
Page 4926
Disclaimer
Page 6410
Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

SERVICE TIP:
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Mandatory Replacement Fluids
NUMBER: 01-151-00
DATE: 07/15/00
NOTE:
reference.
Department.
DISCLAIMER
Page 719
Page 2913

Page 6529

Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 2536
Page 2026
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 1573
Note:
Page 227

Page 5720
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 2795
AT VEHICLES
Page 1758
Disclaimer
Page 2641
2. Pull out the spring pin, and then remove the accelerator pedal from the accelerator pedal lever.
D: ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Clean and apply grease to spacer and inside bore of a accelerator pedal.
Page 4361
8. Install lock and guide pin boot on support.
15 inch AND 16 inch TYPE 1. Clean caliper body interior using brake fluid. 2. Apply a coat of brake
fluid to piston seal and fit piston seal in groove on caliper body. 3. Apply a coat of brake fluid to the
entire inner surface of cylinder and outer surface of piston. 4. Insert piston into cylinder.
To facilitate installation, fit boot starting with piston end.
6. Position boot in grooves on cylinder and piston. 7. Install boot ring. Be careful not scratch boot.
8. Apply a coat of specified grease to lock pin and guide pin, outer surface, cylinder inner surface,
and boot grooves. 9. Install lock pin boot and guide pin boot on support.
Rear
DISASSEMBLY
Page 5345
other parts.
Front Seat Belt
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt
REMOVAL
OUTER BELT (FRONT)
1. Fold backrest all the way forward, and then move front seat all the way forward. 2. Turn ignition
switch OFF, disconnect ground cable from battery, and wait for more than 20 seconds before
starting work. 3. Remove center pillar lower trim.
4. Remove bracket.
5. Remove webbing guide.
6. Remove anchor cover. Loosen shoulder anchor bolt, and then detach shoulder anchor from
center pillar.
Page 844
3. Install ATF filter to bracket.
4. Install ATF filter assembly to vehicle.

Page 3811
2. Remove SFJ boot band and boot.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage boot.
3. Remove circlip from SFJ outer race using screwdriver. 4. Remove SFJ outer race from shaft
assembly. 5. Wipe off grease.
CAUTION: The grease is a special grease. Do not confuse with other greases.
6. Place alignment mark on free ring and trunnion. 7. Remove free ring from trunnion.
CAUTION: Be careful with the free ring position.

Page 1525
cover (LH).
PULLEY WRENCH
CAUTION: ^
end face.
±0.0008 inch)
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 4715
Measure brush length. If brush is worn, replace brush holder assembly.
4. DIODE ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Never use a high tension insulation tester, such as a meggar as it will damage diodes
with its high tension.
The diode consists of eight diodes, four each being located on the positive and negative sides. The
diode is necessary to restrict current flow to one direction.
Check all diodes, for continuity. If any diode is faulty, replace diode assembly.
1. Diodes on "+" side Continuity of proper diodes on "+" side

Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 5496
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt
REMOVAL
OUTER BELT SIDE
1. Remove rear shelf trim. 2. Remove side sill rear upper cover.
3. Remove bolts, then detach outer belt side.
OUTER BELT CENTER
1. Remove rear shelf trim.
2. Remove bolt, and then detach outer belt center.
INNER BELT
1. Remove the rear cushion.
2. Remove bolts, and then detach inner belt.
INSTALLATION
OUTER BELT SIDE
CAUTION:
- During installation, make sure that seat belts are not twisted.
- After installation, make sure that seat belts can be smoothly extended and wound.
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
temperature sensor.
INSTALLATION

Page 4186
DISCLAIMER
Page 2967
Page 4173
Page 3635
Disclaimer
Roof Rail
Roof Rack Frame: Service and Repair Roof Rail
ROOF RAIL
REMOVAL
1. Remove roof trim. 2. Remove five mounting nuts and then detach roof rail carefully.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch body panels with roof rail stud bolts when removing and
installing them.
Page 534
DISCLAIMER
Page 2165
Page 1295
Intake Manifold: Specifications TORQUE
TORQUE
Throttle Body 22 +-2 Nm. (15.9 +-1.4 Ft. Lb.)

Page 2645

OPERATION
How to disconnect:
How to connect:
CAUTION:
Evaporative Shut Valve: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION

Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
The OEM does not provide a Maintenance Required Indicator for this model.
Page 4033

Page 5237
10. Disconnect in-vehicle temperature sensor connector.
11. Remove bolts and nuts on the unit. 12. Disconnect drain hose. 13. Remove the unit.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Replace O-rings with new ones, and apply compressor oil.
Starter Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect connector from intake air temperature sensor. (MT vehicles)

Page 5004
2. Loosen nut and remove rear bushing.
ASSEMBLY
Front Bushing
To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedures.
CAUTION: Install front bushing in correct direction, as shown in figure.
Rear Bushing 1. Install rear bushing to transverse link and align aligning marks scribed on the two.
CAUTION: ^
Discard loosened self-locking nut and replace with a new one.
^ While holding rear bushing so as not to change position of aligning marks, tighten self-locking
nut.
INSPECTION
1. Check transverse link for wear, damage and cracks, and correct or replace if defective. 2. Check
bushings for cracks, fatigue or damage. 3. Check rear bushing for oil leaks.
Page 3822
Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment

Page 3453
Page 5432
Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Testing and Inspection Airbag Warning Light Illumination Pattern
Airbag Warning Light Illumination Pattern
INSPECTION
Keep the ignition switch ON, and confirm that the airbag warning light remains off approximately 6
seconds after being turned on.
Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 1650
Note:
Page 1844
Exhaust Pipe: Testing and Inspection Center Exhaust Pipe
C: INSPECTION
holes or rusting.
INSPECTION

Page 3005

ABS
INSPECTION

CAUTION: -

Page 2812
REMOVAL
Page 4621

Page 4174

Page 3843
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Application and ID
1. PROPELLER SHAFT
1 of 2
2 of 2
Page 2460
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 2386
Part 2
Page 5675
Page 827
4. After ensuring that the marks on timing belt and camshaft sprockets are aligned, remove stopper
pin from belt tensioner adjuster.
CAUTION: After properly installing timing belt, remove rocker cover and ensure that the valve lash
adjuster contains no air.
5. Install timing belt guide. (MT vehicles only)
1) Temporarily tighten remaining bolts.
2) Check and adjust clearance between timing belt and timing belt guide by using thickness gauge.
Clearance: 1.0 ±0.5 mm (0.039 ±0.020 inch)

Page 1553
Coolant: Service Precautions
Page 2670
13. Remove bolt which installs injector pipe to intake manifold.
14. Remove bolt which holds fuel pipe on the left side intake manifold.
15. Remove fuel injector from intake manifold.
1. Remove fuel injector securing clip. (AT vehicles)
INSTALLATION
RH SIDE
Page 5033
submission:
allowance.
Page 1632
Page 4247
Clutch Switch
Page 3326
Ignition Coil Wire: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC's
P0301/P0302/P0303/P0304
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07

INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 3099
Page 1835
9. Remove front exhaust pipe and center exhaust pipe from hanger bracket.
CAUTION: Be careful not to pull down front exhaust pipe and center exhaust pipe.
10. Separate front catalytic converter from front exhaust pipe.
procedure for removing rear catalytic converter is the same as the description above.
INSTALLATION

Page 6254
Cigarette Lighter: Service and Repair
Cigarette Lighter
REMOVAL
1. Remove center panel.
2. Disconnect harness connectors and remove cigarette lighter.
INSTALLATION

Page 5928
Spray time: 12 sec.
Spray time: 8 sec.
Spray time: 8 sec.
minimum of 2 mil.
Spray time : 4 min.
Spray time : 2 min.

Page 2442
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
A: INSPECTION
NOTE: Vibration while cruising may be caused by an unbalanced tire, improper tire inflation
pressure, improper wheel alignment, etc.
Page 3248
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
module.
INSTALLATION

Page 236
DISCLAIMER
Page 2015
Page 765
Page 3549
Page 1493
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 6166
Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair
Actuator
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to apply excessive load to the wire cable when adjusting and/or installing;
otherwise, the actuator may be deformed or damaged.
- Do not bend cable sharply with a radius less than 100 mm (3.94 in); otherwise, cable may bend
permanently, resulting in poor performance.
- When installing cable, be careful not to sharply bend or pinch the inner cable; otherwise, the cable
may break.
1. Remove clip bands from cruise control cable.
2. Loosen nut which secures cruise control cable end to throttle cam and then remove cable from
throttle cam. 3. Remove actuator attaching bolts.
4. Remove actuator while disconnecting connector.
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque: 7.4 N.m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
NOTE:
A: Must be adjusted when cable end outer is fixed in place, so that gap between throttle cam and
lever is 0 - 1 mm (0 - 0.04 in).
(Must be attached while throttle cam is being pulled by wire cable.)

Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 4152
Page 850
FUEL FILTER
REMOVAL
WARNING:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

Page 4151

Page 2521
Page 970
Rear differential gear oil Recommended oil
brands.
5. Instal filler bolt or plug onto rear differential gear case firmly.
CAUTION: -
Fluid packing:
THREE BOND 1105 or equivalent
Tightening torque: 2200 cc AT model: 341 4 Nm (3.5 ± 0.4 kg-m, 25 ± 2.9 ft.lb) Except 2200 cc AT
model: 491 9.8 Nm (5 ± 1 kg-m, 36 ± 7.2 ft.lb)
Page 4754
5. Separate yoke from end frame.
6. Remove brush by lifting up positive (+) side brush spring using long-nose pliers.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage brush and commutator.
7. Remove armature from yoke.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop armature.
8. Remove screws securing magnetic switch to housing.

General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 3477
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION

Fuel Level Sensor
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING:
INSTALLATION
WARNING:

Page 4540
shown.
Disclaimer
Page 233
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 825
Timing Belt: Service and Repair Installation
INSTALLATION
Automatic Belt Tension Adjuster Assembly and Belt Idler
1. Preparation for installation of automatic belt tension adjuster assembly;
CAUTION: ^
Always use a vertical type pressing tool to move the adjuster rod down.
^ Do not use a lateral type vise.
^ Push adjuster rod vertically.
^ Be sure to slowly move the adjuster rod down applying a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.).
^ Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually taking more than three minutes.
^ Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807 N (1,000 kg, 2,205 lbs.).
^ Press the adjuster rod as far as the end surface of the cylinder. Do not press the adjuster rod into
^ Do not release press pressure until stopper pin is completely inserted.
1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster assembly to the vertical pressing tool.
2) Slowly move the adjuster rod down with a pressure of 294 N (30 kg, 66 lbs.) until the adjuster
rod is aligned with the stopper pin hole in the
cylinder.
3) With a 2 mm (0.08 inch) diameter stopper pin or a 2 mm (0.08 inch) (nominal) diameter hex bar
wrench inserted into the stopper pin hole in
the cylinder, secure the adjuster rod.

Page 3001
Page 5743
Description and Operation
Data Link Connector: Description and Operation
NOTE:
1. This connector is used both for OBD-II general scan tools and the Subaru Select Monitor. 2.
Terminal No. 4 to No. 6 of the data link connector is used for the Subaru Select Monitor signal.
CAUTION: Do not connect any scan tools other than the OBD-II general scan tools and the Subaru
Select Monitor, because the circuit for the Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.
Page 220

Page 129

NUMBER: WWM-96
DATE: July 2003
INTRODUCTION
AFFECTED VEHICLES
NOTE:
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 3067
Page 2195
B: ADJUSTMENT
PULLEY WRENCH
valve rocker nut.
CAUTION: ^
end face.
clearances.
Page 4319
Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
1. Move brake and clutch pedal pads in the lateral direction with a force of approximately 10 N (1
kg, 2 lbs.) to ensure pedal deflection is in
specified range.
CAUTION: If excessive deflection is noted, replace bushings with new ones.
2. Check position of pedal pad.
Pedal height: L 148 mm (5.83 inch) Brake pedal free play: A 1 - 3 mm (0.04 - 0.12 inch) [Depress
brake pedal pad with a force of less than 10 N (1 kg, 2 lbs.).]
3. If it is not in specified value, adjust it by adjusting brake booster operating rod length.
Page 6317
F/G (H4)-01
Page 2397

Page 4881
Relay And Fuse

Page 2512
Page 1781
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 1411
4. Measure the extension of rod beyond the body. If it is not within specifications, replace with a
new one.
Rod extension: H 5.7 ±0.5 mm (0.224 ±0.020 inch)
Belt Tension Pulley
1. Check mating surfaces of timing belt and contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
scratches. Replace automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly if faulty.
2. Check tension pulley for smooth rotation. Replace if noise or excessive play is noted.
3. Check tension pulley for grease leakage.
Belt Idler
1. Check belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace if noise or excessive play is noted.
2. Check belt outer contacting surfaces of idler pulley for abnormal wear and scratches.
3. Check belt idler for grease leakage.
Camshaft and Crankshaft Sprocket
1. Check sprocket teeth for abnormal wear and scratches.
2. Make sure there is no freeplay between sprocket and key.
3. Check crankshaft sensor sprocket notch for sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
matter.
Page 1955

Page 1618

Page 3810
2. Using ST1 and ST2, pull drive shaft into place.
ST1 922431000 AXLE SHAFT INSTALLER ST2 927390000 ADAPTER
CAUTION: Do not hammer drive shaft when installing it.
3. Tighten axle nut temporarily.
4. Install SFJ on transmission spindle and drive spring pin into place.
CAUTION: Always use a new spring pin.
5. Connect transverse link to housing.
Tightening torque (self-locking nut): 49 Nm (5.0 kgf-m, 36 ft. lbs.)
6. Install stabilizer bracket. 7. While depressing brake pedal, tighten axle nut to the specified
torque.
Tightening torque: 2.5L MODEL 186 Nm (19 kgf-m, 137 ft. lbs.) 3.0L MODEL 216 Nm (22 kgf-m,
159 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: ^
Use a new axle nut (3.0L model: Olive color, 2.5L model: Gold color).
bearing.
8. After tightening axle nut, lock it securely.
Disassembly and Assembly
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Place alignment marks on shaft and outer race.

Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3295
4. Connect ATF cooler hoses from ATF filter.
NOTE: ^
5. Connect ATF cooler hoses from radiator.
NOTE: ^
6. Install front left mud guard. 7. Install the under cover. 8. Install battery and washer tank. 9. Fill
ATF.
Locations
Relay And Fuse

Page 3739
Locations
Connector Location

Page 2616
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(H6)-243 Engine
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(H6)-243A Engine

Page 4241
NUMBER: 06-31-03 DATE: 07/15/03
INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
REPAIR PROCEDURE
Removal of ECU
NOTE:
Pressure Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Cold Clutch Judder
NUMBER:03-51-02R DATE: 05/01/03
APPLICABILITY:
Vehicles

INTRODUCTION

Page 696
CAMBER
Adjustment 1. Loosen two self-locking nuts located at lower front portion of strut.
CAUTION: ^
When adjusting bolt needs to be loosened or tightened, hold its head with a wrench and turn
self-locking nut.
2. Turn camber adjusting bolt so that camber is set at the specification.


Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 2229

Page 4242
assembly.
CAUTION:
figure 2.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Page 6598
HORN RELAY
Page 6220
second letter.
NOTE:
Specifications

Hydraulic Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Sticking
NUMBER: 03-52-03R DATE: 07/15/03

INTRODUCTION
PROCEDURE
37 +/- 3 Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft. lbs.
5) Add brake fluid.
For Turbo models
Nm (3.8 +/- 0.3 kgm) or 27 +/- 2 ft.lbs.
4) Add brake fluid.


Page 6414
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Component Locations

Page 4638
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 646
Page 173
INSTALLATION
Page 6326
parts.
Page 4981
1. Insert ST from pinion housing side and remove oil seal using a press.
ST 34199AE050 REMOVER OIL SEAL
NOTE: Discard removed oil seal.
2. Force-fit oil seal using ST.
ST 34199AE050 INSTALLER
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage or scratch cylinder inner wall.
NOTE: ^
Apply specified power steering fluid to oil seal.
^ Pay special attention not to install oil seal in wrong direction.
^ Push oil seal until the stepped portion of A contacts end face of B.
Page 1587

Page 3896
DISCLAIMER
Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Steering - Power Steering Groan/Vibration
NUMBER: 04-11-04 DATE: 01/15/04
INTRODUCTION
claim information.
Page 1351
OIL/P-01
Page 437
Horn Switch
REMOVAL
module.
INSTALLATION

Specifications
Timing Belt Tensioner: Specifications
Timing Belt Tensioner Belt Tensioner Adjuster Protrusion of Adjuster Rod 5.2 - 6.2 mm
Belt Tensioner Spacer O.D. 17.955 - 17.975 mm
Tensioner Bush I.D. 18.00 - 18.08 mm
Clearance Between Spacer and Bush Standard 0.025 - 0.125 mm
Limit 0.175 mm
Side Clearance Of Spacer Standard 0.20 - 0.55 mm
Limit 0.81 mm
Clearance ---
Page 153

Page 2701
13. Fuel return hose C 14. Evaporation hose G 15. Clamp 16. Grommet 17. Fuel pipe ASSY 18. Air
vent hose A 19. Evaporation hose H 20. Evaporation hose I 21. Air vent hose B 22. Air vent pipe
23. Evaporation hose J 24. Evaporation hose K 25. Evaporation hose L 26. Fuel tank pressure
sensor hose 27. Fuel filler hose 28. Evaporation pipe B 29. Fuel tank pressure sensor 30. Fuel filler
pipe 31. Ring A 32. Fuel filler cap 33. Ring B 34. Packing 35. Shut valve 36. Evaporation hose M
37. Evaporation hose N 38. Canister 39. Canister lower bracket 40. Cushion rubber 41. Canister
upper bracket 42. Drain valve 43. Drain filter 44. Drain filter hose A 45. Drain valve hose 46. Drain
filter hose B 47. Pressure control solenoid valve 48. Evaporation hose O 49. Evaporation pipe C
50. Pipe protector 51. Evaporation hose P 52. Pressure control solenoid valve hose 53. Canister
front bracket
Tightening torque: N.m (kgf-m, ft-lb) T1: 4.5 (0.46, 3.3)
T2: 7.5 (0.76, 5.5)
T3: 18 (1.8, 13.0)
T4: 23 (2.3, 16.6)
T5: 33 (3.4, 25)

Page 3424
Page 6059
2. Confirm the matching mark (A) of sunroof bracket link. 3. Install sunroof motor. 4. After installing
the motor, reconfirm the matching marks of motor side and sunroof bracket link side. 5. Connect
sunroof motor harness connector and then connect battery ground cable. 6. Operate the sunroof
switch, and check the sunroof stop position. 7. Move sunroof to completely closed position and
install sunroof lid.
8. Check the sunroof operation with the procedure as shown in the figure. 9. Install trims in the
reverse order of removal.
Page 5623
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 5072
Important:
solvent.

Note:
Page 3571
DISCLAIMER
Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
Page 4827

Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 2720
15. Remove bolts which hold rear sub frame on body.
16. Lower the rear sub frame.
CAUTION: Be sure to lower sub frame slowly.
17. Remove fuel filler pipe protector. 18. Disconnect air vent hose (A) and evaporation hose (H)
from evaporation pipe assembly.
Page 4062

Page 4239
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:

Page 2019
Page 1057
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
temperature sensor.
INSTALLATION

Page 1533
Page 284
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 2667
1. Remove fuel injector securing clip. (AT vehicle)
LH SIDE

Diagrams
Locations
Shifter A/T: Locations
A: LOCATION
1 of 2
Page 4614
shown.
Disclaimer
Page 470
INSTALLATION

Page 6429
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Seat Belts Retract Slowly
NUMBER: 17-08-04
DATE: 11/12/04

INTRODUCTION
PARTS INFORMATION
Caution:
Page 4764
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 3800
8. Using ST1 and ST2, press outer oil seal until it contacts the bottom of housing.
ST1 927410000 OIL SEAL INSTALLER ST2 927400000 HOUSING STAND
9. Apply sufficient grease to oil seal lip.
Specified grease: SHELL 6459N
CAUTION: ^
If specified grease is not available, remove bearing grease and apply Auto Rex A instead.
10. Install disc cover to housing the three bolts.
11. Attach hub to ST1 securely. 12. Clean dust or foreign particles from the polished surface of
hub.
13. Using ST2, press bearing into hub by driving inner race.
ST1 927080000 HUB STAND ST2 927120000HUB INSTALLER

Page 6034
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 6876
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 4979
1. Remove snap ring using snap ring pliers.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse removed snap ring.
^ Be careful not to scratch pinion and valve assembly.
2. Press out bearing together with backing washer using pipe of I.D. 38.5 to 39.5 mm (1.516 to 1.55
inch) and press.
CAUTION: Do not reuse removed bearing.
3. Remove oil seal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse removed oil seal.
4. Put vinyl tape around pinion shaft splines to protect oil seal from damage. 5. Fit pinion and valve
assembly into valve housing.
NOTE: Apply specified power steering fluid to outer diameter surface of input shaft and outer
surface of valve body seal ring, and pay special attention not to damage seal when inserting pinion
and valve assembly.
Page 3565
Page 4067
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 404
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 926
Brake Fluid: Service Precautions
ON VEHICLE SERVICE
WARNING: -
Brake fluid may irritate eyes and skin. In case of contact, take the following actions;
- Eye contact - rinse thoroughly with water.
- Skin contact - wash with soap and water.
- If ingested - consult a physician immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is extremely damaging to paint. If fluid should accidentally touch painted
surface, immediately wipe fluid from paint and clean painted surface.
Page 3460
B: ADJUSTMENT
Page 4305
yellow)
Page 608

Page 3187

Page 1482

Seat Belt Retractor: Recalls Recall - Seat Belt Retractor Cover Bolt Torque
AFFECTED VEHICLES
NOTE:
OWNER NOTIFICATION
Page 551

Page 2379
Part 2
Page 5462
Disarming
Arming

Ignition Coil: Customer Interest Ignition System - DTC's P0301/P0302/P0303/P0304
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 1144
(4) Tighten bolts (a) through (h) in alphabetical sequence.
(5) Tighten TORX bolts (i) through (n) in alphabetical sequence using ST.
ST 499497000 TORX PLUS Tightening torque: 18 ± 2 Nm (1.8 ± 0.2 kg-m, 13.0 ± 1.4 ft. lbs.)
(6) Tighten bolts (o) through (v) in alphabetical sequence.
(7) Tighten bolts (w) through (x) in alphabetical sequence.

Page 4007
DISCLAIMER
Page 4657
mm (0.08 - 0.16 inch)
made. -
Page 1891
Page 3042
Part 2
Page 643
Page 5298
Page 1733
12. Disconnect radiator inlet hose from engine.
13. Remove radiator upper brackets.
14. Detach power steering hose from the clip on the radiator. 15. While slightly lifting radiator, slide
it to left.
16. Lift radiator up and away from vehicle.
B: INSTALLATION
Page 1294
AT Vehicles
Page 4005

Page 2345

Page 3749
Differential Mount: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Check rear differential member for damage, bend, or corrosion.
If damage, bend, or corrosion is excessive, replace rear differential member.
2. Check bushings of rear differential member for cracking, hardening, or damage.
If cracking, hardening, or damage is excessive, replace rear differential member.

Page 6401
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Wheels/Tires - Wheel Lock Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Wheel Lock Installation/Removal
NUMBER: 15-125-07 DATE: 08/29/07
APPLICABILITY: All Vehicles SUBJECT: Subaru Wheel Locks
Introduction
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide the proper procedure for removing and installing Subaru
wheel locks. Failure to follow this procedure can cause damage to the wheel locks and/or wheels.
1) Remove one lug nut from each wheel. If wheel studs are dirty, clean with a wire brush prior to
installing locks. Use extreme care to prevent damage to the wheel.
2) By hand, install one wheel lock on each wheel.
3) Using the special wheel lock key and a torque wrench, tighten each wheel lock to the proper lug
nut torque specification (refer to the applicable Subaru Service Manual).
NOTE:
For ease of installation and removal, the wheel lock should always be the last lug nut tightened on
each wheel and should always be the first one removed.
WARNING:
Use of an impact wrench may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock and key.
Warranty Information
Wheel locks and/or keys that are damaged due to improper installation and/or removal is not a
matter for warranty.
Disclaimer
Page 2142

Page 6746
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Page 1466
INSPECTION
Check for:
Page 1389
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
Page 5189
Intake Unit
Page 4480
Note:
Page 5422
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Side Airbag Module
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- The side airbag module cannot be detached from the front seat assembly.
- When replacing side airbag module, replace front seat assembly.
INSTALLATION
Refer to Front Seat.
Side Airbag Harness
REMOVAL
20 seconds before starting work. 3. Remove front seat. 4. Remove console box. 5. Roll up floor
mat, and then disconnect two 12-pin yellow connectors from airbag control module. 6. Disconnect
connector from side airbag sensor.
7. Detach clips, and then remove side airbag harness.
INSTALLATION

Page 6106
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
equipped).
Page 4003
Page 5948
Page 5946
Page 1602
Page 5154
CAUTION: ^
55 g (1.94 oz) weight used with aluminum wheel is not available.
^ Balance weights are available for use with any of 14- to 16-inch wheels.
Page 4215
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 6625
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter (Option)
2. Disconnect resistor connector (a) and then remove cover (b) from the cooling unit (c) by
removing the four clips (d)
3. Pull out filter (a). 4. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: -
The passenger compartment side of each filter is marked with an arrow. Ensure the arrow points
up.
- Ensure each filter assembly's tongues and grooves fit the corresponding cooling unit and
matching filter tongues and grooves.
- Ensure no air leaks from the cooling unit through the cover.
5. Fill in the maintenance label with the replacement date and mileage.
NOTE: Install maintenance label (a) on the outside of the glove box as shown.
Updates/Corrections
NUMBER: 18-69-01 DATE: 07/1/2001
Page 5406
INSTALLATION

Page 2619
Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page EN(DOHC TURBO)-225A Engine

Subaru 2.5L Cam Alignment Bar - Ast [SU499207300]
Camshaft: Tools and Equipment Subaru 2.5L Cam Alignment Bar - Ast [SU499207300]
Subaru 2.5L Cam Alignment Bar AST tool# SU499207300
- Made in the U.S.A.
Subaru 2.5L Cam Alignment Bar
2008 suggested user price: Call AST for pricing
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943

Page 5032
bulletin.
Bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Special Tools
Note:
Note:
Page 2371
Page 5790
4. Remove three screws and clips.
5. Remove gusset cover. Disconnect electrical connectors to remove speaker.

Page 6874

Page 181
FUEL PUMP RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3280
Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. 2.5L MODEL
2. 3.0L MODEL ^
ATF Filter

Page 793
area.

Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Front Fog Light Bulb
REMOVAL
1. EXCEPT OUTBACK
1. Remove the two clips and lower the mudguard.
2. Remove back cover (A). 3. Disconnect harness connector. 4. Remove spring retainer then
detach fog light bulb.
2. OUTBACK
1. Remove fog light assembly. 2. Disconnect harness connector. 3. Loosen screws and turn the
bulb assembly counterclockwise, and then detach the bulb.
INSTALLATION

Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 391
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2158

Page 5800
8. Take out glass door panel upward.
CAUTION: -
Do not turn regulator in the closing direction after removal of the glass. Otherwise gear may be
disengaged.
- Avoid impact and damage to the glass.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make sure that glass stay is placed securely in sash.
2. Adjust front door glass.

Page 6751
C/L-03
NOTE:
Legend:
Electrochromic Compass/Mirror - Troubleshooting Guide
Compass: Technical Service Bulletins Electrochromic Compass/Mirror - Troubleshooting Guide
NUMBER: 15-105-01
DATE: 1/04/02
APPLICABILITY: 2000~2003MY Legacy Wagon / Outback 2001~2003MY Forester 2002~2003MY

Impreza
SUBJECT: Auto Dimming Electrochromic Compass Mirror Trouble Shooting Guide
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this Trouble Shooting Guide is to assist the technician in diagnosis of an Auto
Dimming Electrochromic Compass Mirror complaint. The information below will guide you through
the diagnosis of the mirror and direct you as to the appropriate correction.
MIRROR TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE

Flywheel: Customer Interest M/T - Cold Clutch Judder
NUMBER:03-51-02R DATE: 05/01/03
APPLICABILITY:
Vehicles

INTRODUCTION

Page 4808
Fuse Locations
Page 3744
Bolts must be torqued to the proper specifications (Figure 3).

Aluminum Wheel
Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel
REMOVAL
nuts and wheels.
NOTE: ^
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: ^
miles).
INSPECTION
necessary.
CAUTION Aluminum wheels are easily scratched. To maintain their appearance and safety, do the
following: 1. Do not damage aluminum wheels during removal, disassembly, installation, wheel
balancing, etc. After removing aluminum wheels, place them on
Page 3463
Page 6339
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 6764
REMOVAL
1. WITH AUTO A/C
2. WITH MANUAL A/C
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
spill.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: -

Page 27
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 4609
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:

NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 2323
Page 777
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
module.
INSTALLATION

Page 2563

Page 2515
Specifications
Brake Hose/Line: Specifications
Brake Line Tightening Torque ---
Type Dual Circuit System

Page 2461

Page 2196
NOTE: ^
facing up.
Page 3417

Page 4493
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Front
DISASSEMBLY
14 inch TYPE 1. Clean mud and foreign particles from caliper body assembly and support.
2. Gradually supply compressed air via caliper body brake hose to force piston out.
CAUTION: -
3. Remove piston boot.
4. Remove piston seal from caliper body cylinder. 5. Remove guide pin and boot from caliper body.
15 inch AND 16 inch TYPE 1. Clean mud and foreign particles from caliper body assembly and
support.
2. Using a standard screwdriver, remove boot ring from piston. 3. Remove boot from piston end. 4.
Gradually supply compressed air via caliper body brake hose to force piston out.
Page 775

Page 4895
2. Set ST into the center of the wheel, and then install the wheel alignment gauge. ST 927380002
ADAPTER
FRONT WHEEL TOE-IN
Inspection 1. Using a toe gauge, measure front wheel toe-in.
Toe-in: 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch)
equation:
Adjustment 1. Loosen the left and right side steering tie-rods lock nuts.
2. Turn the left and right tie rods equal amounts until the toe-in is at the specification.
Both the left and right tie-rods are right-hand threaded. To increase toe-in, turn both tie-rods
clockwise equal amounts (as viewed from the inside of the vehicle).
3. Tighten tie-rod lock nut.
CAUTION: Correct tie-rod boot, if it is twisted.
NOTE: Check the left and right wheel steering angle is within specifications.
STEERING ANGLE
Inspection
Specifications
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Specifications
Proportioning Valve Split Point 14 inch Type 3678 kPa
15 inch Type 2942 kPa
16 inch Type 3678 kPa
Reducing Ratio 0.3

Page 1810
Thermostat: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
4. Disconnect radiator outlet hose from thermostat cover.
5. Remove thermostat cover and gasket, and pull out the thermostat.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install the thermostat in the water pump, and install the thermostat cover together with a gasket.
CAUTION: ^
When reinstalling the thermostat, use a new gasket.

Page 1886
Page 2056

Locations
Page 2370
Page 1537
6. Disconnect radiator outlet hose and heater hose from water pump. 7. Lower the vehicle.

Page 3761
bulletin.
Dealers are also to promptly perform the applicable service procedures outlined in this bulletin to
subject to this recall campaign is taken into dealer new or used inventory, or is in the dealership for
service, necessary steps should be taken to ensure the recall procedure has been completed
PARTS INFORMATION
Because the number of vehicles produced with the affected LOT number is relatively small,
replacement parts should only be ordered for vehicles that have been confirmed to have a right
front axle housing with the affected LOT number. Parts should be ordered VOR next day air. The
VIN should be entered in the P0 reference field. The additional airfreight charges may be included
with the Recall/Campaign claim submission.
SOA has prepared a special right front axle housing kit, part number SOA550H100, that contains a
right front axle housing that has been pre-assembled with wheel bearings, snap ring and grease
seals. The kit also contains all other parts necessary to complete this repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. Inspect the lot number on the right (passenger side) front axle housing
as pictured.
2. If the lot number is OF15, replace the housing. If there is any other lot number, replacement is
not necessary.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Important:
Attempting to perform service procedures other then those recommended in the applicable Subaru
Service Manual will cause damage to components.
Locations
Page 5401
INSPECTION
FRONT SUB SENSOR
SIDE AIRBAG SENSOR

Page 5034
Disclaimer
Repair Procedures

Page 3797
Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
C: DISASSEMBLY
1. Using ST1, support housing and hub securely.
2. Attach ST2 to housing and drive hub out.
ST1 927060000 HUB REMOVER ST2 927080000 HUB STAND If inner bearing race remains in
the hub, remove it with a suitable tool (commercially available).
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to scratch polished area of hub.
^ Be sure to install inner race on the side of outer race from which it was removed.
3. Remove disc cover from housing. 4. Using a standard screwdriver, remove outer and inner oil
seals.
CAUTION: Do not use old oil seals.

Page 252

Page 4491
1. Install disc rotor on hub. 2. Install support on housing.
CAUTION: -
- When replacing the pads, replace pads of the right and left wheels at the same time.
and pad clip.
and inner shim. 5. Install pads on support. 6. Install caliper body on support.
Tightening torque: 14 inch type 37 Nm (3.8 kgf-m, 27.5 ft. lbs.) Except 14 inch type 39 Nm (4.0
CAUTION: Replace brake hose gaskets with new ones.
Rear
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up vehicle and remove wheels. 2. Disconnect brake hose from caliper body assembly.
CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with vehicle body; wipe off completely if
spilled.
Page 267
DISCLAIMER
Specifications
Valve Guide: Specifications
Valve Guide Inner Diameter 6.000 - 6.012 mm
Protusion Above Head Intake 20.0 - 20.5 mm
Exhaust 16.5 - 17.0 mm

Page 518
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
data.
AT VEHICLES
Page 2601

Page 4771
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
FAPS-01 - Front Accessory Power Supply System

Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
MT VEHICLES
Page 886
bulletin.
PARTS INFORMATION
Manual.
Page 2243
Page 2498
Page 18
Interrupt Relay
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 3487
Page 5418
Side Air Bag: Testing and Inspection Inspection Items (After A Collision)
INSPECTION
AIRBAG MODULE (SIDE)
- Front seat is damaged or deformed.
- Lead wire is exposed.

Page 3786
11. Remove nut of protector.
12. Remove tank cover.
13. Extract companion flange using ST.
ST 399703602 PULLEY ASSY
14. Remove oil seal using ST.
15. Fit a new oil seal using ST.

Page 6629

Page 2673
CAUTION: Replace O-rings and insulators with new ones.
Page 2514
Page 2522
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE: ^
Page 5778
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
Front Inner Remote
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim. 2. Remove the sealing cover. 3. Remove the two rod joints.
4. Remove the front inner remote.
INSTALLATION

Page 5517
Page 614
INSPECTION

Page 1818
Water Pump: Testing and Inspection
C: INSPECTION
1. Check water pump bearing for smooth rotation. 2. Check water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3. Using a dial gauge, measure impeller runout in thrust direction while rotating the pulley.
"Thrust" runout limit: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch)
4. Check clearance between impeller and pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case: Standard 0.5 - 0.7 mm (0.020 - 0.028 inch) Limit 1.0
mm (0.039 inch)
5. After water pump installation, check pulley shaft for engine coolant leaks. If leaks are noted,
replace water pump assembly.
Page 2354
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove union bolt and disconnect brake hose from caliper body assembly.
2. Remove bolt securing lock pin to caliper body. 3. Raise caliper body and move it toward vehicle
center to separate it from support. 4. Remove support from housing.
NOTE: If disc rotor seizes up within hub, drive disc rotor out by installing an 8-mm bolt in holes B
on the rotor.
INSTALLATION
Page 4864
Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque: T: 4.4 N.m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.3 ft-lb)
NOTE:
- Align the cutout portion of one connector with that of other before tightening the connecting bolt.
- Do not tighten the bolt excessively since this may deform the connectors.
EXPLANATION OF SMJ SHOWN IN THE WIRING DIAGRAM

ABS
REMOVAL
ABSCM&H;/U.
compartment.
CAUTION: -
INSTALLATION
specifications.

Diagrams
1 of 2
2 of 2
Page 3459
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 508

NUMBER: 16-66-02 DATE: 03/15/03
INTRODUCTION
Page 3709
NOTE: ^
Apply grease (SUNLIGHT 2: P/N 003602010) to contact point of release lever and operating
cylinder.
^ Confirm that retainer spring is securely fitted by observing it through the main case hole.
2. Install release bearing and fasten it with two clips.
3. Install release lever seal.

4. After remounting engine and transmission on body.
Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston Ring Ring Gap Top Ring Standard 0.20 - 0.35 mm
Limit 1.0 mm
Second Ring Standard 0.35 - 0.50 mm
Limit 1.0 mm
Oil Ring Standard 0.20 - 0.70 mm
Limit 1.5 mm
Clearance Between Piston Ring and Piston Ring Groove Top Ring Standard 0.040 - 0.080 mm
Limit 0.15 mm
Second Ring Standard 0.030 - 0.070 mm
Limit 0.15 mm
Page 2109
FUEL FILTER
REMOVAL
WARNING:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

Page 788
4. Overheating
colder heat range.
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
spill.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: -

Page 5040
Service and Repair
MAIN RELAY
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 2893
INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:

Page 779
1. HEADLIGHT RELAY
is grounded.
Page 2449
Page 3528
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. PITCHING STOPPER 1. Disconnect battery ground terminal. 2. Remove the air intake duct and
cleaner case.
3. Remove the pitching stopper.
2. CROSSMEMBER AND CUSHION RUBBER 1. Disconnect battery ground terminal. 2. Jack-up

vehicle and support it with sturdy racks. 3. Remove the front center, rear exhaust pipes and muffler.
CAUTION: When removing exhaust pipes, be careful each exhaust pipe does not drop out.
4. Remove the heat shield cover.
5. Set the transmission jack under the transmission.
CAUTION: ^
Page 5061
submission:
allowance.
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection
1. Prepare Subaru Select Monitor kit. 2. Connect diagnosis cable to Subaru Select Monitor.
- A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
NOTE: -
Because ASV solenoid valve, FICD solenoid valve and air injection system diagnosis solenoid
valve are not installed, ASV Solenoid Valve, FICD Solenoid Valve and Pressure Switching Sol.2
will be displayed but non-functional.
- For detailed operation procedure, refer to the SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION
MANUAL.
Page 228
Page 2334
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
Page 2151

Page 4446
specification.

Page 4330
Page 6227

Page 5926
Important:
CROSSMEMBER FRONT
(A).
CROSSMEMBER REAR
Spray time: 6 sec.
Page 2489
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 1626
Page 3150
A: REMOVAL
B: INSTALLATION
Clutch Pedal Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeaking Noise
CLUTCH PEDAL SQUEAK
Page 1206
A: INSPECTION
cylinders;

NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Specifications
Alignment: Specifications
Model Sedan Wagon OUTBACK
Front Camber (tolerance: ± 0°30' ) -0°05' -0°05' 0°20'
Caster (common difference: ± 3°05' 2°50' 2°40'
0°45' )
Kingpin angle 14°15' 14°15' 13°30'
/ -24 mm (+0.47 / -0.94 in)]
Diameter of stabilizer 20 mm (0.79 in) 21 mm (0.83 in)
Rear Camber (tolerance: ± 0°45' ) -0°30' -0°20' -0°10'

/ -24 mm (+0.47 / -0.94 in)]
Thrust angle 0° ± 30'
Diameter of stabilizer 14 mm (0.55 in)

Page 1984
Note:
Page 1790
REMOVAL
assembly.
INSTALLATION

Page 5384

Page 5188
Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Noise
TITLE: Blower Motor Noise
SERVICE TIP:
If you encounter a 2001-2003MY Legacy with a concern of noise from the blower motor, the foam
seal contacting the squirrel cage may be the cause.
Inspection/Repair procedure:
1. Remove the glove box to gain access to the blower motor. 2. Drop the glove box Inner and Outer
assemblies together and disconnect the glove box light wiring harness. 3. Remove the 4 Phillips
head screws from the bottom of the blower motor. 4. Move the wiring harness at the backside of
the blower motor assembly away from the blower motor. 5. Pull the blower motor assembly down
and remove it along with the squirrel cage. 6. Insert one hand into the blower motor housing and
locate the loose foam on the recirculation door. 7. Remove the loose foam from the recirculation
door. 8. Reverse process to reassemble. 9. Test the repair.
Page 1319
4. Install fuel injector pipe.
5. Connect left side fuel hose to injector pipe, and tighten clamp screw.
6. Connect air by-pass hoses.
7. Install fuel injectors.
CAUTION: Always use new O-rings and insulators.

Page 1276
Specifications
Drain Plug: Specifications
Drain Plug 44 Nm
Page 2939

Page 3740
Page 14
REMOVAL
two screws.
INSTALLATION

Component Locations

Recall - Right Front Axle Housing
Differential Axle Housing: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Right Front Axle Housing
NUMBER: WXY-82 DATE: 12/2000
SUBJECT: Improper Casting of Right Front Axle Housing
Subaru of America, Inc. (SOA) has determined that a number of 2001MY Subaru Legacy and
Outback vehicles may have been manufactured with an improperly cast right front axle housing.
This program will involve the inspection of affected vehicles for possible right front axle housing
replacement.
VEHICLES INVOLVED
The affected vehicles are 2001 model year Subaru Legacy and Outback vehicles identified in the
VIN range chart. NOTE:
Page 4146

Page 3156
Page 5579
Note:
Disclaimer
Outside Temperature Display: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 4467
Note:
Note:

Page 2385
Part 1
Page 3438
Page 2258
Page 6645
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 652
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 1732
6. Disconnect radiator outlet hose from thermostat cover.
7. Disconnect ATF cooler hoses from radiator. (AT vehicles only) 8. Lower the vehicle.

Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
INTAKE MANIFOLD
REMOVAL
model)
7. Remove power steering pump and tank from brackets.

Page 3995

Page 3499
1. RELAY
2. CONNECTOR-1
joint box).
5. CONNECTOR-2
connector sketch.
6. CONNECTOR SKETCH
State Emissions Test - Fuel Filler Cap Test Procedure
Fuel Filler Cap: Technical Service Bulletins State Emissions Test - Fuel Filler Cap Test Procedure
NUMBER: 11-61-00
DATE: 06-01-00
SUBJECT: State Emission Test / Fuel Filler or Gas Cap Test
Inspection of warranty returned parts has revealed a number of false failures. In the event you
encounter a customer complaint of a failed fuel filler cap (herein gas cap) as a result of a state
emission test, please review the following:
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency issued technical guidance regulations for inspecting the
gas cap as part of the state emission inspections in basic and enhanced Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) programs during August 1998. The gas cap pressure test is administered to all 1980 and
older model gasoline fueled vehicles, which were originally equipped with a sealed gas cap. Also
affected are 1981 and newer gasoline fueled vehicles, which are exempt from the evaporative
system integrity (pressure) test. The gas cap pressure test is used to verify whether the gas cap
can effectively block the flow of fuel vapors to the atmosphere. The vehicle inspection consists of
both a visual check and functional leak check of the gas cap. The vehicle shall fail the gas cap
visual check if the gas cap is missing or the wrong style gas cap is installed on the vehicle. The gas
cap shall fail the functional test if it leaks a specific amount during a pressure test.
Please perform the following procedure using the Kent-Moore Evaporative Pressure Tester #
J-44357 to confirm pass/fail determination as outlined below.
1. Threaded Type Gas Cap-(All Legacy, SVX, Impreza and Forester)
^ Plug the lower hose connection of the fuel cap adapter. (J-44357 Evap Kit)
^ Thread the hose of the pressure tester to the upper hose connection.
^ Install the gas cap on the fuel cap adapter.( Tighten to 2-3 clicks)
^ Connect the pump to a 12-volt source.
^ Turn on the pump timer passed the 1-minute setting.
^ Set the pressure hold switch of the pump to the open position.
^ Place the vent switch to the closed position.
^ Allow the pressure to build to its highest level and close the pressure hold switch. The pressure
should hold for at least 1 minute.
^ Remove the gas cap from the fuel cap adapter. Replace the gas cap, if the pressure did not hold
within 6 inches of H20 as specified on the # 1-44357 Evap Kit gauge. Hold the part for return to
SOA, if requested.
2. Slot Type Gas Cap (All other older Subaru models).
^ Thread the hose of the pressure tester to the fuel cap adapter (# J-44903).
^ Install the gas cap on the fuel cap adapter. (Turn the cap to full lock position.)
^ Connect the pump to a 12-volt source.
^ Turn on the pump timer passed the 1-minute setting.
^ Set the pressure hold switch of the pump to the open position.
^ Place the vent switch to the closed position.
^ Allow the pressure to build to its highest level and close the pressure hold switch. The pressure
should hold for at least 1 minute.
^ Remove the gas cap from the fuel cap adapter. Replace the gas cap, if the pressure did not hold
within 6 inches of H20 as specified on the # J-44357 Evap Kit gauge. Hold the part for return to
SOA, if requested.
Page 2930
Page 2567
DISCLAIMER
Page 855
Oil Filter: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oil Filter By-Pass Valve Opening Pressure 157 kPa

Page 423
Parking Switch
4. PARKING SWITCH
ABS
REMOVAL
ABSCM&H;/U.
compartment.
CAUTION: -
INSTALLATION
specifications.

Page 5222
Control Unit (Auto A/C)
Page 1491
Page 4040
Part 2
Page 3722
Fail Code JAB-48.
Disclaimer
Page 276
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 2427
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1539
17. Remove left-hand belt cover No. 2.
18. Remove tensioner bracket. 19. Disconnect heater hose from water pump.
20. Remove water pump.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Install water pump onto left-hand cylinder head.
CAUTION: ^
Replace gasket with a new one.
^ When installing water pump, tighten bolts in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
figure.
Tightening torque: First: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Second: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ft. lbs.)
Page 6533
Dome Lamp: Electrical Diagrams

C/L-01
Page 2574
second letter.
NOTE:
Page 4358
3. Remove lock pin. 4. Raise caliper body and move it toward vehicle center to separate it from
support. 5. Remove support from back plate.
INSTALLATION
1. Install disc rotor on hub. 2. Install support on back plate.
CAUTION: -
- Replace pads if there is oil or grease on them.
and pad clip. 4. Install pads on support. 5. Install caliper body on support.
CAUTION: -
The brake hose must be connected without any twist.
- Replace brake hose gaskets with new ones.

Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
propeller shaft.
Service and Repair
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
NUMBER: 07-60-07R DATE: 04/25/07
INTRODUCTION
tension cables.

Page 4842
Page 3904
Front differential gear oil Recommended oil
3. REAR DIFFERENTIAL
1. Drain oil by removing drain boll or plug. 2. Remove filler bolt or plug for quick draining oil. 3.
Tighten drain bolt or plug after draining oil.
CAUTION: -

Tightening torque: 2200 cc AT model: 3414 Nm (3.5 ± 0.4 kg-m, 25 ± 2.9 ft.lb) Except 2200 cc AT
model: 491 9.8 Nm (5 ± 1 kg-m, 36 ± 7.2 ft.lb)
4. After installing drain boll or plug onto rear differential gear case firmly, fill oil up fully to the mouth
of filler bolt or plug.
Oil capacity: 0.8 l (0.8 US qt, 0.7 Imp qt)

Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Page 532
Locations
Page 3994
Page 369
REMOVAL
connector.
INSTALLATION

Page 687
3. Apply battery voltage to switch terminals 17 and 2, and inspect the voltage of terminals 7 and 2.
(Measure the voltage from after the second
time the wiper stops.) If operation is not as specified, replace the switch.
Page 2728
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL FILLER PIPE
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect evaporation hose (M) and (N) from evaporation pipe assembly.
3. Remove nut which holds evaporation pipe assembly on fuel filler pipe.
ASSEMBLY

Page 1715
Page 1404
Timing Belt: Description and Operation
Timing Belt
- A single timing belt drives two camshafts (one in the left bank and one in the right bank). The belt
also drives the water pump by its non-toothed side.
- The timing belt teeth have a specially designed round profile which contributes to quiet operation.
The timing belt is made of strong and inflexible core cords, wear-resistant canvas and heat
resistant rubber material.
- A hydraulic automatic belt tension adjuster always keeps the belt taut to the specified tension.
Any manual belt tension adjustment is unnecessary.
NOTE: *: The #1 piston is at TDC when the piston position mark on the crankshaft sprocket is
aligned with the timing mark on the cylinder block. **: The #1 piston is at TDC on the compression
stroke when the piston position mark on the camshaft sprocket is aligned with the timing mark on
the belt cover.

Page 6094
3. Remove the inner slide rail assembly
Proceed with removal of the inner slide rail assembly as follows:
1) Disconnect the seat adjustment cable and release arm from the inner seat rail.
2) Remove the seat rail to seat frame attaching bolts and screws.
3) Remove the seatback to seat rail attaching screw.
4) Remove the seatbelt buckle assembly from the seat rail as pictured.
5) Carefully rotate the seat rail downward as pictured.

Page 1595
Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 03V153000: Frame Corrosion Issue
Subaru at 1-800-782-2783.
Page 4543
9. Remove air bleeder screws from the RL and RR caliper bodies.
performs
15. Read values indicated on the pressure gauges and check if they meet the standard values. 16.
1. Prepare for operating ABS sequence control. 2. Set the front wheels or rear wheels on the brake
tester and set the select lever's position at "neutral". 3. Operate the brake tester. 4. Perform ABS
sequence control. 5. When the hydraulic unit begins to work, check the following working
sequence.

3. CHECKING THE HYDRAULIC UNIT VDC OPERATION BY PRESSURE GAUGE 1. Lift-up

CAUTION: -
Power Door Lock Actuator: Service and Repair Front Door Lock Actuator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door latch assembly.
2. Remove the bolt. Remove the front door lock actuator.
INSTALLATION

Page 5075
Spray time: 12 sec.
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications A/C Refrigerant Oil
A/C Refrigerant Oil
A/C Refrigerant Capacity 4.50 oz.

Page 3336
Verify Repair
Check parking mechanism for proper operation by setting vehicle into Park on a slight incline.
Confirm vehicle remains stationary.
Diagrams
1 of 2
2 of 2
Page 2016

Page 2637
Accelerator Pedal: Testing and Inspection
E: INSPECTION
Lightly move pedal pad in lateral the direction to ensure pedal deflection is in specified range.
CAUTION: If excessive deflection is noted, replace bushing and clip with new ones.
Deflection of accelerator pedal: Service limit 5.0 mm (0.197 inch) or less

ABS
Locations
Page 758

Page 2931
DISCLAIMER
Page 548
Page 4961
Disarming
Arming

Page 5372

ABS
INSPECTION

CAUTION: -

Crankshaft Bearing Thickness
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Bearing Thickness
Crankshaft Bearing Thickness:
No.1 And No.5:
Standard
......................................................................................................................................................
1.998 - 2.011 mm (0.0787 - 0.0792 inch) 0.03 mm (0.0012 inch):
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 2.017 -
2.020 mm (0.0794 - 0.0795 inch)
0.05 mm (0.0020 inch):
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 2.027 -
2.030 mm (0.0798 - 0.0799 inch)
0.25 mm (0.0098 inch):
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 2.127 -
2.130 mm (0.0837 - 0.0839 inch)
No.2, No.3 And No.4:
Standard
......................................................................................................................................................
2.000 - 2.013 mm (0.0787 - 0.0793 inch) 0.03 mm (0.0012 inch):
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 2.019 -
2.022 mm (0.0795 - 0.0796 inch)
0.05 mm (0.0020 inch):
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 2.029 -
2.032 mm (0.0799 - 0.0800 inch)
0.25 mm (0.0098 inch):
Undersize
.............................................................................................................................................. 2.129 -
2.132 mm (0.0838 - 0.0839 inch)
Page 3594
Fail Code JAB-48.
Disclaimer
Page 4313
Rear right
operations.

Page 1858
Muffler: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Separate muffler from rear exhaust pipe.
2. Remove left and right rubber cushions.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the muffler during removal.
NOTE: To facilitate removal, apply a coat of SUBARU CRC to mating area of rubber cushions in
advance.
SUBARU CRC (Part No. 004301003)
3. Remove front rubber cushion, and detach muffler assembly.
NOTE: To facilitate removal, apply a coat of SUBARU CRC to mating area of rubber cushion in
advance.
SUBARU CRC (Part No. 004301003)
B: INSTALLATION
Page 6536
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 3819
DOJ side: VU-3A 702 (Yellow) (Part No. 23223GA 050) 1. Install BJ boot in specified position, and
fill it with 60 to 70 g (2.12 to 2.47 oz.) of specified grease. 2. Place DOJ boot at the center of shaft.
3. Insert DOJ cage onto shaft.
NOTE: Insert the cage with the cut-out portion facing the shaft end, since the cage has an
orientation.
4. Install DOJ inner race on shaft and fit snap ring with pliers.
NOTE: Confirm that the snap ring is completely fitted in the shaft groove.
5. Install cage, which was previously fitted, to inner race fixed upon shaft.
NOTE: Fit the cage with the protruded part aligned with the track on the inner race and then turn by
a half pitch.
6. Fill 80 to 90 g (2.82 to 3.17 oz.) of specified grease into the interior of DOJ outer race. 7. Apply a
coat of specified grease to the cage pocket and six balls. 8. Insert six balls into the cage pocket.
9. Align the outer race track and ball positions and place in the part where shaft, inner race, cage
and balls are previously installed, and then fit outer
race.
Page 5915
Page 6382
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 1043
Relay And Fuse
Fuse Panel Details

Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
3. Remove oil pan.
Page 5914
Disclaimer
Repair Procedures

Page 2007

Page 2241
Page 6741
Page 2046
DISCLAIMER
Locations
Fuel Supply Line: Locations
FUEL LINE
FUEL LINE
1. Clamp 2. Fuel delivery hose A 3. Fuel filter bracket 4. Fuel filter holder 5. Fuel filter cup 6. Fuel
filter 7. Evaporation hose F 8. Clip 9. Fuel delivery hose B
10. Fuel return hose 11. Fuel pipe ASSY 12. Fuel delivery hose C
Page 1820
6. Disconnect radiator outlet hose and heater hose from water pump. 7. Lower the vehicle.

Page 4030
Page 3468
CAUTION: ^
screws.
harness assembly.
Page 3794
8. Remove cotter pin and castle nut which secure tie-rod end to housing knuckle arm.
9. Using a puller, remove tie-rod ball joint from knuckle arm.
10. Remove ABS sensor assembly and harness in advance.
11. Remove bolt which secures sensor harness to strut.

Page 2031
Page 1555
If a coolant concentration of 50% is needed, drain all the coolant and refill with the undiluted
solution only.
Page 1143
Measure the thrust clearance of camshaft with dial gauge. If the clearance exceeds the limit,
replace camshaft support. Standard: 0.030 - 0.090 mm (0.0012 - 0.0035 inch) Limit: 0.11 mm
(0.0043 inch)
C: INSTALLATION
1. CAMSHAFT (LH)
a) Apply a coat of engine oil to camshaft journals and install camshaft (LH). b) Install camshaft cap.
(1) Apply liquid gasket on the around of camshaft cap.
Liquid gasket: THREE BOND 1280B (Part No. 0029431130)
(2) Temporarily tighten bolts (g) through (j) in alphabetical sequence.
(3) Install valve rocker assembly.

Page 4935
3.0 Model
1. Connect pipe D or pressure hose to oil tank.
2. Connect pipe C or return hose to oil pump.
CAUTION: Use a new gasket.
3. Tighten bolt A.
2. Temporarily connect pipes C and D to pipes (on the gearbox side). 3. Temporarily install clamp
E on pipes C and D.
CAUTION: Ensure that the letter "8" on each clamp are diagonally opposite each other as shown in
figure.
4. Tighten clamp E firmly.
5. Tighten joint nut.

Page 3679
Disclaimer
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
A: REMOVAL
1. Move the select lever to the "N" position. 2. Remove rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
4. Disconnect cable from select lever and then remove cable bracket. 5. Remove console box.
6. Disconnect the connectors, then remove the four bolts to take out the selector lever assembly
from the body.
B: INSTALLATION
1. Mount the selector lever onto the vehicle body.
2. Tighten the four bolts to install the selector lever to the vehicle body, then connect connector.
3. Install console box.

Page 5725
Page 3225
Page 5612
Antenna Amplifier: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear pillar upper trim (left side). 2. Disconnect harness connector and terminal.
3. Remove mounting screw and detach antenna amplifier.
INSTALLATION

Page 3095
OWNER NOTIFICATION
SOA will prepare and mail an Owner Notification Letter to owners of affected vehicles on or around
April 24, 2002.
Page 6219
Page 6319
Fuel Gauge: Service and Repair
Fuel Gauge
REMOVAL
Disassemble combination meter, and then remove speedometer and fuel gauge assembly.
INSTALLATION

Page 1478

Page 5388
Roll Connector: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Turn ignition switch off. 2. Disconnect ground cable from battery and wait for at least 20 seconds
before starting work. 3. Remove lower cover. Disconnect airbag connector (AB3) and (AB8) below
steering column.
CAUTION: Do not reconnect airbag connector at steering column until combination switch is
securely reinstalled.
4. Disconnect combination switch connectors from body harness connector.
5. Set front wheels in straight ahead position. Using T30 TORX(R) bit, remove two TORX(R) bolts.
6. Disconnect airbag connector on back of airbag module. Remove airbag module, and place it with
pad side facing upward. 7. Using steering puller, remove steering wheel.
CAUTION: Do not allow connector to interfere when removing steering wheel.

Page 1598

Page 641
REMOVAL

Page 5459
other parts.
Page 1956
INSTALLATION

Page 6234
Page 1441
FUEL FILTER
REMOVAL
WARNING:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

Page 4445
Rear right
operations.

Page 2259
DISCLAIMER
Page 2152
Page 257

Page 141
Page 4882
Fuse Locations
Page 2059
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 1594

Page 3686
Page 1554
Coolant: Testing and Inspection
B: INSPECTION
1. RELATIONSHIP OF SUBARU COOLANT CONCENTRATION AND FREEZING

TEMPERATURE The concentration and safe operating temperature of the SUBARU coolant is
shown in the diagram. Measuring the temperature and specific gravity of the coolant will provide
this information.
[Example] If the coolant temperature is 25°C (77°F) and its specific gravity is 1.054, the
concentration is 35% (point A), the safe operating temperature is -14 °C (7°F) (point B), and the
freezing temperature is -20°C (-4°F) (point C).
2. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE CONCENTRATION OF THE COOLANT To adjust the

concentration of the coolant according to temperature, find the proper fluid concentration in the
above diagram and replace the necessary amount of coolant with an undiluted solution of SUBARU
genuine coolant (concentration 50). The amount of coolant that should be replaced can be
determined using the diagram.
[Example] Assume that the coolant concentration must be increased form 25% to 40%. Find point
A, where the 25% line of coolant concentration intersects with the 40% curve of the necessary
coolant concentration, and read the scale on the vertical axis of the graph at height A. The quantity
of coolant to be drained is 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts 1.8 Imp quarts). Drain 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts
1.8 Imp quarts) of coolant from the cooling system and add 2.1 liters (2.2 US quarts 1.8 Imp quarts)
of the undiluted solution of SUBARU coolant.
Page 654
C: REMOVAL

Page 136

pressure switch.
Page 2852
INSPECTION
Check for:
Page 538
7. Remove bolts.
D: INSTALLATION
Page 1036
Page 312
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
made.
Service Precautions
CAUTION:
Page 6385
Page 6411
Page 2450
Page 35
NOTE:
shown.
Disclaimer
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant capacity 1.43lbs. (US)

Page 3850
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment

Page 2293
AT VEHICLES
CAUTION: Always use new gasket.

Page 309
Part 2 of 2

Page 91
Legend:
Prefix ...................................................................................................................................................
F ..........................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... Front B .........................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
Bulkhead i ............................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Power Window D .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................... Door R .................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................. Rear
Page 1104
CAUTION:
bottom.

Page 1629
Page 2973
4. Install oil pan.
10.1 US qt. 8.2 - 8.4 Imp qt.)
Page 5192
9. Disconnect aspirator pipe (A) and remove blower motor.
INSTALLATION

Page 647

Page 6791
6. Adjust so that upper and lower ends of center pillar are the same size.
7. For glass stroke adjustment, close door, raise glass until positional relationship between glass
and weatherstrip becomes as shown. And secure the
glass so that upper stopper lightly touches the glass holder.
8. After stabilizer adjustment, carry out glass crimp adjustment. First, visually ensure positional
relationship between retainer & molding and glass of
the roof side, and then begin with rear sash adjustment. Adjust two adjusting bolts alternately step
by step to obtain dimensions shown below (cross-section A).
NOTE: If two nuts are loosened at the same time, sash moves back and forth. Therefore, when one
nut is adjusted, secure the other.
9. Make the same adjustment of two adjusting bolts of rear sash.

Page 4006
Page 1282
OIL/P-01
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Testing and Inspection
Measure voltage between battery (+) terminal and (-) terminal.
NOTE: -
Battery discharge occurs during measurement. Complete measurement within 5 seconds.
- During battery voltage measurement, voltage falls more than 1.8 volts in 3 seconds period. If NG,
replace the battery. (Use CR2032 or equivalent.)
Specifications
Fuel Pressure

Page 296
Page 3266
Dropping Resistor: Service and Repair
A: REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove air intake duct. 3. Disconnect connector from
dropping resistor. 4. Remove dropping resistor.
2.5L model
3.0L model
B: INSTALLATION

Page 2918
Page 6538
Dome Lamp: Service and Repair
Room Light
REMOVAL
1. Remove lens (A) and room light mounting screws (B). 2. Disconnect harness connectors and
remove the light.
INSTALLATION

Page 5600
INSPECTION

Page 3036
Page 2919

Page 4357
1. Install disc rotor on hub. 2. Install support on housing.
CAUTION: -
- When replacing the pads, replace pads of the right and left wheels at the same time.
and pad clip.
and inner shim. 5. Install pads on support. 6. Install caliper body on support.
Tightening torque: 14 inch type 37 Nm (3.8 kgf-m, 27.5 ft. lbs.) Except 14 inch type 39 Nm (4.0
CAUTION: Replace brake hose gaskets with new ones.
Rear
REMOVAL
1. Lift-up vehicle and remove wheels. 2. Disconnect brake hose from caliper body assembly.
CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with vehicle body; wipe off completely if
spilled.
Page 1721
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 1801

Page 6527
Page 4175

Page 4334
Color Code ..........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................ Color
L ...........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................... Blue B ......................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
Black Y ................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Yellow G ............................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... Green R .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. Red W ................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.................... White Br ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... Brown Lg .....................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...................... Light green Gr ...............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... Gray P ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................ Pink Or ....................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Orange Lb ...............
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................. Light Blue V ...........................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Violet SA .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
................................................. Sealed (Inner) SB ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... Sealed (Outer)
second letter.
Page 3733
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair
Clutch, M/T.
Page 3191

Page 4440
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair
Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
General Description
WIRING DIAGRAM
Thermostat: Technical Service Bulletins Service Manual Updates - Multiple Systems
NUMBER: 18-68-01 DATE: 02/15/2001
Page 1413
2. Install automatic belt tension adjuster assembly.
Timing Belt
1. Installation of timing belt
1) Turn camshaft sprocket No. 2 using ST1, and turn camshaft sprocket No. 1 using ST2 so that
their alignment marks come to top positions.
ST1 499207100 CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH
2) While aligning alignment mark on timing belt with marks on sprockets, position timing belt
properly.
CAUTION: Ensure belt's rotating direction is correct.

Page 353
Clutch Switch
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

Page 6512
Component Locations

Page 2785
model)
5. Disconnect connectors from idle air control solenoid valve, throttle position sensor. 6. Disconnect
air by-pass hose from air assist injector solenoid valve.
7. Disconnect engine coolant hoses from throttle body. 8. Remove bolts which install throttle body
to intake manifold.
INSTALLATION
MT VEHICLES
CAUTION: Always use a new gasket.
Tightening torque: Throttle body: 22 N.m (2.2 kgf-m, 15.9 ft-lb)
Air cleaner case: 6.4 N.m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
AT VEHICLES

Page 2797

Page 2250

Floor Mat
Carpet: Service and Repair Floor Mat
FLOOR MAT
REMOVAL
1. Remove front seats. 2. Remove rear seat cushion. 3. Remove console box. 4. Remove front
pillar lower trim, side sill rear upper cover and center pillar lower trim. 5. Remove clips from floor
mat.
NOTE: When pulling out edge, do not pull mat alone; pull mat together with edge. Ply off two steel
clips on side sill front cover and one on side sill rear cover using screwdriver.
6. Remove mat hook. 7. Remove mat from toe board area. 8. Remove mat from rear heater duct.
9. Roll mat, and then take it out of opened rear door.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
- Secure mat firmly with hook and Velcro tape.
- Insert mat edge firmly into the groove of side sill cover.
Service and Repair
REMOVAL
spill.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: -

Page 3485
B: INSTALLATION

Page 6428
7. GROUND
8. DIODE
A <--> A, B <--> B

Page 2486
A: INSPECTION
2 and 1 ranges.
from the N range.
Page 6534
C/L-02
Page 5798
CAUTION: Do not tilt sash bracket to inner panel during adjustment. Otherwise smooth regulator
operation cannot be achieved.
10. Make adjustment of front sash in the same manner as that of rear sash.
CAUTION: Although front and rear sashes must, as a rule, be adjusted in the same manner, in
some door installation, the adjustment in a different manner may be required. However, adjustment
of one sash to the maximum amount and the other to the minimum amount is not permitted. Such
adjustment may result in application of excessive load to regulator.
11. After adjustments, tighten nuts. 12. After adjustment of glass, if there is a gap between outer lip
of gusset and glass surface, adjust the gap with adjusting bolt (A) in lower fitting part
of gusset to prevent generation of wind noise.
13. During adjustments, loosen other three clamping bolts. 14. After adjustment, tighten bolts and
nuts.
Page 3455
1. DOOR SWITCH

Subaru - Impreza - Workshop Manual - 1999 - 2002

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Subaru - Impreza - Workshop Manual - 1999 - 2002

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Page 1042

Compressor Clutch: Specifications A/C Compressor Clutch

A/C Compressor Clutch

A/C Compressor Clutch Air Gap .012-.024 inches

Diagnostic procedure with Trouble Code - Page AT-72

ILLUMI-03 - Clearance Light And Illumination System

5. Install A/C belt tensioner. (With A/C model)

6. Install A/C belt. (With A/C model)

Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page AT-73

Air Bag Control Module: Component Locations

Air Bag System Components

Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page AT-59

Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair

Tightening torque: T: 4.4 N.m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.3 ft-lb)

EXPLANATION OF SMJ SHOWN IN THE WIRING DIAGRAM

Cruise Control Main Switch

6. Connect knock sensor connector.

7. Connect connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.

- ST1 927080000 Hub Stand

- ST2 927420000 Hub Remover

- ST1 927430000 Housing Stand

- ST2 927440000 Bearing Remover

- ST2 927460000 Oil Seal Installer

CAUTION: Use new oil seals.

5. Using flat bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring.

6. Using ST1 and ST2, remove bearing by pressing inner race.

ST1 927430000 HOUSING STAND ST2 927440000 BEARING REMOVER

^ Do not remove bearing unless damaged.

^ Do not re-use bearing after removal.

Diagnostic Chart with Trouble Code - Page 3-2

Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair

- Do not disassemble the airbag control module.

- Do not drop the airbag control module.

If deposits are too stubborn, replace plugs.

Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Impact Sensitivy Test

Security Control Module

1. IMPACT SENSITIVITY TEST

If NG, adjust the impact sensitivity.

Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations

Vehicle Speed Sensor Locations

9. Disconnect connector from fuel sub level sensor.

Reinstall exhaust heat shield cover (H6 Models only).

Lower the vehicle from the lift.

Check for oil leaks.

Install in the reverse order of removal.

Install in the reverse order of removal.

10. Tighten bolt which install injector pipe on intake manifold.

11. Install purge control solenoid valve.

Install in the reverse order of removal.

Steering angle sensor center positioning

Valve Clearance: Specifications CLEARANCE

Intake 0.20 +/- 0.02 mm

Exhaust 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm

How to Use Wiring Diagrams

12. Disconnect accelerator cable bushing from accelerator pedal lever.

1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

If cable clamp is damaged, replace it with a new one.

^ Never fail to cover outer cable end with boot.

^ Be careful not to kink accelerator cable.

^ Always use new clevis pins.

1. Disconnect battery ground cable.

2. Remove lower inner trim of passenger side.

Install in the reverse order of removal.

Diagnostic Procedure with (DTC) - Page AT-59